bachelor of buisness administration (b.b.a) 2020

152
SCHOOL OF COMMERCE & MANAGEMENT EXAMINATION & DETAILED SYLLABUS BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020 RAJAULATU, NAMKUM, RANCHI, JHARKHAND

Upload: others

Post on 03-Dec-2021

4 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020

SCHOOL OF COMMERCE amp MANAGEMENT

EXAMINATION

amp

DETAILED SYLLABUS BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION

(BBA) 2020

RAJAULATU NAMKUM RANCHI JHARKHAND

Vision Strive to achieve a unique blend of academic excellence and management skills to address the

needs of the business environment in a manner that lets each participant achieve his potential in

a value based character

The BBA program seeks to develop students into leaders ready to tackle the challenges of

todaylsquos global business environment

Adapt and find innovative methods for problem solving to cope with unforeseen events and to

manage in unpredictable environments

Manage contemporary societal and global issues resulting from diversity

Appreciate individual ethical behavior and discharge community responsibilities in

organization and society

Mission To leverage their potential by creating an ecosystem that instills critical thinking and analytical

mind set

To develop leaders of competencies in a rapidly changing business environment

To nurture the future business leaders through imparting high quality value-based teaching

research and practical based training that meets industry expectations

To foster a passion for learning and creative thinking among the student and teaching

community

Identify and formulate research problems and analyze complex management and

communication issues

Design solutions for complex managerial and communication problems and to develop the

same so as to meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for employability

BBA PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES AND OUTCOMES

BBA PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES-

Develop viable alternatives and make effective decisions relating to business ethics and social responsibility

Identify and analyze relevant global factors that influence decision-making

To apply appropriate techniques resources and multimedia tools for enhancement of skills

Apply knowledge based skill to assess and solve social-cultural and legal issues

Understand the impact of the professional management literary and soft skills in societal and

environmental contexts

To adopt and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities

To achieve appropriate communication skills and higher levels of proficiency for

Successful career in Industry Business and Entrepreneurship

BBA PROGRAMME OUTCOMES-

Towards the end of the program students will be able to

Provide students with a broad range of managerial capabilities the capacity for critical

thinking communication and problem‐solving skills legal and ethical behavior

Prepare graduates for diverse careers in global management administration and

entrepreneurship through a well‐rounded business education with a focus on global business

operations emerging markets and technology‐enabled organizations

Analyze socio-political-economic environment of business organizations

Communicate effectively in different contexts

Develop functional and general management skills

Build and Demonstrate leadership teamwork and social skills

Evaluate different business problems using analytical creative and integrative abilities

SEMESTER I

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Ist SEMESTER

Course Details

External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allot

ted

Cred

its

Course Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor

Sessional

L

T

P

Subj

ect

wise

Distr

ibuti

on

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Ma

x

Mar

ks

Min

Mark

s

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mark

s

Theory Group

1Y3BBA101

Ability Enhanc

ement

Compul

sory

Course

MIL Hindi Communication

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA102

Core Course

Organization Behavior 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA103 Core

Course

Introduction to

Business Accountancy

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA104 Core Course

Business Environment

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA105 Core

Course

Principles of

Management 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA102

Organization

Behavior 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

1Y3BBA104 Business

Environment 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Grand

Total 600 20 5 - 24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

MIL HINDI COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 101

fgUnh Okdjk oa laizskk

इकाई-I

हहनदीवयाकरण और रचना सजञा सरवनाम हरशष ाण हिया अवयय कारक रचन सहधउपसगव परतयय

तथासमास

ह गहनणवय पयावयराची शबद हर ोम शबद अन क शबदो क ह ए एक शबद

शबद शदधि राकय शदधि महारर और ोकोदधिया पललरन एर सकष पण

इकाई-II

हनबध क ातथासमसामहयक एरराषटर ीय हरषया परहनबधा खन

इकाई-III

सपर षण (सचार)

-सपर षण की अरधारणऔरमहतव सपरष ाण क ह ए आरशयक शत सपरष ाण क परकार

सपर षणकामाधयम सपर षणक ा सपर षण की तकनीक राचनक ा समाचारराचन साकषातकारक ा

रचनातमक खनका कषय रचनातमक ख ानकाआधार भारऔरहरचारोकीपरसतहत राक क ा की

उपयोहगता

अनशसितपसतक -

रहतवयाकरणभासकर डा 0 रचनद रकमार

रहतहनबधाभासकर डा 0 रचनदर कमार

आधहनकहहनदीवयाकरणऔररचना डा 0 रासद रननदनपरसाद

रचनामानस परो0 राम शवरनाथहतरारी

वयरहाररकहहनदी डा 0 जग बहादरपाणड य

रचनातमक खन डा 0 रमश ागौतम

राजहसहहनदीहनबध परो0 आर0 एन0 गौड़

सफ हहनदीहनबध रतन शवर

हनबध सहचर डा 0 कषमणपरसाद

उपकारमहारर और ाक ोदधियाा पार 0 राज शवरपरसादचतरव दी

कहाहनयोकहारता की परतापअनम

समपर षणपरकहहनदीभाषाहशकषण डा 0 रशनानारग

श ीहरजञान डा 0 सर शकमार

श ीहरजञानपरहतमानऔरहरशल षण डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo

श ीहरजञानकाइहतहास डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo

ORGANIZATION BEHAVIOUR

Course Code 1Y3BBA102

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Students study the behaviour of individuals and groups as part of the social and technical system in

the workplace They examine individual and group behaviour communication conflict and various

management styles motivational techniques and coordination in the work environment and apply

these concepts to the development of an organizations human resources

UNIT I

Organization Overview of the concept and relevance of organizational Behaviour meaning Nature

Scope features approaches model challenges and opportunities functions amp Role of manager

Planning process Decision making Process

UNIT II

Foundation of individual Behavior Biography ability personality (determinants and models)

perception (definition components factors affecting perception in decision making) Values

Beliefs etc

UNIT III

Individual Behavior- Attitude Definition importance Types Attitude regarding- Job

Satisfaction Involvement commitment effects of employee attitude changing attitudes

Learning Definition nature theories classical conditioning operant conditioning cognitive

Learning Social learning

UNIT IV

Motivation Concept and theories (Maslow McGregor Herzberg ERG) merits amp demerits Group

dynamics amp Team work Nature theories types of group Definition Stages of Group Development

effectiveness potential problems Analysis of Interpersonal Relationship Transactional Analysis

Johari Window

UNIT- V

Organizational change and development approaches and methods stress nature source effects

conflicts employee counseling approaches extra mural penitential learning programmers case

study

COURSE OUTCOME

To explain group dynamics and demonstrate skills required for working in groups (team building)

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Luthans Fred Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India

bull Mishra MN Behaviour Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi

bull Newstrom W John Davis Keith Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India

bull LM Roy Organisational Behaviour S Chand Publication

bull Dr FC Sharma Organisational Behaviour SBPD Publications

INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ACCOUNTING

Course Code 1Y3BBA103

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable students to synthesize related information and evaluate options for most logical and

optimal solution such that they would be able to predict and control cost incurrence and improve

results

UNIT- I

Accounting Basic of Accounting Accounting Mechanics-Double Entry System Classification

Rules for Debit amp Credit Journal Ledger and Trial Balance sub-division of journal Ledger meaning subdivision and mechanics of Posting balancing ledger accounts

UNIT- II

Cash book and Subsidiary books of Accounting Kinds of Cash Book Purchase day book and sale

day Book Bank reconciliation statement Measurement of income- Adjusting entries- rectification of

errors- Adjusted trial balance

UNIT-III

Preparation of financial statements- Trading account Profit amp Loss account Balance Sheet (with

Adjustments) Accounting for Non-profit organization Accounting Procedures Receipts amp payment

accounts income ampexpenditure account problems

UNIT- IV

Depreciation- Meaning Determinant factors Method amp Significance Basic Concepts of hire

purchase amp installments

UNIT- V

Partnership-Preliminary admission of a partner Company Accounts-Issue of shares Debentures

Forfeitures and reissue of shares

COURSE OUTCOME

Analyse the complexities associated with management of cost of product and services in the

Organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

SA Siddiqui- Comprehensive Accounting

TS Greval- Introduction to Accounting

Mukherjee and M Accounting (Volume-I)

SN Maheshwar- Introduction to Accounting (Vikas Publication)

CAC Rama Gopal Accounting For Managers (New Age)

BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational

and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business

UNIT I

Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro

environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis

for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business

UNIT II

Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic

systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years

plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent

economic initiatives NitiAyog

UNIT III

Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment

problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance

of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural

Development Problems of Growth

UNIT IV

Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment

Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA

and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act

UNIT V

International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational

Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic

Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-

GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India

COURSE OUTCOME

Outline how an entity operates in a business environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996

Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi

Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan

Chand Delhi

Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi

PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA105

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to

articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate

effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the

consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and

quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods

UNIT-I

Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of

Management Functions of the Manager

UNIT- II

Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of

Planning

Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and

type of Policies

Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems

involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques

UNIT- III

Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of

Units and committees

Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship

UNIT- IV

Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training

Directing Nature and purpose and directing

UNIT- V

Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control

process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies

COURSE OUTCOME-

Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques

managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of

managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify

and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own

position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied

audiences

Reference Books

bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher

bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson

Education

bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt

Ltd 4th Ed

bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill

Publications

SEMESTER II

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distributio

n

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor

Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distribu

tion Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Ma

x

Ma

rks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme

nt

Compulsory

Course

English

communication

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA202 Core Course

Management concept amp

Principle

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA203 Core

Course

Environmental

Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA204 Core

Course

Monetary

Economics and

Indian Banking

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA205 Core

Course

Business

Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA205 Business

Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhanceme

nt

Skill Enhancement

Elective

Course-I

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand

Total 600 21 5 - 24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

ENGLISH COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA201

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English

language teaching and content writing sectors

UNIT I

Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning

Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening

UNIT II

Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive

writing expansion of an idea

UNIT III

Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing

(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume

writing covering letter

UNIT IV

Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases

UNIT V

Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb

agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions

(Advanced)

COURSE OUTCOME

To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill

Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul

Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan

Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das

Orient Blackswan

Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press

Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication

MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 202

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and

process of effective controlling in the organization

UNIT I

Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science

Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)

UNIT II

School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and

Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)

Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management

UNIT III

Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing

Staffing Directing and Coordinating

UNIT IV

Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command

Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control

UNIT V

Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure

determination Forms- formal amp informal organization

Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations

COURSE OUTCOME

Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial

functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management

REFERENCE BOOKS

LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management

VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management

James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB

Fred Luthans- OB

ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 203

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links

between human and natural systems

UNIT I

Introduction to environmental studies

Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability

and sustainable development

UNIT II

Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an

ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following

ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds

streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)

Unit III

Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to

mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and

over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international

ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate

energy sources growing energy needs case studies

UNIT IV

Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem

diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots

Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and

Informational value

UNIT V

Environmental Pollution

Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution

Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and

Industrial waste Pollution case studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social

and environmental processes

REFERENCE BOOKS

California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London

Routledge

Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security

Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press

Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of

ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006

Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37

McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books

McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the

Twentieth Century

Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders

Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic

Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt

Ltd

Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons

Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi

1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP

Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation

S Chand Publishing New Delhi

MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING

Course Code 1Y3BBA204

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using

statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills

within the contest of subject matter of economics

UNIT I

Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of

Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value

of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income

theory of Money

UNIT II

Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people

Money Market

UNIT III

Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial

Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks

UNIT IV

Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control

methods and Tools of Monetary Policy

UNIT V

RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative

Banks and Rural Banks

COURSE OUTCOME

Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and

mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of

economics

REFERENCE BOOKS

MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi

LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi

Crowther- An Out Line of Money

Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant

KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ

BUSINESS COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA205

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative

scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication

UNIT I

Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports

OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)

UNIT II

Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other

words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis

UNIT III

Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers

Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers

UNIT IV

Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a

Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication

Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)

UNIT V

Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written

Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp

minutes

COURSE OUTCOME

To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical

proficiency in the development of exposition and argument

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wren amp Martin

K Madhukar- Business Communication

VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication

Asha Laul- Business Communication

Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH

SEMESTER III

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotte

d

Credit

s

Course Code Course

Type

Course

Title

Total

Mark

s

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subjec

t wise

Distrib

ution

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA301

Ability

Enhancement

IT Tool for Business

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA302

Core Course

Introduction to Marketing

Management

100 50 17 20 7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA303 Core

Course

Business

Law

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA304 Core

Course

Business

statistics for

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA305

Core

Course

Retail

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA304 Practical

Business

statistics for Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill

Enhancemen

t Elective Course-II

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand Total 600 24

IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 301

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software

components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data

base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT

UNIT-I

Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and

Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World

Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept

UNIT-II

Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different

computer generation

UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and

Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming

Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-

principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart

examples

UNIT-IV

Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation

applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)

Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information

System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems

Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human

Resources Management Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations

Understand the hardware and software components of the computer

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford

2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication

3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication

4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill

INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 302

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply

these to a new or existing business

UNIT I

Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept

amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro

environment

UNIT II

Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of

Product Line amp Product- mix

UNIT III

Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing

decisions Overview of pricing process

UNIT IV

Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product

Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage

UNIT V

Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to

marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct

selling

COURSE OUTCOME

To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct

an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an

appropriate format

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Philip Kotler

2 TN Chabra

3 TK Panda

4 SH Kazmi

5 Arun Kumar

BUSINESS LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 303

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal

environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with

knowledge of legal principles

UNIT-I

Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration

capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts

Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp

Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency

UNIT-II

Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp

Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales

UNIT-III

Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -

Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a

negotiable instrument

UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of

non-registration Dissolution of a firm

UNIT-V

Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of

Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013

COURSE OBJECTIVE

On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to

individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context

Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 ND Kapoor

2 Tulsian

3 MC Kuchhal

4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business

BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 304

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management

UNIT I

Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance

Scope and Limitation of Statistic

UNIT II

Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar

Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive

UNIT III

Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic

Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures

of dispersion

UNIT IV

Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and

Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index

number CPI WPI IIP

UNIT V

Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank

Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series

COURSE OUTCOME

Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically

discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons

2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication

3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication

RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in

India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone

Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT

FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan

Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process

UNIT II

FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail

Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors

Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing

MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer

Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design

and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication

UNIT III

STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty

Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors

UNIT IV

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management

IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service

Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM

Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying

UNIT V

MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at

Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems

at Retail Centers

Course Outcome-

Reference Books

bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education

bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A

Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education

The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge

about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various

aspects of retail operations

After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with

the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the

entire retail operations

SEMESTER IV

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code Course

Type Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subject

wise

Distributio

n

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mark

s

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-401

Ability

Enhanceme

nt

Introduction to

soft skill amp

Team Building

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA-402 Core Course

Introduction to

financial

management

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-403 Core Course

Advertising

and Sales

Promotion

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-404 Core Course

Management

of Human resource

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of

Business

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group

Term End

Practical

Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-404 Practical

Management

of Human

resource

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-405 Practical

Macro

Economics of Business

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

Grand Total 550 22

INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 401

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate

students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners

by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are

learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for

their own learning

UNIT ndash I

General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of

Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences

Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making

Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of

communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of

Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation

UNIT ndash II

Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing

skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice

modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements

General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral

skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive

Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style

UNIT ndash III

Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format

and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in

Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active

Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD

UNIT ndash IV

Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction

Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview

Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing

Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of

Conversation

UNIT ndash V

Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional

Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers

COURSE OUTCOME

To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills

and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin

bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar

INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 402

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital

decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and

raising long-term finance

UNIT I

Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives

Role of finance manager

UNIT II

Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of

investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return

Comparison between NPV amp IRR

UNIT III

Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of

Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning

capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure

UNIT IV

The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage

Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating

Leverage

UNIT V

Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital

estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of

inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order

Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy

COURSE OUTCOME

Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial

manager in the current competitive business scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 IM Pandey

2 P Chandra

3 SP Gupta

4 MY Khan

ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 403

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may

review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos

homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions

UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising

budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for

Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising

UNIT II

Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy

Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role

types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council

of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)

UNIT III

Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring

awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of

design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet

advertising and evaluation of advertising

UNIT IV

Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors

influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option

Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of

consumer schemes and other methods of promotion

UNIT V

Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs

Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales

personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion

COURSE OUTCOME

Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how

these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its

relation to todaylsquos marketplace

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall

Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi

Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi

Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications

MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 404

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource

management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational

setting

UNIT-I

Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with

special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in

strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management

UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge

workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)

Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)

UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of

human resource department and the role of human resource manager

UNITndashIV

Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification

rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation

UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection

(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction

COURSE OUTCOME

To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training

Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical

Behaviour

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi

Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New

Delhi

Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York

HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications

A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications

MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the

important indicators of the economy and their significance

UNIT I

Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of

Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income

Personal and Personal disposable income

UNIT II

Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income

Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and

Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator

Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate

demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy

UNIT III

Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate

demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government

expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary

and fiscal policy

UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary

policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production

Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation

monetary measures fiscal measures

UNIT V

Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and

corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in

open economy

COURSE OUTCOME

To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the

role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson

2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill

3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers

4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson

SEMESTER V

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment

Internal Assessment Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-501

Ability Enhancement

Public Relation amp Corporate Image

50

25

8

10

4

15

6

2

-

-

2

1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and

small Business

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-503

Core Course Principle of

Economics

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-502

Practical Entrepreneurship and

small Business

50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics

50

25 08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Skill Course

Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill Enhancement

Elective Course-III

50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2

Grand Total

600

24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication

1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management

1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India

1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation

1Y3BBA509 Organization Development

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision

1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management

1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA513 Database Management System

1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service

1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy

1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management

1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management

1Y3BBA520 Stores Management

1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA522 Technology Management

1Y3BBA523 Productivity

1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept

1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management

1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System

1Y3BBA529 Health Economics

1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management

(Rural Management Group )

1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity

1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment

1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management

SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES

Non-Technical

Elective No Department Faculty Name

Faculty of Information Technology

I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)

II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)

IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)

V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Management

I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)

II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)

III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development

Faculty of Commerce

I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)

II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Humanities

I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)

II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)

III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Science

I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)

II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)

III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)

IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)

V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Education

I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)

II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)

PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA501

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts

of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling

and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization

UNIT- I

Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash

Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy

Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors

ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public

Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations

UNIT- II

Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service

Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social

Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy

for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation

Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event

Management

UNIT- III

Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash

Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public

Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of

Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control

UNIT IV

Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies

Components of an Individual Image

Advertising and Corporate Image

Public Relations of an Institutions

UNIT V

The Grapevine and Rumours

Stereotype

Propaganda

Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations

applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different

entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling

REFERENCE BOOKS

Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House

Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House

Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University

Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill

This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning

ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-

The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding

processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to

those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic

environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide

evidence which informs those debates

UNIT I

Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of

Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its

environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship

UNIT II

Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship

development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the

Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making

UNIT III

Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that

enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in

Social context Start Up

UNIT IV

Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional

source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital

UNIT V

Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication

2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd

3 Vasant Desai

4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH

PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 503

COURSE OBJECTIVES-

To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production

UNIT- I

Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits

UNIT-II

Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus

movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts

of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications

of demand and supply price rationing price floors

Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price

elasticity cross and income elasticity

UNIT-III

Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility

Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp

Producer surplus

UNIT-IV

Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant

and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue

and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale

UNIT-V

Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of

the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run

equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment

concept

COURSE OUTCOME-

To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011

bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th

edition

2007

bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA

bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press

Oxford

bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore

MARKETING GROUP

INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so

that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to

enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications

UNIT-I

Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC

in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising

appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion

relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship

between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods

Interactive Internet Marketing

UNIT-II

Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach

establishing and allocating promotional budget

UNIT-III

IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different

forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning

creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design

considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client

Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork

UNIT-IV

Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering

key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and

media research

Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration

client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc

UNIT-V

Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing

Communications

COURSE OUTCOME-

To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches

and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to

communicating to target audiences

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc

Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard

D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois

Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing

House

Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and

Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication

Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH

Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing

Communications Pearson Education Limited

Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc

Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House

Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning

Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc

Homewood Illinois

Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic

Approach Cengage Learning

Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India

Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education

SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT

Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE

It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and

distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and

distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners

UNIT-I

Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies

Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling

objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring

Procedure Socialization

UNIT-II

Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program

Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation

Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial

Evaluation of Contest

UNIT-III

Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel

Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales

Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process

UNIT-IV

Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key

tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market

Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation

UNIT-V

Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners

Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict

Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International

Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales

COURSE OUTCOME

Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the

sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans

participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables

REFERENCE BOOKS

Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres

Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books

Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI

L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills

Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets

Greenwood Publishing Group

Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub

ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH

Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing

consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing

research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students

within a course project

UNIT-I

Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing

Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research

Process Marketing Research Designs

UNIT-II

The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques

Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of

Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic

Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical

Analysis Tools

UNIT-III

Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)

ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor

Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental

Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores

Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-

hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number

UNIT-IV

Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product

Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant

Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification

Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing

Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and

their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity

UNIT-V

Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning

in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report

and class presentation of the same

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from

analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor

analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis

REFERENCE BOOKS

Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi

William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi

Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi

Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill

Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research

Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey

Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning

Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp

Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced

in the class

HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP

LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA

Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of

Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity

objectivity and understandings

UNIT-I

The Factories Act 1948

The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923

The Employees State Insurance Act 1948

UNIT-II

The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952

The Payment of gratuity Act 1972

UNIT-III

The Maternity Benefit Act 1961

The Minimum Wages act 1948

UNIT-IV

The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946

The Payment of Bonus Act 1965

UNIT-V

The Apprentices Act 1969

The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959

COURSE OUTCOME ndash

To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour

Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the

organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to

follow the Laws applicable to the establishment

REFERENCE BOOKS

S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications

S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi

Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot

V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House

N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons

INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE

In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our

country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of

Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be

acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the

concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India

UNIT-I

Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors

affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial

relation programme

Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact

of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes

lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry

UNIT-II

Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal

Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective

bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective

collective bargaining collective bargaining in India

UNIT-III

Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education

scheme in India- objectives functions and problems

Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation

schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India

UNIT-IV

Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India

major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions

registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union

UNIT-V

Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery

Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation

submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court

industrial tribunals

Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power

of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute

COURSE OUTCOME

Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective

bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute

resolution

REFERENCE BOOKS

Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts

IIPM Personnel Management in India

Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business

Publication Ltd

Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India

Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India

Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication

Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co

Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law

ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational

culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the

human values in individuals

UNIT-I

Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational

Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development

Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining

and survey research amp feedback methodology

UNIT-II

Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in

organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief

systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development

UNIT-III

Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component

interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief

of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action

UNIT-IV

OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team

building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process

interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions

important for successful OD efforts

UNIT ndash V

HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational

implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional

Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have

improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi

Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York

McGrawhill

Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in

addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a

good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company

UNIT-I

Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm

Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-

Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of

Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering

UNIT-II

Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the

analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount

of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a

Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and

Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis

UNIT-III

Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues

and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements

medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings

Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project

finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing

UNIT-IV

Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of

financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing

Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect

cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization

UNIT-V

Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value

Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic

indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added

Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total

Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)

COURSE OUTCOME

Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and

corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts

REFERENCE BOOKS

Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill

Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial

environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a

multinational corporation

UNIT-I

Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation

functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial

management International monetary system

UNIT-II

Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories

ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible

exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer

Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options

Currency swaps and interest rate swaps

UNIT-III

Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction

transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction

exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The

national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International

capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)

UNIT-IV

International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic

considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)

Financial risk and cost of capital

Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of

capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-

20 subsidiaries and tax havens

UNIT-V

International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their

comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets

Recent developments in the Euro bond market

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations

and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley

PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall

Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall

Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis

Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co

Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall

Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers

Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath

FINANCIAL INCLUSION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion

such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss

the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to

promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models

UNIT-I

Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting

Access to Financial Services

Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive

Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators

UNIT-II

Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey

Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional

Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card

UNIT-III

Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India

Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations

Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor

UNIT-IV

SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of

microfinance evolved in India

Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial

Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for

Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for

Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People

UNIT-V

Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises

Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion

and Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account

initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage

Publication

Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House

Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech

Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications

Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications

Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing

Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI

Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI

Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag

Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion

Academic Foundation

IT GROUP

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to

manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the

hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment

UNIT-I

The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures

File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base

Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial

Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness

UNIT-II

Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface

with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database

Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design

UNIT-III

Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database

Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database

Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases

UNIT-IV

DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance

Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues

UNIT-V

Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the

field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective

faculty during the coverage of syllabus

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic

concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational

algebra and SQL

REFERENCE BOOKS

Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs

Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan

Press

McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co

MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It

aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing

implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services

UNIT-I

The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development

Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The

Enabling Environment for ITES

UNIT-II

Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled

Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of

Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services

UNIT-III

Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support

Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions

UNIT-IV

International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting

Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in

facilitating Trade in ITESTITES

UNIT-V

Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of

Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of

Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace

Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations

and integrate the learning in handling these complexities

REFERENCE BOOKS

Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat

E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing

SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information

technology with various aspects of Software Project Management

UNIT-I

Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision

and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM

Framework

UNIT-II

Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning

Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan

Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration

and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning

UNIT-III

Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an

Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques

Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule

Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools

UNIT-IV

Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance

Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior

Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review

UNIT-V

Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks

Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk

COURSE OUTCOME

Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business

context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business

scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson

Education Ltd

P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp

Tsinghua University Press

R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance

Management Concepts Pub

Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group

B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science

Press

A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications

G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on

understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business

UNIT I

Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm

production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country

UNIT II

Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms

and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business

sector

UNIT III

Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations

relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries

UNIT IV

Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment

and policy

UNIT V

Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies

COURSE OUTCOME

Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper

and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain

REFERENCE BOOKS

Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons

Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ

Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ

AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 517

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies

strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms

UNIT I

Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market

structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp

significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of

marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour

UNIT II

Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash

significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product

product life cycle

UNIT III

Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies

and pricing methods

UNIT IV

Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and

standardization

UNIT V

Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural

products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in

agribusiness

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better

understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for

agricultural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH

Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall

Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control

Pearson Edu

Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu

Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India

FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 518

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food

marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen

and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural

political and economic forces over time

UNIT I

Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade

Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of

Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic

factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer

UNIT II

Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling

food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing

in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions

across the chain in food retail food service marketing

UNIT III

4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing

Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system

Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement

Strategies for food retailers

UNIT IV

Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling

Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food

Products

UNIT V

Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training

Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in

retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze

Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing

REFERENCE BOOKS

Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of

India

Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu

Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill

RETAIL GROUP

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in

the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it

UNIT- I

Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management

Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain

networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain

Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network

UNIT- II

Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer

service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs

multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier

Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants

UNIT- III

Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory

models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system

UNIT- IV

COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip

Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION

TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain

Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management

UNIT- V

Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a

Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance

measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics

quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics

COURSE OUTCOME

After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain

which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House

bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers

bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg

bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi

bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan

STORES MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 520

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different

terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned

areas

UNIT- I

Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the

location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design

UNIT- II

Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual

Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors

UNIT- III

Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at

Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores

Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments

UNIT- IV

Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies

Quick Response System

UNIT- V

Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact

on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space

Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization

COURSE OUTCOME

The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern

and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management

bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing

bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach

bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing

bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing

RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 521

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail

Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail

business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management

UNIT I

Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail

equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail

market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-

Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India

UNIT II

Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development

The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and

Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-

Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on

ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response

marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks

The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management

UNIT III

Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM

Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch

points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services

Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM

Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding

Common Barriers

UNIT IV

Services Management

Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the

service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-

Supply relationships vehicle routing

UNIT V

Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising

Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping

the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand

management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-

2nd edition 2006

MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational

edititionUS1798

Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education

New Delhi 2003

JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy

Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi

Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy

Pearson Education New Delhi 2004

KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005

Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007

Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House

Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution

rosenbloom and Education Foundation US

PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 522

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

UNIT- I

Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology

Change Implication

UNIT- II

Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying

UNIT- III

Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology

Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management

UNIT- IV

Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology

Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages

UNIT- V

Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise

Level

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to

manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009

bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009

bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson

PRODUCTIVITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 523

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

UNIT- I

Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and

external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work

Contents and Ineffective Time

UNIT- II

Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram

String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart

UNIT- III

Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart

UNIT- IV

Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be

Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement

UNIT- V

Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International

Labour Office Geneva

bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed

bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill

bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India

QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO

Course Code 1Y3BBA 524

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify

the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and

measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current

issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans

UNIT- I

Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives

UNIT- II

Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect

concept

UNIT- III

Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality

UNIT- IV

Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various

control Charts

UNIT- V

Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification

COURSE OUTCOME-

Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to

explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key

aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for

controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp

communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze

the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise

and evaluate quality implementation plans

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay

bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd

bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas

bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd

bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition

7th

Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012

bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM CONCEPTS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 525

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism

To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash

Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp

Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and

development of Tourism through the ages

UNIT II

COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash

Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism

inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious

Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions

incentives sports and adventure tourism

UNIT III

TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash

Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of

motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash

health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and

push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists

UNIT IV

IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash

Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts

- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism

UNIT V

SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-

Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote

Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable

Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and

experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of

tourism experiences

REFERENCES BOOKS

Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling

Publishers Private Limited New Delhi

Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism

Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited

Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill

International

Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors

New Delhi

Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas

Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New

Delhi

TOURISM MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 526

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the basic concept and various components of management

UNIT I

MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-

Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of

management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)

Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management

UNIT II

PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-

Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of

planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by

objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance

and limitation of decision making

UNIT III

ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash

Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of

staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance

appraisal

UNIT IV

DIRECTING ndash

Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation

(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy

theory)

UNIT V

LEADERSHIP-

Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path

Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to

communication

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives

Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of

tourism as well as the impacts of tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc

Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New

Delhi

Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition

AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing

House New Delhi

Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition

Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations

To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism

industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-

Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing

Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and

Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash

Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New

Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING -

Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION -

Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity

Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in

promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level

which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described

REFERENCES BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson

Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition

Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent

learning

UNIT I

Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health

Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural

History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention

UNIT II

Definition and meaning of hospital ndash

Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing

concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of

Hospitals

UNIT III

Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector

Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in

delivering healthcare in India

UNIT IV

Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural

hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description

UNIT V

The reforms of Healthcare System-

The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare

reforms amp Future of Healthcare System

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding

the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the

management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and

organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services

REFERENCE BOOKS

The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991

Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd

Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers

HEALTH ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 529

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and

understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict

peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different

social actions

UNIT I

Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and

importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below

Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits

UNIT II

Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve

techniques and properties of indifference curve

UNIT III

Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash

Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of

Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of

Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of

demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash

Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue

UNIT IV

Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two

variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves

UNIT V

Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash

Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and

monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market

situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price

determination

COURSE OUTCOME

To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from

an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic

evaluation of a health intervention or program

REFERENCE BOOKS

Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR

Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP

Managerial Economics - Gupta GS

Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani

Business Economics - Sharma NK

Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar

Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi

Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL

HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 530

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions

related to records management in the healthcare environment

UNIT I

Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record

keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records

UNIT II

Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health

Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research

UNIT III

Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics

investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing

Pharmacy etc Audits)

UNIT IV

Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems

associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic

Related Groups (DRG)

UNIT V

Medical Registers ndash

Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various

departments amp common problems faced

COURSE OUTCOME

Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New

Delhi 1999

Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995

Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi

George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003

Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 531

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India

To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India

UNIT I

Rural Society in India

Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-

urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and

subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural

life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion

UNIT II

Rural Society

Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social

institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity

and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of

rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT-III

Village India

Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance

contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and

political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology

Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class

UNIT IV

Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics

Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid

growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope

and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -

Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT-V

Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times

Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social

processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India

Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy

Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms

REFERENCE BOOKS

Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi

Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay

PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House

SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication

House Delhi

ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 532

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To explain the nature of environmental studies

To introduce aspects of Natural resources

To introduce aspects of ecosystems

To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation

To introduce aspects of environmental pollution

To create awareness on social issues and environment

To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

UNIT I

Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for

public awareness

UNIT II

Ecosystems

Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and

decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and

Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the

following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic

Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)

UNIT III

Biodiversity and its Conservation

Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification

of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option

Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports

of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-

Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ

Conservation of biodiversity

UNIT IV

Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil

pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste

Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an

individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods

earthquake cyclone and landslides

20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT V

Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water

Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of

People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible

responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and

holocaust

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the nature of environmental studies

Classify renewable and non-renewable resources

Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues

Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation

Analyze aspects of environmental pollution

Describe aspects of social issues and environment

Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner

Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental

Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai

Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA

RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 533

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts

To familiarize Rural marketing strategy

To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems

To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing

To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages

UNIT I

Overview of Rural Marketing

Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing

and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction

Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class

UNIT II

Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for

rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT III

Rural Distribution Systems

Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche

markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of

Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT IV

ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network

(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction

Methodology Group Project work

UNIT V

Market support

Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role

play

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Market their products

Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products

Choose an appropriate distribution system

Apply ICT in rural marketing

Source the finance for rural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India

Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education

Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi

SEMESTER- VI

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allot

ted

Cred

its

Course

Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mark

s

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-601

Core

Course

E- Commerce

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-602 Core

Course

Customer

Relationship Management

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-603 Practical

Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva

Voce

100

50

17

-

-

50

20

- - 4 4

1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Grand Total

550

22

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one

paper presentation certificate in related discipline

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management

1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing

1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA607 Management of Change

1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management

1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management

1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service

1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business

1Y3BBA614 E- Governance

1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management

1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing

1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour

1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning

1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design

1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control

1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan

1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing

1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management

1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care

1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law

(Rural Management Group)

1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System

1Y3BBA632

Panchayati Raj

1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy

E- COMMERCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 601

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is

designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the

technical foundation for understanding information systems

UNIT I

Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting

online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a

business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-

commerce

UNIT II

Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet

(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A

systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing

vs in-house development of a website)

UNIT III

Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension

definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security

intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)

technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and

protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)

UNIT IV

E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards

e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online

banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house

automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments

UNIT V

Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting

online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of

utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online

services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and

entertainment

COURSE OUTCOME-

Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information

systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Management Information System Jawadekar

bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon

bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana

bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)

bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty

CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 602

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of

Customer Relationship Management in the organizations

UNIT- I

Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature

of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive

and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and

evaluating customer business plans

UNIT- II

Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer

database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing

customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively

Planning and making persuasive presentations

UNIT- III

Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality

Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality

managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and

Cross- sell

UNIT- IV

Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations

Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority

setting Target setting setting standards

UNIT- V

Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction

COURSE OUTCOME-

To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship

Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd

Ed Response Books Sage Publication

Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House

Pvt Ltd

Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books

Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management

V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008

Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management

South Western Cengage Learning

Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press

Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age

International

Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan

Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of

India Private Limted New Delhi 2011

S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private

Limted New Delhi 2008

ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 603

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to

work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn

the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final

semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by

the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a

student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their

analytical capabilities and experience

DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)

Title of the study (Cover Page)

Declaration

Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)

Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)

Acknowledgement

Table of Contents

Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Introduction

12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research

12 Significance of the study

13 Scope of the study

14 Research Problem

15 Objective of the study

17 Hypothesis

18 Limitations of the study

2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students

to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they

learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After

the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is

evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report

should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to

provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also

able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business

operations and come up with the ways to tap the

Opportunities

3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

31 Introduction

32 Population of the study

33 Sampling Design

331 Sampling Technique

332 Sampling Method

333 Sample Size

34 Research Instrument

35 Sources of data

351 Primary Data

352 Secondary Data

4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION

5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION

Bibliography

COURSE OUTCOME-

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able

to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and

come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities

MARKETING GROUP

PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 604

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the

context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product

manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions

UNIT- I

Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused

organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management

Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-

cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product

Development

UNIT- II

Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods

of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in

international Market

UNIT- III

Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity

concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand

Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image

UNIT- IV

Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system

measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement

Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market

segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining

and establishing brand values

UNIT- V

Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand

extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time

Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand

Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation

COURSE OUTCOME

The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of

Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for

Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning

implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer

Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi

Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi

Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi

Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education

New Delhi

Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi

Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata

McGraw Hill New Delhi

Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi

STRATEGIC MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 605

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and

implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and

managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver

superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation

through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills

UNIT- I

Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash

Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of

Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying

Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting

Marketing Objectives

UNIT-II

Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching

Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy

Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle

Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies

UNIT-III

Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp

Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models

UNIT- IV

Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives

Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy

Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing

UNIT- V

Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at

different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by

executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and

interdisciplinary nature

REFERENCE BOOKS

Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt

D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin

OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage

Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill

Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp

Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson

Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann

Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India

George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press

J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and

Programs McGraw-Hill Companies

Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub

Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon

P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave

E-MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 606

COURSE OBJECTIVE

It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance

enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns

UNIT- I

Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics

Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan

Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing

UNIT- II

Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in

India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within

communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing

UNIT- III

Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet

as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet

User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-

branding

UNIT- IV

Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-

marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools

Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent

Trends in e-customer service

UNIT- V

Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web

Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing

campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising

Course Outcome

Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics

online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its

implication on marketing strategy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a

networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill

Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall

Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning

Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books

Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial

Times

HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP

MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 607

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be

Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students

Understand the importance of managing change

UNIT- I

Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-

Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of

human resource strategies in implementing Change

UNIT-II

Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR

implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation

and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions

UNIT-III

HR Processes amp Change

Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned

change

Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change

UNIT- IV

Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in

employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management

of change implications of downsizing

UNIT- V

Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to

promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and

feedback

Course Outcome

Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more

effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change

process

REFERENCE BOOKS

A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human

Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education

Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill

Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage

South Asia Edition

K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation

Response Books

VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books

CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 608

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical

relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand

anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions

to ensure the organizational and individual success

UNIT-I

Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of

organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business

environment

UNIT-II

Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars

Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations

UNIT- III

Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock

Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system

(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)

UNIT- IV

Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and

repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally

appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural

negotiation and conflicts management

UNIT- V

Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual

countries Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development

of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning

Private Limited

G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill

Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley

Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing

Co

Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell

Business

Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times

McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp

Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation

Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson

Education India

GROUP DYNAMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 609

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group

dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group

effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of

resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding

UNIT-I

Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group

dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B

UNIT-II

Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group

Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash

Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress

UNIT-III

Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group

decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash

conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict

UNIT- IV

Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De

individuation theory

UNIT- V

Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources

of Change in groups

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups

REFERENCE BOOKS

Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley

Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass

Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co

Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE

Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and

application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax

along with basic concepts of VAT

UNIT-I

Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of

Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment

of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-II

Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature

and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax

planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business

UNIT-III

Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net

Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and

Penalties (Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-IV

Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for

service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of

Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)

UNIT- V

VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview

of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT

Law)

COURSE OUTCOME

Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields

REFERENCE BOOKS

Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications

Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub

Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House

T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India

BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson

S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann

R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _

INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 611

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important

components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO

Analysis etc

UNIT-I

INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian

Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role

in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)

UNIT-II

FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different

Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players

Different types of Instruments

UNIT-III

CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI

Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank

UNIT- IV

COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp

Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A

REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA

UNIT- V

NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies

Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture

Capital Funds

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment

Banking companies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication

Financial Services MY Khan TMH

Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication

S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran

ML Seth

FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 612

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and

prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of

uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding

of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role

of internal audit assessments

UNIT I

Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview

UNIT II

Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax

fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and

inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds

UNIT III

Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion

investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports

UNIT IV

Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using

Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)

UNIT V Case Study

1 Two Indian

2 Two international cases

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread

nature of fraud and its economic impact

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation

Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination

Cengage Learning

IT GROUP

INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 613

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security

managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues

in the information assurance field

UNIT I

Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian

Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its

application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law

Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour

Laws E-Media and Print Media

UNIT II

E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security

Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature

UNIT III

Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil

Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-

detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of

Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA

UNIT IV

IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal

issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base

UNIT V

Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of

Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules

COURSE OUTCOME-

Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House

Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co

John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River

Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher

Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University

E-GOVERNANCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 614

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information

Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an

awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the

issues concerning the Cyber security

UNIT I

Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National

E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status

UNIT II

E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process

Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges

UNIT III

E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-

Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics

UNIT IV

Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic

data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber

audit implications for e-governance

Unit V

Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and

construction of a joining table

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill

Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing

Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in

India ICFAI Press Hyderabad

B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill

H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications

V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd

IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 615

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization

UNIT I

IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT

Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo

Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for

IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library

UNIT II

Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service

Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support

Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change

Management Release Management

UNIT III

Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve

Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine

Recovery Data Retention

UNIT IV

Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security

Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection

UNIT V

IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and

Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and

Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of

Internet on Technical Support

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology

REFERENCE BOOKS

Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce

(OGC) TSO UK

Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos

Management Tata McGraw Hill

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 616

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques

and their management

UNIT I

Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations

of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and

distribution

UNIT II

Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and

factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging

of foods

UNIT III

Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food

industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO

etc

UNIT IV

Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products

cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking

confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of

fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH

Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie

Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing

Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH

MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 617

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing

concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs

UNIT I

Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution

channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-

farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing

UNIT II

Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds

Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of

NSC and State Seed Corporation

UNIT III

Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers

Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash

marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer

marketing

UNIT IV

Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash

marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of

electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity

UNIT V

Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm

machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines

implementsEquipmentlsquos

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with

various functional areas of agribusiness

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp

IBH

Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management

Kalyani

Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ

House

FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 618

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis

of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions

UNIT I

Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management

decisions farm management problems

UNIT II

Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle

principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc

UNIT III

Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm

records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement

farm efficiency measures

UNIT IV

Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc

UNIT V

Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to

counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks

and uncertainty

COURSE OUTCOME

Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses

REFERENCE BOOKS

Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall

Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ

Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ

Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ

RETAIL GROUP

BUYER BEHAVIOUR

Course Code 1Y3BBA 619

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer

decisions making

UNIT-I

A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic

Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market

Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making

UNIT-II

Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles

of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer

Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and

Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product

Relationship

UNIT-III

Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to

information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-

Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors

Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications

UNIT-IV

Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing

Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-

Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions

Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy

UNIT-V

Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics

lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they

experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and

impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour

COURSE OUTCOME

Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the

choices consumers make

REFERENCE BOOKS

JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata

Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006

Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context

Excel Books NewDelhi-2001

Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous

DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing

Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi

Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining

Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005

Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000

RETAIL PLANNING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 620

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational

decision-making processes in the organized retail

UNIT I

Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail

Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-

Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative

methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management

UNIT II

Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics

Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp

non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion

designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting

Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-

Management of Obsolete goods

UNIT III

Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer

psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical

Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices

UNIT IV

Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-

Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp

Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective

Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer

Rights- Consumer Protection Acts

UNIT V

Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing

Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-

Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels

REFERENCE BOOKS

Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies

Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies

Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson

Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund

amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson

Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice

Hall of India New Delhi

Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies

Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best

People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd

RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 621

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the

value it creates

UNIT I

Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When

How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience

Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency

UNIT II

Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated

Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-

Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-

UNIT III

Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on

Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-

Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display

Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-

UNIT IV

Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium

Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and

Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-

Trade Dealing

UNIT V

Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-

Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating

Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing

to act in ways that increase loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -

Prentice-Hall

Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology

Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales

Promotion Techniques

Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate

Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page

Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books

George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing

Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill

PRODUCTION GROUP

PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL

Course Code 1Y3BBA 622

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a

basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of

facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality

control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an

understanding of the concept of aggregate planning

UNIT- I

Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors

Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-

requisites of PPC

UNIT- II

Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in

Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining

Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control

Models)

UNIT- III

Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection

Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master

production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of

software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II

UNIT- IV

Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n

job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling

Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)

UNIT- V

Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control

function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications

bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi

Deep and Deep Publications

PROCESS REENGINEERING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 623

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of

business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering

projects

UNIT- I

Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp

pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR

UNIT- II

Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering

project organizing for process reengineering

UNIT- III

Process analysis and design

a) Process analysis

(b) Process design

UNIT- IV

Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition

tracking and measuring process performance

UNIT- V

Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology

Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact

measurement

COURSE OUTCOME

To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the

considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-

engineering project

REFERENCE BOOKS

Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata

McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater

Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester

John Wiley amp Sons

WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn

the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time

standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering

to design of work systems

UNIT- I

Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos

productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity

Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time

Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities

Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was

developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph

UNIT- II

Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting

up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion

Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand

Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and

Design of Tools amp Equipment

UNIT- III

Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard

from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and

Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work

Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling

UNIT- IV

Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage

Incentive Plans

The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for

Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action

UNIT-V

Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion

Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System

Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts

Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional

including understanding the need for quality

REFERENCE BOOKS

iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill

ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation

Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp

Sons

Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall

Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall

Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press

Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall

Mall East and London

Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN

Course Code 1Y3BBA 625

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in

it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative

impacts of tourism development

UNIT I

Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism

Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of

Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in

Tourism Development

UNIT II

Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning

system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos

Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-

Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in

learning system

UNIT III

Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable

development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist

Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash

The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash

Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities

UNIT IV

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage

of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment

UNIT IV

Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the

Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National

Policy on Ecology and Environment

COURSE OUTCOME

To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global

perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international

tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for

sustainable tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash

Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications

Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers

Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William

Heinemann Ltd

Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices

London Pitman Publishing

Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York

Kendall Hunt Publishing Company

Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan

Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman

Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford

University Press

New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable

Development Approach VNR and New York

TOURISM MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 626

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism

and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing

that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products

before the stakeholders of tourism industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing

Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and

Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market

Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing

Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for

different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing

Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales

promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital

communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future

It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are

needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be

a part of this growth

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar

Thomson Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd

edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of

Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry

UNIT I

HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of

Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads

ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and

marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents

UNIT II

RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief

History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway

Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway

station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains

express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world

heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes

UNIT III

AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth

Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled

Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature

Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players

Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and

performance marketing strategies of Air India

UNIT IV

WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover

crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going

traffic) ndash National waterways

UNIT V

CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing

stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and

Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation

COURSE OUTCOME

Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of

the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management

REFERENCE BOOKS

RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 628

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of

its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing

knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital

Management

UNIT I

Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its

impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need

principles purpose

UNIT II

Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and

their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply

department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health

and patient safety

UNIT III

Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of

biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules

standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging

transportation amp storage

UNIT IV

Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier

methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal

decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of

wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan

UNIT V

Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party

insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash

meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural

disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague

typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics

COURSE OUTCOME

To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost

containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges

arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs

and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its

various components

REFERENCE BOOKS

Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication

First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn

Park k - Preventive and social medicine

Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot

MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 629

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted

advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public

relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any

potential crisis that may arise

UNIT I

Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches

to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of

marketing functions of marketing

UNIT II

Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment

Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market

segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash

positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing

UNIT III

Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior

(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying

decision process

UNIT IV

Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp

deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product

development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling

UNIT V

Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing

policies and strategies

Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management

decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels

COURSE OUTCOME

Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an

integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare

professionals and the public

REFERENCE BOOKS

Philip Kotler - marketing management

Wiliam jStanton - marketing management

Sherleker S A - marketing management

J C Gandhi - marketing management

Davar - modern marketing management

Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub

P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research

Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research

HOSPITALS RELATED LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 630

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of

common-law development

UNIT ndash I

Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties

sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance

act trust act societies registration act

UNIT ndashII

Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of

human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act

1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971

mental health act patient consent

UNIT ndash III

Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948

narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods

act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration

UNIT ndash IV

Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act

1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916

maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing

order) act trade union act industrial disputes act

UNIT ndashV

Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in

hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical

negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical

establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal

pronouncements rulings and regulations

REFERENCE BOOKS

Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer

Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law

Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 631

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India

To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural

Production system in India

To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India

To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development

UNIT -1

Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions

ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology

Case analysis and discussion

UNIT II

Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash

Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture

UNIT III

Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-

Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India

UNIT IV

Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of

holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus

land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas

UNIT V

Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash

Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and

schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM

COURSE OUTCOMES

Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management

Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India

Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development

REFERENCE BOOKS

Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution

Can We Make London Department for International Development

Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House

PANCHAYATI RAJ

Course Code 1Y3BBA632

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration

To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites

To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance

To provide insights on Rural Administration

To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes

UNIT I

Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction

Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges

Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration

(Official and non-official) and report submission

UNIT III

Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission

UNIT IV

Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and

Block- Panchayat relationship

Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play

UNIT V

Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government

Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan

Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

COURSE OUTCOMES

Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village

Development interventions

Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its

power Structure

Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and

Plans

Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes

32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959

Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise

Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi

Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New

Delhi

RURAL ECONOMY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 633

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy

To help students understand their role in rural economic development

To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources

To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation

To create awareness on rural economic development

UNIT I

Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-

Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries

(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in

agriculture individual production other production services

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-

Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash

Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land

Reforms

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

UNIT III

Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation

programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs

UNIT IV

Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work

UNIT V

Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing

ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for

the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy

Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village

Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues

Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation

Facilities

Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi

Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi

Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic

Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New

Delhi

INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER

Mid Semester Examination (MSE)

There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5

descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered

End Semester Examination (ESE)

There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks

each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of

10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered

Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations

The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment

Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be

applicable

(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )

Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type

End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size

Page 2: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020

Vision Strive to achieve a unique blend of academic excellence and management skills to address the

needs of the business environment in a manner that lets each participant achieve his potential in

a value based character

The BBA program seeks to develop students into leaders ready to tackle the challenges of

todaylsquos global business environment

Adapt and find innovative methods for problem solving to cope with unforeseen events and to

manage in unpredictable environments

Manage contemporary societal and global issues resulting from diversity

Appreciate individual ethical behavior and discharge community responsibilities in

organization and society

Mission To leverage their potential by creating an ecosystem that instills critical thinking and analytical

mind set

To develop leaders of competencies in a rapidly changing business environment

To nurture the future business leaders through imparting high quality value-based teaching

research and practical based training that meets industry expectations

To foster a passion for learning and creative thinking among the student and teaching

community

Identify and formulate research problems and analyze complex management and

communication issues

Design solutions for complex managerial and communication problems and to develop the

same so as to meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for employability

BBA PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES AND OUTCOMES

BBA PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES-

Develop viable alternatives and make effective decisions relating to business ethics and social responsibility

Identify and analyze relevant global factors that influence decision-making

To apply appropriate techniques resources and multimedia tools for enhancement of skills

Apply knowledge based skill to assess and solve social-cultural and legal issues

Understand the impact of the professional management literary and soft skills in societal and

environmental contexts

To adopt and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities

To achieve appropriate communication skills and higher levels of proficiency for

Successful career in Industry Business and Entrepreneurship

BBA PROGRAMME OUTCOMES-

Towards the end of the program students will be able to

Provide students with a broad range of managerial capabilities the capacity for critical

thinking communication and problem‐solving skills legal and ethical behavior

Prepare graduates for diverse careers in global management administration and

entrepreneurship through a well‐rounded business education with a focus on global business

operations emerging markets and technology‐enabled organizations

Analyze socio-political-economic environment of business organizations

Communicate effectively in different contexts

Develop functional and general management skills

Build and Demonstrate leadership teamwork and social skills

Evaluate different business problems using analytical creative and integrative abilities

SEMESTER I

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Ist SEMESTER

Course Details

External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allot

ted

Cred

its

Course Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor

Sessional

L

T

P

Subj

ect

wise

Distr

ibuti

on

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Ma

x

Mar

ks

Min

Mark

s

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mark

s

Theory Group

1Y3BBA101

Ability Enhanc

ement

Compul

sory

Course

MIL Hindi Communication

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA102

Core Course

Organization Behavior 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA103 Core

Course

Introduction to

Business Accountancy

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA104 Core Course

Business Environment

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA105 Core

Course

Principles of

Management 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA102

Organization

Behavior 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

1Y3BBA104 Business

Environment 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Grand

Total 600 20 5 - 24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

MIL HINDI COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 101

fgUnh Okdjk oa laizskk

इकाई-I

हहनदीवयाकरण और रचना सजञा सरवनाम हरशष ाण हिया अवयय कारक रचन सहधउपसगव परतयय

तथासमास

ह गहनणवय पयावयराची शबद हर ोम शबद अन क शबदो क ह ए एक शबद

शबद शदधि राकय शदधि महारर और ोकोदधिया पललरन एर सकष पण

इकाई-II

हनबध क ातथासमसामहयक एरराषटर ीय हरषया परहनबधा खन

इकाई-III

सपर षण (सचार)

-सपर षण की अरधारणऔरमहतव सपरष ाण क ह ए आरशयक शत सपरष ाण क परकार

सपर षणकामाधयम सपर षणक ा सपर षण की तकनीक राचनक ा समाचारराचन साकषातकारक ा

रचनातमक खनका कषय रचनातमक ख ानकाआधार भारऔरहरचारोकीपरसतहत राक क ा की

उपयोहगता

अनशसितपसतक -

रहतवयाकरणभासकर डा 0 रचनद रकमार

रहतहनबधाभासकर डा 0 रचनदर कमार

आधहनकहहनदीवयाकरणऔररचना डा 0 रासद रननदनपरसाद

रचनामानस परो0 राम शवरनाथहतरारी

वयरहाररकहहनदी डा 0 जग बहादरपाणड य

रचनातमक खन डा 0 रमश ागौतम

राजहसहहनदीहनबध परो0 आर0 एन0 गौड़

सफ हहनदीहनबध रतन शवर

हनबध सहचर डा 0 कषमणपरसाद

उपकारमहारर और ाक ोदधियाा पार 0 राज शवरपरसादचतरव दी

कहाहनयोकहारता की परतापअनम

समपर षणपरकहहनदीभाषाहशकषण डा 0 रशनानारग

श ीहरजञान डा 0 सर शकमार

श ीहरजञानपरहतमानऔरहरशल षण डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo

श ीहरजञानकाइहतहास डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo

ORGANIZATION BEHAVIOUR

Course Code 1Y3BBA102

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Students study the behaviour of individuals and groups as part of the social and technical system in

the workplace They examine individual and group behaviour communication conflict and various

management styles motivational techniques and coordination in the work environment and apply

these concepts to the development of an organizations human resources

UNIT I

Organization Overview of the concept and relevance of organizational Behaviour meaning Nature

Scope features approaches model challenges and opportunities functions amp Role of manager

Planning process Decision making Process

UNIT II

Foundation of individual Behavior Biography ability personality (determinants and models)

perception (definition components factors affecting perception in decision making) Values

Beliefs etc

UNIT III

Individual Behavior- Attitude Definition importance Types Attitude regarding- Job

Satisfaction Involvement commitment effects of employee attitude changing attitudes

Learning Definition nature theories classical conditioning operant conditioning cognitive

Learning Social learning

UNIT IV

Motivation Concept and theories (Maslow McGregor Herzberg ERG) merits amp demerits Group

dynamics amp Team work Nature theories types of group Definition Stages of Group Development

effectiveness potential problems Analysis of Interpersonal Relationship Transactional Analysis

Johari Window

UNIT- V

Organizational change and development approaches and methods stress nature source effects

conflicts employee counseling approaches extra mural penitential learning programmers case

study

COURSE OUTCOME

To explain group dynamics and demonstrate skills required for working in groups (team building)

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Luthans Fred Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India

bull Mishra MN Behaviour Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi

bull Newstrom W John Davis Keith Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India

bull LM Roy Organisational Behaviour S Chand Publication

bull Dr FC Sharma Organisational Behaviour SBPD Publications

INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ACCOUNTING

Course Code 1Y3BBA103

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable students to synthesize related information and evaluate options for most logical and

optimal solution such that they would be able to predict and control cost incurrence and improve

results

UNIT- I

Accounting Basic of Accounting Accounting Mechanics-Double Entry System Classification

Rules for Debit amp Credit Journal Ledger and Trial Balance sub-division of journal Ledger meaning subdivision and mechanics of Posting balancing ledger accounts

UNIT- II

Cash book and Subsidiary books of Accounting Kinds of Cash Book Purchase day book and sale

day Book Bank reconciliation statement Measurement of income- Adjusting entries- rectification of

errors- Adjusted trial balance

UNIT-III

Preparation of financial statements- Trading account Profit amp Loss account Balance Sheet (with

Adjustments) Accounting for Non-profit organization Accounting Procedures Receipts amp payment

accounts income ampexpenditure account problems

UNIT- IV

Depreciation- Meaning Determinant factors Method amp Significance Basic Concepts of hire

purchase amp installments

UNIT- V

Partnership-Preliminary admission of a partner Company Accounts-Issue of shares Debentures

Forfeitures and reissue of shares

COURSE OUTCOME

Analyse the complexities associated with management of cost of product and services in the

Organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

SA Siddiqui- Comprehensive Accounting

TS Greval- Introduction to Accounting

Mukherjee and M Accounting (Volume-I)

SN Maheshwar- Introduction to Accounting (Vikas Publication)

CAC Rama Gopal Accounting For Managers (New Age)

BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational

and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business

UNIT I

Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro

environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis

for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business

UNIT II

Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic

systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years

plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent

economic initiatives NitiAyog

UNIT III

Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment

problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance

of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural

Development Problems of Growth

UNIT IV

Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment

Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA

and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act

UNIT V

International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational

Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic

Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-

GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India

COURSE OUTCOME

Outline how an entity operates in a business environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996

Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi

Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan

Chand Delhi

Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi

PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA105

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to

articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate

effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the

consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and

quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods

UNIT-I

Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of

Management Functions of the Manager

UNIT- II

Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of

Planning

Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and

type of Policies

Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems

involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques

UNIT- III

Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of

Units and committees

Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship

UNIT- IV

Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training

Directing Nature and purpose and directing

UNIT- V

Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control

process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies

COURSE OUTCOME-

Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques

managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of

managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify

and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own

position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied

audiences

Reference Books

bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher

bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson

Education

bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt

Ltd 4th Ed

bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill

Publications

SEMESTER II

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distributio

n

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor

Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distribu

tion Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Ma

x

Ma

rks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme

nt

Compulsory

Course

English

communication

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA202 Core Course

Management concept amp

Principle

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA203 Core

Course

Environmental

Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA204 Core

Course

Monetary

Economics and

Indian Banking

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA205 Core

Course

Business

Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA205 Business

Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhanceme

nt

Skill Enhancement

Elective

Course-I

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand

Total 600 21 5 - 24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

ENGLISH COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA201

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English

language teaching and content writing sectors

UNIT I

Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning

Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening

UNIT II

Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive

writing expansion of an idea

UNIT III

Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing

(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume

writing covering letter

UNIT IV

Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases

UNIT V

Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb

agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions

(Advanced)

COURSE OUTCOME

To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill

Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul

Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan

Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das

Orient Blackswan

Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press

Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication

MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 202

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and

process of effective controlling in the organization

UNIT I

Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science

Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)

UNIT II

School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and

Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)

Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management

UNIT III

Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing

Staffing Directing and Coordinating

UNIT IV

Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command

Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control

UNIT V

Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure

determination Forms- formal amp informal organization

Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations

COURSE OUTCOME

Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial

functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management

REFERENCE BOOKS

LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management

VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management

James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB

Fred Luthans- OB

ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 203

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links

between human and natural systems

UNIT I

Introduction to environmental studies

Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability

and sustainable development

UNIT II

Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an

ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following

ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds

streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)

Unit III

Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to

mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and

over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international

ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate

energy sources growing energy needs case studies

UNIT IV

Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem

diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots

Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and

Informational value

UNIT V

Environmental Pollution

Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution

Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and

Industrial waste Pollution case studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social

and environmental processes

REFERENCE BOOKS

California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London

Routledge

Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security

Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press

Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of

ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006

Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37

McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books

McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the

Twentieth Century

Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders

Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic

Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt

Ltd

Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons

Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi

1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP

Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation

S Chand Publishing New Delhi

MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING

Course Code 1Y3BBA204

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using

statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills

within the contest of subject matter of economics

UNIT I

Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of

Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value

of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income

theory of Money

UNIT II

Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people

Money Market

UNIT III

Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial

Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks

UNIT IV

Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control

methods and Tools of Monetary Policy

UNIT V

RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative

Banks and Rural Banks

COURSE OUTCOME

Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and

mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of

economics

REFERENCE BOOKS

MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi

LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi

Crowther- An Out Line of Money

Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant

KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ

BUSINESS COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA205

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative

scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication

UNIT I

Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports

OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)

UNIT II

Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other

words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis

UNIT III

Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers

Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers

UNIT IV

Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a

Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication

Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)

UNIT V

Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written

Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp

minutes

COURSE OUTCOME

To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical

proficiency in the development of exposition and argument

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wren amp Martin

K Madhukar- Business Communication

VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication

Asha Laul- Business Communication

Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH

SEMESTER III

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotte

d

Credit

s

Course Code Course

Type

Course

Title

Total

Mark

s

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subjec

t wise

Distrib

ution

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA301

Ability

Enhancement

IT Tool for Business

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA302

Core Course

Introduction to Marketing

Management

100 50 17 20 7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA303 Core

Course

Business

Law

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA304 Core

Course

Business

statistics for

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA305

Core

Course

Retail

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA304 Practical

Business

statistics for Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill

Enhancemen

t Elective Course-II

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand Total 600 24

IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 301

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software

components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data

base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT

UNIT-I

Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and

Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World

Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept

UNIT-II

Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different

computer generation

UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and

Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming

Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-

principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart

examples

UNIT-IV

Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation

applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)

Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information

System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems

Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human

Resources Management Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations

Understand the hardware and software components of the computer

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford

2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication

3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication

4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill

INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 302

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply

these to a new or existing business

UNIT I

Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept

amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro

environment

UNIT II

Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of

Product Line amp Product- mix

UNIT III

Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing

decisions Overview of pricing process

UNIT IV

Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product

Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage

UNIT V

Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to

marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct

selling

COURSE OUTCOME

To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct

an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an

appropriate format

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Philip Kotler

2 TN Chabra

3 TK Panda

4 SH Kazmi

5 Arun Kumar

BUSINESS LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 303

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal

environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with

knowledge of legal principles

UNIT-I

Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration

capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts

Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp

Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency

UNIT-II

Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp

Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales

UNIT-III

Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -

Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a

negotiable instrument

UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of

non-registration Dissolution of a firm

UNIT-V

Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of

Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013

COURSE OBJECTIVE

On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to

individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context

Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 ND Kapoor

2 Tulsian

3 MC Kuchhal

4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business

BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 304

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management

UNIT I

Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance

Scope and Limitation of Statistic

UNIT II

Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar

Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive

UNIT III

Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic

Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures

of dispersion

UNIT IV

Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and

Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index

number CPI WPI IIP

UNIT V

Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank

Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series

COURSE OUTCOME

Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically

discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons

2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication

3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication

RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in

India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone

Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT

FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan

Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process

UNIT II

FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail

Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors

Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing

MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer

Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design

and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication

UNIT III

STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty

Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors

UNIT IV

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management

IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service

Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM

Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying

UNIT V

MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at

Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems

at Retail Centers

Course Outcome-

Reference Books

bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education

bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A

Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education

The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge

about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various

aspects of retail operations

After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with

the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the

entire retail operations

SEMESTER IV

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code Course

Type Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subject

wise

Distributio

n

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mark

s

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-401

Ability

Enhanceme

nt

Introduction to

soft skill amp

Team Building

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA-402 Core Course

Introduction to

financial

management

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-403 Core Course

Advertising

and Sales

Promotion

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-404 Core Course

Management

of Human resource

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of

Business

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group

Term End

Practical

Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-404 Practical

Management

of Human

resource

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-405 Practical

Macro

Economics of Business

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

Grand Total 550 22

INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 401

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate

students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners

by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are

learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for

their own learning

UNIT ndash I

General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of

Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences

Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making

Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of

communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of

Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation

UNIT ndash II

Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing

skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice

modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements

General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral

skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive

Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style

UNIT ndash III

Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format

and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in

Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active

Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD

UNIT ndash IV

Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction

Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview

Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing

Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of

Conversation

UNIT ndash V

Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional

Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers

COURSE OUTCOME

To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills

and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin

bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar

INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 402

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital

decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and

raising long-term finance

UNIT I

Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives

Role of finance manager

UNIT II

Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of

investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return

Comparison between NPV amp IRR

UNIT III

Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of

Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning

capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure

UNIT IV

The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage

Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating

Leverage

UNIT V

Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital

estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of

inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order

Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy

COURSE OUTCOME

Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial

manager in the current competitive business scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 IM Pandey

2 P Chandra

3 SP Gupta

4 MY Khan

ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 403

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may

review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos

homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions

UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising

budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for

Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising

UNIT II

Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy

Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role

types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council

of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)

UNIT III

Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring

awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of

design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet

advertising and evaluation of advertising

UNIT IV

Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors

influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option

Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of

consumer schemes and other methods of promotion

UNIT V

Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs

Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales

personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion

COURSE OUTCOME

Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how

these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its

relation to todaylsquos marketplace

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall

Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi

Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi

Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications

MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 404

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource

management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational

setting

UNIT-I

Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with

special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in

strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management

UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge

workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)

Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)

UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of

human resource department and the role of human resource manager

UNITndashIV

Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification

rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation

UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection

(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction

COURSE OUTCOME

To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training

Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical

Behaviour

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi

Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New

Delhi

Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York

HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications

A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications

MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the

important indicators of the economy and their significance

UNIT I

Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of

Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income

Personal and Personal disposable income

UNIT II

Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income

Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and

Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator

Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate

demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy

UNIT III

Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate

demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government

expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary

and fiscal policy

UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary

policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production

Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation

monetary measures fiscal measures

UNIT V

Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and

corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in

open economy

COURSE OUTCOME

To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the

role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson

2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill

3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers

4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson

SEMESTER V

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment

Internal Assessment Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-501

Ability Enhancement

Public Relation amp Corporate Image

50

25

8

10

4

15

6

2

-

-

2

1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and

small Business

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-503

Core Course Principle of

Economics

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-502

Practical Entrepreneurship and

small Business

50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics

50

25 08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Skill Course

Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill Enhancement

Elective Course-III

50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2

Grand Total

600

24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication

1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management

1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India

1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation

1Y3BBA509 Organization Development

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision

1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management

1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA513 Database Management System

1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service

1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy

1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management

1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management

1Y3BBA520 Stores Management

1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA522 Technology Management

1Y3BBA523 Productivity

1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept

1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management

1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System

1Y3BBA529 Health Economics

1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management

(Rural Management Group )

1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity

1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment

1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management

SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES

Non-Technical

Elective No Department Faculty Name

Faculty of Information Technology

I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)

II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)

IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)

V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Management

I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)

II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)

III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development

Faculty of Commerce

I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)

II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Humanities

I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)

II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)

III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Science

I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)

II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)

III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)

IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)

V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Education

I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)

II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)

PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA501

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts

of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling

and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization

UNIT- I

Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash

Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy

Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors

ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public

Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations

UNIT- II

Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service

Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social

Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy

for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation

Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event

Management

UNIT- III

Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash

Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public

Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of

Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control

UNIT IV

Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies

Components of an Individual Image

Advertising and Corporate Image

Public Relations of an Institutions

UNIT V

The Grapevine and Rumours

Stereotype

Propaganda

Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations

applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different

entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling

REFERENCE BOOKS

Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House

Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House

Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University

Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill

This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning

ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-

The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding

processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to

those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic

environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide

evidence which informs those debates

UNIT I

Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of

Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its

environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship

UNIT II

Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship

development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the

Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making

UNIT III

Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that

enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in

Social context Start Up

UNIT IV

Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional

source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital

UNIT V

Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication

2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd

3 Vasant Desai

4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH

PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 503

COURSE OBJECTIVES-

To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production

UNIT- I

Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits

UNIT-II

Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus

movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts

of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications

of demand and supply price rationing price floors

Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price

elasticity cross and income elasticity

UNIT-III

Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility

Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp

Producer surplus

UNIT-IV

Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant

and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue

and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale

UNIT-V

Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of

the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run

equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment

concept

COURSE OUTCOME-

To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011

bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th

edition

2007

bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA

bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press

Oxford

bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore

MARKETING GROUP

INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so

that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to

enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications

UNIT-I

Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC

in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising

appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion

relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship

between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods

Interactive Internet Marketing

UNIT-II

Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach

establishing and allocating promotional budget

UNIT-III

IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different

forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning

creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design

considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client

Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork

UNIT-IV

Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering

key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and

media research

Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration

client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc

UNIT-V

Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing

Communications

COURSE OUTCOME-

To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches

and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to

communicating to target audiences

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc

Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard

D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois

Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing

House

Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and

Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication

Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH

Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing

Communications Pearson Education Limited

Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc

Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House

Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning

Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc

Homewood Illinois

Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic

Approach Cengage Learning

Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India

Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education

SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT

Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE

It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and

distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and

distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners

UNIT-I

Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies

Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling

objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring

Procedure Socialization

UNIT-II

Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program

Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation

Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial

Evaluation of Contest

UNIT-III

Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel

Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales

Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process

UNIT-IV

Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key

tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market

Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation

UNIT-V

Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners

Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict

Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International

Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales

COURSE OUTCOME

Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the

sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans

participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables

REFERENCE BOOKS

Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres

Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books

Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI

L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills

Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets

Greenwood Publishing Group

Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub

ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH

Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing

consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing

research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students

within a course project

UNIT-I

Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing

Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research

Process Marketing Research Designs

UNIT-II

The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques

Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of

Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic

Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical

Analysis Tools

UNIT-III

Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)

ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor

Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental

Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores

Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-

hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number

UNIT-IV

Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product

Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant

Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification

Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing

Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and

their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity

UNIT-V

Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning

in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report

and class presentation of the same

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from

analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor

analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis

REFERENCE BOOKS

Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi

William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi

Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi

Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill

Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research

Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey

Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning

Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp

Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced

in the class

HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP

LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA

Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of

Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity

objectivity and understandings

UNIT-I

The Factories Act 1948

The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923

The Employees State Insurance Act 1948

UNIT-II

The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952

The Payment of gratuity Act 1972

UNIT-III

The Maternity Benefit Act 1961

The Minimum Wages act 1948

UNIT-IV

The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946

The Payment of Bonus Act 1965

UNIT-V

The Apprentices Act 1969

The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959

COURSE OUTCOME ndash

To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour

Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the

organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to

follow the Laws applicable to the establishment

REFERENCE BOOKS

S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications

S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi

Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot

V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House

N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons

INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE

In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our

country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of

Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be

acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the

concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India

UNIT-I

Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors

affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial

relation programme

Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact

of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes

lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry

UNIT-II

Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal

Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective

bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective

collective bargaining collective bargaining in India

UNIT-III

Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education

scheme in India- objectives functions and problems

Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation

schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India

UNIT-IV

Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India

major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions

registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union

UNIT-V

Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery

Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation

submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court

industrial tribunals

Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power

of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute

COURSE OUTCOME

Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective

bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute

resolution

REFERENCE BOOKS

Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts

IIPM Personnel Management in India

Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business

Publication Ltd

Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India

Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India

Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication

Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co

Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law

ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational

culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the

human values in individuals

UNIT-I

Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational

Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development

Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining

and survey research amp feedback methodology

UNIT-II

Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in

organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief

systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development

UNIT-III

Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component

interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief

of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action

UNIT-IV

OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team

building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process

interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions

important for successful OD efforts

UNIT ndash V

HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational

implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional

Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have

improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi

Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York

McGrawhill

Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in

addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a

good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company

UNIT-I

Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm

Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-

Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of

Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering

UNIT-II

Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the

analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount

of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a

Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and

Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis

UNIT-III

Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues

and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements

medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings

Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project

finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing

UNIT-IV

Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of

financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing

Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect

cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization

UNIT-V

Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value

Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic

indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added

Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total

Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)

COURSE OUTCOME

Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and

corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts

REFERENCE BOOKS

Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill

Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial

environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a

multinational corporation

UNIT-I

Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation

functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial

management International monetary system

UNIT-II

Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories

ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible

exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer

Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options

Currency swaps and interest rate swaps

UNIT-III

Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction

transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction

exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The

national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International

capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)

UNIT-IV

International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic

considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)

Financial risk and cost of capital

Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of

capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-

20 subsidiaries and tax havens

UNIT-V

International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their

comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets

Recent developments in the Euro bond market

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations

and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley

PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall

Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall

Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis

Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co

Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall

Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers

Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath

FINANCIAL INCLUSION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion

such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss

the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to

promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models

UNIT-I

Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting

Access to Financial Services

Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive

Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators

UNIT-II

Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey

Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional

Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card

UNIT-III

Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India

Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations

Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor

UNIT-IV

SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of

microfinance evolved in India

Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial

Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for

Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for

Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People

UNIT-V

Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises

Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion

and Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account

initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage

Publication

Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House

Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech

Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications

Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications

Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing

Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI

Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI

Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag

Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion

Academic Foundation

IT GROUP

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to

manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the

hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment

UNIT-I

The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures

File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base

Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial

Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness

UNIT-II

Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface

with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database

Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design

UNIT-III

Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database

Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database

Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases

UNIT-IV

DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance

Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues

UNIT-V

Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the

field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective

faculty during the coverage of syllabus

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic

concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational

algebra and SQL

REFERENCE BOOKS

Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs

Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan

Press

McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co

MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It

aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing

implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services

UNIT-I

The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development

Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The

Enabling Environment for ITES

UNIT-II

Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled

Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of

Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services

UNIT-III

Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support

Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions

UNIT-IV

International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting

Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in

facilitating Trade in ITESTITES

UNIT-V

Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of

Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of

Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace

Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations

and integrate the learning in handling these complexities

REFERENCE BOOKS

Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat

E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing

SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information

technology with various aspects of Software Project Management

UNIT-I

Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision

and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM

Framework

UNIT-II

Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning

Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan

Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration

and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning

UNIT-III

Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an

Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques

Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule

Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools

UNIT-IV

Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance

Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior

Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review

UNIT-V

Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks

Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk

COURSE OUTCOME

Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business

context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business

scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson

Education Ltd

P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp

Tsinghua University Press

R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance

Management Concepts Pub

Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group

B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science

Press

A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications

G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on

understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business

UNIT I

Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm

production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country

UNIT II

Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms

and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business

sector

UNIT III

Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations

relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries

UNIT IV

Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment

and policy

UNIT V

Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies

COURSE OUTCOME

Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper

and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain

REFERENCE BOOKS

Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons

Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ

Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ

AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 517

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies

strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms

UNIT I

Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market

structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp

significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of

marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour

UNIT II

Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash

significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product

product life cycle

UNIT III

Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies

and pricing methods

UNIT IV

Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and

standardization

UNIT V

Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural

products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in

agribusiness

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better

understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for

agricultural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH

Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall

Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control

Pearson Edu

Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu

Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India

FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 518

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food

marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen

and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural

political and economic forces over time

UNIT I

Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade

Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of

Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic

factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer

UNIT II

Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling

food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing

in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions

across the chain in food retail food service marketing

UNIT III

4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing

Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system

Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement

Strategies for food retailers

UNIT IV

Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling

Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food

Products

UNIT V

Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training

Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in

retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze

Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing

REFERENCE BOOKS

Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of

India

Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu

Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill

RETAIL GROUP

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in

the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it

UNIT- I

Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management

Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain

networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain

Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network

UNIT- II

Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer

service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs

multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier

Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants

UNIT- III

Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory

models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system

UNIT- IV

COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip

Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION

TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain

Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management

UNIT- V

Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a

Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance

measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics

quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics

COURSE OUTCOME

After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain

which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House

bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers

bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg

bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi

bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan

STORES MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 520

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different

terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned

areas

UNIT- I

Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the

location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design

UNIT- II

Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual

Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors

UNIT- III

Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at

Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores

Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments

UNIT- IV

Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies

Quick Response System

UNIT- V

Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact

on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space

Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization

COURSE OUTCOME

The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern

and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management

bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing

bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach

bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing

bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing

RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 521

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail

Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail

business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management

UNIT I

Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail

equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail

market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-

Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India

UNIT II

Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development

The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and

Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-

Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on

ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response

marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks

The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management

UNIT III

Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM

Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch

points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services

Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM

Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding

Common Barriers

UNIT IV

Services Management

Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the

service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-

Supply relationships vehicle routing

UNIT V

Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising

Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping

the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand

management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-

2nd edition 2006

MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational

edititionUS1798

Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education

New Delhi 2003

JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy

Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi

Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy

Pearson Education New Delhi 2004

KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005

Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007

Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House

Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution

rosenbloom and Education Foundation US

PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 522

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

UNIT- I

Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology

Change Implication

UNIT- II

Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying

UNIT- III

Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology

Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management

UNIT- IV

Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology

Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages

UNIT- V

Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise

Level

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to

manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009

bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009

bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson

PRODUCTIVITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 523

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

UNIT- I

Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and

external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work

Contents and Ineffective Time

UNIT- II

Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram

String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart

UNIT- III

Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart

UNIT- IV

Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be

Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement

UNIT- V

Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International

Labour Office Geneva

bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed

bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill

bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India

QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO

Course Code 1Y3BBA 524

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify

the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and

measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current

issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans

UNIT- I

Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives

UNIT- II

Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect

concept

UNIT- III

Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality

UNIT- IV

Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various

control Charts

UNIT- V

Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification

COURSE OUTCOME-

Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to

explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key

aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for

controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp

communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze

the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise

and evaluate quality implementation plans

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay

bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd

bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas

bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd

bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition

7th

Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012

bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM CONCEPTS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 525

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism

To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash

Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp

Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and

development of Tourism through the ages

UNIT II

COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash

Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism

inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious

Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions

incentives sports and adventure tourism

UNIT III

TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash

Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of

motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash

health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and

push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists

UNIT IV

IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash

Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts

- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism

UNIT V

SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-

Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote

Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable

Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and

experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of

tourism experiences

REFERENCES BOOKS

Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling

Publishers Private Limited New Delhi

Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism

Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited

Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill

International

Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors

New Delhi

Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas

Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New

Delhi

TOURISM MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 526

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the basic concept and various components of management

UNIT I

MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-

Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of

management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)

Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management

UNIT II

PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-

Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of

planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by

objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance

and limitation of decision making

UNIT III

ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash

Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of

staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance

appraisal

UNIT IV

DIRECTING ndash

Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation

(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy

theory)

UNIT V

LEADERSHIP-

Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path

Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to

communication

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives

Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of

tourism as well as the impacts of tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc

Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New

Delhi

Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition

AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing

House New Delhi

Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition

Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations

To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism

industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-

Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing

Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and

Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash

Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New

Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING -

Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION -

Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity

Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in

promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level

which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described

REFERENCES BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson

Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition

Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent

learning

UNIT I

Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health

Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural

History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention

UNIT II

Definition and meaning of hospital ndash

Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing

concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of

Hospitals

UNIT III

Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector

Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in

delivering healthcare in India

UNIT IV

Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural

hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description

UNIT V

The reforms of Healthcare System-

The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare

reforms amp Future of Healthcare System

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding

the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the

management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and

organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services

REFERENCE BOOKS

The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991

Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd

Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers

HEALTH ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 529

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and

understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict

peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different

social actions

UNIT I

Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and

importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below

Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits

UNIT II

Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve

techniques and properties of indifference curve

UNIT III

Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash

Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of

Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of

Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of

demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash

Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue

UNIT IV

Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two

variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves

UNIT V

Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash

Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and

monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market

situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price

determination

COURSE OUTCOME

To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from

an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic

evaluation of a health intervention or program

REFERENCE BOOKS

Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR

Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP

Managerial Economics - Gupta GS

Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani

Business Economics - Sharma NK

Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar

Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi

Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL

HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 530

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions

related to records management in the healthcare environment

UNIT I

Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record

keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records

UNIT II

Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health

Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research

UNIT III

Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics

investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing

Pharmacy etc Audits)

UNIT IV

Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems

associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic

Related Groups (DRG)

UNIT V

Medical Registers ndash

Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various

departments amp common problems faced

COURSE OUTCOME

Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New

Delhi 1999

Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995

Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi

George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003

Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 531

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India

To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India

UNIT I

Rural Society in India

Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-

urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and

subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural

life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion

UNIT II

Rural Society

Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social

institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity

and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of

rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT-III

Village India

Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance

contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and

political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology

Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class

UNIT IV

Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics

Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid

growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope

and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -

Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT-V

Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times

Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social

processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India

Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy

Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms

REFERENCE BOOKS

Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi

Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay

PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House

SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication

House Delhi

ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 532

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To explain the nature of environmental studies

To introduce aspects of Natural resources

To introduce aspects of ecosystems

To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation

To introduce aspects of environmental pollution

To create awareness on social issues and environment

To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

UNIT I

Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for

public awareness

UNIT II

Ecosystems

Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and

decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and

Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the

following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic

Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)

UNIT III

Biodiversity and its Conservation

Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification

of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option

Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports

of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-

Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ

Conservation of biodiversity

UNIT IV

Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil

pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste

Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an

individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods

earthquake cyclone and landslides

20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT V

Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water

Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of

People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible

responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and

holocaust

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the nature of environmental studies

Classify renewable and non-renewable resources

Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues

Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation

Analyze aspects of environmental pollution

Describe aspects of social issues and environment

Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner

Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental

Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai

Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA

RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 533

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts

To familiarize Rural marketing strategy

To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems

To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing

To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages

UNIT I

Overview of Rural Marketing

Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing

and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction

Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class

UNIT II

Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for

rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT III

Rural Distribution Systems

Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche

markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of

Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT IV

ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network

(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction

Methodology Group Project work

UNIT V

Market support

Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role

play

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Market their products

Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products

Choose an appropriate distribution system

Apply ICT in rural marketing

Source the finance for rural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India

Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education

Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi

SEMESTER- VI

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allot

ted

Cred

its

Course

Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mark

s

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-601

Core

Course

E- Commerce

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-602 Core

Course

Customer

Relationship Management

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-603 Practical

Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva

Voce

100

50

17

-

-

50

20

- - 4 4

1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Grand Total

550

22

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one

paper presentation certificate in related discipline

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management

1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing

1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA607 Management of Change

1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management

1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management

1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service

1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business

1Y3BBA614 E- Governance

1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management

1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing

1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour

1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning

1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design

1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control

1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan

1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing

1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management

1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care

1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law

(Rural Management Group)

1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System

1Y3BBA632

Panchayati Raj

1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy

E- COMMERCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 601

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is

designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the

technical foundation for understanding information systems

UNIT I

Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting

online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a

business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-

commerce

UNIT II

Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet

(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A

systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing

vs in-house development of a website)

UNIT III

Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension

definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security

intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)

technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and

protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)

UNIT IV

E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards

e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online

banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house

automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments

UNIT V

Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting

online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of

utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online

services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and

entertainment

COURSE OUTCOME-

Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information

systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Management Information System Jawadekar

bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon

bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana

bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)

bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty

CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 602

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of

Customer Relationship Management in the organizations

UNIT- I

Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature

of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive

and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and

evaluating customer business plans

UNIT- II

Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer

database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing

customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively

Planning and making persuasive presentations

UNIT- III

Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality

Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality

managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and

Cross- sell

UNIT- IV

Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations

Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority

setting Target setting setting standards

UNIT- V

Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction

COURSE OUTCOME-

To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship

Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd

Ed Response Books Sage Publication

Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House

Pvt Ltd

Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books

Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management

V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008

Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management

South Western Cengage Learning

Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press

Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age

International

Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan

Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of

India Private Limted New Delhi 2011

S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private

Limted New Delhi 2008

ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 603

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to

work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn

the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final

semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by

the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a

student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their

analytical capabilities and experience

DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)

Title of the study (Cover Page)

Declaration

Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)

Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)

Acknowledgement

Table of Contents

Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Introduction

12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research

12 Significance of the study

13 Scope of the study

14 Research Problem

15 Objective of the study

17 Hypothesis

18 Limitations of the study

2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students

to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they

learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After

the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is

evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report

should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to

provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also

able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business

operations and come up with the ways to tap the

Opportunities

3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

31 Introduction

32 Population of the study

33 Sampling Design

331 Sampling Technique

332 Sampling Method

333 Sample Size

34 Research Instrument

35 Sources of data

351 Primary Data

352 Secondary Data

4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION

5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION

Bibliography

COURSE OUTCOME-

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able

to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and

come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities

MARKETING GROUP

PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 604

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the

context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product

manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions

UNIT- I

Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused

organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management

Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-

cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product

Development

UNIT- II

Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods

of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in

international Market

UNIT- III

Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity

concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand

Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image

UNIT- IV

Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system

measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement

Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market

segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining

and establishing brand values

UNIT- V

Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand

extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time

Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand

Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation

COURSE OUTCOME

The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of

Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for

Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning

implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer

Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi

Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi

Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi

Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education

New Delhi

Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi

Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata

McGraw Hill New Delhi

Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi

STRATEGIC MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 605

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and

implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and

managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver

superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation

through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills

UNIT- I

Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash

Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of

Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying

Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting

Marketing Objectives

UNIT-II

Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching

Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy

Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle

Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies

UNIT-III

Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp

Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models

UNIT- IV

Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives

Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy

Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing

UNIT- V

Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at

different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by

executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and

interdisciplinary nature

REFERENCE BOOKS

Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt

D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin

OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage

Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill

Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp

Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson

Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann

Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India

George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press

J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and

Programs McGraw-Hill Companies

Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub

Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon

P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave

E-MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 606

COURSE OBJECTIVE

It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance

enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns

UNIT- I

Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics

Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan

Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing

UNIT- II

Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in

India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within

communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing

UNIT- III

Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet

as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet

User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-

branding

UNIT- IV

Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-

marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools

Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent

Trends in e-customer service

UNIT- V

Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web

Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing

campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising

Course Outcome

Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics

online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its

implication on marketing strategy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a

networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill

Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall

Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning

Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books

Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial

Times

HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP

MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 607

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be

Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students

Understand the importance of managing change

UNIT- I

Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-

Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of

human resource strategies in implementing Change

UNIT-II

Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR

implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation

and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions

UNIT-III

HR Processes amp Change

Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned

change

Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change

UNIT- IV

Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in

employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management

of change implications of downsizing

UNIT- V

Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to

promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and

feedback

Course Outcome

Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more

effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change

process

REFERENCE BOOKS

A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human

Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education

Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill

Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage

South Asia Edition

K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation

Response Books

VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books

CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 608

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical

relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand

anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions

to ensure the organizational and individual success

UNIT-I

Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of

organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business

environment

UNIT-II

Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars

Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations

UNIT- III

Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock

Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system

(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)

UNIT- IV

Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and

repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally

appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural

negotiation and conflicts management

UNIT- V

Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual

countries Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development

of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning

Private Limited

G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill

Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley

Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing

Co

Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell

Business

Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times

McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp

Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation

Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson

Education India

GROUP DYNAMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 609

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group

dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group

effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of

resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding

UNIT-I

Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group

dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B

UNIT-II

Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group

Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash

Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress

UNIT-III

Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group

decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash

conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict

UNIT- IV

Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De

individuation theory

UNIT- V

Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources

of Change in groups

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups

REFERENCE BOOKS

Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley

Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass

Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co

Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE

Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and

application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax

along with basic concepts of VAT

UNIT-I

Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of

Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment

of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-II

Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature

and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax

planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business

UNIT-III

Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net

Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and

Penalties (Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-IV

Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for

service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of

Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)

UNIT- V

VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview

of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT

Law)

COURSE OUTCOME

Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields

REFERENCE BOOKS

Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications

Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub

Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House

T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India

BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson

S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann

R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _

INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 611

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important

components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO

Analysis etc

UNIT-I

INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian

Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role

in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)

UNIT-II

FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different

Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players

Different types of Instruments

UNIT-III

CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI

Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank

UNIT- IV

COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp

Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A

REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA

UNIT- V

NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies

Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture

Capital Funds

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment

Banking companies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication

Financial Services MY Khan TMH

Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication

S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran

ML Seth

FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 612

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and

prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of

uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding

of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role

of internal audit assessments

UNIT I

Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview

UNIT II

Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax

fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and

inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds

UNIT III

Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion

investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports

UNIT IV

Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using

Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)

UNIT V Case Study

1 Two Indian

2 Two international cases

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread

nature of fraud and its economic impact

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation

Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination

Cengage Learning

IT GROUP

INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 613

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security

managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues

in the information assurance field

UNIT I

Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian

Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its

application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law

Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour

Laws E-Media and Print Media

UNIT II

E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security

Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature

UNIT III

Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil

Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-

detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of

Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA

UNIT IV

IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal

issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base

UNIT V

Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of

Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules

COURSE OUTCOME-

Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House

Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co

John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River

Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher

Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University

E-GOVERNANCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 614

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information

Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an

awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the

issues concerning the Cyber security

UNIT I

Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National

E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status

UNIT II

E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process

Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges

UNIT III

E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-

Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics

UNIT IV

Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic

data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber

audit implications for e-governance

Unit V

Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and

construction of a joining table

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill

Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing

Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in

India ICFAI Press Hyderabad

B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill

H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications

V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd

IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 615

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization

UNIT I

IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT

Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo

Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for

IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library

UNIT II

Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service

Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support

Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change

Management Release Management

UNIT III

Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve

Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine

Recovery Data Retention

UNIT IV

Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security

Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection

UNIT V

IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and

Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and

Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of

Internet on Technical Support

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology

REFERENCE BOOKS

Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce

(OGC) TSO UK

Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos

Management Tata McGraw Hill

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 616

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques

and their management

UNIT I

Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations

of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and

distribution

UNIT II

Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and

factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging

of foods

UNIT III

Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food

industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO

etc

UNIT IV

Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products

cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking

confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of

fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH

Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie

Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing

Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH

MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 617

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing

concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs

UNIT I

Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution

channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-

farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing

UNIT II

Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds

Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of

NSC and State Seed Corporation

UNIT III

Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers

Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash

marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer

marketing

UNIT IV

Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash

marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of

electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity

UNIT V

Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm

machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines

implementsEquipmentlsquos

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with

various functional areas of agribusiness

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp

IBH

Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management

Kalyani

Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ

House

FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 618

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis

of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions

UNIT I

Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management

decisions farm management problems

UNIT II

Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle

principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc

UNIT III

Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm

records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement

farm efficiency measures

UNIT IV

Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc

UNIT V

Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to

counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks

and uncertainty

COURSE OUTCOME

Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses

REFERENCE BOOKS

Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall

Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ

Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ

Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ

RETAIL GROUP

BUYER BEHAVIOUR

Course Code 1Y3BBA 619

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer

decisions making

UNIT-I

A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic

Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market

Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making

UNIT-II

Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles

of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer

Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and

Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product

Relationship

UNIT-III

Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to

information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-

Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors

Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications

UNIT-IV

Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing

Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-

Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions

Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy

UNIT-V

Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics

lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they

experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and

impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour

COURSE OUTCOME

Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the

choices consumers make

REFERENCE BOOKS

JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata

Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006

Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context

Excel Books NewDelhi-2001

Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous

DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing

Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi

Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining

Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005

Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000

RETAIL PLANNING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 620

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational

decision-making processes in the organized retail

UNIT I

Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail

Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-

Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative

methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management

UNIT II

Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics

Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp

non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion

designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting

Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-

Management of Obsolete goods

UNIT III

Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer

psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical

Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices

UNIT IV

Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-

Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp

Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective

Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer

Rights- Consumer Protection Acts

UNIT V

Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing

Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-

Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels

REFERENCE BOOKS

Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies

Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies

Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson

Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund

amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson

Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice

Hall of India New Delhi

Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies

Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best

People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd

RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 621

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the

value it creates

UNIT I

Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When

How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience

Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency

UNIT II

Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated

Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-

Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-

UNIT III

Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on

Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-

Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display

Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-

UNIT IV

Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium

Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and

Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-

Trade Dealing

UNIT V

Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-

Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating

Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing

to act in ways that increase loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -

Prentice-Hall

Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology

Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales

Promotion Techniques

Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate

Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page

Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books

George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing

Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill

PRODUCTION GROUP

PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL

Course Code 1Y3BBA 622

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a

basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of

facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality

control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an

understanding of the concept of aggregate planning

UNIT- I

Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors

Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-

requisites of PPC

UNIT- II

Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in

Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining

Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control

Models)

UNIT- III

Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection

Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master

production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of

software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II

UNIT- IV

Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n

job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling

Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)

UNIT- V

Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control

function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications

bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi

Deep and Deep Publications

PROCESS REENGINEERING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 623

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of

business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering

projects

UNIT- I

Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp

pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR

UNIT- II

Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering

project organizing for process reengineering

UNIT- III

Process analysis and design

a) Process analysis

(b) Process design

UNIT- IV

Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition

tracking and measuring process performance

UNIT- V

Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology

Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact

measurement

COURSE OUTCOME

To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the

considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-

engineering project

REFERENCE BOOKS

Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata

McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater

Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester

John Wiley amp Sons

WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn

the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time

standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering

to design of work systems

UNIT- I

Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos

productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity

Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time

Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities

Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was

developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph

UNIT- II

Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting

up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion

Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand

Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and

Design of Tools amp Equipment

UNIT- III

Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard

from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and

Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work

Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling

UNIT- IV

Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage

Incentive Plans

The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for

Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action

UNIT-V

Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion

Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System

Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts

Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional

including understanding the need for quality

REFERENCE BOOKS

iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill

ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation

Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp

Sons

Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall

Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall

Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press

Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall

Mall East and London

Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN

Course Code 1Y3BBA 625

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in

it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative

impacts of tourism development

UNIT I

Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism

Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of

Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in

Tourism Development

UNIT II

Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning

system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos

Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-

Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in

learning system

UNIT III

Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable

development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist

Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash

The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash

Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities

UNIT IV

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage

of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment

UNIT IV

Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the

Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National

Policy on Ecology and Environment

COURSE OUTCOME

To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global

perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international

tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for

sustainable tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash

Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications

Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers

Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William

Heinemann Ltd

Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices

London Pitman Publishing

Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York

Kendall Hunt Publishing Company

Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan

Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman

Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford

University Press

New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable

Development Approach VNR and New York

TOURISM MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 626

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism

and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing

that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products

before the stakeholders of tourism industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing

Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and

Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market

Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing

Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for

different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing

Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales

promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital

communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future

It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are

needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be

a part of this growth

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar

Thomson Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd

edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of

Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry

UNIT I

HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of

Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads

ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and

marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents

UNIT II

RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief

History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway

Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway

station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains

express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world

heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes

UNIT III

AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth

Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled

Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature

Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players

Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and

performance marketing strategies of Air India

UNIT IV

WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover

crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going

traffic) ndash National waterways

UNIT V

CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing

stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and

Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation

COURSE OUTCOME

Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of

the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management

REFERENCE BOOKS

RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 628

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of

its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing

knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital

Management

UNIT I

Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its

impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need

principles purpose

UNIT II

Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and

their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply

department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health

and patient safety

UNIT III

Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of

biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules

standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging

transportation amp storage

UNIT IV

Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier

methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal

decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of

wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan

UNIT V

Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party

insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash

meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural

disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague

typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics

COURSE OUTCOME

To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost

containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges

arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs

and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its

various components

REFERENCE BOOKS

Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication

First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn

Park k - Preventive and social medicine

Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot

MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 629

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted

advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public

relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any

potential crisis that may arise

UNIT I

Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches

to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of

marketing functions of marketing

UNIT II

Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment

Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market

segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash

positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing

UNIT III

Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior

(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying

decision process

UNIT IV

Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp

deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product

development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling

UNIT V

Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing

policies and strategies

Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management

decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels

COURSE OUTCOME

Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an

integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare

professionals and the public

REFERENCE BOOKS

Philip Kotler - marketing management

Wiliam jStanton - marketing management

Sherleker S A - marketing management

J C Gandhi - marketing management

Davar - modern marketing management

Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub

P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research

Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research

HOSPITALS RELATED LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 630

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of

common-law development

UNIT ndash I

Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties

sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance

act trust act societies registration act

UNIT ndashII

Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of

human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act

1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971

mental health act patient consent

UNIT ndash III

Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948

narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods

act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration

UNIT ndash IV

Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act

1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916

maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing

order) act trade union act industrial disputes act

UNIT ndashV

Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in

hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical

negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical

establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal

pronouncements rulings and regulations

REFERENCE BOOKS

Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer

Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law

Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 631

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India

To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural

Production system in India

To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India

To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development

UNIT -1

Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions

ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology

Case analysis and discussion

UNIT II

Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash

Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture

UNIT III

Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-

Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India

UNIT IV

Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of

holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus

land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas

UNIT V

Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash

Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and

schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM

COURSE OUTCOMES

Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management

Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India

Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development

REFERENCE BOOKS

Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution

Can We Make London Department for International Development

Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House

PANCHAYATI RAJ

Course Code 1Y3BBA632

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration

To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites

To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance

To provide insights on Rural Administration

To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes

UNIT I

Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction

Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges

Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration

(Official and non-official) and report submission

UNIT III

Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission

UNIT IV

Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and

Block- Panchayat relationship

Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play

UNIT V

Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government

Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan

Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

COURSE OUTCOMES

Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village

Development interventions

Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its

power Structure

Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and

Plans

Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes

32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959

Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise

Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi

Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New

Delhi

RURAL ECONOMY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 633

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy

To help students understand their role in rural economic development

To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources

To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation

To create awareness on rural economic development

UNIT I

Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-

Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries

(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in

agriculture individual production other production services

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-

Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash

Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land

Reforms

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

UNIT III

Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation

programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs

UNIT IV

Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work

UNIT V

Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing

ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for

the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy

Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village

Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues

Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation

Facilities

Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi

Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi

Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic

Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New

Delhi

INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER

Mid Semester Examination (MSE)

There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5

descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered

End Semester Examination (ESE)

There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks

each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of

10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered

Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations

The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment

Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be

applicable

(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )

Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type

End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size

Page 3: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020

BBA PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES AND OUTCOMES

BBA PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES-

Develop viable alternatives and make effective decisions relating to business ethics and social responsibility

Identify and analyze relevant global factors that influence decision-making

To apply appropriate techniques resources and multimedia tools for enhancement of skills

Apply knowledge based skill to assess and solve social-cultural and legal issues

Understand the impact of the professional management literary and soft skills in societal and

environmental contexts

To adopt and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities

To achieve appropriate communication skills and higher levels of proficiency for

Successful career in Industry Business and Entrepreneurship

BBA PROGRAMME OUTCOMES-

Towards the end of the program students will be able to

Provide students with a broad range of managerial capabilities the capacity for critical

thinking communication and problem‐solving skills legal and ethical behavior

Prepare graduates for diverse careers in global management administration and

entrepreneurship through a well‐rounded business education with a focus on global business

operations emerging markets and technology‐enabled organizations

Analyze socio-political-economic environment of business organizations

Communicate effectively in different contexts

Develop functional and general management skills

Build and Demonstrate leadership teamwork and social skills

Evaluate different business problems using analytical creative and integrative abilities

SEMESTER I

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Ist SEMESTER

Course Details

External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allot

ted

Cred

its

Course Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor

Sessional

L

T

P

Subj

ect

wise

Distr

ibuti

on

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Ma

x

Mar

ks

Min

Mark

s

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mark

s

Theory Group

1Y3BBA101

Ability Enhanc

ement

Compul

sory

Course

MIL Hindi Communication

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA102

Core Course

Organization Behavior 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA103 Core

Course

Introduction to

Business Accountancy

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA104 Core Course

Business Environment

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA105 Core

Course

Principles of

Management 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA102

Organization

Behavior 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

1Y3BBA104 Business

Environment 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Grand

Total 600 20 5 - 24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

MIL HINDI COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 101

fgUnh Okdjk oa laizskk

इकाई-I

हहनदीवयाकरण और रचना सजञा सरवनाम हरशष ाण हिया अवयय कारक रचन सहधउपसगव परतयय

तथासमास

ह गहनणवय पयावयराची शबद हर ोम शबद अन क शबदो क ह ए एक शबद

शबद शदधि राकय शदधि महारर और ोकोदधिया पललरन एर सकष पण

इकाई-II

हनबध क ातथासमसामहयक एरराषटर ीय हरषया परहनबधा खन

इकाई-III

सपर षण (सचार)

-सपर षण की अरधारणऔरमहतव सपरष ाण क ह ए आरशयक शत सपरष ाण क परकार

सपर षणकामाधयम सपर षणक ा सपर षण की तकनीक राचनक ा समाचारराचन साकषातकारक ा

रचनातमक खनका कषय रचनातमक ख ानकाआधार भारऔरहरचारोकीपरसतहत राक क ा की

उपयोहगता

अनशसितपसतक -

रहतवयाकरणभासकर डा 0 रचनद रकमार

रहतहनबधाभासकर डा 0 रचनदर कमार

आधहनकहहनदीवयाकरणऔररचना डा 0 रासद रननदनपरसाद

रचनामानस परो0 राम शवरनाथहतरारी

वयरहाररकहहनदी डा 0 जग बहादरपाणड य

रचनातमक खन डा 0 रमश ागौतम

राजहसहहनदीहनबध परो0 आर0 एन0 गौड़

सफ हहनदीहनबध रतन शवर

हनबध सहचर डा 0 कषमणपरसाद

उपकारमहारर और ाक ोदधियाा पार 0 राज शवरपरसादचतरव दी

कहाहनयोकहारता की परतापअनम

समपर षणपरकहहनदीभाषाहशकषण डा 0 रशनानारग

श ीहरजञान डा 0 सर शकमार

श ीहरजञानपरहतमानऔरहरशल षण डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo

श ीहरजञानकाइहतहास डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo

ORGANIZATION BEHAVIOUR

Course Code 1Y3BBA102

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Students study the behaviour of individuals and groups as part of the social and technical system in

the workplace They examine individual and group behaviour communication conflict and various

management styles motivational techniques and coordination in the work environment and apply

these concepts to the development of an organizations human resources

UNIT I

Organization Overview of the concept and relevance of organizational Behaviour meaning Nature

Scope features approaches model challenges and opportunities functions amp Role of manager

Planning process Decision making Process

UNIT II

Foundation of individual Behavior Biography ability personality (determinants and models)

perception (definition components factors affecting perception in decision making) Values

Beliefs etc

UNIT III

Individual Behavior- Attitude Definition importance Types Attitude regarding- Job

Satisfaction Involvement commitment effects of employee attitude changing attitudes

Learning Definition nature theories classical conditioning operant conditioning cognitive

Learning Social learning

UNIT IV

Motivation Concept and theories (Maslow McGregor Herzberg ERG) merits amp demerits Group

dynamics amp Team work Nature theories types of group Definition Stages of Group Development

effectiveness potential problems Analysis of Interpersonal Relationship Transactional Analysis

Johari Window

UNIT- V

Organizational change and development approaches and methods stress nature source effects

conflicts employee counseling approaches extra mural penitential learning programmers case

study

COURSE OUTCOME

To explain group dynamics and demonstrate skills required for working in groups (team building)

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Luthans Fred Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India

bull Mishra MN Behaviour Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi

bull Newstrom W John Davis Keith Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India

bull LM Roy Organisational Behaviour S Chand Publication

bull Dr FC Sharma Organisational Behaviour SBPD Publications

INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ACCOUNTING

Course Code 1Y3BBA103

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable students to synthesize related information and evaluate options for most logical and

optimal solution such that they would be able to predict and control cost incurrence and improve

results

UNIT- I

Accounting Basic of Accounting Accounting Mechanics-Double Entry System Classification

Rules for Debit amp Credit Journal Ledger and Trial Balance sub-division of journal Ledger meaning subdivision and mechanics of Posting balancing ledger accounts

UNIT- II

Cash book and Subsidiary books of Accounting Kinds of Cash Book Purchase day book and sale

day Book Bank reconciliation statement Measurement of income- Adjusting entries- rectification of

errors- Adjusted trial balance

UNIT-III

Preparation of financial statements- Trading account Profit amp Loss account Balance Sheet (with

Adjustments) Accounting for Non-profit organization Accounting Procedures Receipts amp payment

accounts income ampexpenditure account problems

UNIT- IV

Depreciation- Meaning Determinant factors Method amp Significance Basic Concepts of hire

purchase amp installments

UNIT- V

Partnership-Preliminary admission of a partner Company Accounts-Issue of shares Debentures

Forfeitures and reissue of shares

COURSE OUTCOME

Analyse the complexities associated with management of cost of product and services in the

Organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

SA Siddiqui- Comprehensive Accounting

TS Greval- Introduction to Accounting

Mukherjee and M Accounting (Volume-I)

SN Maheshwar- Introduction to Accounting (Vikas Publication)

CAC Rama Gopal Accounting For Managers (New Age)

BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational

and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business

UNIT I

Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro

environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis

for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business

UNIT II

Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic

systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years

plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent

economic initiatives NitiAyog

UNIT III

Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment

problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance

of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural

Development Problems of Growth

UNIT IV

Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment

Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA

and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act

UNIT V

International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational

Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic

Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-

GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India

COURSE OUTCOME

Outline how an entity operates in a business environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996

Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi

Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan

Chand Delhi

Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi

PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA105

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to

articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate

effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the

consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and

quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods

UNIT-I

Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of

Management Functions of the Manager

UNIT- II

Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of

Planning

Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and

type of Policies

Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems

involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques

UNIT- III

Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of

Units and committees

Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship

UNIT- IV

Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training

Directing Nature and purpose and directing

UNIT- V

Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control

process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies

COURSE OUTCOME-

Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques

managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of

managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify

and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own

position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied

audiences

Reference Books

bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher

bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson

Education

bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt

Ltd 4th Ed

bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill

Publications

SEMESTER II

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distributio

n

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor

Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distribu

tion Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Ma

x

Ma

rks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme

nt

Compulsory

Course

English

communication

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA202 Core Course

Management concept amp

Principle

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA203 Core

Course

Environmental

Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA204 Core

Course

Monetary

Economics and

Indian Banking

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA205 Core

Course

Business

Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA205 Business

Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhanceme

nt

Skill Enhancement

Elective

Course-I

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand

Total 600 21 5 - 24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

ENGLISH COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA201

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English

language teaching and content writing sectors

UNIT I

Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning

Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening

UNIT II

Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive

writing expansion of an idea

UNIT III

Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing

(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume

writing covering letter

UNIT IV

Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases

UNIT V

Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb

agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions

(Advanced)

COURSE OUTCOME

To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill

Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul

Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan

Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das

Orient Blackswan

Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press

Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication

MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 202

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and

process of effective controlling in the organization

UNIT I

Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science

Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)

UNIT II

School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and

Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)

Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management

UNIT III

Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing

Staffing Directing and Coordinating

UNIT IV

Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command

Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control

UNIT V

Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure

determination Forms- formal amp informal organization

Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations

COURSE OUTCOME

Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial

functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management

REFERENCE BOOKS

LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management

VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management

James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB

Fred Luthans- OB

ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 203

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links

between human and natural systems

UNIT I

Introduction to environmental studies

Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability

and sustainable development

UNIT II

Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an

ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following

ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds

streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)

Unit III

Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to

mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and

over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international

ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate

energy sources growing energy needs case studies

UNIT IV

Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem

diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots

Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and

Informational value

UNIT V

Environmental Pollution

Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution

Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and

Industrial waste Pollution case studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social

and environmental processes

REFERENCE BOOKS

California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London

Routledge

Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security

Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press

Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of

ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006

Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37

McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books

McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the

Twentieth Century

Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders

Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic

Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt

Ltd

Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons

Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi

1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP

Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation

S Chand Publishing New Delhi

MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING

Course Code 1Y3BBA204

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using

statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills

within the contest of subject matter of economics

UNIT I

Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of

Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value

of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income

theory of Money

UNIT II

Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people

Money Market

UNIT III

Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial

Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks

UNIT IV

Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control

methods and Tools of Monetary Policy

UNIT V

RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative

Banks and Rural Banks

COURSE OUTCOME

Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and

mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of

economics

REFERENCE BOOKS

MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi

LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi

Crowther- An Out Line of Money

Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant

KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ

BUSINESS COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA205

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative

scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication

UNIT I

Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports

OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)

UNIT II

Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other

words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis

UNIT III

Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers

Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers

UNIT IV

Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a

Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication

Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)

UNIT V

Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written

Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp

minutes

COURSE OUTCOME

To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical

proficiency in the development of exposition and argument

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wren amp Martin

K Madhukar- Business Communication

VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication

Asha Laul- Business Communication

Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH

SEMESTER III

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotte

d

Credit

s

Course Code Course

Type

Course

Title

Total

Mark

s

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subjec

t wise

Distrib

ution

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA301

Ability

Enhancement

IT Tool for Business

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA302

Core Course

Introduction to Marketing

Management

100 50 17 20 7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA303 Core

Course

Business

Law

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA304 Core

Course

Business

statistics for

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA305

Core

Course

Retail

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA304 Practical

Business

statistics for Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill

Enhancemen

t Elective Course-II

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand Total 600 24

IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 301

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software

components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data

base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT

UNIT-I

Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and

Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World

Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept

UNIT-II

Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different

computer generation

UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and

Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming

Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-

principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart

examples

UNIT-IV

Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation

applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)

Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information

System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems

Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human

Resources Management Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations

Understand the hardware and software components of the computer

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford

2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication

3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication

4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill

INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 302

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply

these to a new or existing business

UNIT I

Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept

amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro

environment

UNIT II

Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of

Product Line amp Product- mix

UNIT III

Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing

decisions Overview of pricing process

UNIT IV

Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product

Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage

UNIT V

Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to

marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct

selling

COURSE OUTCOME

To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct

an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an

appropriate format

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Philip Kotler

2 TN Chabra

3 TK Panda

4 SH Kazmi

5 Arun Kumar

BUSINESS LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 303

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal

environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with

knowledge of legal principles

UNIT-I

Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration

capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts

Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp

Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency

UNIT-II

Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp

Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales

UNIT-III

Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -

Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a

negotiable instrument

UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of

non-registration Dissolution of a firm

UNIT-V

Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of

Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013

COURSE OBJECTIVE

On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to

individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context

Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 ND Kapoor

2 Tulsian

3 MC Kuchhal

4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business

BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 304

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management

UNIT I

Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance

Scope and Limitation of Statistic

UNIT II

Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar

Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive

UNIT III

Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic

Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures

of dispersion

UNIT IV

Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and

Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index

number CPI WPI IIP

UNIT V

Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank

Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series

COURSE OUTCOME

Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically

discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons

2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication

3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication

RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in

India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone

Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT

FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan

Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process

UNIT II

FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail

Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors

Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing

MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer

Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design

and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication

UNIT III

STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty

Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors

UNIT IV

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management

IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service

Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM

Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying

UNIT V

MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at

Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems

at Retail Centers

Course Outcome-

Reference Books

bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education

bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A

Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education

The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge

about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various

aspects of retail operations

After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with

the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the

entire retail operations

SEMESTER IV

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code Course

Type Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subject

wise

Distributio

n

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mark

s

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-401

Ability

Enhanceme

nt

Introduction to

soft skill amp

Team Building

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA-402 Core Course

Introduction to

financial

management

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-403 Core Course

Advertising

and Sales

Promotion

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-404 Core Course

Management

of Human resource

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of

Business

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group

Term End

Practical

Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-404 Practical

Management

of Human

resource

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-405 Practical

Macro

Economics of Business

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

Grand Total 550 22

INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 401

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate

students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners

by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are

learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for

their own learning

UNIT ndash I

General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of

Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences

Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making

Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of

communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of

Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation

UNIT ndash II

Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing

skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice

modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements

General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral

skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive

Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style

UNIT ndash III

Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format

and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in

Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active

Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD

UNIT ndash IV

Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction

Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview

Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing

Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of

Conversation

UNIT ndash V

Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional

Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers

COURSE OUTCOME

To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills

and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin

bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar

INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 402

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital

decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and

raising long-term finance

UNIT I

Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives

Role of finance manager

UNIT II

Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of

investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return

Comparison between NPV amp IRR

UNIT III

Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of

Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning

capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure

UNIT IV

The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage

Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating

Leverage

UNIT V

Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital

estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of

inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order

Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy

COURSE OUTCOME

Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial

manager in the current competitive business scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 IM Pandey

2 P Chandra

3 SP Gupta

4 MY Khan

ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 403

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may

review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos

homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions

UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising

budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for

Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising

UNIT II

Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy

Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role

types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council

of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)

UNIT III

Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring

awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of

design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet

advertising and evaluation of advertising

UNIT IV

Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors

influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option

Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of

consumer schemes and other methods of promotion

UNIT V

Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs

Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales

personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion

COURSE OUTCOME

Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how

these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its

relation to todaylsquos marketplace

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall

Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi

Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi

Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications

MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 404

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource

management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational

setting

UNIT-I

Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with

special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in

strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management

UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge

workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)

Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)

UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of

human resource department and the role of human resource manager

UNITndashIV

Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification

rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation

UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection

(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction

COURSE OUTCOME

To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training

Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical

Behaviour

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi

Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New

Delhi

Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York

HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications

A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications

MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the

important indicators of the economy and their significance

UNIT I

Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of

Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income

Personal and Personal disposable income

UNIT II

Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income

Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and

Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator

Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate

demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy

UNIT III

Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate

demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government

expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary

and fiscal policy

UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary

policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production

Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation

monetary measures fiscal measures

UNIT V

Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and

corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in

open economy

COURSE OUTCOME

To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the

role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson

2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill

3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers

4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson

SEMESTER V

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment

Internal Assessment Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-501

Ability Enhancement

Public Relation amp Corporate Image

50

25

8

10

4

15

6

2

-

-

2

1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and

small Business

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-503

Core Course Principle of

Economics

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-502

Practical Entrepreneurship and

small Business

50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics

50

25 08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Skill Course

Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill Enhancement

Elective Course-III

50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2

Grand Total

600

24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication

1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management

1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India

1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation

1Y3BBA509 Organization Development

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision

1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management

1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA513 Database Management System

1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service

1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy

1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management

1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management

1Y3BBA520 Stores Management

1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA522 Technology Management

1Y3BBA523 Productivity

1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept

1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management

1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System

1Y3BBA529 Health Economics

1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management

(Rural Management Group )

1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity

1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment

1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management

SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES

Non-Technical

Elective No Department Faculty Name

Faculty of Information Technology

I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)

II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)

IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)

V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Management

I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)

II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)

III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development

Faculty of Commerce

I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)

II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Humanities

I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)

II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)

III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Science

I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)

II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)

III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)

IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)

V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Education

I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)

II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)

PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA501

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts

of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling

and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization

UNIT- I

Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash

Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy

Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors

ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public

Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations

UNIT- II

Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service

Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social

Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy

for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation

Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event

Management

UNIT- III

Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash

Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public

Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of

Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control

UNIT IV

Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies

Components of an Individual Image

Advertising and Corporate Image

Public Relations of an Institutions

UNIT V

The Grapevine and Rumours

Stereotype

Propaganda

Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations

applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different

entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling

REFERENCE BOOKS

Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House

Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House

Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University

Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill

This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning

ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-

The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding

processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to

those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic

environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide

evidence which informs those debates

UNIT I

Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of

Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its

environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship

UNIT II

Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship

development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the

Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making

UNIT III

Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that

enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in

Social context Start Up

UNIT IV

Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional

source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital

UNIT V

Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication

2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd

3 Vasant Desai

4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH

PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 503

COURSE OBJECTIVES-

To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production

UNIT- I

Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits

UNIT-II

Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus

movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts

of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications

of demand and supply price rationing price floors

Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price

elasticity cross and income elasticity

UNIT-III

Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility

Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp

Producer surplus

UNIT-IV

Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant

and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue

and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale

UNIT-V

Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of

the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run

equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment

concept

COURSE OUTCOME-

To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011

bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th

edition

2007

bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA

bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press

Oxford

bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore

MARKETING GROUP

INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so

that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to

enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications

UNIT-I

Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC

in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising

appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion

relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship

between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods

Interactive Internet Marketing

UNIT-II

Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach

establishing and allocating promotional budget

UNIT-III

IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different

forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning

creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design

considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client

Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork

UNIT-IV

Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering

key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and

media research

Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration

client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc

UNIT-V

Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing

Communications

COURSE OUTCOME-

To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches

and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to

communicating to target audiences

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc

Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard

D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois

Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing

House

Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and

Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication

Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH

Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing

Communications Pearson Education Limited

Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc

Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House

Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning

Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc

Homewood Illinois

Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic

Approach Cengage Learning

Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India

Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education

SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT

Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE

It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and

distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and

distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners

UNIT-I

Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies

Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling

objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring

Procedure Socialization

UNIT-II

Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program

Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation

Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial

Evaluation of Contest

UNIT-III

Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel

Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales

Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process

UNIT-IV

Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key

tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market

Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation

UNIT-V

Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners

Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict

Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International

Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales

COURSE OUTCOME

Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the

sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans

participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables

REFERENCE BOOKS

Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres

Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books

Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI

L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills

Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets

Greenwood Publishing Group

Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub

ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH

Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing

consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing

research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students

within a course project

UNIT-I

Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing

Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research

Process Marketing Research Designs

UNIT-II

The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques

Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of

Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic

Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical

Analysis Tools

UNIT-III

Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)

ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor

Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental

Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores

Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-

hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number

UNIT-IV

Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product

Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant

Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification

Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing

Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and

their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity

UNIT-V

Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning

in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report

and class presentation of the same

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from

analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor

analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis

REFERENCE BOOKS

Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi

William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi

Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi

Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill

Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research

Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey

Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning

Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp

Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced

in the class

HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP

LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA

Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of

Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity

objectivity and understandings

UNIT-I

The Factories Act 1948

The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923

The Employees State Insurance Act 1948

UNIT-II

The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952

The Payment of gratuity Act 1972

UNIT-III

The Maternity Benefit Act 1961

The Minimum Wages act 1948

UNIT-IV

The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946

The Payment of Bonus Act 1965

UNIT-V

The Apprentices Act 1969

The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959

COURSE OUTCOME ndash

To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour

Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the

organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to

follow the Laws applicable to the establishment

REFERENCE BOOKS

S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications

S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi

Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot

V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House

N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons

INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE

In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our

country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of

Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be

acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the

concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India

UNIT-I

Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors

affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial

relation programme

Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact

of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes

lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry

UNIT-II

Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal

Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective

bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective

collective bargaining collective bargaining in India

UNIT-III

Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education

scheme in India- objectives functions and problems

Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation

schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India

UNIT-IV

Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India

major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions

registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union

UNIT-V

Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery

Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation

submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court

industrial tribunals

Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power

of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute

COURSE OUTCOME

Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective

bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute

resolution

REFERENCE BOOKS

Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts

IIPM Personnel Management in India

Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business

Publication Ltd

Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India

Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India

Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication

Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co

Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law

ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational

culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the

human values in individuals

UNIT-I

Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational

Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development

Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining

and survey research amp feedback methodology

UNIT-II

Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in

organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief

systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development

UNIT-III

Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component

interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief

of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action

UNIT-IV

OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team

building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process

interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions

important for successful OD efforts

UNIT ndash V

HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational

implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional

Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have

improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi

Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York

McGrawhill

Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in

addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a

good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company

UNIT-I

Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm

Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-

Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of

Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering

UNIT-II

Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the

analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount

of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a

Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and

Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis

UNIT-III

Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues

and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements

medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings

Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project

finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing

UNIT-IV

Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of

financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing

Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect

cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization

UNIT-V

Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value

Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic

indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added

Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total

Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)

COURSE OUTCOME

Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and

corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts

REFERENCE BOOKS

Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill

Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial

environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a

multinational corporation

UNIT-I

Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation

functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial

management International monetary system

UNIT-II

Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories

ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible

exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer

Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options

Currency swaps and interest rate swaps

UNIT-III

Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction

transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction

exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The

national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International

capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)

UNIT-IV

International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic

considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)

Financial risk and cost of capital

Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of

capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-

20 subsidiaries and tax havens

UNIT-V

International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their

comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets

Recent developments in the Euro bond market

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations

and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley

PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall

Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall

Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis

Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co

Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall

Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers

Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath

FINANCIAL INCLUSION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion

such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss

the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to

promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models

UNIT-I

Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting

Access to Financial Services

Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive

Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators

UNIT-II

Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey

Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional

Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card

UNIT-III

Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India

Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations

Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor

UNIT-IV

SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of

microfinance evolved in India

Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial

Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for

Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for

Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People

UNIT-V

Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises

Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion

and Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account

initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage

Publication

Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House

Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech

Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications

Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications

Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing

Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI

Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI

Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag

Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion

Academic Foundation

IT GROUP

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to

manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the

hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment

UNIT-I

The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures

File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base

Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial

Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness

UNIT-II

Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface

with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database

Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design

UNIT-III

Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database

Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database

Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases

UNIT-IV

DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance

Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues

UNIT-V

Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the

field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective

faculty during the coverage of syllabus

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic

concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational

algebra and SQL

REFERENCE BOOKS

Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs

Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan

Press

McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co

MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It

aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing

implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services

UNIT-I

The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development

Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The

Enabling Environment for ITES

UNIT-II

Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled

Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of

Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services

UNIT-III

Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support

Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions

UNIT-IV

International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting

Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in

facilitating Trade in ITESTITES

UNIT-V

Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of

Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of

Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace

Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations

and integrate the learning in handling these complexities

REFERENCE BOOKS

Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat

E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing

SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information

technology with various aspects of Software Project Management

UNIT-I

Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision

and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM

Framework

UNIT-II

Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning

Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan

Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration

and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning

UNIT-III

Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an

Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques

Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule

Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools

UNIT-IV

Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance

Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior

Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review

UNIT-V

Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks

Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk

COURSE OUTCOME

Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business

context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business

scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson

Education Ltd

P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp

Tsinghua University Press

R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance

Management Concepts Pub

Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group

B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science

Press

A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications

G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on

understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business

UNIT I

Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm

production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country

UNIT II

Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms

and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business

sector

UNIT III

Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations

relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries

UNIT IV

Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment

and policy

UNIT V

Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies

COURSE OUTCOME

Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper

and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain

REFERENCE BOOKS

Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons

Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ

Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ

AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 517

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies

strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms

UNIT I

Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market

structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp

significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of

marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour

UNIT II

Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash

significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product

product life cycle

UNIT III

Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies

and pricing methods

UNIT IV

Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and

standardization

UNIT V

Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural

products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in

agribusiness

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better

understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for

agricultural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH

Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall

Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control

Pearson Edu

Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu

Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India

FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 518

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food

marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen

and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural

political and economic forces over time

UNIT I

Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade

Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of

Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic

factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer

UNIT II

Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling

food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing

in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions

across the chain in food retail food service marketing

UNIT III

4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing

Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system

Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement

Strategies for food retailers

UNIT IV

Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling

Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food

Products

UNIT V

Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training

Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in

retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze

Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing

REFERENCE BOOKS

Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of

India

Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu

Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill

RETAIL GROUP

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in

the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it

UNIT- I

Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management

Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain

networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain

Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network

UNIT- II

Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer

service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs

multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier

Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants

UNIT- III

Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory

models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system

UNIT- IV

COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip

Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION

TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain

Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management

UNIT- V

Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a

Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance

measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics

quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics

COURSE OUTCOME

After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain

which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House

bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers

bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg

bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi

bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan

STORES MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 520

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different

terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned

areas

UNIT- I

Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the

location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design

UNIT- II

Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual

Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors

UNIT- III

Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at

Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores

Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments

UNIT- IV

Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies

Quick Response System

UNIT- V

Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact

on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space

Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization

COURSE OUTCOME

The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern

and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management

bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing

bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach

bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing

bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing

RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 521

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail

Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail

business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management

UNIT I

Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail

equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail

market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-

Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India

UNIT II

Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development

The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and

Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-

Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on

ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response

marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks

The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management

UNIT III

Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM

Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch

points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services

Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM

Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding

Common Barriers

UNIT IV

Services Management

Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the

service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-

Supply relationships vehicle routing

UNIT V

Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising

Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping

the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand

management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-

2nd edition 2006

MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational

edititionUS1798

Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education

New Delhi 2003

JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy

Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi

Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy

Pearson Education New Delhi 2004

KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005

Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007

Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House

Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution

rosenbloom and Education Foundation US

PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 522

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

UNIT- I

Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology

Change Implication

UNIT- II

Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying

UNIT- III

Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology

Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management

UNIT- IV

Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology

Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages

UNIT- V

Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise

Level

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to

manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009

bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009

bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson

PRODUCTIVITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 523

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

UNIT- I

Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and

external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work

Contents and Ineffective Time

UNIT- II

Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram

String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart

UNIT- III

Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart

UNIT- IV

Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be

Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement

UNIT- V

Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International

Labour Office Geneva

bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed

bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill

bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India

QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO

Course Code 1Y3BBA 524

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify

the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and

measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current

issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans

UNIT- I

Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives

UNIT- II

Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect

concept

UNIT- III

Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality

UNIT- IV

Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various

control Charts

UNIT- V

Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification

COURSE OUTCOME-

Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to

explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key

aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for

controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp

communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze

the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise

and evaluate quality implementation plans

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay

bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd

bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas

bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd

bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition

7th

Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012

bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM CONCEPTS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 525

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism

To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash

Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp

Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and

development of Tourism through the ages

UNIT II

COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash

Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism

inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious

Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions

incentives sports and adventure tourism

UNIT III

TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash

Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of

motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash

health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and

push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists

UNIT IV

IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash

Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts

- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism

UNIT V

SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-

Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote

Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable

Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and

experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of

tourism experiences

REFERENCES BOOKS

Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling

Publishers Private Limited New Delhi

Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism

Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited

Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill

International

Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors

New Delhi

Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas

Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New

Delhi

TOURISM MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 526

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the basic concept and various components of management

UNIT I

MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-

Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of

management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)

Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management

UNIT II

PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-

Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of

planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by

objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance

and limitation of decision making

UNIT III

ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash

Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of

staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance

appraisal

UNIT IV

DIRECTING ndash

Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation

(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy

theory)

UNIT V

LEADERSHIP-

Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path

Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to

communication

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives

Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of

tourism as well as the impacts of tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc

Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New

Delhi

Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition

AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing

House New Delhi

Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition

Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations

To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism

industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-

Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing

Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and

Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash

Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New

Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING -

Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION -

Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity

Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in

promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level

which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described

REFERENCES BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson

Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition

Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent

learning

UNIT I

Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health

Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural

History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention

UNIT II

Definition and meaning of hospital ndash

Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing

concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of

Hospitals

UNIT III

Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector

Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in

delivering healthcare in India

UNIT IV

Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural

hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description

UNIT V

The reforms of Healthcare System-

The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare

reforms amp Future of Healthcare System

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding

the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the

management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and

organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services

REFERENCE BOOKS

The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991

Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd

Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers

HEALTH ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 529

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and

understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict

peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different

social actions

UNIT I

Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and

importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below

Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits

UNIT II

Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve

techniques and properties of indifference curve

UNIT III

Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash

Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of

Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of

Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of

demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash

Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue

UNIT IV

Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two

variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves

UNIT V

Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash

Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and

monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market

situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price

determination

COURSE OUTCOME

To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from

an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic

evaluation of a health intervention or program

REFERENCE BOOKS

Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR

Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP

Managerial Economics - Gupta GS

Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani

Business Economics - Sharma NK

Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar

Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi

Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL

HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 530

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions

related to records management in the healthcare environment

UNIT I

Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record

keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records

UNIT II

Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health

Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research

UNIT III

Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics

investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing

Pharmacy etc Audits)

UNIT IV

Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems

associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic

Related Groups (DRG)

UNIT V

Medical Registers ndash

Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various

departments amp common problems faced

COURSE OUTCOME

Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New

Delhi 1999

Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995

Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi

George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003

Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 531

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India

To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India

UNIT I

Rural Society in India

Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-

urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and

subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural

life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion

UNIT II

Rural Society

Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social

institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity

and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of

rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT-III

Village India

Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance

contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and

political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology

Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class

UNIT IV

Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics

Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid

growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope

and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -

Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT-V

Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times

Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social

processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India

Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy

Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms

REFERENCE BOOKS

Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi

Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay

PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House

SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication

House Delhi

ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 532

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To explain the nature of environmental studies

To introduce aspects of Natural resources

To introduce aspects of ecosystems

To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation

To introduce aspects of environmental pollution

To create awareness on social issues and environment

To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

UNIT I

Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for

public awareness

UNIT II

Ecosystems

Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and

decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and

Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the

following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic

Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)

UNIT III

Biodiversity and its Conservation

Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification

of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option

Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports

of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-

Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ

Conservation of biodiversity

UNIT IV

Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil

pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste

Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an

individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods

earthquake cyclone and landslides

20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT V

Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water

Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of

People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible

responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and

holocaust

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the nature of environmental studies

Classify renewable and non-renewable resources

Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues

Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation

Analyze aspects of environmental pollution

Describe aspects of social issues and environment

Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner

Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental

Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai

Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA

RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 533

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts

To familiarize Rural marketing strategy

To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems

To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing

To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages

UNIT I

Overview of Rural Marketing

Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing

and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction

Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class

UNIT II

Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for

rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT III

Rural Distribution Systems

Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche

markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of

Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT IV

ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network

(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction

Methodology Group Project work

UNIT V

Market support

Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role

play

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Market their products

Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products

Choose an appropriate distribution system

Apply ICT in rural marketing

Source the finance for rural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India

Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education

Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi

SEMESTER- VI

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allot

ted

Cred

its

Course

Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mark

s

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-601

Core

Course

E- Commerce

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-602 Core

Course

Customer

Relationship Management

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-603 Practical

Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva

Voce

100

50

17

-

-

50

20

- - 4 4

1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Grand Total

550

22

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one

paper presentation certificate in related discipline

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management

1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing

1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA607 Management of Change

1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management

1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management

1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service

1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business

1Y3BBA614 E- Governance

1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management

1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing

1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour

1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning

1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design

1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control

1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan

1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing

1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management

1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care

1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law

(Rural Management Group)

1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System

1Y3BBA632

Panchayati Raj

1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy

E- COMMERCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 601

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is

designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the

technical foundation for understanding information systems

UNIT I

Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting

online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a

business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-

commerce

UNIT II

Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet

(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A

systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing

vs in-house development of a website)

UNIT III

Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension

definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security

intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)

technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and

protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)

UNIT IV

E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards

e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online

banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house

automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments

UNIT V

Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting

online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of

utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online

services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and

entertainment

COURSE OUTCOME-

Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information

systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Management Information System Jawadekar

bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon

bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana

bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)

bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty

CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 602

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of

Customer Relationship Management in the organizations

UNIT- I

Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature

of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive

and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and

evaluating customer business plans

UNIT- II

Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer

database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing

customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively

Planning and making persuasive presentations

UNIT- III

Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality

Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality

managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and

Cross- sell

UNIT- IV

Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations

Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority

setting Target setting setting standards

UNIT- V

Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction

COURSE OUTCOME-

To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship

Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd

Ed Response Books Sage Publication

Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House

Pvt Ltd

Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books

Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management

V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008

Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management

South Western Cengage Learning

Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press

Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age

International

Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan

Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of

India Private Limted New Delhi 2011

S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private

Limted New Delhi 2008

ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 603

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to

work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn

the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final

semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by

the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a

student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their

analytical capabilities and experience

DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)

Title of the study (Cover Page)

Declaration

Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)

Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)

Acknowledgement

Table of Contents

Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Introduction

12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research

12 Significance of the study

13 Scope of the study

14 Research Problem

15 Objective of the study

17 Hypothesis

18 Limitations of the study

2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students

to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they

learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After

the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is

evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report

should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to

provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also

able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business

operations and come up with the ways to tap the

Opportunities

3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

31 Introduction

32 Population of the study

33 Sampling Design

331 Sampling Technique

332 Sampling Method

333 Sample Size

34 Research Instrument

35 Sources of data

351 Primary Data

352 Secondary Data

4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION

5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION

Bibliography

COURSE OUTCOME-

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able

to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and

come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities

MARKETING GROUP

PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 604

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the

context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product

manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions

UNIT- I

Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused

organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management

Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-

cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product

Development

UNIT- II

Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods

of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in

international Market

UNIT- III

Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity

concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand

Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image

UNIT- IV

Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system

measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement

Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market

segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining

and establishing brand values

UNIT- V

Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand

extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time

Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand

Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation

COURSE OUTCOME

The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of

Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for

Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning

implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer

Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi

Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi

Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi

Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education

New Delhi

Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi

Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata

McGraw Hill New Delhi

Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi

STRATEGIC MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 605

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and

implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and

managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver

superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation

through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills

UNIT- I

Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash

Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of

Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying

Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting

Marketing Objectives

UNIT-II

Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching

Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy

Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle

Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies

UNIT-III

Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp

Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models

UNIT- IV

Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives

Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy

Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing

UNIT- V

Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at

different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by

executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and

interdisciplinary nature

REFERENCE BOOKS

Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt

D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin

OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage

Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill

Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp

Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson

Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann

Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India

George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press

J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and

Programs McGraw-Hill Companies

Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub

Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon

P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave

E-MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 606

COURSE OBJECTIVE

It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance

enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns

UNIT- I

Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics

Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan

Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing

UNIT- II

Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in

India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within

communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing

UNIT- III

Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet

as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet

User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-

branding

UNIT- IV

Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-

marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools

Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent

Trends in e-customer service

UNIT- V

Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web

Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing

campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising

Course Outcome

Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics

online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its

implication on marketing strategy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a

networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill

Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall

Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning

Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books

Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial

Times

HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP

MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 607

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be

Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students

Understand the importance of managing change

UNIT- I

Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-

Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of

human resource strategies in implementing Change

UNIT-II

Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR

implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation

and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions

UNIT-III

HR Processes amp Change

Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned

change

Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change

UNIT- IV

Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in

employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management

of change implications of downsizing

UNIT- V

Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to

promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and

feedback

Course Outcome

Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more

effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change

process

REFERENCE BOOKS

A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human

Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education

Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill

Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage

South Asia Edition

K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation

Response Books

VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books

CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 608

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical

relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand

anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions

to ensure the organizational and individual success

UNIT-I

Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of

organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business

environment

UNIT-II

Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars

Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations

UNIT- III

Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock

Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system

(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)

UNIT- IV

Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and

repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally

appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural

negotiation and conflicts management

UNIT- V

Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual

countries Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development

of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning

Private Limited

G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill

Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley

Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing

Co

Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell

Business

Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times

McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp

Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation

Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson

Education India

GROUP DYNAMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 609

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group

dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group

effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of

resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding

UNIT-I

Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group

dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B

UNIT-II

Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group

Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash

Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress

UNIT-III

Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group

decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash

conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict

UNIT- IV

Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De

individuation theory

UNIT- V

Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources

of Change in groups

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups

REFERENCE BOOKS

Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley

Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass

Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co

Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE

Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and

application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax

along with basic concepts of VAT

UNIT-I

Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of

Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment

of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-II

Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature

and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax

planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business

UNIT-III

Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net

Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and

Penalties (Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-IV

Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for

service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of

Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)

UNIT- V

VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview

of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT

Law)

COURSE OUTCOME

Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields

REFERENCE BOOKS

Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications

Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub

Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House

T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India

BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson

S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann

R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _

INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 611

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important

components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO

Analysis etc

UNIT-I

INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian

Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role

in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)

UNIT-II

FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different

Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players

Different types of Instruments

UNIT-III

CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI

Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank

UNIT- IV

COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp

Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A

REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA

UNIT- V

NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies

Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture

Capital Funds

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment

Banking companies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication

Financial Services MY Khan TMH

Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication

S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran

ML Seth

FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 612

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and

prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of

uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding

of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role

of internal audit assessments

UNIT I

Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview

UNIT II

Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax

fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and

inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds

UNIT III

Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion

investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports

UNIT IV

Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using

Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)

UNIT V Case Study

1 Two Indian

2 Two international cases

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread

nature of fraud and its economic impact

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation

Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination

Cengage Learning

IT GROUP

INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 613

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security

managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues

in the information assurance field

UNIT I

Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian

Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its

application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law

Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour

Laws E-Media and Print Media

UNIT II

E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security

Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature

UNIT III

Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil

Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-

detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of

Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA

UNIT IV

IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal

issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base

UNIT V

Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of

Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules

COURSE OUTCOME-

Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House

Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co

John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River

Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher

Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University

E-GOVERNANCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 614

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information

Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an

awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the

issues concerning the Cyber security

UNIT I

Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National

E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status

UNIT II

E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process

Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges

UNIT III

E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-

Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics

UNIT IV

Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic

data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber

audit implications for e-governance

Unit V

Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and

construction of a joining table

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill

Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing

Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in

India ICFAI Press Hyderabad

B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill

H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications

V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd

IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 615

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization

UNIT I

IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT

Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo

Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for

IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library

UNIT II

Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service

Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support

Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change

Management Release Management

UNIT III

Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve

Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine

Recovery Data Retention

UNIT IV

Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security

Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection

UNIT V

IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and

Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and

Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of

Internet on Technical Support

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology

REFERENCE BOOKS

Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce

(OGC) TSO UK

Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos

Management Tata McGraw Hill

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 616

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques

and their management

UNIT I

Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations

of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and

distribution

UNIT II

Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and

factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging

of foods

UNIT III

Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food

industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO

etc

UNIT IV

Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products

cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking

confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of

fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH

Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie

Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing

Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH

MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 617

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing

concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs

UNIT I

Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution

channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-

farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing

UNIT II

Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds

Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of

NSC and State Seed Corporation

UNIT III

Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers

Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash

marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer

marketing

UNIT IV

Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash

marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of

electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity

UNIT V

Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm

machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines

implementsEquipmentlsquos

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with

various functional areas of agribusiness

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp

IBH

Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management

Kalyani

Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ

House

FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 618

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis

of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions

UNIT I

Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management

decisions farm management problems

UNIT II

Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle

principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc

UNIT III

Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm

records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement

farm efficiency measures

UNIT IV

Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc

UNIT V

Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to

counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks

and uncertainty

COURSE OUTCOME

Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses

REFERENCE BOOKS

Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall

Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ

Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ

Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ

RETAIL GROUP

BUYER BEHAVIOUR

Course Code 1Y3BBA 619

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer

decisions making

UNIT-I

A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic

Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market

Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making

UNIT-II

Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles

of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer

Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and

Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product

Relationship

UNIT-III

Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to

information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-

Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors

Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications

UNIT-IV

Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing

Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-

Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions

Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy

UNIT-V

Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics

lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they

experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and

impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour

COURSE OUTCOME

Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the

choices consumers make

REFERENCE BOOKS

JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata

Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006

Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context

Excel Books NewDelhi-2001

Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous

DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing

Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi

Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining

Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005

Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000

RETAIL PLANNING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 620

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational

decision-making processes in the organized retail

UNIT I

Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail

Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-

Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative

methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management

UNIT II

Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics

Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp

non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion

designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting

Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-

Management of Obsolete goods

UNIT III

Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer

psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical

Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices

UNIT IV

Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-

Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp

Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective

Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer

Rights- Consumer Protection Acts

UNIT V

Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing

Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-

Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels

REFERENCE BOOKS

Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies

Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies

Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson

Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund

amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson

Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice

Hall of India New Delhi

Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies

Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best

People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd

RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 621

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the

value it creates

UNIT I

Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When

How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience

Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency

UNIT II

Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated

Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-

Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-

UNIT III

Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on

Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-

Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display

Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-

UNIT IV

Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium

Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and

Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-

Trade Dealing

UNIT V

Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-

Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating

Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing

to act in ways that increase loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -

Prentice-Hall

Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology

Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales

Promotion Techniques

Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate

Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page

Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books

George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing

Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill

PRODUCTION GROUP

PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL

Course Code 1Y3BBA 622

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a

basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of

facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality

control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an

understanding of the concept of aggregate planning

UNIT- I

Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors

Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-

requisites of PPC

UNIT- II

Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in

Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining

Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control

Models)

UNIT- III

Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection

Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master

production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of

software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II

UNIT- IV

Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n

job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling

Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)

UNIT- V

Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control

function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications

bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi

Deep and Deep Publications

PROCESS REENGINEERING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 623

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of

business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering

projects

UNIT- I

Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp

pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR

UNIT- II

Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering

project organizing for process reengineering

UNIT- III

Process analysis and design

a) Process analysis

(b) Process design

UNIT- IV

Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition

tracking and measuring process performance

UNIT- V

Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology

Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact

measurement

COURSE OUTCOME

To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the

considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-

engineering project

REFERENCE BOOKS

Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata

McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater

Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester

John Wiley amp Sons

WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn

the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time

standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering

to design of work systems

UNIT- I

Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos

productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity

Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time

Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities

Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was

developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph

UNIT- II

Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting

up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion

Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand

Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and

Design of Tools amp Equipment

UNIT- III

Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard

from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and

Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work

Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling

UNIT- IV

Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage

Incentive Plans

The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for

Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action

UNIT-V

Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion

Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System

Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts

Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional

including understanding the need for quality

REFERENCE BOOKS

iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill

ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation

Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp

Sons

Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall

Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall

Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press

Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall

Mall East and London

Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN

Course Code 1Y3BBA 625

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in

it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative

impacts of tourism development

UNIT I

Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism

Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of

Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in

Tourism Development

UNIT II

Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning

system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos

Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-

Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in

learning system

UNIT III

Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable

development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist

Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash

The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash

Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities

UNIT IV

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage

of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment

UNIT IV

Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the

Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National

Policy on Ecology and Environment

COURSE OUTCOME

To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global

perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international

tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for

sustainable tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash

Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications

Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers

Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William

Heinemann Ltd

Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices

London Pitman Publishing

Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York

Kendall Hunt Publishing Company

Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan

Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman

Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford

University Press

New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable

Development Approach VNR and New York

TOURISM MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 626

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism

and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing

that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products

before the stakeholders of tourism industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing

Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and

Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market

Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing

Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for

different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing

Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales

promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital

communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future

It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are

needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be

a part of this growth

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar

Thomson Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd

edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of

Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry

UNIT I

HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of

Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads

ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and

marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents

UNIT II

RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief

History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway

Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway

station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains

express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world

heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes

UNIT III

AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth

Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled

Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature

Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players

Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and

performance marketing strategies of Air India

UNIT IV

WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover

crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going

traffic) ndash National waterways

UNIT V

CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing

stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and

Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation

COURSE OUTCOME

Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of

the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management

REFERENCE BOOKS

RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 628

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of

its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing

knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital

Management

UNIT I

Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its

impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need

principles purpose

UNIT II

Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and

their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply

department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health

and patient safety

UNIT III

Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of

biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules

standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging

transportation amp storage

UNIT IV

Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier

methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal

decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of

wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan

UNIT V

Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party

insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash

meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural

disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague

typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics

COURSE OUTCOME

To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost

containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges

arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs

and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its

various components

REFERENCE BOOKS

Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication

First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn

Park k - Preventive and social medicine

Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot

MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 629

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted

advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public

relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any

potential crisis that may arise

UNIT I

Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches

to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of

marketing functions of marketing

UNIT II

Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment

Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market

segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash

positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing

UNIT III

Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior

(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying

decision process

UNIT IV

Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp

deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product

development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling

UNIT V

Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing

policies and strategies

Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management

decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels

COURSE OUTCOME

Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an

integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare

professionals and the public

REFERENCE BOOKS

Philip Kotler - marketing management

Wiliam jStanton - marketing management

Sherleker S A - marketing management

J C Gandhi - marketing management

Davar - modern marketing management

Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub

P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research

Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research

HOSPITALS RELATED LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 630

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of

common-law development

UNIT ndash I

Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties

sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance

act trust act societies registration act

UNIT ndashII

Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of

human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act

1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971

mental health act patient consent

UNIT ndash III

Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948

narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods

act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration

UNIT ndash IV

Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act

1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916

maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing

order) act trade union act industrial disputes act

UNIT ndashV

Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in

hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical

negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical

establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal

pronouncements rulings and regulations

REFERENCE BOOKS

Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer

Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law

Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 631

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India

To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural

Production system in India

To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India

To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development

UNIT -1

Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions

ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology

Case analysis and discussion

UNIT II

Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash

Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture

UNIT III

Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-

Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India

UNIT IV

Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of

holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus

land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas

UNIT V

Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash

Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and

schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM

COURSE OUTCOMES

Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management

Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India

Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development

REFERENCE BOOKS

Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution

Can We Make London Department for International Development

Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House

PANCHAYATI RAJ

Course Code 1Y3BBA632

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration

To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites

To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance

To provide insights on Rural Administration

To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes

UNIT I

Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction

Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges

Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration

(Official and non-official) and report submission

UNIT III

Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission

UNIT IV

Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and

Block- Panchayat relationship

Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play

UNIT V

Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government

Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan

Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

COURSE OUTCOMES

Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village

Development interventions

Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its

power Structure

Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and

Plans

Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes

32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959

Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise

Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi

Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New

Delhi

RURAL ECONOMY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 633

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy

To help students understand their role in rural economic development

To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources

To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation

To create awareness on rural economic development

UNIT I

Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-

Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries

(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in

agriculture individual production other production services

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-

Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash

Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land

Reforms

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

UNIT III

Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation

programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs

UNIT IV

Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work

UNIT V

Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing

ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for

the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy

Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village

Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues

Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation

Facilities

Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi

Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi

Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic

Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New

Delhi

INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER

Mid Semester Examination (MSE)

There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5

descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered

End Semester Examination (ESE)

There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks

each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of

10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered

Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations

The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment

Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be

applicable

(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )

Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type

End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size

Page 4: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020

SEMESTER I

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Ist SEMESTER

Course Details

External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allot

ted

Cred

its

Course Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor

Sessional

L

T

P

Subj

ect

wise

Distr

ibuti

on

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Ma

x

Mar

ks

Min

Mark

s

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mark

s

Theory Group

1Y3BBA101

Ability Enhanc

ement

Compul

sory

Course

MIL Hindi Communication

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA102

Core Course

Organization Behavior 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA103 Core

Course

Introduction to

Business Accountancy

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA104 Core Course

Business Environment

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA105 Core

Course

Principles of

Management 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA102

Organization

Behavior 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

1Y3BBA104 Business

Environment 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Grand

Total 600 20 5 - 24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

MIL HINDI COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 101

fgUnh Okdjk oa laizskk

इकाई-I

हहनदीवयाकरण और रचना सजञा सरवनाम हरशष ाण हिया अवयय कारक रचन सहधउपसगव परतयय

तथासमास

ह गहनणवय पयावयराची शबद हर ोम शबद अन क शबदो क ह ए एक शबद

शबद शदधि राकय शदधि महारर और ोकोदधिया पललरन एर सकष पण

इकाई-II

हनबध क ातथासमसामहयक एरराषटर ीय हरषया परहनबधा खन

इकाई-III

सपर षण (सचार)

-सपर षण की अरधारणऔरमहतव सपरष ाण क ह ए आरशयक शत सपरष ाण क परकार

सपर षणकामाधयम सपर षणक ा सपर षण की तकनीक राचनक ा समाचारराचन साकषातकारक ा

रचनातमक खनका कषय रचनातमक ख ानकाआधार भारऔरहरचारोकीपरसतहत राक क ा की

उपयोहगता

अनशसितपसतक -

रहतवयाकरणभासकर डा 0 रचनद रकमार

रहतहनबधाभासकर डा 0 रचनदर कमार

आधहनकहहनदीवयाकरणऔररचना डा 0 रासद रननदनपरसाद

रचनामानस परो0 राम शवरनाथहतरारी

वयरहाररकहहनदी डा 0 जग बहादरपाणड य

रचनातमक खन डा 0 रमश ागौतम

राजहसहहनदीहनबध परो0 आर0 एन0 गौड़

सफ हहनदीहनबध रतन शवर

हनबध सहचर डा 0 कषमणपरसाद

उपकारमहारर और ाक ोदधियाा पार 0 राज शवरपरसादचतरव दी

कहाहनयोकहारता की परतापअनम

समपर षणपरकहहनदीभाषाहशकषण डा 0 रशनानारग

श ीहरजञान डा 0 सर शकमार

श ीहरजञानपरहतमानऔरहरशल षण डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo

श ीहरजञानकाइहतहास डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo

ORGANIZATION BEHAVIOUR

Course Code 1Y3BBA102

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Students study the behaviour of individuals and groups as part of the social and technical system in

the workplace They examine individual and group behaviour communication conflict and various

management styles motivational techniques and coordination in the work environment and apply

these concepts to the development of an organizations human resources

UNIT I

Organization Overview of the concept and relevance of organizational Behaviour meaning Nature

Scope features approaches model challenges and opportunities functions amp Role of manager

Planning process Decision making Process

UNIT II

Foundation of individual Behavior Biography ability personality (determinants and models)

perception (definition components factors affecting perception in decision making) Values

Beliefs etc

UNIT III

Individual Behavior- Attitude Definition importance Types Attitude regarding- Job

Satisfaction Involvement commitment effects of employee attitude changing attitudes

Learning Definition nature theories classical conditioning operant conditioning cognitive

Learning Social learning

UNIT IV

Motivation Concept and theories (Maslow McGregor Herzberg ERG) merits amp demerits Group

dynamics amp Team work Nature theories types of group Definition Stages of Group Development

effectiveness potential problems Analysis of Interpersonal Relationship Transactional Analysis

Johari Window

UNIT- V

Organizational change and development approaches and methods stress nature source effects

conflicts employee counseling approaches extra mural penitential learning programmers case

study

COURSE OUTCOME

To explain group dynamics and demonstrate skills required for working in groups (team building)

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Luthans Fred Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India

bull Mishra MN Behaviour Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi

bull Newstrom W John Davis Keith Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India

bull LM Roy Organisational Behaviour S Chand Publication

bull Dr FC Sharma Organisational Behaviour SBPD Publications

INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ACCOUNTING

Course Code 1Y3BBA103

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable students to synthesize related information and evaluate options for most logical and

optimal solution such that they would be able to predict and control cost incurrence and improve

results

UNIT- I

Accounting Basic of Accounting Accounting Mechanics-Double Entry System Classification

Rules for Debit amp Credit Journal Ledger and Trial Balance sub-division of journal Ledger meaning subdivision and mechanics of Posting balancing ledger accounts

UNIT- II

Cash book and Subsidiary books of Accounting Kinds of Cash Book Purchase day book and sale

day Book Bank reconciliation statement Measurement of income- Adjusting entries- rectification of

errors- Adjusted trial balance

UNIT-III

Preparation of financial statements- Trading account Profit amp Loss account Balance Sheet (with

Adjustments) Accounting for Non-profit organization Accounting Procedures Receipts amp payment

accounts income ampexpenditure account problems

UNIT- IV

Depreciation- Meaning Determinant factors Method amp Significance Basic Concepts of hire

purchase amp installments

UNIT- V

Partnership-Preliminary admission of a partner Company Accounts-Issue of shares Debentures

Forfeitures and reissue of shares

COURSE OUTCOME

Analyse the complexities associated with management of cost of product and services in the

Organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

SA Siddiqui- Comprehensive Accounting

TS Greval- Introduction to Accounting

Mukherjee and M Accounting (Volume-I)

SN Maheshwar- Introduction to Accounting (Vikas Publication)

CAC Rama Gopal Accounting For Managers (New Age)

BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational

and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business

UNIT I

Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro

environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis

for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business

UNIT II

Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic

systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years

plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent

economic initiatives NitiAyog

UNIT III

Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment

problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance

of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural

Development Problems of Growth

UNIT IV

Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment

Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA

and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act

UNIT V

International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational

Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic

Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-

GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India

COURSE OUTCOME

Outline how an entity operates in a business environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996

Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi

Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan

Chand Delhi

Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi

PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA105

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to

articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate

effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the

consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and

quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods

UNIT-I

Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of

Management Functions of the Manager

UNIT- II

Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of

Planning

Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and

type of Policies

Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems

involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques

UNIT- III

Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of

Units and committees

Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship

UNIT- IV

Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training

Directing Nature and purpose and directing

UNIT- V

Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control

process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies

COURSE OUTCOME-

Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques

managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of

managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify

and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own

position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied

audiences

Reference Books

bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher

bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson

Education

bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt

Ltd 4th Ed

bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill

Publications

SEMESTER II

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distributio

n

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor

Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distribu

tion Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Ma

x

Ma

rks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme

nt

Compulsory

Course

English

communication

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA202 Core Course

Management concept amp

Principle

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA203 Core

Course

Environmental

Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA204 Core

Course

Monetary

Economics and

Indian Banking

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA205 Core

Course

Business

Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA205 Business

Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhanceme

nt

Skill Enhancement

Elective

Course-I

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand

Total 600 21 5 - 24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

ENGLISH COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA201

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English

language teaching and content writing sectors

UNIT I

Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning

Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening

UNIT II

Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive

writing expansion of an idea

UNIT III

Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing

(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume

writing covering letter

UNIT IV

Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases

UNIT V

Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb

agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions

(Advanced)

COURSE OUTCOME

To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill

Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul

Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan

Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das

Orient Blackswan

Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press

Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication

MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 202

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and

process of effective controlling in the organization

UNIT I

Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science

Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)

UNIT II

School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and

Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)

Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management

UNIT III

Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing

Staffing Directing and Coordinating

UNIT IV

Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command

Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control

UNIT V

Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure

determination Forms- formal amp informal organization

Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations

COURSE OUTCOME

Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial

functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management

REFERENCE BOOKS

LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management

VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management

James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB

Fred Luthans- OB

ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 203

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links

between human and natural systems

UNIT I

Introduction to environmental studies

Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability

and sustainable development

UNIT II

Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an

ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following

ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds

streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)

Unit III

Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to

mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and

over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international

ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate

energy sources growing energy needs case studies

UNIT IV

Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem

diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots

Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and

Informational value

UNIT V

Environmental Pollution

Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution

Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and

Industrial waste Pollution case studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social

and environmental processes

REFERENCE BOOKS

California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London

Routledge

Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security

Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press

Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of

ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006

Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37

McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books

McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the

Twentieth Century

Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders

Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic

Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt

Ltd

Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons

Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi

1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP

Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation

S Chand Publishing New Delhi

MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING

Course Code 1Y3BBA204

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using

statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills

within the contest of subject matter of economics

UNIT I

Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of

Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value

of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income

theory of Money

UNIT II

Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people

Money Market

UNIT III

Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial

Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks

UNIT IV

Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control

methods and Tools of Monetary Policy

UNIT V

RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative

Banks and Rural Banks

COURSE OUTCOME

Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and

mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of

economics

REFERENCE BOOKS

MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi

LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi

Crowther- An Out Line of Money

Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant

KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ

BUSINESS COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA205

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative

scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication

UNIT I

Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports

OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)

UNIT II

Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other

words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis

UNIT III

Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers

Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers

UNIT IV

Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a

Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication

Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)

UNIT V

Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written

Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp

minutes

COURSE OUTCOME

To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical

proficiency in the development of exposition and argument

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wren amp Martin

K Madhukar- Business Communication

VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication

Asha Laul- Business Communication

Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH

SEMESTER III

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotte

d

Credit

s

Course Code Course

Type

Course

Title

Total

Mark

s

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subjec

t wise

Distrib

ution

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA301

Ability

Enhancement

IT Tool for Business

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA302

Core Course

Introduction to Marketing

Management

100 50 17 20 7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA303 Core

Course

Business

Law

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA304 Core

Course

Business

statistics for

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA305

Core

Course

Retail

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA304 Practical

Business

statistics for Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill

Enhancemen

t Elective Course-II

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand Total 600 24

IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 301

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software

components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data

base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT

UNIT-I

Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and

Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World

Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept

UNIT-II

Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different

computer generation

UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and

Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming

Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-

principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart

examples

UNIT-IV

Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation

applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)

Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information

System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems

Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human

Resources Management Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations

Understand the hardware and software components of the computer

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford

2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication

3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication

4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill

INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 302

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply

these to a new or existing business

UNIT I

Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept

amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro

environment

UNIT II

Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of

Product Line amp Product- mix

UNIT III

Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing

decisions Overview of pricing process

UNIT IV

Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product

Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage

UNIT V

Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to

marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct

selling

COURSE OUTCOME

To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct

an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an

appropriate format

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Philip Kotler

2 TN Chabra

3 TK Panda

4 SH Kazmi

5 Arun Kumar

BUSINESS LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 303

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal

environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with

knowledge of legal principles

UNIT-I

Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration

capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts

Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp

Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency

UNIT-II

Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp

Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales

UNIT-III

Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -

Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a

negotiable instrument

UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of

non-registration Dissolution of a firm

UNIT-V

Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of

Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013

COURSE OBJECTIVE

On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to

individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context

Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 ND Kapoor

2 Tulsian

3 MC Kuchhal

4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business

BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 304

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management

UNIT I

Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance

Scope and Limitation of Statistic

UNIT II

Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar

Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive

UNIT III

Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic

Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures

of dispersion

UNIT IV

Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and

Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index

number CPI WPI IIP

UNIT V

Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank

Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series

COURSE OUTCOME

Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically

discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons

2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication

3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication

RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in

India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone

Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT

FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan

Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process

UNIT II

FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail

Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors

Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing

MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer

Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design

and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication

UNIT III

STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty

Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors

UNIT IV

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management

IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service

Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM

Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying

UNIT V

MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at

Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems

at Retail Centers

Course Outcome-

Reference Books

bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education

bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A

Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education

The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge

about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various

aspects of retail operations

After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with

the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the

entire retail operations

SEMESTER IV

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code Course

Type Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subject

wise

Distributio

n

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mark

s

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-401

Ability

Enhanceme

nt

Introduction to

soft skill amp

Team Building

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA-402 Core Course

Introduction to

financial

management

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-403 Core Course

Advertising

and Sales

Promotion

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-404 Core Course

Management

of Human resource

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of

Business

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group

Term End

Practical

Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-404 Practical

Management

of Human

resource

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-405 Practical

Macro

Economics of Business

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

Grand Total 550 22

INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 401

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate

students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners

by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are

learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for

their own learning

UNIT ndash I

General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of

Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences

Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making

Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of

communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of

Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation

UNIT ndash II

Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing

skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice

modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements

General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral

skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive

Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style

UNIT ndash III

Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format

and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in

Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active

Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD

UNIT ndash IV

Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction

Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview

Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing

Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of

Conversation

UNIT ndash V

Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional

Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers

COURSE OUTCOME

To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills

and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin

bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar

INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 402

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital

decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and

raising long-term finance

UNIT I

Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives

Role of finance manager

UNIT II

Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of

investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return

Comparison between NPV amp IRR

UNIT III

Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of

Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning

capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure

UNIT IV

The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage

Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating

Leverage

UNIT V

Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital

estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of

inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order

Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy

COURSE OUTCOME

Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial

manager in the current competitive business scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 IM Pandey

2 P Chandra

3 SP Gupta

4 MY Khan

ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 403

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may

review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos

homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions

UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising

budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for

Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising

UNIT II

Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy

Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role

types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council

of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)

UNIT III

Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring

awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of

design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet

advertising and evaluation of advertising

UNIT IV

Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors

influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option

Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of

consumer schemes and other methods of promotion

UNIT V

Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs

Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales

personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion

COURSE OUTCOME

Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how

these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its

relation to todaylsquos marketplace

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall

Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi

Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi

Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications

MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 404

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource

management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational

setting

UNIT-I

Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with

special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in

strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management

UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge

workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)

Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)

UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of

human resource department and the role of human resource manager

UNITndashIV

Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification

rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation

UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection

(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction

COURSE OUTCOME

To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training

Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical

Behaviour

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi

Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New

Delhi

Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York

HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications

A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications

MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the

important indicators of the economy and their significance

UNIT I

Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of

Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income

Personal and Personal disposable income

UNIT II

Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income

Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and

Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator

Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate

demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy

UNIT III

Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate

demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government

expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary

and fiscal policy

UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary

policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production

Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation

monetary measures fiscal measures

UNIT V

Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and

corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in

open economy

COURSE OUTCOME

To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the

role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson

2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill

3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers

4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson

SEMESTER V

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment

Internal Assessment Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-501

Ability Enhancement

Public Relation amp Corporate Image

50

25

8

10

4

15

6

2

-

-

2

1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and

small Business

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-503

Core Course Principle of

Economics

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-502

Practical Entrepreneurship and

small Business

50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics

50

25 08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Skill Course

Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill Enhancement

Elective Course-III

50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2

Grand Total

600

24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication

1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management

1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India

1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation

1Y3BBA509 Organization Development

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision

1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management

1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA513 Database Management System

1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service

1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy

1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management

1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management

1Y3BBA520 Stores Management

1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA522 Technology Management

1Y3BBA523 Productivity

1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept

1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management

1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System

1Y3BBA529 Health Economics

1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management

(Rural Management Group )

1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity

1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment

1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management

SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES

Non-Technical

Elective No Department Faculty Name

Faculty of Information Technology

I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)

II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)

IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)

V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Management

I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)

II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)

III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development

Faculty of Commerce

I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)

II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Humanities

I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)

II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)

III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Science

I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)

II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)

III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)

IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)

V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Education

I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)

II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)

PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA501

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts

of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling

and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization

UNIT- I

Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash

Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy

Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors

ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public

Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations

UNIT- II

Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service

Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social

Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy

for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation

Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event

Management

UNIT- III

Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash

Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public

Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of

Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control

UNIT IV

Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies

Components of an Individual Image

Advertising and Corporate Image

Public Relations of an Institutions

UNIT V

The Grapevine and Rumours

Stereotype

Propaganda

Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations

applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different

entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling

REFERENCE BOOKS

Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House

Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House

Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University

Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill

This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning

ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-

The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding

processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to

those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic

environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide

evidence which informs those debates

UNIT I

Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of

Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its

environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship

UNIT II

Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship

development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the

Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making

UNIT III

Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that

enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in

Social context Start Up

UNIT IV

Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional

source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital

UNIT V

Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication

2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd

3 Vasant Desai

4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH

PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 503

COURSE OBJECTIVES-

To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production

UNIT- I

Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits

UNIT-II

Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus

movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts

of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications

of demand and supply price rationing price floors

Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price

elasticity cross and income elasticity

UNIT-III

Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility

Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp

Producer surplus

UNIT-IV

Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant

and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue

and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale

UNIT-V

Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of

the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run

equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment

concept

COURSE OUTCOME-

To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011

bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th

edition

2007

bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA

bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press

Oxford

bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore

MARKETING GROUP

INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so

that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to

enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications

UNIT-I

Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC

in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising

appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion

relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship

between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods

Interactive Internet Marketing

UNIT-II

Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach

establishing and allocating promotional budget

UNIT-III

IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different

forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning

creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design

considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client

Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork

UNIT-IV

Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering

key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and

media research

Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration

client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc

UNIT-V

Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing

Communications

COURSE OUTCOME-

To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches

and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to

communicating to target audiences

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc

Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard

D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois

Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing

House

Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and

Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication

Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH

Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing

Communications Pearson Education Limited

Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc

Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House

Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning

Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc

Homewood Illinois

Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic

Approach Cengage Learning

Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India

Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education

SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT

Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE

It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and

distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and

distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners

UNIT-I

Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies

Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling

objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring

Procedure Socialization

UNIT-II

Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program

Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation

Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial

Evaluation of Contest

UNIT-III

Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel

Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales

Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process

UNIT-IV

Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key

tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market

Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation

UNIT-V

Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners

Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict

Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International

Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales

COURSE OUTCOME

Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the

sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans

participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables

REFERENCE BOOKS

Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres

Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books

Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI

L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills

Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets

Greenwood Publishing Group

Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub

ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH

Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing

consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing

research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students

within a course project

UNIT-I

Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing

Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research

Process Marketing Research Designs

UNIT-II

The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques

Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of

Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic

Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical

Analysis Tools

UNIT-III

Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)

ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor

Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental

Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores

Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-

hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number

UNIT-IV

Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product

Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant

Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification

Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing

Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and

their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity

UNIT-V

Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning

in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report

and class presentation of the same

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from

analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor

analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis

REFERENCE BOOKS

Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi

William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi

Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi

Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill

Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research

Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey

Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning

Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp

Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced

in the class

HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP

LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA

Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of

Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity

objectivity and understandings

UNIT-I

The Factories Act 1948

The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923

The Employees State Insurance Act 1948

UNIT-II

The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952

The Payment of gratuity Act 1972

UNIT-III

The Maternity Benefit Act 1961

The Minimum Wages act 1948

UNIT-IV

The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946

The Payment of Bonus Act 1965

UNIT-V

The Apprentices Act 1969

The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959

COURSE OUTCOME ndash

To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour

Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the

organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to

follow the Laws applicable to the establishment

REFERENCE BOOKS

S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications

S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi

Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot

V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House

N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons

INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE

In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our

country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of

Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be

acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the

concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India

UNIT-I

Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors

affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial

relation programme

Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact

of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes

lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry

UNIT-II

Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal

Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective

bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective

collective bargaining collective bargaining in India

UNIT-III

Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education

scheme in India- objectives functions and problems

Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation

schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India

UNIT-IV

Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India

major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions

registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union

UNIT-V

Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery

Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation

submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court

industrial tribunals

Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power

of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute

COURSE OUTCOME

Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective

bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute

resolution

REFERENCE BOOKS

Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts

IIPM Personnel Management in India

Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business

Publication Ltd

Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India

Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India

Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication

Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co

Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law

ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational

culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the

human values in individuals

UNIT-I

Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational

Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development

Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining

and survey research amp feedback methodology

UNIT-II

Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in

organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief

systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development

UNIT-III

Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component

interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief

of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action

UNIT-IV

OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team

building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process

interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions

important for successful OD efforts

UNIT ndash V

HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational

implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional

Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have

improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi

Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York

McGrawhill

Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in

addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a

good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company

UNIT-I

Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm

Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-

Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of

Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering

UNIT-II

Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the

analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount

of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a

Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and

Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis

UNIT-III

Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues

and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements

medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings

Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project

finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing

UNIT-IV

Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of

financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing

Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect

cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization

UNIT-V

Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value

Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic

indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added

Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total

Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)

COURSE OUTCOME

Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and

corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts

REFERENCE BOOKS

Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill

Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial

environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a

multinational corporation

UNIT-I

Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation

functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial

management International monetary system

UNIT-II

Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories

ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible

exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer

Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options

Currency swaps and interest rate swaps

UNIT-III

Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction

transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction

exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The

national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International

capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)

UNIT-IV

International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic

considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)

Financial risk and cost of capital

Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of

capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-

20 subsidiaries and tax havens

UNIT-V

International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their

comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets

Recent developments in the Euro bond market

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations

and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley

PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall

Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall

Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis

Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co

Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall

Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers

Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath

FINANCIAL INCLUSION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion

such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss

the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to

promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models

UNIT-I

Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting

Access to Financial Services

Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive

Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators

UNIT-II

Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey

Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional

Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card

UNIT-III

Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India

Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations

Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor

UNIT-IV

SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of

microfinance evolved in India

Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial

Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for

Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for

Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People

UNIT-V

Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises

Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion

and Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account

initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage

Publication

Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House

Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech

Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications

Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications

Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing

Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI

Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI

Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag

Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion

Academic Foundation

IT GROUP

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to

manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the

hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment

UNIT-I

The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures

File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base

Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial

Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness

UNIT-II

Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface

with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database

Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design

UNIT-III

Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database

Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database

Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases

UNIT-IV

DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance

Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues

UNIT-V

Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the

field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective

faculty during the coverage of syllabus

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic

concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational

algebra and SQL

REFERENCE BOOKS

Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs

Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan

Press

McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co

MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It

aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing

implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services

UNIT-I

The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development

Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The

Enabling Environment for ITES

UNIT-II

Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled

Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of

Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services

UNIT-III

Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support

Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions

UNIT-IV

International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting

Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in

facilitating Trade in ITESTITES

UNIT-V

Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of

Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of

Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace

Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations

and integrate the learning in handling these complexities

REFERENCE BOOKS

Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat

E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing

SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information

technology with various aspects of Software Project Management

UNIT-I

Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision

and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM

Framework

UNIT-II

Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning

Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan

Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration

and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning

UNIT-III

Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an

Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques

Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule

Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools

UNIT-IV

Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance

Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior

Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review

UNIT-V

Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks

Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk

COURSE OUTCOME

Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business

context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business

scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson

Education Ltd

P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp

Tsinghua University Press

R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance

Management Concepts Pub

Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group

B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science

Press

A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications

G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on

understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business

UNIT I

Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm

production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country

UNIT II

Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms

and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business

sector

UNIT III

Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations

relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries

UNIT IV

Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment

and policy

UNIT V

Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies

COURSE OUTCOME

Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper

and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain

REFERENCE BOOKS

Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons

Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ

Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ

AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 517

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies

strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms

UNIT I

Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market

structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp

significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of

marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour

UNIT II

Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash

significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product

product life cycle

UNIT III

Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies

and pricing methods

UNIT IV

Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and

standardization

UNIT V

Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural

products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in

agribusiness

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better

understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for

agricultural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH

Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall

Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control

Pearson Edu

Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu

Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India

FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 518

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food

marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen

and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural

political and economic forces over time

UNIT I

Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade

Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of

Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic

factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer

UNIT II

Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling

food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing

in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions

across the chain in food retail food service marketing

UNIT III

4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing

Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system

Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement

Strategies for food retailers

UNIT IV

Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling

Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food

Products

UNIT V

Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training

Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in

retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze

Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing

REFERENCE BOOKS

Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of

India

Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu

Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill

RETAIL GROUP

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in

the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it

UNIT- I

Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management

Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain

networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain

Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network

UNIT- II

Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer

service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs

multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier

Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants

UNIT- III

Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory

models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system

UNIT- IV

COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip

Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION

TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain

Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management

UNIT- V

Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a

Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance

measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics

quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics

COURSE OUTCOME

After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain

which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House

bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers

bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg

bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi

bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan

STORES MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 520

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different

terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned

areas

UNIT- I

Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the

location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design

UNIT- II

Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual

Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors

UNIT- III

Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at

Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores

Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments

UNIT- IV

Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies

Quick Response System

UNIT- V

Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact

on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space

Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization

COURSE OUTCOME

The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern

and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management

bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing

bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach

bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing

bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing

RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 521

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail

Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail

business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management

UNIT I

Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail

equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail

market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-

Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India

UNIT II

Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development

The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and

Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-

Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on

ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response

marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks

The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management

UNIT III

Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM

Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch

points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services

Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM

Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding

Common Barriers

UNIT IV

Services Management

Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the

service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-

Supply relationships vehicle routing

UNIT V

Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising

Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping

the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand

management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-

2nd edition 2006

MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational

edititionUS1798

Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education

New Delhi 2003

JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy

Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi

Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy

Pearson Education New Delhi 2004

KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005

Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007

Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House

Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution

rosenbloom and Education Foundation US

PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 522

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

UNIT- I

Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology

Change Implication

UNIT- II

Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying

UNIT- III

Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology

Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management

UNIT- IV

Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology

Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages

UNIT- V

Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise

Level

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to

manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009

bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009

bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson

PRODUCTIVITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 523

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

UNIT- I

Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and

external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work

Contents and Ineffective Time

UNIT- II

Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram

String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart

UNIT- III

Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart

UNIT- IV

Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be

Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement

UNIT- V

Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International

Labour Office Geneva

bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed

bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill

bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India

QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO

Course Code 1Y3BBA 524

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify

the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and

measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current

issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans

UNIT- I

Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives

UNIT- II

Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect

concept

UNIT- III

Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality

UNIT- IV

Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various

control Charts

UNIT- V

Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification

COURSE OUTCOME-

Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to

explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key

aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for

controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp

communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze

the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise

and evaluate quality implementation plans

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay

bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd

bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas

bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd

bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition

7th

Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012

bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM CONCEPTS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 525

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism

To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash

Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp

Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and

development of Tourism through the ages

UNIT II

COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash

Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism

inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious

Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions

incentives sports and adventure tourism

UNIT III

TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash

Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of

motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash

health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and

push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists

UNIT IV

IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash

Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts

- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism

UNIT V

SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-

Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote

Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable

Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and

experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of

tourism experiences

REFERENCES BOOKS

Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling

Publishers Private Limited New Delhi

Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism

Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited

Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill

International

Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors

New Delhi

Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas

Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New

Delhi

TOURISM MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 526

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the basic concept and various components of management

UNIT I

MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-

Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of

management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)

Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management

UNIT II

PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-

Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of

planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by

objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance

and limitation of decision making

UNIT III

ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash

Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of

staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance

appraisal

UNIT IV

DIRECTING ndash

Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation

(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy

theory)

UNIT V

LEADERSHIP-

Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path

Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to

communication

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives

Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of

tourism as well as the impacts of tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc

Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New

Delhi

Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition

AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing

House New Delhi

Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition

Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations

To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism

industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-

Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing

Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and

Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash

Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New

Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING -

Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION -

Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity

Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in

promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level

which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described

REFERENCES BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson

Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition

Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent

learning

UNIT I

Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health

Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural

History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention

UNIT II

Definition and meaning of hospital ndash

Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing

concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of

Hospitals

UNIT III

Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector

Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in

delivering healthcare in India

UNIT IV

Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural

hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description

UNIT V

The reforms of Healthcare System-

The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare

reforms amp Future of Healthcare System

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding

the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the

management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and

organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services

REFERENCE BOOKS

The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991

Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd

Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers

HEALTH ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 529

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and

understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict

peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different

social actions

UNIT I

Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and

importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below

Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits

UNIT II

Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve

techniques and properties of indifference curve

UNIT III

Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash

Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of

Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of

Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of

demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash

Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue

UNIT IV

Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two

variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves

UNIT V

Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash

Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and

monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market

situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price

determination

COURSE OUTCOME

To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from

an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic

evaluation of a health intervention or program

REFERENCE BOOKS

Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR

Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP

Managerial Economics - Gupta GS

Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani

Business Economics - Sharma NK

Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar

Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi

Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL

HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 530

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions

related to records management in the healthcare environment

UNIT I

Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record

keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records

UNIT II

Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health

Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research

UNIT III

Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics

investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing

Pharmacy etc Audits)

UNIT IV

Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems

associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic

Related Groups (DRG)

UNIT V

Medical Registers ndash

Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various

departments amp common problems faced

COURSE OUTCOME

Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New

Delhi 1999

Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995

Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi

George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003

Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 531

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India

To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India

UNIT I

Rural Society in India

Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-

urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and

subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural

life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion

UNIT II

Rural Society

Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social

institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity

and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of

rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT-III

Village India

Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance

contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and

political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology

Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class

UNIT IV

Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics

Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid

growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope

and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -

Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT-V

Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times

Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social

processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India

Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy

Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms

REFERENCE BOOKS

Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi

Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay

PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House

SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication

House Delhi

ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 532

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To explain the nature of environmental studies

To introduce aspects of Natural resources

To introduce aspects of ecosystems

To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation

To introduce aspects of environmental pollution

To create awareness on social issues and environment

To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

UNIT I

Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for

public awareness

UNIT II

Ecosystems

Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and

decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and

Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the

following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic

Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)

UNIT III

Biodiversity and its Conservation

Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification

of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option

Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports

of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-

Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ

Conservation of biodiversity

UNIT IV

Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil

pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste

Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an

individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods

earthquake cyclone and landslides

20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT V

Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water

Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of

People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible

responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and

holocaust

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the nature of environmental studies

Classify renewable and non-renewable resources

Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues

Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation

Analyze aspects of environmental pollution

Describe aspects of social issues and environment

Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner

Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental

Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai

Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA

RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 533

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts

To familiarize Rural marketing strategy

To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems

To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing

To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages

UNIT I

Overview of Rural Marketing

Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing

and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction

Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class

UNIT II

Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for

rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT III

Rural Distribution Systems

Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche

markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of

Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT IV

ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network

(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction

Methodology Group Project work

UNIT V

Market support

Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role

play

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Market their products

Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products

Choose an appropriate distribution system

Apply ICT in rural marketing

Source the finance for rural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India

Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education

Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi

SEMESTER- VI

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allot

ted

Cred

its

Course

Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mark

s

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-601

Core

Course

E- Commerce

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-602 Core

Course

Customer

Relationship Management

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-603 Practical

Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva

Voce

100

50

17

-

-

50

20

- - 4 4

1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Grand Total

550

22

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one

paper presentation certificate in related discipline

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management

1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing

1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA607 Management of Change

1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management

1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management

1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service

1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business

1Y3BBA614 E- Governance

1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management

1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing

1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour

1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning

1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design

1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control

1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan

1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing

1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management

1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care

1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law

(Rural Management Group)

1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System

1Y3BBA632

Panchayati Raj

1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy

E- COMMERCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 601

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is

designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the

technical foundation for understanding information systems

UNIT I

Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting

online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a

business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-

commerce

UNIT II

Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet

(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A

systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing

vs in-house development of a website)

UNIT III

Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension

definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security

intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)

technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and

protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)

UNIT IV

E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards

e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online

banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house

automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments

UNIT V

Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting

online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of

utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online

services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and

entertainment

COURSE OUTCOME-

Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information

systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Management Information System Jawadekar

bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon

bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana

bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)

bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty

CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 602

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of

Customer Relationship Management in the organizations

UNIT- I

Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature

of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive

and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and

evaluating customer business plans

UNIT- II

Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer

database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing

customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively

Planning and making persuasive presentations

UNIT- III

Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality

Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality

managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and

Cross- sell

UNIT- IV

Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations

Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority

setting Target setting setting standards

UNIT- V

Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction

COURSE OUTCOME-

To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship

Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd

Ed Response Books Sage Publication

Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House

Pvt Ltd

Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books

Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management

V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008

Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management

South Western Cengage Learning

Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press

Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age

International

Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan

Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of

India Private Limted New Delhi 2011

S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private

Limted New Delhi 2008

ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 603

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to

work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn

the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final

semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by

the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a

student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their

analytical capabilities and experience

DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)

Title of the study (Cover Page)

Declaration

Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)

Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)

Acknowledgement

Table of Contents

Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Introduction

12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research

12 Significance of the study

13 Scope of the study

14 Research Problem

15 Objective of the study

17 Hypothesis

18 Limitations of the study

2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students

to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they

learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After

the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is

evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report

should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to

provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also

able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business

operations and come up with the ways to tap the

Opportunities

3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

31 Introduction

32 Population of the study

33 Sampling Design

331 Sampling Technique

332 Sampling Method

333 Sample Size

34 Research Instrument

35 Sources of data

351 Primary Data

352 Secondary Data

4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION

5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION

Bibliography

COURSE OUTCOME-

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able

to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and

come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities

MARKETING GROUP

PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 604

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the

context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product

manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions

UNIT- I

Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused

organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management

Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-

cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product

Development

UNIT- II

Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods

of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in

international Market

UNIT- III

Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity

concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand

Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image

UNIT- IV

Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system

measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement

Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market

segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining

and establishing brand values

UNIT- V

Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand

extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time

Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand

Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation

COURSE OUTCOME

The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of

Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for

Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning

implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer

Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi

Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi

Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi

Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education

New Delhi

Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi

Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata

McGraw Hill New Delhi

Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi

STRATEGIC MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 605

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and

implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and

managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver

superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation

through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills

UNIT- I

Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash

Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of

Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying

Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting

Marketing Objectives

UNIT-II

Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching

Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy

Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle

Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies

UNIT-III

Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp

Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models

UNIT- IV

Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives

Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy

Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing

UNIT- V

Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at

different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by

executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and

interdisciplinary nature

REFERENCE BOOKS

Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt

D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin

OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage

Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill

Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp

Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson

Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann

Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India

George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press

J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and

Programs McGraw-Hill Companies

Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub

Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon

P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave

E-MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 606

COURSE OBJECTIVE

It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance

enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns

UNIT- I

Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics

Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan

Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing

UNIT- II

Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in

India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within

communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing

UNIT- III

Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet

as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet

User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-

branding

UNIT- IV

Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-

marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools

Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent

Trends in e-customer service

UNIT- V

Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web

Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing

campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising

Course Outcome

Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics

online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its

implication on marketing strategy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a

networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill

Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall

Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning

Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books

Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial

Times

HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP

MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 607

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be

Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students

Understand the importance of managing change

UNIT- I

Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-

Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of

human resource strategies in implementing Change

UNIT-II

Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR

implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation

and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions

UNIT-III

HR Processes amp Change

Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned

change

Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change

UNIT- IV

Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in

employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management

of change implications of downsizing

UNIT- V

Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to

promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and

feedback

Course Outcome

Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more

effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change

process

REFERENCE BOOKS

A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human

Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education

Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill

Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage

South Asia Edition

K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation

Response Books

VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books

CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 608

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical

relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand

anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions

to ensure the organizational and individual success

UNIT-I

Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of

organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business

environment

UNIT-II

Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars

Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations

UNIT- III

Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock

Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system

(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)

UNIT- IV

Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and

repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally

appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural

negotiation and conflicts management

UNIT- V

Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual

countries Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development

of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning

Private Limited

G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill

Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley

Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing

Co

Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell

Business

Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times

McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp

Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation

Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson

Education India

GROUP DYNAMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 609

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group

dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group

effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of

resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding

UNIT-I

Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group

dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B

UNIT-II

Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group

Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash

Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress

UNIT-III

Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group

decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash

conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict

UNIT- IV

Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De

individuation theory

UNIT- V

Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources

of Change in groups

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups

REFERENCE BOOKS

Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley

Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass

Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co

Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE

Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and

application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax

along with basic concepts of VAT

UNIT-I

Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of

Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment

of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-II

Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature

and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax

planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business

UNIT-III

Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net

Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and

Penalties (Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-IV

Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for

service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of

Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)

UNIT- V

VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview

of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT

Law)

COURSE OUTCOME

Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields

REFERENCE BOOKS

Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications

Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub

Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House

T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India

BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson

S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann

R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _

INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 611

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important

components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO

Analysis etc

UNIT-I

INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian

Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role

in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)

UNIT-II

FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different

Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players

Different types of Instruments

UNIT-III

CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI

Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank

UNIT- IV

COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp

Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A

REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA

UNIT- V

NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies

Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture

Capital Funds

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment

Banking companies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication

Financial Services MY Khan TMH

Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication

S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran

ML Seth

FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 612

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and

prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of

uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding

of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role

of internal audit assessments

UNIT I

Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview

UNIT II

Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax

fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and

inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds

UNIT III

Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion

investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports

UNIT IV

Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using

Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)

UNIT V Case Study

1 Two Indian

2 Two international cases

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread

nature of fraud and its economic impact

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation

Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination

Cengage Learning

IT GROUP

INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 613

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security

managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues

in the information assurance field

UNIT I

Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian

Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its

application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law

Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour

Laws E-Media and Print Media

UNIT II

E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security

Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature

UNIT III

Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil

Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-

detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of

Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA

UNIT IV

IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal

issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base

UNIT V

Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of

Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules

COURSE OUTCOME-

Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House

Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co

John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River

Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher

Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University

E-GOVERNANCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 614

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information

Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an

awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the

issues concerning the Cyber security

UNIT I

Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National

E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status

UNIT II

E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process

Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges

UNIT III

E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-

Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics

UNIT IV

Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic

data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber

audit implications for e-governance

Unit V

Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and

construction of a joining table

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill

Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing

Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in

India ICFAI Press Hyderabad

B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill

H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications

V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd

IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 615

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization

UNIT I

IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT

Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo

Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for

IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library

UNIT II

Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service

Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support

Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change

Management Release Management

UNIT III

Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve

Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine

Recovery Data Retention

UNIT IV

Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security

Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection

UNIT V

IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and

Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and

Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of

Internet on Technical Support

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology

REFERENCE BOOKS

Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce

(OGC) TSO UK

Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos

Management Tata McGraw Hill

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 616

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques

and their management

UNIT I

Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations

of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and

distribution

UNIT II

Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and

factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging

of foods

UNIT III

Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food

industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO

etc

UNIT IV

Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products

cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking

confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of

fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH

Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie

Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing

Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH

MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 617

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing

concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs

UNIT I

Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution

channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-

farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing

UNIT II

Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds

Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of

NSC and State Seed Corporation

UNIT III

Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers

Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash

marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer

marketing

UNIT IV

Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash

marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of

electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity

UNIT V

Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm

machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines

implementsEquipmentlsquos

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with

various functional areas of agribusiness

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp

IBH

Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management

Kalyani

Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ

House

FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 618

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis

of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions

UNIT I

Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management

decisions farm management problems

UNIT II

Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle

principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc

UNIT III

Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm

records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement

farm efficiency measures

UNIT IV

Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc

UNIT V

Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to

counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks

and uncertainty

COURSE OUTCOME

Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses

REFERENCE BOOKS

Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall

Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ

Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ

Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ

RETAIL GROUP

BUYER BEHAVIOUR

Course Code 1Y3BBA 619

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer

decisions making

UNIT-I

A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic

Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market

Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making

UNIT-II

Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles

of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer

Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and

Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product

Relationship

UNIT-III

Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to

information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-

Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors

Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications

UNIT-IV

Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing

Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-

Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions

Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy

UNIT-V

Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics

lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they

experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and

impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour

COURSE OUTCOME

Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the

choices consumers make

REFERENCE BOOKS

JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata

Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006

Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context

Excel Books NewDelhi-2001

Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous

DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing

Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi

Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining

Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005

Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000

RETAIL PLANNING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 620

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational

decision-making processes in the organized retail

UNIT I

Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail

Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-

Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative

methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management

UNIT II

Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics

Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp

non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion

designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting

Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-

Management of Obsolete goods

UNIT III

Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer

psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical

Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices

UNIT IV

Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-

Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp

Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective

Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer

Rights- Consumer Protection Acts

UNIT V

Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing

Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-

Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels

REFERENCE BOOKS

Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies

Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies

Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson

Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund

amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson

Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice

Hall of India New Delhi

Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies

Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best

People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd

RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 621

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the

value it creates

UNIT I

Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When

How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience

Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency

UNIT II

Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated

Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-

Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-

UNIT III

Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on

Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-

Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display

Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-

UNIT IV

Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium

Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and

Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-

Trade Dealing

UNIT V

Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-

Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating

Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing

to act in ways that increase loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -

Prentice-Hall

Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology

Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales

Promotion Techniques

Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate

Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page

Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books

George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing

Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill

PRODUCTION GROUP

PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL

Course Code 1Y3BBA 622

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a

basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of

facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality

control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an

understanding of the concept of aggregate planning

UNIT- I

Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors

Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-

requisites of PPC

UNIT- II

Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in

Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining

Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control

Models)

UNIT- III

Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection

Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master

production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of

software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II

UNIT- IV

Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n

job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling

Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)

UNIT- V

Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control

function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications

bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi

Deep and Deep Publications

PROCESS REENGINEERING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 623

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of

business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering

projects

UNIT- I

Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp

pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR

UNIT- II

Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering

project organizing for process reengineering

UNIT- III

Process analysis and design

a) Process analysis

(b) Process design

UNIT- IV

Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition

tracking and measuring process performance

UNIT- V

Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology

Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact

measurement

COURSE OUTCOME

To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the

considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-

engineering project

REFERENCE BOOKS

Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata

McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater

Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester

John Wiley amp Sons

WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn

the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time

standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering

to design of work systems

UNIT- I

Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos

productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity

Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time

Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities

Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was

developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph

UNIT- II

Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting

up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion

Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand

Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and

Design of Tools amp Equipment

UNIT- III

Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard

from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and

Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work

Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling

UNIT- IV

Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage

Incentive Plans

The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for

Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action

UNIT-V

Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion

Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System

Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts

Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional

including understanding the need for quality

REFERENCE BOOKS

iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill

ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation

Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp

Sons

Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall

Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall

Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press

Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall

Mall East and London

Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN

Course Code 1Y3BBA 625

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in

it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative

impacts of tourism development

UNIT I

Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism

Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of

Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in

Tourism Development

UNIT II

Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning

system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos

Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-

Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in

learning system

UNIT III

Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable

development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist

Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash

The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash

Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities

UNIT IV

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage

of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment

UNIT IV

Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the

Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National

Policy on Ecology and Environment

COURSE OUTCOME

To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global

perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international

tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for

sustainable tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash

Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications

Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers

Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William

Heinemann Ltd

Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices

London Pitman Publishing

Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York

Kendall Hunt Publishing Company

Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan

Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman

Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford

University Press

New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable

Development Approach VNR and New York

TOURISM MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 626

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism

and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing

that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products

before the stakeholders of tourism industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing

Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and

Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market

Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing

Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for

different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing

Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales

promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital

communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future

It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are

needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be

a part of this growth

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar

Thomson Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd

edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of

Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry

UNIT I

HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of

Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads

ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and

marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents

UNIT II

RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief

History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway

Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway

station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains

express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world

heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes

UNIT III

AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth

Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled

Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature

Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players

Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and

performance marketing strategies of Air India

UNIT IV

WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover

crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going

traffic) ndash National waterways

UNIT V

CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing

stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and

Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation

COURSE OUTCOME

Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of

the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management

REFERENCE BOOKS

RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 628

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of

its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing

knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital

Management

UNIT I

Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its

impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need

principles purpose

UNIT II

Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and

their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply

department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health

and patient safety

UNIT III

Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of

biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules

standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging

transportation amp storage

UNIT IV

Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier

methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal

decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of

wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan

UNIT V

Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party

insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash

meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural

disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague

typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics

COURSE OUTCOME

To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost

containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges

arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs

and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its

various components

REFERENCE BOOKS

Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication

First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn

Park k - Preventive and social medicine

Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot

MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 629

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted

advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public

relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any

potential crisis that may arise

UNIT I

Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches

to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of

marketing functions of marketing

UNIT II

Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment

Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market

segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash

positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing

UNIT III

Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior

(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying

decision process

UNIT IV

Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp

deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product

development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling

UNIT V

Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing

policies and strategies

Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management

decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels

COURSE OUTCOME

Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an

integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare

professionals and the public

REFERENCE BOOKS

Philip Kotler - marketing management

Wiliam jStanton - marketing management

Sherleker S A - marketing management

J C Gandhi - marketing management

Davar - modern marketing management

Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub

P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research

Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research

HOSPITALS RELATED LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 630

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of

common-law development

UNIT ndash I

Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties

sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance

act trust act societies registration act

UNIT ndashII

Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of

human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act

1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971

mental health act patient consent

UNIT ndash III

Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948

narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods

act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration

UNIT ndash IV

Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act

1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916

maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing

order) act trade union act industrial disputes act

UNIT ndashV

Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in

hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical

negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical

establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal

pronouncements rulings and regulations

REFERENCE BOOKS

Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer

Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law

Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 631

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India

To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural

Production system in India

To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India

To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development

UNIT -1

Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions

ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology

Case analysis and discussion

UNIT II

Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash

Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture

UNIT III

Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-

Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India

UNIT IV

Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of

holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus

land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas

UNIT V

Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash

Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and

schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM

COURSE OUTCOMES

Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management

Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India

Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development

REFERENCE BOOKS

Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution

Can We Make London Department for International Development

Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House

PANCHAYATI RAJ

Course Code 1Y3BBA632

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration

To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites

To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance

To provide insights on Rural Administration

To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes

UNIT I

Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction

Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges

Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration

(Official and non-official) and report submission

UNIT III

Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission

UNIT IV

Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and

Block- Panchayat relationship

Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play

UNIT V

Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government

Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan

Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

COURSE OUTCOMES

Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village

Development interventions

Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its

power Structure

Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and

Plans

Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes

32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959

Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise

Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi

Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New

Delhi

RURAL ECONOMY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 633

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy

To help students understand their role in rural economic development

To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources

To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation

To create awareness on rural economic development

UNIT I

Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-

Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries

(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in

agriculture individual production other production services

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-

Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash

Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land

Reforms

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

UNIT III

Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation

programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs

UNIT IV

Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work

UNIT V

Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing

ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for

the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy

Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village

Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues

Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation

Facilities

Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi

Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi

Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic

Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New

Delhi

INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER

Mid Semester Examination (MSE)

There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5

descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered

End Semester Examination (ESE)

There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks

each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of

10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered

Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations

The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment

Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be

applicable

(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )

Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type

End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size

Page 5: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020

MIL HINDI COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 101

fgUnh Okdjk oa laizskk

इकाई-I

हहनदीवयाकरण और रचना सजञा सरवनाम हरशष ाण हिया अवयय कारक रचन सहधउपसगव परतयय

तथासमास

ह गहनणवय पयावयराची शबद हर ोम शबद अन क शबदो क ह ए एक शबद

शबद शदधि राकय शदधि महारर और ोकोदधिया पललरन एर सकष पण

इकाई-II

हनबध क ातथासमसामहयक एरराषटर ीय हरषया परहनबधा खन

इकाई-III

सपर षण (सचार)

-सपर षण की अरधारणऔरमहतव सपरष ाण क ह ए आरशयक शत सपरष ाण क परकार

सपर षणकामाधयम सपर षणक ा सपर षण की तकनीक राचनक ा समाचारराचन साकषातकारक ा

रचनातमक खनका कषय रचनातमक ख ानकाआधार भारऔरहरचारोकीपरसतहत राक क ा की

उपयोहगता

अनशसितपसतक -

रहतवयाकरणभासकर डा 0 रचनद रकमार

रहतहनबधाभासकर डा 0 रचनदर कमार

आधहनकहहनदीवयाकरणऔररचना डा 0 रासद रननदनपरसाद

रचनामानस परो0 राम शवरनाथहतरारी

वयरहाररकहहनदी डा 0 जग बहादरपाणड य

रचनातमक खन डा 0 रमश ागौतम

राजहसहहनदीहनबध परो0 आर0 एन0 गौड़

सफ हहनदीहनबध रतन शवर

हनबध सहचर डा 0 कषमणपरसाद

उपकारमहारर और ाक ोदधियाा पार 0 राज शवरपरसादचतरव दी

कहाहनयोकहारता की परतापअनम

समपर षणपरकहहनदीभाषाहशकषण डा 0 रशनानारग

श ीहरजञान डा 0 सर शकमार

श ीहरजञानपरहतमानऔरहरशल षण डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo

श ीहरजञानकाइहतहास डा 0 पाड य शहशभषाण शीताशाlsquo

ORGANIZATION BEHAVIOUR

Course Code 1Y3BBA102

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Students study the behaviour of individuals and groups as part of the social and technical system in

the workplace They examine individual and group behaviour communication conflict and various

management styles motivational techniques and coordination in the work environment and apply

these concepts to the development of an organizations human resources

UNIT I

Organization Overview of the concept and relevance of organizational Behaviour meaning Nature

Scope features approaches model challenges and opportunities functions amp Role of manager

Planning process Decision making Process

UNIT II

Foundation of individual Behavior Biography ability personality (determinants and models)

perception (definition components factors affecting perception in decision making) Values

Beliefs etc

UNIT III

Individual Behavior- Attitude Definition importance Types Attitude regarding- Job

Satisfaction Involvement commitment effects of employee attitude changing attitudes

Learning Definition nature theories classical conditioning operant conditioning cognitive

Learning Social learning

UNIT IV

Motivation Concept and theories (Maslow McGregor Herzberg ERG) merits amp demerits Group

dynamics amp Team work Nature theories types of group Definition Stages of Group Development

effectiveness potential problems Analysis of Interpersonal Relationship Transactional Analysis

Johari Window

UNIT- V

Organizational change and development approaches and methods stress nature source effects

conflicts employee counseling approaches extra mural penitential learning programmers case

study

COURSE OUTCOME

To explain group dynamics and demonstrate skills required for working in groups (team building)

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Luthans Fred Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India

bull Mishra MN Behaviour Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi

bull Newstrom W John Davis Keith Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India

bull LM Roy Organisational Behaviour S Chand Publication

bull Dr FC Sharma Organisational Behaviour SBPD Publications

INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ACCOUNTING

Course Code 1Y3BBA103

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable students to synthesize related information and evaluate options for most logical and

optimal solution such that they would be able to predict and control cost incurrence and improve

results

UNIT- I

Accounting Basic of Accounting Accounting Mechanics-Double Entry System Classification

Rules for Debit amp Credit Journal Ledger and Trial Balance sub-division of journal Ledger meaning subdivision and mechanics of Posting balancing ledger accounts

UNIT- II

Cash book and Subsidiary books of Accounting Kinds of Cash Book Purchase day book and sale

day Book Bank reconciliation statement Measurement of income- Adjusting entries- rectification of

errors- Adjusted trial balance

UNIT-III

Preparation of financial statements- Trading account Profit amp Loss account Balance Sheet (with

Adjustments) Accounting for Non-profit organization Accounting Procedures Receipts amp payment

accounts income ampexpenditure account problems

UNIT- IV

Depreciation- Meaning Determinant factors Method amp Significance Basic Concepts of hire

purchase amp installments

UNIT- V

Partnership-Preliminary admission of a partner Company Accounts-Issue of shares Debentures

Forfeitures and reissue of shares

COURSE OUTCOME

Analyse the complexities associated with management of cost of product and services in the

Organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

SA Siddiqui- Comprehensive Accounting

TS Greval- Introduction to Accounting

Mukherjee and M Accounting (Volume-I)

SN Maheshwar- Introduction to Accounting (Vikas Publication)

CAC Rama Gopal Accounting For Managers (New Age)

BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational

and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business

UNIT I

Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro

environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis

for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business

UNIT II

Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic

systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years

plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent

economic initiatives NitiAyog

UNIT III

Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment

problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance

of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural

Development Problems of Growth

UNIT IV

Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment

Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA

and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act

UNIT V

International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational

Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic

Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-

GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India

COURSE OUTCOME

Outline how an entity operates in a business environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996

Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi

Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan

Chand Delhi

Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi

PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA105

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to

articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate

effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the

consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and

quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods

UNIT-I

Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of

Management Functions of the Manager

UNIT- II

Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of

Planning

Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and

type of Policies

Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems

involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques

UNIT- III

Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of

Units and committees

Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship

UNIT- IV

Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training

Directing Nature and purpose and directing

UNIT- V

Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control

process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies

COURSE OUTCOME-

Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques

managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of

managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify

and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own

position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied

audiences

Reference Books

bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher

bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson

Education

bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt

Ltd 4th Ed

bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill

Publications

SEMESTER II

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distributio

n

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor

Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distribu

tion Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Ma

x

Ma

rks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme

nt

Compulsory

Course

English

communication

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA202 Core Course

Management concept amp

Principle

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA203 Core

Course

Environmental

Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA204 Core

Course

Monetary

Economics and

Indian Banking

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA205 Core

Course

Business

Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA205 Business

Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhanceme

nt

Skill Enhancement

Elective

Course-I

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand

Total 600 21 5 - 24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

ENGLISH COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA201

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English

language teaching and content writing sectors

UNIT I

Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning

Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening

UNIT II

Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive

writing expansion of an idea

UNIT III

Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing

(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume

writing covering letter

UNIT IV

Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases

UNIT V

Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb

agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions

(Advanced)

COURSE OUTCOME

To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill

Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul

Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan

Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das

Orient Blackswan

Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press

Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication

MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 202

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and

process of effective controlling in the organization

UNIT I

Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science

Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)

UNIT II

School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and

Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)

Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management

UNIT III

Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing

Staffing Directing and Coordinating

UNIT IV

Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command

Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control

UNIT V

Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure

determination Forms- formal amp informal organization

Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations

COURSE OUTCOME

Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial

functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management

REFERENCE BOOKS

LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management

VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management

James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB

Fred Luthans- OB

ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 203

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links

between human and natural systems

UNIT I

Introduction to environmental studies

Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability

and sustainable development

UNIT II

Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an

ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following

ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds

streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)

Unit III

Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to

mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and

over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international

ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate

energy sources growing energy needs case studies

UNIT IV

Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem

diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots

Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and

Informational value

UNIT V

Environmental Pollution

Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution

Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and

Industrial waste Pollution case studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social

and environmental processes

REFERENCE BOOKS

California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London

Routledge

Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security

Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press

Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of

ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006

Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37

McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books

McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the

Twentieth Century

Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders

Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic

Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt

Ltd

Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons

Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi

1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP

Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation

S Chand Publishing New Delhi

MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING

Course Code 1Y3BBA204

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using

statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills

within the contest of subject matter of economics

UNIT I

Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of

Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value

of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income

theory of Money

UNIT II

Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people

Money Market

UNIT III

Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial

Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks

UNIT IV

Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control

methods and Tools of Monetary Policy

UNIT V

RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative

Banks and Rural Banks

COURSE OUTCOME

Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and

mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of

economics

REFERENCE BOOKS

MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi

LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi

Crowther- An Out Line of Money

Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant

KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ

BUSINESS COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA205

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative

scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication

UNIT I

Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports

OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)

UNIT II

Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other

words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis

UNIT III

Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers

Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers

UNIT IV

Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a

Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication

Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)

UNIT V

Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written

Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp

minutes

COURSE OUTCOME

To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical

proficiency in the development of exposition and argument

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wren amp Martin

K Madhukar- Business Communication

VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication

Asha Laul- Business Communication

Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH

SEMESTER III

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotte

d

Credit

s

Course Code Course

Type

Course

Title

Total

Mark

s

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subjec

t wise

Distrib

ution

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA301

Ability

Enhancement

IT Tool for Business

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA302

Core Course

Introduction to Marketing

Management

100 50 17 20 7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA303 Core

Course

Business

Law

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA304 Core

Course

Business

statistics for

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA305

Core

Course

Retail

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA304 Practical

Business

statistics for Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill

Enhancemen

t Elective Course-II

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand Total 600 24

IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 301

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software

components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data

base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT

UNIT-I

Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and

Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World

Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept

UNIT-II

Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different

computer generation

UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and

Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming

Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-

principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart

examples

UNIT-IV

Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation

applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)

Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information

System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems

Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human

Resources Management Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations

Understand the hardware and software components of the computer

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford

2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication

3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication

4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill

INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 302

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply

these to a new or existing business

UNIT I

Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept

amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro

environment

UNIT II

Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of

Product Line amp Product- mix

UNIT III

Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing

decisions Overview of pricing process

UNIT IV

Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product

Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage

UNIT V

Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to

marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct

selling

COURSE OUTCOME

To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct

an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an

appropriate format

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Philip Kotler

2 TN Chabra

3 TK Panda

4 SH Kazmi

5 Arun Kumar

BUSINESS LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 303

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal

environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with

knowledge of legal principles

UNIT-I

Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration

capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts

Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp

Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency

UNIT-II

Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp

Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales

UNIT-III

Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -

Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a

negotiable instrument

UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of

non-registration Dissolution of a firm

UNIT-V

Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of

Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013

COURSE OBJECTIVE

On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to

individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context

Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 ND Kapoor

2 Tulsian

3 MC Kuchhal

4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business

BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 304

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management

UNIT I

Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance

Scope and Limitation of Statistic

UNIT II

Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar

Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive

UNIT III

Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic

Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures

of dispersion

UNIT IV

Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and

Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index

number CPI WPI IIP

UNIT V

Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank

Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series

COURSE OUTCOME

Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically

discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons

2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication

3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication

RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in

India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone

Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT

FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan

Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process

UNIT II

FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail

Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors

Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing

MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer

Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design

and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication

UNIT III

STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty

Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors

UNIT IV

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management

IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service

Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM

Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying

UNIT V

MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at

Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems

at Retail Centers

Course Outcome-

Reference Books

bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education

bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A

Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education

The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge

about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various

aspects of retail operations

After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with

the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the

entire retail operations

SEMESTER IV

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code Course

Type Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subject

wise

Distributio

n

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mark

s

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-401

Ability

Enhanceme

nt

Introduction to

soft skill amp

Team Building

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA-402 Core Course

Introduction to

financial

management

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-403 Core Course

Advertising

and Sales

Promotion

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-404 Core Course

Management

of Human resource

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of

Business

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group

Term End

Practical

Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-404 Practical

Management

of Human

resource

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-405 Practical

Macro

Economics of Business

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

Grand Total 550 22

INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 401

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate

students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners

by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are

learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for

their own learning

UNIT ndash I

General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of

Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences

Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making

Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of

communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of

Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation

UNIT ndash II

Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing

skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice

modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements

General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral

skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive

Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style

UNIT ndash III

Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format

and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in

Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active

Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD

UNIT ndash IV

Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction

Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview

Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing

Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of

Conversation

UNIT ndash V

Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional

Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers

COURSE OUTCOME

To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills

and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin

bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar

INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 402

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital

decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and

raising long-term finance

UNIT I

Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives

Role of finance manager

UNIT II

Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of

investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return

Comparison between NPV amp IRR

UNIT III

Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of

Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning

capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure

UNIT IV

The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage

Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating

Leverage

UNIT V

Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital

estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of

inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order

Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy

COURSE OUTCOME

Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial

manager in the current competitive business scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 IM Pandey

2 P Chandra

3 SP Gupta

4 MY Khan

ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 403

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may

review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos

homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions

UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising

budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for

Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising

UNIT II

Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy

Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role

types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council

of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)

UNIT III

Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring

awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of

design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet

advertising and evaluation of advertising

UNIT IV

Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors

influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option

Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of

consumer schemes and other methods of promotion

UNIT V

Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs

Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales

personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion

COURSE OUTCOME

Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how

these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its

relation to todaylsquos marketplace

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall

Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi

Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi

Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications

MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 404

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource

management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational

setting

UNIT-I

Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with

special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in

strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management

UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge

workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)

Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)

UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of

human resource department and the role of human resource manager

UNITndashIV

Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification

rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation

UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection

(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction

COURSE OUTCOME

To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training

Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical

Behaviour

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi

Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New

Delhi

Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York

HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications

A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications

MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the

important indicators of the economy and their significance

UNIT I

Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of

Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income

Personal and Personal disposable income

UNIT II

Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income

Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and

Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator

Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate

demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy

UNIT III

Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate

demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government

expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary

and fiscal policy

UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary

policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production

Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation

monetary measures fiscal measures

UNIT V

Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and

corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in

open economy

COURSE OUTCOME

To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the

role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson

2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill

3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers

4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson

SEMESTER V

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment

Internal Assessment Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-501

Ability Enhancement

Public Relation amp Corporate Image

50

25

8

10

4

15

6

2

-

-

2

1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and

small Business

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-503

Core Course Principle of

Economics

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-502

Practical Entrepreneurship and

small Business

50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics

50

25 08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Skill Course

Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill Enhancement

Elective Course-III

50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2

Grand Total

600

24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication

1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management

1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India

1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation

1Y3BBA509 Organization Development

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision

1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management

1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA513 Database Management System

1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service

1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy

1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management

1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management

1Y3BBA520 Stores Management

1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA522 Technology Management

1Y3BBA523 Productivity

1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept

1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management

1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System

1Y3BBA529 Health Economics

1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management

(Rural Management Group )

1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity

1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment

1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management

SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES

Non-Technical

Elective No Department Faculty Name

Faculty of Information Technology

I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)

II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)

IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)

V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Management

I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)

II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)

III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development

Faculty of Commerce

I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)

II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Humanities

I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)

II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)

III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Science

I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)

II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)

III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)

IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)

V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Education

I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)

II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)

PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA501

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts

of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling

and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization

UNIT- I

Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash

Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy

Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors

ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public

Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations

UNIT- II

Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service

Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social

Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy

for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation

Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event

Management

UNIT- III

Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash

Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public

Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of

Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control

UNIT IV

Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies

Components of an Individual Image

Advertising and Corporate Image

Public Relations of an Institutions

UNIT V

The Grapevine and Rumours

Stereotype

Propaganda

Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations

applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different

entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling

REFERENCE BOOKS

Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House

Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House

Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University

Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill

This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning

ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-

The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding

processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to

those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic

environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide

evidence which informs those debates

UNIT I

Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of

Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its

environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship

UNIT II

Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship

development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the

Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making

UNIT III

Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that

enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in

Social context Start Up

UNIT IV

Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional

source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital

UNIT V

Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication

2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd

3 Vasant Desai

4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH

PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 503

COURSE OBJECTIVES-

To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production

UNIT- I

Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits

UNIT-II

Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus

movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts

of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications

of demand and supply price rationing price floors

Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price

elasticity cross and income elasticity

UNIT-III

Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility

Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp

Producer surplus

UNIT-IV

Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant

and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue

and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale

UNIT-V

Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of

the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run

equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment

concept

COURSE OUTCOME-

To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011

bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th

edition

2007

bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA

bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press

Oxford

bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore

MARKETING GROUP

INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so

that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to

enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications

UNIT-I

Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC

in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising

appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion

relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship

between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods

Interactive Internet Marketing

UNIT-II

Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach

establishing and allocating promotional budget

UNIT-III

IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different

forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning

creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design

considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client

Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork

UNIT-IV

Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering

key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and

media research

Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration

client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc

UNIT-V

Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing

Communications

COURSE OUTCOME-

To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches

and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to

communicating to target audiences

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc

Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard

D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois

Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing

House

Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and

Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication

Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH

Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing

Communications Pearson Education Limited

Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc

Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House

Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning

Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc

Homewood Illinois

Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic

Approach Cengage Learning

Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India

Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education

SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT

Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE

It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and

distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and

distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners

UNIT-I

Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies

Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling

objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring

Procedure Socialization

UNIT-II

Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program

Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation

Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial

Evaluation of Contest

UNIT-III

Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel

Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales

Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process

UNIT-IV

Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key

tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market

Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation

UNIT-V

Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners

Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict

Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International

Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales

COURSE OUTCOME

Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the

sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans

participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables

REFERENCE BOOKS

Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres

Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books

Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI

L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills

Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets

Greenwood Publishing Group

Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub

ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH

Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing

consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing

research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students

within a course project

UNIT-I

Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing

Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research

Process Marketing Research Designs

UNIT-II

The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques

Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of

Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic

Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical

Analysis Tools

UNIT-III

Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)

ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor

Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental

Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores

Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-

hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number

UNIT-IV

Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product

Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant

Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification

Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing

Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and

their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity

UNIT-V

Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning

in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report

and class presentation of the same

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from

analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor

analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis

REFERENCE BOOKS

Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi

William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi

Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi

Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill

Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research

Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey

Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning

Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp

Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced

in the class

HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP

LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA

Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of

Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity

objectivity and understandings

UNIT-I

The Factories Act 1948

The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923

The Employees State Insurance Act 1948

UNIT-II

The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952

The Payment of gratuity Act 1972

UNIT-III

The Maternity Benefit Act 1961

The Minimum Wages act 1948

UNIT-IV

The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946

The Payment of Bonus Act 1965

UNIT-V

The Apprentices Act 1969

The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959

COURSE OUTCOME ndash

To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour

Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the

organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to

follow the Laws applicable to the establishment

REFERENCE BOOKS

S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications

S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi

Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot

V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House

N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons

INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE

In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our

country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of

Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be

acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the

concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India

UNIT-I

Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors

affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial

relation programme

Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact

of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes

lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry

UNIT-II

Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal

Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective

bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective

collective bargaining collective bargaining in India

UNIT-III

Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education

scheme in India- objectives functions and problems

Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation

schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India

UNIT-IV

Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India

major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions

registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union

UNIT-V

Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery

Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation

submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court

industrial tribunals

Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power

of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute

COURSE OUTCOME

Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective

bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute

resolution

REFERENCE BOOKS

Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts

IIPM Personnel Management in India

Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business

Publication Ltd

Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India

Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India

Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication

Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co

Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law

ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational

culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the

human values in individuals

UNIT-I

Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational

Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development

Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining

and survey research amp feedback methodology

UNIT-II

Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in

organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief

systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development

UNIT-III

Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component

interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief

of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action

UNIT-IV

OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team

building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process

interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions

important for successful OD efforts

UNIT ndash V

HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational

implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional

Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have

improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi

Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York

McGrawhill

Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in

addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a

good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company

UNIT-I

Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm

Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-

Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of

Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering

UNIT-II

Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the

analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount

of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a

Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and

Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis

UNIT-III

Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues

and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements

medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings

Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project

finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing

UNIT-IV

Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of

financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing

Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect

cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization

UNIT-V

Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value

Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic

indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added

Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total

Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)

COURSE OUTCOME

Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and

corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts

REFERENCE BOOKS

Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill

Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial

environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a

multinational corporation

UNIT-I

Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation

functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial

management International monetary system

UNIT-II

Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories

ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible

exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer

Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options

Currency swaps and interest rate swaps

UNIT-III

Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction

transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction

exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The

national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International

capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)

UNIT-IV

International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic

considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)

Financial risk and cost of capital

Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of

capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-

20 subsidiaries and tax havens

UNIT-V

International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their

comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets

Recent developments in the Euro bond market

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations

and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley

PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall

Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall

Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis

Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co

Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall

Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers

Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath

FINANCIAL INCLUSION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion

such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss

the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to

promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models

UNIT-I

Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting

Access to Financial Services

Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive

Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators

UNIT-II

Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey

Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional

Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card

UNIT-III

Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India

Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations

Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor

UNIT-IV

SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of

microfinance evolved in India

Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial

Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for

Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for

Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People

UNIT-V

Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises

Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion

and Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account

initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage

Publication

Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House

Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech

Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications

Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications

Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing

Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI

Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI

Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag

Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion

Academic Foundation

IT GROUP

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to

manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the

hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment

UNIT-I

The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures

File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base

Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial

Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness

UNIT-II

Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface

with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database

Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design

UNIT-III

Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database

Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database

Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases

UNIT-IV

DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance

Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues

UNIT-V

Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the

field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective

faculty during the coverage of syllabus

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic

concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational

algebra and SQL

REFERENCE BOOKS

Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs

Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan

Press

McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co

MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It

aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing

implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services

UNIT-I

The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development

Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The

Enabling Environment for ITES

UNIT-II

Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled

Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of

Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services

UNIT-III

Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support

Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions

UNIT-IV

International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting

Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in

facilitating Trade in ITESTITES

UNIT-V

Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of

Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of

Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace

Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations

and integrate the learning in handling these complexities

REFERENCE BOOKS

Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat

E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing

SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information

technology with various aspects of Software Project Management

UNIT-I

Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision

and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM

Framework

UNIT-II

Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning

Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan

Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration

and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning

UNIT-III

Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an

Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques

Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule

Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools

UNIT-IV

Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance

Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior

Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review

UNIT-V

Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks

Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk

COURSE OUTCOME

Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business

context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business

scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson

Education Ltd

P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp

Tsinghua University Press

R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance

Management Concepts Pub

Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group

B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science

Press

A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications

G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on

understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business

UNIT I

Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm

production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country

UNIT II

Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms

and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business

sector

UNIT III

Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations

relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries

UNIT IV

Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment

and policy

UNIT V

Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies

COURSE OUTCOME

Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper

and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain

REFERENCE BOOKS

Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons

Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ

Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ

AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 517

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies

strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms

UNIT I

Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market

structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp

significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of

marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour

UNIT II

Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash

significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product

product life cycle

UNIT III

Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies

and pricing methods

UNIT IV

Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and

standardization

UNIT V

Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural

products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in

agribusiness

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better

understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for

agricultural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH

Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall

Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control

Pearson Edu

Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu

Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India

FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 518

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food

marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen

and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural

political and economic forces over time

UNIT I

Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade

Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of

Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic

factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer

UNIT II

Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling

food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing

in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions

across the chain in food retail food service marketing

UNIT III

4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing

Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system

Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement

Strategies for food retailers

UNIT IV

Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling

Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food

Products

UNIT V

Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training

Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in

retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze

Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing

REFERENCE BOOKS

Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of

India

Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu

Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill

RETAIL GROUP

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in

the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it

UNIT- I

Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management

Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain

networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain

Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network

UNIT- II

Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer

service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs

multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier

Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants

UNIT- III

Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory

models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system

UNIT- IV

COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip

Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION

TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain

Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management

UNIT- V

Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a

Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance

measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics

quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics

COURSE OUTCOME

After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain

which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House

bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers

bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg

bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi

bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan

STORES MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 520

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different

terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned

areas

UNIT- I

Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the

location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design

UNIT- II

Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual

Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors

UNIT- III

Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at

Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores

Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments

UNIT- IV

Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies

Quick Response System

UNIT- V

Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact

on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space

Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization

COURSE OUTCOME

The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern

and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management

bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing

bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach

bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing

bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing

RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 521

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail

Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail

business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management

UNIT I

Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail

equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail

market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-

Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India

UNIT II

Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development

The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and

Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-

Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on

ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response

marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks

The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management

UNIT III

Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM

Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch

points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services

Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM

Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding

Common Barriers

UNIT IV

Services Management

Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the

service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-

Supply relationships vehicle routing

UNIT V

Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising

Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping

the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand

management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-

2nd edition 2006

MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational

edititionUS1798

Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education

New Delhi 2003

JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy

Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi

Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy

Pearson Education New Delhi 2004

KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005

Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007

Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House

Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution

rosenbloom and Education Foundation US

PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 522

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

UNIT- I

Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology

Change Implication

UNIT- II

Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying

UNIT- III

Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology

Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management

UNIT- IV

Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology

Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages

UNIT- V

Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise

Level

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to

manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009

bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009

bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson

PRODUCTIVITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 523

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

UNIT- I

Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and

external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work

Contents and Ineffective Time

UNIT- II

Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram

String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart

UNIT- III

Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart

UNIT- IV

Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be

Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement

UNIT- V

Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International

Labour Office Geneva

bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed

bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill

bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India

QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO

Course Code 1Y3BBA 524

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify

the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and

measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current

issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans

UNIT- I

Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives

UNIT- II

Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect

concept

UNIT- III

Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality

UNIT- IV

Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various

control Charts

UNIT- V

Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification

COURSE OUTCOME-

Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to

explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key

aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for

controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp

communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze

the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise

and evaluate quality implementation plans

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay

bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd

bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas

bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd

bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition

7th

Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012

bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM CONCEPTS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 525

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism

To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash

Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp

Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and

development of Tourism through the ages

UNIT II

COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash

Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism

inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious

Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions

incentives sports and adventure tourism

UNIT III

TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash

Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of

motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash

health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and

push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists

UNIT IV

IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash

Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts

- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism

UNIT V

SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-

Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote

Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable

Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and

experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of

tourism experiences

REFERENCES BOOKS

Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling

Publishers Private Limited New Delhi

Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism

Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited

Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill

International

Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors

New Delhi

Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas

Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New

Delhi

TOURISM MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 526

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the basic concept and various components of management

UNIT I

MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-

Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of

management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)

Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management

UNIT II

PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-

Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of

planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by

objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance

and limitation of decision making

UNIT III

ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash

Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of

staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance

appraisal

UNIT IV

DIRECTING ndash

Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation

(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy

theory)

UNIT V

LEADERSHIP-

Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path

Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to

communication

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives

Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of

tourism as well as the impacts of tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc

Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New

Delhi

Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition

AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing

House New Delhi

Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition

Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations

To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism

industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-

Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing

Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and

Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash

Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New

Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING -

Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION -

Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity

Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in

promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level

which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described

REFERENCES BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson

Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition

Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent

learning

UNIT I

Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health

Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural

History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention

UNIT II

Definition and meaning of hospital ndash

Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing

concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of

Hospitals

UNIT III

Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector

Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in

delivering healthcare in India

UNIT IV

Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural

hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description

UNIT V

The reforms of Healthcare System-

The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare

reforms amp Future of Healthcare System

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding

the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the

management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and

organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services

REFERENCE BOOKS

The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991

Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd

Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers

HEALTH ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 529

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and

understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict

peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different

social actions

UNIT I

Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and

importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below

Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits

UNIT II

Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve

techniques and properties of indifference curve

UNIT III

Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash

Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of

Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of

Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of

demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash

Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue

UNIT IV

Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two

variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves

UNIT V

Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash

Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and

monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market

situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price

determination

COURSE OUTCOME

To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from

an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic

evaluation of a health intervention or program

REFERENCE BOOKS

Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR

Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP

Managerial Economics - Gupta GS

Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani

Business Economics - Sharma NK

Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar

Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi

Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL

HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 530

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions

related to records management in the healthcare environment

UNIT I

Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record

keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records

UNIT II

Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health

Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research

UNIT III

Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics

investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing

Pharmacy etc Audits)

UNIT IV

Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems

associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic

Related Groups (DRG)

UNIT V

Medical Registers ndash

Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various

departments amp common problems faced

COURSE OUTCOME

Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New

Delhi 1999

Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995

Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi

George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003

Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 531

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India

To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India

UNIT I

Rural Society in India

Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-

urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and

subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural

life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion

UNIT II

Rural Society

Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social

institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity

and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of

rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT-III

Village India

Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance

contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and

political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology

Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class

UNIT IV

Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics

Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid

growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope

and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -

Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT-V

Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times

Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social

processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India

Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy

Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms

REFERENCE BOOKS

Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi

Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay

PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House

SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication

House Delhi

ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 532

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To explain the nature of environmental studies

To introduce aspects of Natural resources

To introduce aspects of ecosystems

To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation

To introduce aspects of environmental pollution

To create awareness on social issues and environment

To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

UNIT I

Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for

public awareness

UNIT II

Ecosystems

Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and

decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and

Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the

following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic

Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)

UNIT III

Biodiversity and its Conservation

Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification

of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option

Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports

of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-

Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ

Conservation of biodiversity

UNIT IV

Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil

pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste

Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an

individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods

earthquake cyclone and landslides

20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT V

Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water

Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of

People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible

responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and

holocaust

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the nature of environmental studies

Classify renewable and non-renewable resources

Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues

Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation

Analyze aspects of environmental pollution

Describe aspects of social issues and environment

Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner

Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental

Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai

Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA

RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 533

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts

To familiarize Rural marketing strategy

To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems

To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing

To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages

UNIT I

Overview of Rural Marketing

Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing

and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction

Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class

UNIT II

Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for

rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT III

Rural Distribution Systems

Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche

markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of

Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT IV

ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network

(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction

Methodology Group Project work

UNIT V

Market support

Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role

play

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Market their products

Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products

Choose an appropriate distribution system

Apply ICT in rural marketing

Source the finance for rural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India

Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education

Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi

SEMESTER- VI

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allot

ted

Cred

its

Course

Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mark

s

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-601

Core

Course

E- Commerce

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-602 Core

Course

Customer

Relationship Management

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-603 Practical

Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva

Voce

100

50

17

-

-

50

20

- - 4 4

1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Grand Total

550

22

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one

paper presentation certificate in related discipline

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management

1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing

1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA607 Management of Change

1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management

1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management

1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service

1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business

1Y3BBA614 E- Governance

1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management

1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing

1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour

1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning

1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design

1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control

1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan

1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing

1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management

1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care

1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law

(Rural Management Group)

1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System

1Y3BBA632

Panchayati Raj

1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy

E- COMMERCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 601

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is

designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the

technical foundation for understanding information systems

UNIT I

Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting

online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a

business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-

commerce

UNIT II

Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet

(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A

systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing

vs in-house development of a website)

UNIT III

Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension

definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security

intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)

technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and

protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)

UNIT IV

E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards

e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online

banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house

automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments

UNIT V

Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting

online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of

utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online

services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and

entertainment

COURSE OUTCOME-

Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information

systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Management Information System Jawadekar

bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon

bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana

bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)

bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty

CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 602

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of

Customer Relationship Management in the organizations

UNIT- I

Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature

of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive

and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and

evaluating customer business plans

UNIT- II

Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer

database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing

customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively

Planning and making persuasive presentations

UNIT- III

Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality

Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality

managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and

Cross- sell

UNIT- IV

Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations

Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority

setting Target setting setting standards

UNIT- V

Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction

COURSE OUTCOME-

To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship

Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd

Ed Response Books Sage Publication

Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House

Pvt Ltd

Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books

Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management

V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008

Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management

South Western Cengage Learning

Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press

Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age

International

Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan

Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of

India Private Limted New Delhi 2011

S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private

Limted New Delhi 2008

ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 603

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to

work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn

the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final

semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by

the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a

student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their

analytical capabilities and experience

DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)

Title of the study (Cover Page)

Declaration

Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)

Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)

Acknowledgement

Table of Contents

Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Introduction

12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research

12 Significance of the study

13 Scope of the study

14 Research Problem

15 Objective of the study

17 Hypothesis

18 Limitations of the study

2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students

to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they

learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After

the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is

evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report

should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to

provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also

able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business

operations and come up with the ways to tap the

Opportunities

3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

31 Introduction

32 Population of the study

33 Sampling Design

331 Sampling Technique

332 Sampling Method

333 Sample Size

34 Research Instrument

35 Sources of data

351 Primary Data

352 Secondary Data

4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION

5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION

Bibliography

COURSE OUTCOME-

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able

to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and

come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities

MARKETING GROUP

PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 604

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the

context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product

manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions

UNIT- I

Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused

organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management

Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-

cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product

Development

UNIT- II

Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods

of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in

international Market

UNIT- III

Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity

concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand

Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image

UNIT- IV

Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system

measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement

Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market

segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining

and establishing brand values

UNIT- V

Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand

extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time

Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand

Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation

COURSE OUTCOME

The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of

Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for

Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning

implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer

Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi

Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi

Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi

Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education

New Delhi

Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi

Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata

McGraw Hill New Delhi

Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi

STRATEGIC MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 605

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and

implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and

managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver

superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation

through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills

UNIT- I

Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash

Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of

Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying

Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting

Marketing Objectives

UNIT-II

Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching

Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy

Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle

Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies

UNIT-III

Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp

Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models

UNIT- IV

Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives

Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy

Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing

UNIT- V

Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at

different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by

executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and

interdisciplinary nature

REFERENCE BOOKS

Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt

D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin

OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage

Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill

Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp

Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson

Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann

Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India

George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press

J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and

Programs McGraw-Hill Companies

Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub

Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon

P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave

E-MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 606

COURSE OBJECTIVE

It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance

enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns

UNIT- I

Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics

Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan

Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing

UNIT- II

Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in

India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within

communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing

UNIT- III

Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet

as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet

User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-

branding

UNIT- IV

Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-

marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools

Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent

Trends in e-customer service

UNIT- V

Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web

Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing

campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising

Course Outcome

Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics

online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its

implication on marketing strategy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a

networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill

Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall

Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning

Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books

Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial

Times

HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP

MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 607

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be

Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students

Understand the importance of managing change

UNIT- I

Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-

Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of

human resource strategies in implementing Change

UNIT-II

Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR

implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation

and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions

UNIT-III

HR Processes amp Change

Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned

change

Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change

UNIT- IV

Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in

employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management

of change implications of downsizing

UNIT- V

Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to

promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and

feedback

Course Outcome

Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more

effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change

process

REFERENCE BOOKS

A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human

Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education

Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill

Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage

South Asia Edition

K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation

Response Books

VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books

CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 608

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical

relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand

anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions

to ensure the organizational and individual success

UNIT-I

Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of

organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business

environment

UNIT-II

Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars

Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations

UNIT- III

Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock

Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system

(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)

UNIT- IV

Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and

repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally

appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural

negotiation and conflicts management

UNIT- V

Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual

countries Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development

of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning

Private Limited

G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill

Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley

Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing

Co

Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell

Business

Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times

McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp

Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation

Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson

Education India

GROUP DYNAMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 609

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group

dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group

effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of

resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding

UNIT-I

Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group

dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B

UNIT-II

Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group

Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash

Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress

UNIT-III

Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group

decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash

conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict

UNIT- IV

Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De

individuation theory

UNIT- V

Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources

of Change in groups

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups

REFERENCE BOOKS

Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley

Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass

Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co

Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE

Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and

application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax

along with basic concepts of VAT

UNIT-I

Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of

Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment

of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-II

Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature

and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax

planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business

UNIT-III

Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net

Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and

Penalties (Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-IV

Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for

service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of

Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)

UNIT- V

VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview

of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT

Law)

COURSE OUTCOME

Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields

REFERENCE BOOKS

Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications

Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub

Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House

T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India

BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson

S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann

R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _

INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 611

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important

components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO

Analysis etc

UNIT-I

INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian

Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role

in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)

UNIT-II

FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different

Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players

Different types of Instruments

UNIT-III

CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI

Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank

UNIT- IV

COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp

Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A

REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA

UNIT- V

NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies

Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture

Capital Funds

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment

Banking companies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication

Financial Services MY Khan TMH

Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication

S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran

ML Seth

FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 612

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and

prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of

uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding

of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role

of internal audit assessments

UNIT I

Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview

UNIT II

Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax

fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and

inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds

UNIT III

Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion

investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports

UNIT IV

Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using

Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)

UNIT V Case Study

1 Two Indian

2 Two international cases

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread

nature of fraud and its economic impact

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation

Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination

Cengage Learning

IT GROUP

INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 613

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security

managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues

in the information assurance field

UNIT I

Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian

Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its

application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law

Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour

Laws E-Media and Print Media

UNIT II

E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security

Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature

UNIT III

Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil

Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-

detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of

Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA

UNIT IV

IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal

issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base

UNIT V

Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of

Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules

COURSE OUTCOME-

Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House

Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co

John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River

Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher

Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University

E-GOVERNANCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 614

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information

Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an

awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the

issues concerning the Cyber security

UNIT I

Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National

E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status

UNIT II

E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process

Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges

UNIT III

E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-

Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics

UNIT IV

Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic

data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber

audit implications for e-governance

Unit V

Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and

construction of a joining table

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill

Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing

Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in

India ICFAI Press Hyderabad

B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill

H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications

V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd

IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 615

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization

UNIT I

IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT

Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo

Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for

IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library

UNIT II

Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service

Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support

Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change

Management Release Management

UNIT III

Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve

Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine

Recovery Data Retention

UNIT IV

Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security

Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection

UNIT V

IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and

Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and

Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of

Internet on Technical Support

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology

REFERENCE BOOKS

Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce

(OGC) TSO UK

Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos

Management Tata McGraw Hill

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 616

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques

and their management

UNIT I

Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations

of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and

distribution

UNIT II

Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and

factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging

of foods

UNIT III

Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food

industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO

etc

UNIT IV

Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products

cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking

confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of

fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH

Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie

Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing

Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH

MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 617

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing

concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs

UNIT I

Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution

channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-

farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing

UNIT II

Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds

Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of

NSC and State Seed Corporation

UNIT III

Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers

Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash

marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer

marketing

UNIT IV

Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash

marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of

electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity

UNIT V

Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm

machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines

implementsEquipmentlsquos

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with

various functional areas of agribusiness

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp

IBH

Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management

Kalyani

Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ

House

FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 618

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis

of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions

UNIT I

Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management

decisions farm management problems

UNIT II

Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle

principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc

UNIT III

Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm

records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement

farm efficiency measures

UNIT IV

Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc

UNIT V

Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to

counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks

and uncertainty

COURSE OUTCOME

Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses

REFERENCE BOOKS

Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall

Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ

Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ

Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ

RETAIL GROUP

BUYER BEHAVIOUR

Course Code 1Y3BBA 619

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer

decisions making

UNIT-I

A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic

Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market

Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making

UNIT-II

Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles

of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer

Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and

Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product

Relationship

UNIT-III

Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to

information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-

Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors

Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications

UNIT-IV

Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing

Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-

Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions

Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy

UNIT-V

Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics

lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they

experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and

impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour

COURSE OUTCOME

Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the

choices consumers make

REFERENCE BOOKS

JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata

Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006

Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context

Excel Books NewDelhi-2001

Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous

DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing

Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi

Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining

Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005

Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000

RETAIL PLANNING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 620

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational

decision-making processes in the organized retail

UNIT I

Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail

Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-

Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative

methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management

UNIT II

Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics

Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp

non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion

designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting

Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-

Management of Obsolete goods

UNIT III

Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer

psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical

Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices

UNIT IV

Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-

Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp

Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective

Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer

Rights- Consumer Protection Acts

UNIT V

Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing

Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-

Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels

REFERENCE BOOKS

Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies

Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies

Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson

Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund

amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson

Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice

Hall of India New Delhi

Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies

Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best

People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd

RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 621

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the

value it creates

UNIT I

Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When

How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience

Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency

UNIT II

Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated

Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-

Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-

UNIT III

Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on

Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-

Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display

Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-

UNIT IV

Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium

Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and

Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-

Trade Dealing

UNIT V

Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-

Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating

Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing

to act in ways that increase loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -

Prentice-Hall

Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology

Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales

Promotion Techniques

Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate

Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page

Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books

George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing

Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill

PRODUCTION GROUP

PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL

Course Code 1Y3BBA 622

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a

basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of

facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality

control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an

understanding of the concept of aggregate planning

UNIT- I

Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors

Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-

requisites of PPC

UNIT- II

Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in

Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining

Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control

Models)

UNIT- III

Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection

Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master

production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of

software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II

UNIT- IV

Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n

job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling

Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)

UNIT- V

Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control

function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications

bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi

Deep and Deep Publications

PROCESS REENGINEERING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 623

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of

business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering

projects

UNIT- I

Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp

pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR

UNIT- II

Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering

project organizing for process reengineering

UNIT- III

Process analysis and design

a) Process analysis

(b) Process design

UNIT- IV

Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition

tracking and measuring process performance

UNIT- V

Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology

Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact

measurement

COURSE OUTCOME

To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the

considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-

engineering project

REFERENCE BOOKS

Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata

McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater

Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester

John Wiley amp Sons

WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn

the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time

standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering

to design of work systems

UNIT- I

Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos

productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity

Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time

Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities

Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was

developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph

UNIT- II

Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting

up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion

Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand

Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and

Design of Tools amp Equipment

UNIT- III

Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard

from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and

Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work

Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling

UNIT- IV

Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage

Incentive Plans

The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for

Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action

UNIT-V

Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion

Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System

Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts

Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional

including understanding the need for quality

REFERENCE BOOKS

iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill

ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation

Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp

Sons

Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall

Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall

Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press

Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall

Mall East and London

Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN

Course Code 1Y3BBA 625

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in

it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative

impacts of tourism development

UNIT I

Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism

Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of

Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in

Tourism Development

UNIT II

Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning

system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos

Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-

Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in

learning system

UNIT III

Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable

development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist

Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash

The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash

Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities

UNIT IV

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage

of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment

UNIT IV

Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the

Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National

Policy on Ecology and Environment

COURSE OUTCOME

To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global

perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international

tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for

sustainable tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash

Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications

Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers

Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William

Heinemann Ltd

Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices

London Pitman Publishing

Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York

Kendall Hunt Publishing Company

Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan

Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman

Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford

University Press

New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable

Development Approach VNR and New York

TOURISM MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 626

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism

and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing

that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products

before the stakeholders of tourism industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing

Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and

Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market

Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing

Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for

different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing

Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales

promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital

communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future

It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are

needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be

a part of this growth

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar

Thomson Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd

edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of

Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry

UNIT I

HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of

Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads

ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and

marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents

UNIT II

RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief

History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway

Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway

station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains

express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world

heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes

UNIT III

AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth

Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled

Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature

Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players

Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and

performance marketing strategies of Air India

UNIT IV

WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover

crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going

traffic) ndash National waterways

UNIT V

CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing

stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and

Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation

COURSE OUTCOME

Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of

the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management

REFERENCE BOOKS

RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 628

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of

its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing

knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital

Management

UNIT I

Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its

impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need

principles purpose

UNIT II

Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and

their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply

department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health

and patient safety

UNIT III

Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of

biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules

standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging

transportation amp storage

UNIT IV

Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier

methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal

decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of

wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan

UNIT V

Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party

insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash

meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural

disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague

typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics

COURSE OUTCOME

To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost

containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges

arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs

and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its

various components

REFERENCE BOOKS

Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication

First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn

Park k - Preventive and social medicine

Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot

MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 629

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted

advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public

relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any

potential crisis that may arise

UNIT I

Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches

to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of

marketing functions of marketing

UNIT II

Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment

Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market

segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash

positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing

UNIT III

Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior

(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying

decision process

UNIT IV

Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp

deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product

development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling

UNIT V

Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing

policies and strategies

Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management

decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels

COURSE OUTCOME

Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an

integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare

professionals and the public

REFERENCE BOOKS

Philip Kotler - marketing management

Wiliam jStanton - marketing management

Sherleker S A - marketing management

J C Gandhi - marketing management

Davar - modern marketing management

Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub

P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research

Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research

HOSPITALS RELATED LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 630

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of

common-law development

UNIT ndash I

Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties

sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance

act trust act societies registration act

UNIT ndashII

Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of

human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act

1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971

mental health act patient consent

UNIT ndash III

Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948

narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods

act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration

UNIT ndash IV

Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act

1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916

maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing

order) act trade union act industrial disputes act

UNIT ndashV

Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in

hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical

negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical

establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal

pronouncements rulings and regulations

REFERENCE BOOKS

Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer

Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law

Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 631

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India

To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural

Production system in India

To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India

To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development

UNIT -1

Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions

ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology

Case analysis and discussion

UNIT II

Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash

Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture

UNIT III

Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-

Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India

UNIT IV

Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of

holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus

land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas

UNIT V

Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash

Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and

schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM

COURSE OUTCOMES

Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management

Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India

Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development

REFERENCE BOOKS

Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution

Can We Make London Department for International Development

Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House

PANCHAYATI RAJ

Course Code 1Y3BBA632

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration

To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites

To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance

To provide insights on Rural Administration

To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes

UNIT I

Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction

Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges

Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration

(Official and non-official) and report submission

UNIT III

Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission

UNIT IV

Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and

Block- Panchayat relationship

Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play

UNIT V

Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government

Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan

Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

COURSE OUTCOMES

Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village

Development interventions

Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its

power Structure

Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and

Plans

Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes

32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959

Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise

Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi

Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New

Delhi

RURAL ECONOMY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 633

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy

To help students understand their role in rural economic development

To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources

To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation

To create awareness on rural economic development

UNIT I

Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-

Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries

(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in

agriculture individual production other production services

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-

Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash

Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land

Reforms

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

UNIT III

Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation

programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs

UNIT IV

Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work

UNIT V

Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing

ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for

the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy

Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village

Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues

Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation

Facilities

Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi

Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi

Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic

Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New

Delhi

INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER

Mid Semester Examination (MSE)

There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5

descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered

End Semester Examination (ESE)

There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks

each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of

10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered

Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations

The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment

Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be

applicable

(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )

Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type

End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size

Page 6: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020

ORGANIZATION BEHAVIOUR

Course Code 1Y3BBA102

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Students study the behaviour of individuals and groups as part of the social and technical system in

the workplace They examine individual and group behaviour communication conflict and various

management styles motivational techniques and coordination in the work environment and apply

these concepts to the development of an organizations human resources

UNIT I

Organization Overview of the concept and relevance of organizational Behaviour meaning Nature

Scope features approaches model challenges and opportunities functions amp Role of manager

Planning process Decision making Process

UNIT II

Foundation of individual Behavior Biography ability personality (determinants and models)

perception (definition components factors affecting perception in decision making) Values

Beliefs etc

UNIT III

Individual Behavior- Attitude Definition importance Types Attitude regarding- Job

Satisfaction Involvement commitment effects of employee attitude changing attitudes

Learning Definition nature theories classical conditioning operant conditioning cognitive

Learning Social learning

UNIT IV

Motivation Concept and theories (Maslow McGregor Herzberg ERG) merits amp demerits Group

dynamics amp Team work Nature theories types of group Definition Stages of Group Development

effectiveness potential problems Analysis of Interpersonal Relationship Transactional Analysis

Johari Window

UNIT- V

Organizational change and development approaches and methods stress nature source effects

conflicts employee counseling approaches extra mural penitential learning programmers case

study

COURSE OUTCOME

To explain group dynamics and demonstrate skills required for working in groups (team building)

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Luthans Fred Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India

bull Mishra MN Behaviour Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi

bull Newstrom W John Davis Keith Organization Behaviour McGraw Hill India

bull LM Roy Organisational Behaviour S Chand Publication

bull Dr FC Sharma Organisational Behaviour SBPD Publications

INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ACCOUNTING

Course Code 1Y3BBA103

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable students to synthesize related information and evaluate options for most logical and

optimal solution such that they would be able to predict and control cost incurrence and improve

results

UNIT- I

Accounting Basic of Accounting Accounting Mechanics-Double Entry System Classification

Rules for Debit amp Credit Journal Ledger and Trial Balance sub-division of journal Ledger meaning subdivision and mechanics of Posting balancing ledger accounts

UNIT- II

Cash book and Subsidiary books of Accounting Kinds of Cash Book Purchase day book and sale

day Book Bank reconciliation statement Measurement of income- Adjusting entries- rectification of

errors- Adjusted trial balance

UNIT-III

Preparation of financial statements- Trading account Profit amp Loss account Balance Sheet (with

Adjustments) Accounting for Non-profit organization Accounting Procedures Receipts amp payment

accounts income ampexpenditure account problems

UNIT- IV

Depreciation- Meaning Determinant factors Method amp Significance Basic Concepts of hire

purchase amp installments

UNIT- V

Partnership-Preliminary admission of a partner Company Accounts-Issue of shares Debentures

Forfeitures and reissue of shares

COURSE OUTCOME

Analyse the complexities associated with management of cost of product and services in the

Organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

SA Siddiqui- Comprehensive Accounting

TS Greval- Introduction to Accounting

Mukherjee and M Accounting (Volume-I)

SN Maheshwar- Introduction to Accounting (Vikas Publication)

CAC Rama Gopal Accounting For Managers (New Age)

BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational

and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business

UNIT I

Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro

environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis

for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business

UNIT II

Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic

systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years

plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent

economic initiatives NitiAyog

UNIT III

Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment

problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance

of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural

Development Problems of Growth

UNIT IV

Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment

Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA

and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act

UNIT V

International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational

Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic

Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-

GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India

COURSE OUTCOME

Outline how an entity operates in a business environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996

Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi

Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan

Chand Delhi

Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi

PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA105

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to

articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate

effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the

consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and

quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods

UNIT-I

Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of

Management Functions of the Manager

UNIT- II

Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of

Planning

Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and

type of Policies

Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems

involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques

UNIT- III

Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of

Units and committees

Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship

UNIT- IV

Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training

Directing Nature and purpose and directing

UNIT- V

Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control

process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies

COURSE OUTCOME-

Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques

managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of

managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify

and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own

position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied

audiences

Reference Books

bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher

bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson

Education

bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt

Ltd 4th Ed

bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill

Publications

SEMESTER II

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distributio

n

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor

Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distribu

tion Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Ma

x

Ma

rks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme

nt

Compulsory

Course

English

communication

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA202 Core Course

Management concept amp

Principle

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA203 Core

Course

Environmental

Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA204 Core

Course

Monetary

Economics and

Indian Banking

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA205 Core

Course

Business

Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA205 Business

Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhanceme

nt

Skill Enhancement

Elective

Course-I

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand

Total 600 21 5 - 24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

ENGLISH COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA201

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English

language teaching and content writing sectors

UNIT I

Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning

Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening

UNIT II

Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive

writing expansion of an idea

UNIT III

Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing

(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume

writing covering letter

UNIT IV

Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases

UNIT V

Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb

agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions

(Advanced)

COURSE OUTCOME

To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill

Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul

Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan

Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das

Orient Blackswan

Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press

Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication

MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 202

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and

process of effective controlling in the organization

UNIT I

Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science

Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)

UNIT II

School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and

Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)

Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management

UNIT III

Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing

Staffing Directing and Coordinating

UNIT IV

Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command

Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control

UNIT V

Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure

determination Forms- formal amp informal organization

Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations

COURSE OUTCOME

Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial

functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management

REFERENCE BOOKS

LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management

VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management

James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB

Fred Luthans- OB

ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 203

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links

between human and natural systems

UNIT I

Introduction to environmental studies

Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability

and sustainable development

UNIT II

Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an

ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following

ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds

streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)

Unit III

Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to

mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and

over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international

ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate

energy sources growing energy needs case studies

UNIT IV

Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem

diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots

Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and

Informational value

UNIT V

Environmental Pollution

Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution

Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and

Industrial waste Pollution case studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social

and environmental processes

REFERENCE BOOKS

California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London

Routledge

Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security

Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press

Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of

ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006

Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37

McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books

McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the

Twentieth Century

Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders

Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic

Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt

Ltd

Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons

Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi

1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP

Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation

S Chand Publishing New Delhi

MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING

Course Code 1Y3BBA204

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using

statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills

within the contest of subject matter of economics

UNIT I

Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of

Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value

of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income

theory of Money

UNIT II

Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people

Money Market

UNIT III

Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial

Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks

UNIT IV

Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control

methods and Tools of Monetary Policy

UNIT V

RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative

Banks and Rural Banks

COURSE OUTCOME

Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and

mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of

economics

REFERENCE BOOKS

MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi

LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi

Crowther- An Out Line of Money

Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant

KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ

BUSINESS COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA205

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative

scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication

UNIT I

Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports

OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)

UNIT II

Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other

words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis

UNIT III

Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers

Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers

UNIT IV

Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a

Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication

Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)

UNIT V

Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written

Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp

minutes

COURSE OUTCOME

To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical

proficiency in the development of exposition and argument

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wren amp Martin

K Madhukar- Business Communication

VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication

Asha Laul- Business Communication

Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH

SEMESTER III

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotte

d

Credit

s

Course Code Course

Type

Course

Title

Total

Mark

s

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subjec

t wise

Distrib

ution

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA301

Ability

Enhancement

IT Tool for Business

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA302

Core Course

Introduction to Marketing

Management

100 50 17 20 7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA303 Core

Course

Business

Law

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA304 Core

Course

Business

statistics for

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA305

Core

Course

Retail

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA304 Practical

Business

statistics for Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill

Enhancemen

t Elective Course-II

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand Total 600 24

IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 301

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software

components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data

base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT

UNIT-I

Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and

Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World

Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept

UNIT-II

Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different

computer generation

UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and

Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming

Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-

principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart

examples

UNIT-IV

Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation

applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)

Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information

System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems

Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human

Resources Management Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations

Understand the hardware and software components of the computer

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford

2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication

3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication

4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill

INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 302

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply

these to a new or existing business

UNIT I

Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept

amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro

environment

UNIT II

Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of

Product Line amp Product- mix

UNIT III

Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing

decisions Overview of pricing process

UNIT IV

Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product

Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage

UNIT V

Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to

marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct

selling

COURSE OUTCOME

To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct

an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an

appropriate format

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Philip Kotler

2 TN Chabra

3 TK Panda

4 SH Kazmi

5 Arun Kumar

BUSINESS LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 303

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal

environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with

knowledge of legal principles

UNIT-I

Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration

capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts

Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp

Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency

UNIT-II

Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp

Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales

UNIT-III

Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -

Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a

negotiable instrument

UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of

non-registration Dissolution of a firm

UNIT-V

Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of

Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013

COURSE OBJECTIVE

On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to

individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context

Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 ND Kapoor

2 Tulsian

3 MC Kuchhal

4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business

BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 304

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management

UNIT I

Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance

Scope and Limitation of Statistic

UNIT II

Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar

Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive

UNIT III

Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic

Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures

of dispersion

UNIT IV

Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and

Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index

number CPI WPI IIP

UNIT V

Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank

Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series

COURSE OUTCOME

Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically

discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons

2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication

3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication

RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in

India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone

Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT

FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan

Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process

UNIT II

FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail

Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors

Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing

MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer

Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design

and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication

UNIT III

STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty

Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors

UNIT IV

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management

IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service

Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM

Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying

UNIT V

MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at

Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems

at Retail Centers

Course Outcome-

Reference Books

bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education

bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A

Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education

The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge

about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various

aspects of retail operations

After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with

the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the

entire retail operations

SEMESTER IV

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code Course

Type Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subject

wise

Distributio

n

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mark

s

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-401

Ability

Enhanceme

nt

Introduction to

soft skill amp

Team Building

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA-402 Core Course

Introduction to

financial

management

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-403 Core Course

Advertising

and Sales

Promotion

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-404 Core Course

Management

of Human resource

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of

Business

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group

Term End

Practical

Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-404 Practical

Management

of Human

resource

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-405 Practical

Macro

Economics of Business

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

Grand Total 550 22

INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 401

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate

students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners

by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are

learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for

their own learning

UNIT ndash I

General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of

Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences

Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making

Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of

communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of

Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation

UNIT ndash II

Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing

skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice

modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements

General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral

skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive

Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style

UNIT ndash III

Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format

and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in

Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active

Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD

UNIT ndash IV

Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction

Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview

Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing

Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of

Conversation

UNIT ndash V

Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional

Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers

COURSE OUTCOME

To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills

and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin

bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar

INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 402

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital

decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and

raising long-term finance

UNIT I

Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives

Role of finance manager

UNIT II

Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of

investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return

Comparison between NPV amp IRR

UNIT III

Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of

Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning

capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure

UNIT IV

The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage

Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating

Leverage

UNIT V

Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital

estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of

inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order

Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy

COURSE OUTCOME

Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial

manager in the current competitive business scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 IM Pandey

2 P Chandra

3 SP Gupta

4 MY Khan

ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 403

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may

review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos

homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions

UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising

budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for

Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising

UNIT II

Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy

Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role

types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council

of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)

UNIT III

Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring

awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of

design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet

advertising and evaluation of advertising

UNIT IV

Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors

influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option

Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of

consumer schemes and other methods of promotion

UNIT V

Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs

Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales

personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion

COURSE OUTCOME

Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how

these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its

relation to todaylsquos marketplace

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall

Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi

Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi

Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications

MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 404

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource

management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational

setting

UNIT-I

Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with

special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in

strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management

UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge

workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)

Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)

UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of

human resource department and the role of human resource manager

UNITndashIV

Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification

rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation

UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection

(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction

COURSE OUTCOME

To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training

Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical

Behaviour

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi

Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New

Delhi

Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York

HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications

A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications

MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the

important indicators of the economy and their significance

UNIT I

Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of

Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income

Personal and Personal disposable income

UNIT II

Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income

Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and

Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator

Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate

demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy

UNIT III

Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate

demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government

expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary

and fiscal policy

UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary

policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production

Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation

monetary measures fiscal measures

UNIT V

Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and

corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in

open economy

COURSE OUTCOME

To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the

role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson

2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill

3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers

4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson

SEMESTER V

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment

Internal Assessment Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-501

Ability Enhancement

Public Relation amp Corporate Image

50

25

8

10

4

15

6

2

-

-

2

1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and

small Business

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-503

Core Course Principle of

Economics

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-502

Practical Entrepreneurship and

small Business

50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics

50

25 08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Skill Course

Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill Enhancement

Elective Course-III

50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2

Grand Total

600

24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication

1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management

1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India

1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation

1Y3BBA509 Organization Development

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision

1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management

1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA513 Database Management System

1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service

1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy

1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management

1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management

1Y3BBA520 Stores Management

1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA522 Technology Management

1Y3BBA523 Productivity

1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept

1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management

1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System

1Y3BBA529 Health Economics

1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management

(Rural Management Group )

1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity

1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment

1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management

SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES

Non-Technical

Elective No Department Faculty Name

Faculty of Information Technology

I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)

II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)

IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)

V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Management

I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)

II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)

III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development

Faculty of Commerce

I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)

II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Humanities

I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)

II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)

III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Science

I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)

II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)

III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)

IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)

V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Education

I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)

II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)

PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA501

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts

of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling

and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization

UNIT- I

Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash

Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy

Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors

ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public

Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations

UNIT- II

Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service

Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social

Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy

for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation

Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event

Management

UNIT- III

Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash

Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public

Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of

Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control

UNIT IV

Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies

Components of an Individual Image

Advertising and Corporate Image

Public Relations of an Institutions

UNIT V

The Grapevine and Rumours

Stereotype

Propaganda

Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations

applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different

entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling

REFERENCE BOOKS

Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House

Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House

Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University

Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill

This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning

ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-

The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding

processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to

those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic

environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide

evidence which informs those debates

UNIT I

Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of

Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its

environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship

UNIT II

Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship

development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the

Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making

UNIT III

Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that

enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in

Social context Start Up

UNIT IV

Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional

source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital

UNIT V

Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication

2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd

3 Vasant Desai

4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH

PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 503

COURSE OBJECTIVES-

To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production

UNIT- I

Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits

UNIT-II

Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus

movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts

of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications

of demand and supply price rationing price floors

Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price

elasticity cross and income elasticity

UNIT-III

Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility

Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp

Producer surplus

UNIT-IV

Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant

and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue

and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale

UNIT-V

Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of

the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run

equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment

concept

COURSE OUTCOME-

To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011

bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th

edition

2007

bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA

bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press

Oxford

bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore

MARKETING GROUP

INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so

that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to

enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications

UNIT-I

Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC

in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising

appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion

relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship

between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods

Interactive Internet Marketing

UNIT-II

Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach

establishing and allocating promotional budget

UNIT-III

IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different

forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning

creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design

considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client

Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork

UNIT-IV

Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering

key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and

media research

Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration

client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc

UNIT-V

Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing

Communications

COURSE OUTCOME-

To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches

and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to

communicating to target audiences

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc

Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard

D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois

Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing

House

Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and

Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication

Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH

Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing

Communications Pearson Education Limited

Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc

Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House

Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning

Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc

Homewood Illinois

Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic

Approach Cengage Learning

Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India

Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education

SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT

Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE

It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and

distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and

distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners

UNIT-I

Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies

Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling

objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring

Procedure Socialization

UNIT-II

Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program

Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation

Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial

Evaluation of Contest

UNIT-III

Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel

Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales

Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process

UNIT-IV

Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key

tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market

Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation

UNIT-V

Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners

Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict

Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International

Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales

COURSE OUTCOME

Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the

sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans

participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables

REFERENCE BOOKS

Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres

Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books

Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI

L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills

Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets

Greenwood Publishing Group

Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub

ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH

Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing

consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing

research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students

within a course project

UNIT-I

Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing

Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research

Process Marketing Research Designs

UNIT-II

The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques

Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of

Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic

Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical

Analysis Tools

UNIT-III

Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)

ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor

Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental

Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores

Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-

hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number

UNIT-IV

Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product

Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant

Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification

Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing

Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and

their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity

UNIT-V

Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning

in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report

and class presentation of the same

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from

analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor

analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis

REFERENCE BOOKS

Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi

William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi

Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi

Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill

Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research

Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey

Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning

Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp

Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced

in the class

HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP

LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA

Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of

Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity

objectivity and understandings

UNIT-I

The Factories Act 1948

The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923

The Employees State Insurance Act 1948

UNIT-II

The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952

The Payment of gratuity Act 1972

UNIT-III

The Maternity Benefit Act 1961

The Minimum Wages act 1948

UNIT-IV

The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946

The Payment of Bonus Act 1965

UNIT-V

The Apprentices Act 1969

The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959

COURSE OUTCOME ndash

To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour

Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the

organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to

follow the Laws applicable to the establishment

REFERENCE BOOKS

S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications

S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi

Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot

V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House

N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons

INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE

In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our

country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of

Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be

acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the

concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India

UNIT-I

Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors

affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial

relation programme

Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact

of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes

lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry

UNIT-II

Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal

Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective

bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective

collective bargaining collective bargaining in India

UNIT-III

Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education

scheme in India- objectives functions and problems

Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation

schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India

UNIT-IV

Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India

major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions

registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union

UNIT-V

Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery

Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation

submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court

industrial tribunals

Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power

of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute

COURSE OUTCOME

Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective

bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute

resolution

REFERENCE BOOKS

Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts

IIPM Personnel Management in India

Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business

Publication Ltd

Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India

Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India

Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication

Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co

Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law

ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational

culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the

human values in individuals

UNIT-I

Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational

Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development

Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining

and survey research amp feedback methodology

UNIT-II

Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in

organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief

systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development

UNIT-III

Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component

interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief

of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action

UNIT-IV

OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team

building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process

interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions

important for successful OD efforts

UNIT ndash V

HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational

implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional

Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have

improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi

Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York

McGrawhill

Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in

addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a

good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company

UNIT-I

Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm

Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-

Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of

Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering

UNIT-II

Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the

analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount

of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a

Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and

Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis

UNIT-III

Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues

and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements

medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings

Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project

finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing

UNIT-IV

Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of

financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing

Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect

cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization

UNIT-V

Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value

Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic

indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added

Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total

Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)

COURSE OUTCOME

Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and

corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts

REFERENCE BOOKS

Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill

Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial

environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a

multinational corporation

UNIT-I

Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation

functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial

management International monetary system

UNIT-II

Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories

ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible

exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer

Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options

Currency swaps and interest rate swaps

UNIT-III

Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction

transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction

exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The

national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International

capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)

UNIT-IV

International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic

considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)

Financial risk and cost of capital

Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of

capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-

20 subsidiaries and tax havens

UNIT-V

International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their

comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets

Recent developments in the Euro bond market

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations

and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley

PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall

Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall

Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis

Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co

Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall

Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers

Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath

FINANCIAL INCLUSION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion

such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss

the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to

promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models

UNIT-I

Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting

Access to Financial Services

Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive

Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators

UNIT-II

Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey

Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional

Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card

UNIT-III

Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India

Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations

Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor

UNIT-IV

SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of

microfinance evolved in India

Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial

Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for

Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for

Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People

UNIT-V

Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises

Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion

and Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account

initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage

Publication

Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House

Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech

Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications

Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications

Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing

Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI

Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI

Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag

Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion

Academic Foundation

IT GROUP

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to

manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the

hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment

UNIT-I

The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures

File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base

Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial

Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness

UNIT-II

Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface

with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database

Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design

UNIT-III

Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database

Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database

Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases

UNIT-IV

DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance

Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues

UNIT-V

Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the

field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective

faculty during the coverage of syllabus

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic

concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational

algebra and SQL

REFERENCE BOOKS

Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs

Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan

Press

McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co

MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It

aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing

implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services

UNIT-I

The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development

Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The

Enabling Environment for ITES

UNIT-II

Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled

Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of

Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services

UNIT-III

Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support

Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions

UNIT-IV

International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting

Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in

facilitating Trade in ITESTITES

UNIT-V

Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of

Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of

Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace

Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations

and integrate the learning in handling these complexities

REFERENCE BOOKS

Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat

E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing

SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information

technology with various aspects of Software Project Management

UNIT-I

Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision

and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM

Framework

UNIT-II

Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning

Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan

Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration

and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning

UNIT-III

Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an

Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques

Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule

Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools

UNIT-IV

Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance

Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior

Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review

UNIT-V

Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks

Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk

COURSE OUTCOME

Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business

context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business

scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson

Education Ltd

P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp

Tsinghua University Press

R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance

Management Concepts Pub

Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group

B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science

Press

A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications

G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on

understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business

UNIT I

Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm

production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country

UNIT II

Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms

and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business

sector

UNIT III

Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations

relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries

UNIT IV

Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment

and policy

UNIT V

Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies

COURSE OUTCOME

Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper

and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain

REFERENCE BOOKS

Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons

Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ

Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ

AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 517

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies

strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms

UNIT I

Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market

structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp

significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of

marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour

UNIT II

Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash

significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product

product life cycle

UNIT III

Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies

and pricing methods

UNIT IV

Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and

standardization

UNIT V

Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural

products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in

agribusiness

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better

understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for

agricultural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH

Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall

Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control

Pearson Edu

Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu

Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India

FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 518

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food

marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen

and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural

political and economic forces over time

UNIT I

Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade

Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of

Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic

factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer

UNIT II

Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling

food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing

in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions

across the chain in food retail food service marketing

UNIT III

4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing

Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system

Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement

Strategies for food retailers

UNIT IV

Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling

Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food

Products

UNIT V

Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training

Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in

retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze

Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing

REFERENCE BOOKS

Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of

India

Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu

Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill

RETAIL GROUP

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in

the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it

UNIT- I

Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management

Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain

networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain

Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network

UNIT- II

Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer

service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs

multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier

Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants

UNIT- III

Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory

models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system

UNIT- IV

COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip

Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION

TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain

Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management

UNIT- V

Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a

Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance

measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics

quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics

COURSE OUTCOME

After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain

which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House

bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers

bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg

bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi

bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan

STORES MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 520

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different

terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned

areas

UNIT- I

Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the

location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design

UNIT- II

Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual

Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors

UNIT- III

Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at

Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores

Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments

UNIT- IV

Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies

Quick Response System

UNIT- V

Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact

on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space

Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization

COURSE OUTCOME

The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern

and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management

bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing

bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach

bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing

bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing

RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 521

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail

Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail

business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management

UNIT I

Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail

equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail

market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-

Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India

UNIT II

Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development

The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and

Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-

Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on

ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response

marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks

The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management

UNIT III

Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM

Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch

points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services

Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM

Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding

Common Barriers

UNIT IV

Services Management

Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the

service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-

Supply relationships vehicle routing

UNIT V

Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising

Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping

the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand

management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-

2nd edition 2006

MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational

edititionUS1798

Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education

New Delhi 2003

JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy

Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi

Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy

Pearson Education New Delhi 2004

KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005

Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007

Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House

Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution

rosenbloom and Education Foundation US

PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 522

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

UNIT- I

Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology

Change Implication

UNIT- II

Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying

UNIT- III

Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology

Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management

UNIT- IV

Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology

Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages

UNIT- V

Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise

Level

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to

manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009

bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009

bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson

PRODUCTIVITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 523

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

UNIT- I

Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and

external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work

Contents and Ineffective Time

UNIT- II

Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram

String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart

UNIT- III

Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart

UNIT- IV

Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be

Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement

UNIT- V

Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International

Labour Office Geneva

bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed

bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill

bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India

QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO

Course Code 1Y3BBA 524

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify

the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and

measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current

issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans

UNIT- I

Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives

UNIT- II

Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect

concept

UNIT- III

Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality

UNIT- IV

Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various

control Charts

UNIT- V

Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification

COURSE OUTCOME-

Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to

explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key

aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for

controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp

communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze

the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise

and evaluate quality implementation plans

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay

bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd

bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas

bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd

bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition

7th

Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012

bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM CONCEPTS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 525

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism

To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash

Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp

Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and

development of Tourism through the ages

UNIT II

COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash

Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism

inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious

Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions

incentives sports and adventure tourism

UNIT III

TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash

Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of

motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash

health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and

push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists

UNIT IV

IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash

Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts

- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism

UNIT V

SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-

Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote

Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable

Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and

experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of

tourism experiences

REFERENCES BOOKS

Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling

Publishers Private Limited New Delhi

Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism

Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited

Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill

International

Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors

New Delhi

Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas

Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New

Delhi

TOURISM MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 526

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the basic concept and various components of management

UNIT I

MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-

Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of

management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)

Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management

UNIT II

PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-

Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of

planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by

objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance

and limitation of decision making

UNIT III

ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash

Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of

staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance

appraisal

UNIT IV

DIRECTING ndash

Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation

(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy

theory)

UNIT V

LEADERSHIP-

Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path

Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to

communication

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives

Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of

tourism as well as the impacts of tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc

Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New

Delhi

Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition

AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing

House New Delhi

Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition

Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations

To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism

industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-

Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing

Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and

Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash

Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New

Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING -

Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION -

Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity

Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in

promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level

which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described

REFERENCES BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson

Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition

Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent

learning

UNIT I

Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health

Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural

History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention

UNIT II

Definition and meaning of hospital ndash

Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing

concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of

Hospitals

UNIT III

Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector

Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in

delivering healthcare in India

UNIT IV

Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural

hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description

UNIT V

The reforms of Healthcare System-

The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare

reforms amp Future of Healthcare System

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding

the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the

management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and

organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services

REFERENCE BOOKS

The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991

Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd

Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers

HEALTH ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 529

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and

understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict

peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different

social actions

UNIT I

Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and

importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below

Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits

UNIT II

Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve

techniques and properties of indifference curve

UNIT III

Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash

Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of

Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of

Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of

demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash

Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue

UNIT IV

Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two

variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves

UNIT V

Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash

Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and

monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market

situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price

determination

COURSE OUTCOME

To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from

an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic

evaluation of a health intervention or program

REFERENCE BOOKS

Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR

Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP

Managerial Economics - Gupta GS

Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani

Business Economics - Sharma NK

Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar

Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi

Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL

HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 530

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions

related to records management in the healthcare environment

UNIT I

Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record

keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records

UNIT II

Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health

Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research

UNIT III

Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics

investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing

Pharmacy etc Audits)

UNIT IV

Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems

associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic

Related Groups (DRG)

UNIT V

Medical Registers ndash

Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various

departments amp common problems faced

COURSE OUTCOME

Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New

Delhi 1999

Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995

Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi

George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003

Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 531

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India

To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India

UNIT I

Rural Society in India

Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-

urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and

subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural

life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion

UNIT II

Rural Society

Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social

institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity

and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of

rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT-III

Village India

Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance

contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and

political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology

Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class

UNIT IV

Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics

Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid

growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope

and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -

Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT-V

Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times

Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social

processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India

Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy

Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms

REFERENCE BOOKS

Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi

Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay

PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House

SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication

House Delhi

ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 532

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To explain the nature of environmental studies

To introduce aspects of Natural resources

To introduce aspects of ecosystems

To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation

To introduce aspects of environmental pollution

To create awareness on social issues and environment

To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

UNIT I

Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for

public awareness

UNIT II

Ecosystems

Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and

decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and

Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the

following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic

Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)

UNIT III

Biodiversity and its Conservation

Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification

of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option

Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports

of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-

Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ

Conservation of biodiversity

UNIT IV

Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil

pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste

Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an

individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods

earthquake cyclone and landslides

20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT V

Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water

Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of

People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible

responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and

holocaust

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the nature of environmental studies

Classify renewable and non-renewable resources

Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues

Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation

Analyze aspects of environmental pollution

Describe aspects of social issues and environment

Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner

Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental

Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai

Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA

RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 533

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts

To familiarize Rural marketing strategy

To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems

To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing

To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages

UNIT I

Overview of Rural Marketing

Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing

and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction

Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class

UNIT II

Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for

rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT III

Rural Distribution Systems

Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche

markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of

Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT IV

ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network

(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction

Methodology Group Project work

UNIT V

Market support

Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role

play

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Market their products

Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products

Choose an appropriate distribution system

Apply ICT in rural marketing

Source the finance for rural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India

Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education

Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi

SEMESTER- VI

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allot

ted

Cred

its

Course

Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mark

s

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-601

Core

Course

E- Commerce

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-602 Core

Course

Customer

Relationship Management

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-603 Practical

Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva

Voce

100

50

17

-

-

50

20

- - 4 4

1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Grand Total

550

22

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one

paper presentation certificate in related discipline

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management

1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing

1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA607 Management of Change

1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management

1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management

1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service

1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business

1Y3BBA614 E- Governance

1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management

1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing

1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour

1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning

1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design

1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control

1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan

1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing

1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management

1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care

1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law

(Rural Management Group)

1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System

1Y3BBA632

Panchayati Raj

1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy

E- COMMERCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 601

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is

designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the

technical foundation for understanding information systems

UNIT I

Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting

online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a

business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-

commerce

UNIT II

Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet

(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A

systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing

vs in-house development of a website)

UNIT III

Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension

definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security

intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)

technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and

protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)

UNIT IV

E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards

e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online

banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house

automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments

UNIT V

Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting

online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of

utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online

services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and

entertainment

COURSE OUTCOME-

Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information

systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Management Information System Jawadekar

bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon

bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana

bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)

bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty

CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 602

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of

Customer Relationship Management in the organizations

UNIT- I

Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature

of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive

and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and

evaluating customer business plans

UNIT- II

Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer

database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing

customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively

Planning and making persuasive presentations

UNIT- III

Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality

Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality

managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and

Cross- sell

UNIT- IV

Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations

Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority

setting Target setting setting standards

UNIT- V

Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction

COURSE OUTCOME-

To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship

Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd

Ed Response Books Sage Publication

Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House

Pvt Ltd

Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books

Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management

V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008

Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management

South Western Cengage Learning

Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press

Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age

International

Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan

Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of

India Private Limted New Delhi 2011

S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private

Limted New Delhi 2008

ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 603

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to

work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn

the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final

semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by

the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a

student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their

analytical capabilities and experience

DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)

Title of the study (Cover Page)

Declaration

Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)

Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)

Acknowledgement

Table of Contents

Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Introduction

12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research

12 Significance of the study

13 Scope of the study

14 Research Problem

15 Objective of the study

17 Hypothesis

18 Limitations of the study

2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students

to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they

learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After

the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is

evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report

should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to

provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also

able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business

operations and come up with the ways to tap the

Opportunities

3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

31 Introduction

32 Population of the study

33 Sampling Design

331 Sampling Technique

332 Sampling Method

333 Sample Size

34 Research Instrument

35 Sources of data

351 Primary Data

352 Secondary Data

4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION

5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION

Bibliography

COURSE OUTCOME-

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able

to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and

come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities

MARKETING GROUP

PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 604

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the

context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product

manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions

UNIT- I

Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused

organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management

Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-

cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product

Development

UNIT- II

Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods

of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in

international Market

UNIT- III

Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity

concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand

Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image

UNIT- IV

Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system

measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement

Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market

segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining

and establishing brand values

UNIT- V

Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand

extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time

Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand

Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation

COURSE OUTCOME

The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of

Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for

Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning

implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer

Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi

Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi

Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi

Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education

New Delhi

Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi

Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata

McGraw Hill New Delhi

Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi

STRATEGIC MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 605

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and

implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and

managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver

superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation

through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills

UNIT- I

Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash

Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of

Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying

Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting

Marketing Objectives

UNIT-II

Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching

Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy

Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle

Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies

UNIT-III

Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp

Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models

UNIT- IV

Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives

Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy

Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing

UNIT- V

Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at

different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by

executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and

interdisciplinary nature

REFERENCE BOOKS

Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt

D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin

OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage

Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill

Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp

Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson

Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann

Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India

George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press

J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and

Programs McGraw-Hill Companies

Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub

Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon

P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave

E-MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 606

COURSE OBJECTIVE

It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance

enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns

UNIT- I

Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics

Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan

Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing

UNIT- II

Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in

India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within

communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing

UNIT- III

Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet

as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet

User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-

branding

UNIT- IV

Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-

marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools

Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent

Trends in e-customer service

UNIT- V

Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web

Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing

campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising

Course Outcome

Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics

online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its

implication on marketing strategy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a

networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill

Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall

Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning

Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books

Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial

Times

HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP

MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 607

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be

Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students

Understand the importance of managing change

UNIT- I

Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-

Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of

human resource strategies in implementing Change

UNIT-II

Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR

implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation

and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions

UNIT-III

HR Processes amp Change

Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned

change

Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change

UNIT- IV

Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in

employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management

of change implications of downsizing

UNIT- V

Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to

promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and

feedback

Course Outcome

Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more

effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change

process

REFERENCE BOOKS

A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human

Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education

Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill

Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage

South Asia Edition

K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation

Response Books

VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books

CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 608

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical

relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand

anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions

to ensure the organizational and individual success

UNIT-I

Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of

organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business

environment

UNIT-II

Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars

Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations

UNIT- III

Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock

Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system

(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)

UNIT- IV

Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and

repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally

appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural

negotiation and conflicts management

UNIT- V

Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual

countries Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development

of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning

Private Limited

G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill

Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley

Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing

Co

Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell

Business

Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times

McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp

Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation

Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson

Education India

GROUP DYNAMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 609

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group

dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group

effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of

resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding

UNIT-I

Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group

dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B

UNIT-II

Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group

Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash

Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress

UNIT-III

Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group

decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash

conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict

UNIT- IV

Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De

individuation theory

UNIT- V

Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources

of Change in groups

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups

REFERENCE BOOKS

Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley

Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass

Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co

Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE

Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and

application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax

along with basic concepts of VAT

UNIT-I

Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of

Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment

of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-II

Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature

and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax

planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business

UNIT-III

Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net

Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and

Penalties (Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-IV

Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for

service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of

Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)

UNIT- V

VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview

of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT

Law)

COURSE OUTCOME

Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields

REFERENCE BOOKS

Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications

Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub

Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House

T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India

BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson

S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann

R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _

INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 611

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important

components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO

Analysis etc

UNIT-I

INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian

Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role

in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)

UNIT-II

FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different

Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players

Different types of Instruments

UNIT-III

CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI

Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank

UNIT- IV

COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp

Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A

REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA

UNIT- V

NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies

Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture

Capital Funds

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment

Banking companies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication

Financial Services MY Khan TMH

Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication

S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran

ML Seth

FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 612

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and

prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of

uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding

of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role

of internal audit assessments

UNIT I

Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview

UNIT II

Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax

fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and

inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds

UNIT III

Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion

investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports

UNIT IV

Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using

Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)

UNIT V Case Study

1 Two Indian

2 Two international cases

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread

nature of fraud and its economic impact

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation

Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination

Cengage Learning

IT GROUP

INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 613

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security

managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues

in the information assurance field

UNIT I

Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian

Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its

application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law

Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour

Laws E-Media and Print Media

UNIT II

E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security

Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature

UNIT III

Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil

Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-

detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of

Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA

UNIT IV

IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal

issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base

UNIT V

Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of

Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules

COURSE OUTCOME-

Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House

Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co

John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River

Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher

Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University

E-GOVERNANCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 614

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information

Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an

awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the

issues concerning the Cyber security

UNIT I

Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National

E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status

UNIT II

E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process

Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges

UNIT III

E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-

Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics

UNIT IV

Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic

data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber

audit implications for e-governance

Unit V

Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and

construction of a joining table

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill

Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing

Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in

India ICFAI Press Hyderabad

B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill

H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications

V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd

IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 615

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization

UNIT I

IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT

Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo

Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for

IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library

UNIT II

Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service

Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support

Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change

Management Release Management

UNIT III

Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve

Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine

Recovery Data Retention

UNIT IV

Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security

Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection

UNIT V

IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and

Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and

Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of

Internet on Technical Support

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology

REFERENCE BOOKS

Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce

(OGC) TSO UK

Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos

Management Tata McGraw Hill

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 616

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques

and their management

UNIT I

Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations

of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and

distribution

UNIT II

Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and

factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging

of foods

UNIT III

Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food

industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO

etc

UNIT IV

Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products

cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking

confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of

fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH

Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie

Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing

Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH

MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 617

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing

concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs

UNIT I

Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution

channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-

farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing

UNIT II

Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds

Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of

NSC and State Seed Corporation

UNIT III

Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers

Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash

marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer

marketing

UNIT IV

Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash

marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of

electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity

UNIT V

Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm

machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines

implementsEquipmentlsquos

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with

various functional areas of agribusiness

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp

IBH

Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management

Kalyani

Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ

House

FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 618

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis

of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions

UNIT I

Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management

decisions farm management problems

UNIT II

Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle

principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc

UNIT III

Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm

records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement

farm efficiency measures

UNIT IV

Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc

UNIT V

Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to

counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks

and uncertainty

COURSE OUTCOME

Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses

REFERENCE BOOKS

Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall

Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ

Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ

Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ

RETAIL GROUP

BUYER BEHAVIOUR

Course Code 1Y3BBA 619

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer

decisions making

UNIT-I

A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic

Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market

Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making

UNIT-II

Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles

of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer

Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and

Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product

Relationship

UNIT-III

Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to

information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-

Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors

Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications

UNIT-IV

Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing

Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-

Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions

Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy

UNIT-V

Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics

lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they

experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and

impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour

COURSE OUTCOME

Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the

choices consumers make

REFERENCE BOOKS

JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata

Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006

Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context

Excel Books NewDelhi-2001

Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous

DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing

Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi

Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining

Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005

Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000

RETAIL PLANNING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 620

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational

decision-making processes in the organized retail

UNIT I

Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail

Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-

Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative

methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management

UNIT II

Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics

Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp

non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion

designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting

Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-

Management of Obsolete goods

UNIT III

Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer

psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical

Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices

UNIT IV

Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-

Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp

Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective

Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer

Rights- Consumer Protection Acts

UNIT V

Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing

Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-

Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels

REFERENCE BOOKS

Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies

Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies

Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson

Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund

amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson

Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice

Hall of India New Delhi

Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies

Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best

People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd

RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 621

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the

value it creates

UNIT I

Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When

How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience

Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency

UNIT II

Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated

Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-

Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-

UNIT III

Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on

Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-

Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display

Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-

UNIT IV

Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium

Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and

Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-

Trade Dealing

UNIT V

Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-

Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating

Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing

to act in ways that increase loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -

Prentice-Hall

Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology

Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales

Promotion Techniques

Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate

Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page

Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books

George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing

Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill

PRODUCTION GROUP

PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL

Course Code 1Y3BBA 622

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a

basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of

facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality

control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an

understanding of the concept of aggregate planning

UNIT- I

Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors

Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-

requisites of PPC

UNIT- II

Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in

Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining

Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control

Models)

UNIT- III

Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection

Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master

production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of

software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II

UNIT- IV

Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n

job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling

Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)

UNIT- V

Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control

function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications

bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi

Deep and Deep Publications

PROCESS REENGINEERING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 623

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of

business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering

projects

UNIT- I

Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp

pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR

UNIT- II

Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering

project organizing for process reengineering

UNIT- III

Process analysis and design

a) Process analysis

(b) Process design

UNIT- IV

Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition

tracking and measuring process performance

UNIT- V

Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology

Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact

measurement

COURSE OUTCOME

To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the

considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-

engineering project

REFERENCE BOOKS

Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata

McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater

Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester

John Wiley amp Sons

WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn

the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time

standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering

to design of work systems

UNIT- I

Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos

productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity

Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time

Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities

Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was

developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph

UNIT- II

Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting

up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion

Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand

Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and

Design of Tools amp Equipment

UNIT- III

Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard

from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and

Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work

Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling

UNIT- IV

Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage

Incentive Plans

The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for

Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action

UNIT-V

Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion

Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System

Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts

Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional

including understanding the need for quality

REFERENCE BOOKS

iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill

ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation

Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp

Sons

Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall

Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall

Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press

Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall

Mall East and London

Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN

Course Code 1Y3BBA 625

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in

it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative

impacts of tourism development

UNIT I

Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism

Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of

Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in

Tourism Development

UNIT II

Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning

system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos

Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-

Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in

learning system

UNIT III

Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable

development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist

Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash

The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash

Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities

UNIT IV

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage

of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment

UNIT IV

Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the

Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National

Policy on Ecology and Environment

COURSE OUTCOME

To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global

perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international

tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for

sustainable tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash

Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications

Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers

Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William

Heinemann Ltd

Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices

London Pitman Publishing

Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York

Kendall Hunt Publishing Company

Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan

Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman

Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford

University Press

New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable

Development Approach VNR and New York

TOURISM MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 626

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism

and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing

that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products

before the stakeholders of tourism industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing

Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and

Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market

Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing

Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for

different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing

Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales

promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital

communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future

It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are

needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be

a part of this growth

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar

Thomson Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd

edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of

Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry

UNIT I

HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of

Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads

ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and

marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents

UNIT II

RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief

History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway

Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway

station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains

express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world

heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes

UNIT III

AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth

Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled

Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature

Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players

Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and

performance marketing strategies of Air India

UNIT IV

WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover

crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going

traffic) ndash National waterways

UNIT V

CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing

stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and

Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation

COURSE OUTCOME

Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of

the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management

REFERENCE BOOKS

RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 628

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of

its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing

knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital

Management

UNIT I

Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its

impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need

principles purpose

UNIT II

Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and

their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply

department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health

and patient safety

UNIT III

Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of

biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules

standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging

transportation amp storage

UNIT IV

Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier

methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal

decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of

wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan

UNIT V

Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party

insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash

meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural

disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague

typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics

COURSE OUTCOME

To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost

containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges

arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs

and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its

various components

REFERENCE BOOKS

Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication

First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn

Park k - Preventive and social medicine

Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot

MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 629

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted

advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public

relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any

potential crisis that may arise

UNIT I

Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches

to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of

marketing functions of marketing

UNIT II

Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment

Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market

segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash

positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing

UNIT III

Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior

(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying

decision process

UNIT IV

Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp

deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product

development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling

UNIT V

Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing

policies and strategies

Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management

decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels

COURSE OUTCOME

Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an

integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare

professionals and the public

REFERENCE BOOKS

Philip Kotler - marketing management

Wiliam jStanton - marketing management

Sherleker S A - marketing management

J C Gandhi - marketing management

Davar - modern marketing management

Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub

P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research

Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research

HOSPITALS RELATED LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 630

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of

common-law development

UNIT ndash I

Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties

sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance

act trust act societies registration act

UNIT ndashII

Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of

human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act

1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971

mental health act patient consent

UNIT ndash III

Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948

narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods

act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration

UNIT ndash IV

Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act

1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916

maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing

order) act trade union act industrial disputes act

UNIT ndashV

Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in

hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical

negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical

establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal

pronouncements rulings and regulations

REFERENCE BOOKS

Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer

Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law

Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 631

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India

To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural

Production system in India

To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India

To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development

UNIT -1

Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions

ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology

Case analysis and discussion

UNIT II

Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash

Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture

UNIT III

Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-

Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India

UNIT IV

Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of

holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus

land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas

UNIT V

Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash

Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and

schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM

COURSE OUTCOMES

Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management

Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India

Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development

REFERENCE BOOKS

Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution

Can We Make London Department for International Development

Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House

PANCHAYATI RAJ

Course Code 1Y3BBA632

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration

To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites

To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance

To provide insights on Rural Administration

To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes

UNIT I

Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction

Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges

Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration

(Official and non-official) and report submission

UNIT III

Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission

UNIT IV

Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and

Block- Panchayat relationship

Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play

UNIT V

Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government

Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan

Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

COURSE OUTCOMES

Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village

Development interventions

Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its

power Structure

Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and

Plans

Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes

32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959

Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise

Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi

Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New

Delhi

RURAL ECONOMY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 633

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy

To help students understand their role in rural economic development

To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources

To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation

To create awareness on rural economic development

UNIT I

Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-

Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries

(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in

agriculture individual production other production services

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-

Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash

Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land

Reforms

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

UNIT III

Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation

programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs

UNIT IV

Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work

UNIT V

Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing

ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for

the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy

Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village

Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues

Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation

Facilities

Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi

Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi

Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic

Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New

Delhi

INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER

Mid Semester Examination (MSE)

There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5

descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered

End Semester Examination (ESE)

There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks

each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of

10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered

Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations

The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment

Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be

applicable

(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )

Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type

End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size

Page 7: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020

INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ACCOUNTING

Course Code 1Y3BBA103

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable students to synthesize related information and evaluate options for most logical and

optimal solution such that they would be able to predict and control cost incurrence and improve

results

UNIT- I

Accounting Basic of Accounting Accounting Mechanics-Double Entry System Classification

Rules for Debit amp Credit Journal Ledger and Trial Balance sub-division of journal Ledger meaning subdivision and mechanics of Posting balancing ledger accounts

UNIT- II

Cash book and Subsidiary books of Accounting Kinds of Cash Book Purchase day book and sale

day Book Bank reconciliation statement Measurement of income- Adjusting entries- rectification of

errors- Adjusted trial balance

UNIT-III

Preparation of financial statements- Trading account Profit amp Loss account Balance Sheet (with

Adjustments) Accounting for Non-profit organization Accounting Procedures Receipts amp payment

accounts income ampexpenditure account problems

UNIT- IV

Depreciation- Meaning Determinant factors Method amp Significance Basic Concepts of hire

purchase amp installments

UNIT- V

Partnership-Preliminary admission of a partner Company Accounts-Issue of shares Debentures

Forfeitures and reissue of shares

COURSE OUTCOME

Analyse the complexities associated with management of cost of product and services in the

Organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

SA Siddiqui- Comprehensive Accounting

TS Greval- Introduction to Accounting

Mukherjee and M Accounting (Volume-I)

SN Maheshwar- Introduction to Accounting (Vikas Publication)

CAC Rama Gopal Accounting For Managers (New Age)

BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational

and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business

UNIT I

Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro

environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis

for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business

UNIT II

Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic

systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years

plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent

economic initiatives NitiAyog

UNIT III

Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment

problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance

of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural

Development Problems of Growth

UNIT IV

Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment

Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA

and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act

UNIT V

International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational

Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic

Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-

GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India

COURSE OUTCOME

Outline how an entity operates in a business environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996

Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi

Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan

Chand Delhi

Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi

PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA105

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to

articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate

effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the

consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and

quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods

UNIT-I

Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of

Management Functions of the Manager

UNIT- II

Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of

Planning

Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and

type of Policies

Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems

involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques

UNIT- III

Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of

Units and committees

Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship

UNIT- IV

Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training

Directing Nature and purpose and directing

UNIT- V

Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control

process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies

COURSE OUTCOME-

Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques

managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of

managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify

and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own

position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied

audiences

Reference Books

bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher

bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson

Education

bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt

Ltd 4th Ed

bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill

Publications

SEMESTER II

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distributio

n

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor

Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distribu

tion Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Ma

x

Ma

rks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme

nt

Compulsory

Course

English

communication

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA202 Core Course

Management concept amp

Principle

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA203 Core

Course

Environmental

Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA204 Core

Course

Monetary

Economics and

Indian Banking

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA205 Core

Course

Business

Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA205 Business

Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhanceme

nt

Skill Enhancement

Elective

Course-I

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand

Total 600 21 5 - 24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

ENGLISH COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA201

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English

language teaching and content writing sectors

UNIT I

Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning

Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening

UNIT II

Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive

writing expansion of an idea

UNIT III

Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing

(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume

writing covering letter

UNIT IV

Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases

UNIT V

Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb

agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions

(Advanced)

COURSE OUTCOME

To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill

Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul

Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan

Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das

Orient Blackswan

Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press

Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication

MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 202

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and

process of effective controlling in the organization

UNIT I

Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science

Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)

UNIT II

School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and

Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)

Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management

UNIT III

Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing

Staffing Directing and Coordinating

UNIT IV

Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command

Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control

UNIT V

Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure

determination Forms- formal amp informal organization

Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations

COURSE OUTCOME

Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial

functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management

REFERENCE BOOKS

LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management

VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management

James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB

Fred Luthans- OB

ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 203

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links

between human and natural systems

UNIT I

Introduction to environmental studies

Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability

and sustainable development

UNIT II

Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an

ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following

ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds

streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)

Unit III

Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to

mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and

over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international

ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate

energy sources growing energy needs case studies

UNIT IV

Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem

diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots

Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and

Informational value

UNIT V

Environmental Pollution

Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution

Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and

Industrial waste Pollution case studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social

and environmental processes

REFERENCE BOOKS

California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London

Routledge

Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security

Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press

Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of

ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006

Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37

McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books

McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the

Twentieth Century

Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders

Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic

Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt

Ltd

Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons

Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi

1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP

Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation

S Chand Publishing New Delhi

MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING

Course Code 1Y3BBA204

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using

statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills

within the contest of subject matter of economics

UNIT I

Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of

Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value

of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income

theory of Money

UNIT II

Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people

Money Market

UNIT III

Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial

Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks

UNIT IV

Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control

methods and Tools of Monetary Policy

UNIT V

RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative

Banks and Rural Banks

COURSE OUTCOME

Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and

mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of

economics

REFERENCE BOOKS

MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi

LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi

Crowther- An Out Line of Money

Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant

KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ

BUSINESS COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA205

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative

scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication

UNIT I

Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports

OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)

UNIT II

Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other

words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis

UNIT III

Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers

Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers

UNIT IV

Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a

Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication

Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)

UNIT V

Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written

Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp

minutes

COURSE OUTCOME

To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical

proficiency in the development of exposition and argument

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wren amp Martin

K Madhukar- Business Communication

VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication

Asha Laul- Business Communication

Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH

SEMESTER III

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotte

d

Credit

s

Course Code Course

Type

Course

Title

Total

Mark

s

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subjec

t wise

Distrib

ution

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA301

Ability

Enhancement

IT Tool for Business

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA302

Core Course

Introduction to Marketing

Management

100 50 17 20 7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA303 Core

Course

Business

Law

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA304 Core

Course

Business

statistics for

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA305

Core

Course

Retail

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA304 Practical

Business

statistics for Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill

Enhancemen

t Elective Course-II

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand Total 600 24

IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 301

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software

components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data

base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT

UNIT-I

Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and

Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World

Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept

UNIT-II

Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different

computer generation

UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and

Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming

Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-

principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart

examples

UNIT-IV

Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation

applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)

Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information

System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems

Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human

Resources Management Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations

Understand the hardware and software components of the computer

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford

2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication

3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication

4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill

INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 302

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply

these to a new or existing business

UNIT I

Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept

amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro

environment

UNIT II

Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of

Product Line amp Product- mix

UNIT III

Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing

decisions Overview of pricing process

UNIT IV

Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product

Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage

UNIT V

Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to

marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct

selling

COURSE OUTCOME

To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct

an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an

appropriate format

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Philip Kotler

2 TN Chabra

3 TK Panda

4 SH Kazmi

5 Arun Kumar

BUSINESS LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 303

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal

environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with

knowledge of legal principles

UNIT-I

Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration

capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts

Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp

Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency

UNIT-II

Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp

Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales

UNIT-III

Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -

Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a

negotiable instrument

UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of

non-registration Dissolution of a firm

UNIT-V

Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of

Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013

COURSE OBJECTIVE

On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to

individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context

Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 ND Kapoor

2 Tulsian

3 MC Kuchhal

4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business

BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 304

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management

UNIT I

Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance

Scope and Limitation of Statistic

UNIT II

Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar

Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive

UNIT III

Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic

Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures

of dispersion

UNIT IV

Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and

Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index

number CPI WPI IIP

UNIT V

Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank

Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series

COURSE OUTCOME

Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically

discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons

2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication

3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication

RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in

India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone

Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT

FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan

Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process

UNIT II

FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail

Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors

Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing

MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer

Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design

and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication

UNIT III

STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty

Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors

UNIT IV

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management

IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service

Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM

Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying

UNIT V

MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at

Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems

at Retail Centers

Course Outcome-

Reference Books

bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education

bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A

Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education

The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge

about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various

aspects of retail operations

After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with

the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the

entire retail operations

SEMESTER IV

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code Course

Type Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subject

wise

Distributio

n

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mark

s

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-401

Ability

Enhanceme

nt

Introduction to

soft skill amp

Team Building

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA-402 Core Course

Introduction to

financial

management

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-403 Core Course

Advertising

and Sales

Promotion

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-404 Core Course

Management

of Human resource

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of

Business

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group

Term End

Practical

Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-404 Practical

Management

of Human

resource

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-405 Practical

Macro

Economics of Business

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

Grand Total 550 22

INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 401

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate

students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners

by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are

learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for

their own learning

UNIT ndash I

General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of

Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences

Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making

Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of

communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of

Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation

UNIT ndash II

Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing

skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice

modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements

General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral

skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive

Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style

UNIT ndash III

Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format

and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in

Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active

Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD

UNIT ndash IV

Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction

Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview

Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing

Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of

Conversation

UNIT ndash V

Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional

Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers

COURSE OUTCOME

To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills

and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin

bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar

INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 402

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital

decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and

raising long-term finance

UNIT I

Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives

Role of finance manager

UNIT II

Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of

investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return

Comparison between NPV amp IRR

UNIT III

Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of

Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning

capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure

UNIT IV

The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage

Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating

Leverage

UNIT V

Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital

estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of

inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order

Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy

COURSE OUTCOME

Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial

manager in the current competitive business scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 IM Pandey

2 P Chandra

3 SP Gupta

4 MY Khan

ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 403

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may

review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos

homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions

UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising

budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for

Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising

UNIT II

Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy

Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role

types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council

of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)

UNIT III

Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring

awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of

design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet

advertising and evaluation of advertising

UNIT IV

Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors

influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option

Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of

consumer schemes and other methods of promotion

UNIT V

Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs

Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales

personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion

COURSE OUTCOME

Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how

these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its

relation to todaylsquos marketplace

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall

Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi

Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi

Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications

MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 404

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource

management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational

setting

UNIT-I

Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with

special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in

strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management

UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge

workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)

Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)

UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of

human resource department and the role of human resource manager

UNITndashIV

Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification

rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation

UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection

(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction

COURSE OUTCOME

To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training

Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical

Behaviour

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi

Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New

Delhi

Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York

HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications

A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications

MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the

important indicators of the economy and their significance

UNIT I

Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of

Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income

Personal and Personal disposable income

UNIT II

Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income

Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and

Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator

Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate

demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy

UNIT III

Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate

demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government

expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary

and fiscal policy

UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary

policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production

Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation

monetary measures fiscal measures

UNIT V

Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and

corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in

open economy

COURSE OUTCOME

To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the

role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson

2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill

3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers

4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson

SEMESTER V

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment

Internal Assessment Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-501

Ability Enhancement

Public Relation amp Corporate Image

50

25

8

10

4

15

6

2

-

-

2

1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and

small Business

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-503

Core Course Principle of

Economics

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-502

Practical Entrepreneurship and

small Business

50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics

50

25 08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Skill Course

Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill Enhancement

Elective Course-III

50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2

Grand Total

600

24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication

1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management

1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India

1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation

1Y3BBA509 Organization Development

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision

1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management

1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA513 Database Management System

1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service

1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy

1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management

1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management

1Y3BBA520 Stores Management

1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA522 Technology Management

1Y3BBA523 Productivity

1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept

1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management

1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System

1Y3BBA529 Health Economics

1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management

(Rural Management Group )

1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity

1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment

1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management

SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES

Non-Technical

Elective No Department Faculty Name

Faculty of Information Technology

I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)

II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)

IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)

V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Management

I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)

II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)

III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development

Faculty of Commerce

I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)

II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Humanities

I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)

II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)

III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Science

I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)

II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)

III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)

IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)

V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Education

I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)

II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)

PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA501

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts

of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling

and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization

UNIT- I

Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash

Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy

Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors

ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public

Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations

UNIT- II

Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service

Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social

Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy

for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation

Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event

Management

UNIT- III

Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash

Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public

Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of

Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control

UNIT IV

Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies

Components of an Individual Image

Advertising and Corporate Image

Public Relations of an Institutions

UNIT V

The Grapevine and Rumours

Stereotype

Propaganda

Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations

applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different

entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling

REFERENCE BOOKS

Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House

Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House

Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University

Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill

This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning

ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-

The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding

processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to

those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic

environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide

evidence which informs those debates

UNIT I

Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of

Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its

environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship

UNIT II

Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship

development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the

Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making

UNIT III

Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that

enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in

Social context Start Up

UNIT IV

Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional

source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital

UNIT V

Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication

2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd

3 Vasant Desai

4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH

PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 503

COURSE OBJECTIVES-

To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production

UNIT- I

Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits

UNIT-II

Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus

movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts

of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications

of demand and supply price rationing price floors

Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price

elasticity cross and income elasticity

UNIT-III

Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility

Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp

Producer surplus

UNIT-IV

Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant

and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue

and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale

UNIT-V

Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of

the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run

equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment

concept

COURSE OUTCOME-

To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011

bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th

edition

2007

bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA

bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press

Oxford

bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore

MARKETING GROUP

INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so

that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to

enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications

UNIT-I

Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC

in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising

appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion

relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship

between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods

Interactive Internet Marketing

UNIT-II

Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach

establishing and allocating promotional budget

UNIT-III

IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different

forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning

creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design

considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client

Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork

UNIT-IV

Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering

key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and

media research

Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration

client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc

UNIT-V

Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing

Communications

COURSE OUTCOME-

To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches

and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to

communicating to target audiences

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc

Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard

D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois

Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing

House

Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and

Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication

Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH

Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing

Communications Pearson Education Limited

Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc

Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House

Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning

Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc

Homewood Illinois

Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic

Approach Cengage Learning

Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India

Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education

SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT

Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE

It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and

distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and

distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners

UNIT-I

Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies

Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling

objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring

Procedure Socialization

UNIT-II

Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program

Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation

Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial

Evaluation of Contest

UNIT-III

Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel

Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales

Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process

UNIT-IV

Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key

tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market

Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation

UNIT-V

Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners

Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict

Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International

Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales

COURSE OUTCOME

Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the

sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans

participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables

REFERENCE BOOKS

Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres

Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books

Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI

L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills

Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets

Greenwood Publishing Group

Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub

ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH

Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing

consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing

research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students

within a course project

UNIT-I

Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing

Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research

Process Marketing Research Designs

UNIT-II

The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques

Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of

Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic

Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical

Analysis Tools

UNIT-III

Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)

ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor

Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental

Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores

Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-

hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number

UNIT-IV

Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product

Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant

Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification

Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing

Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and

their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity

UNIT-V

Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning

in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report

and class presentation of the same

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from

analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor

analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis

REFERENCE BOOKS

Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi

William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi

Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi

Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill

Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research

Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey

Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning

Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp

Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced

in the class

HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP

LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA

Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of

Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity

objectivity and understandings

UNIT-I

The Factories Act 1948

The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923

The Employees State Insurance Act 1948

UNIT-II

The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952

The Payment of gratuity Act 1972

UNIT-III

The Maternity Benefit Act 1961

The Minimum Wages act 1948

UNIT-IV

The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946

The Payment of Bonus Act 1965

UNIT-V

The Apprentices Act 1969

The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959

COURSE OUTCOME ndash

To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour

Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the

organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to

follow the Laws applicable to the establishment

REFERENCE BOOKS

S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications

S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi

Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot

V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House

N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons

INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE

In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our

country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of

Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be

acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the

concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India

UNIT-I

Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors

affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial

relation programme

Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact

of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes

lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry

UNIT-II

Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal

Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective

bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective

collective bargaining collective bargaining in India

UNIT-III

Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education

scheme in India- objectives functions and problems

Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation

schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India

UNIT-IV

Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India

major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions

registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union

UNIT-V

Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery

Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation

submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court

industrial tribunals

Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power

of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute

COURSE OUTCOME

Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective

bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute

resolution

REFERENCE BOOKS

Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts

IIPM Personnel Management in India

Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business

Publication Ltd

Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India

Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India

Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication

Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co

Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law

ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational

culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the

human values in individuals

UNIT-I

Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational

Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development

Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining

and survey research amp feedback methodology

UNIT-II

Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in

organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief

systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development

UNIT-III

Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component

interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief

of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action

UNIT-IV

OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team

building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process

interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions

important for successful OD efforts

UNIT ndash V

HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational

implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional

Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have

improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi

Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York

McGrawhill

Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in

addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a

good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company

UNIT-I

Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm

Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-

Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of

Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering

UNIT-II

Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the

analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount

of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a

Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and

Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis

UNIT-III

Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues

and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements

medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings

Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project

finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing

UNIT-IV

Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of

financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing

Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect

cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization

UNIT-V

Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value

Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic

indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added

Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total

Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)

COURSE OUTCOME

Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and

corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts

REFERENCE BOOKS

Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill

Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial

environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a

multinational corporation

UNIT-I

Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation

functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial

management International monetary system

UNIT-II

Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories

ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible

exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer

Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options

Currency swaps and interest rate swaps

UNIT-III

Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction

transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction

exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The

national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International

capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)

UNIT-IV

International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic

considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)

Financial risk and cost of capital

Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of

capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-

20 subsidiaries and tax havens

UNIT-V

International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their

comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets

Recent developments in the Euro bond market

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations

and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley

PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall

Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall

Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis

Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co

Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall

Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers

Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath

FINANCIAL INCLUSION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion

such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss

the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to

promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models

UNIT-I

Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting

Access to Financial Services

Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive

Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators

UNIT-II

Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey

Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional

Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card

UNIT-III

Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India

Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations

Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor

UNIT-IV

SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of

microfinance evolved in India

Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial

Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for

Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for

Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People

UNIT-V

Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises

Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion

and Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account

initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage

Publication

Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House

Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech

Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications

Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications

Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing

Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI

Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI

Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag

Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion

Academic Foundation

IT GROUP

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to

manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the

hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment

UNIT-I

The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures

File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base

Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial

Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness

UNIT-II

Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface

with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database

Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design

UNIT-III

Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database

Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database

Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases

UNIT-IV

DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance

Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues

UNIT-V

Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the

field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective

faculty during the coverage of syllabus

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic

concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational

algebra and SQL

REFERENCE BOOKS

Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs

Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan

Press

McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co

MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It

aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing

implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services

UNIT-I

The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development

Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The

Enabling Environment for ITES

UNIT-II

Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled

Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of

Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services

UNIT-III

Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support

Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions

UNIT-IV

International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting

Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in

facilitating Trade in ITESTITES

UNIT-V

Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of

Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of

Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace

Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations

and integrate the learning in handling these complexities

REFERENCE BOOKS

Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat

E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing

SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information

technology with various aspects of Software Project Management

UNIT-I

Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision

and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM

Framework

UNIT-II

Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning

Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan

Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration

and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning

UNIT-III

Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an

Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques

Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule

Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools

UNIT-IV

Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance

Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior

Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review

UNIT-V

Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks

Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk

COURSE OUTCOME

Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business

context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business

scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson

Education Ltd

P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp

Tsinghua University Press

R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance

Management Concepts Pub

Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group

B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science

Press

A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications

G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on

understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business

UNIT I

Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm

production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country

UNIT II

Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms

and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business

sector

UNIT III

Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations

relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries

UNIT IV

Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment

and policy

UNIT V

Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies

COURSE OUTCOME

Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper

and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain

REFERENCE BOOKS

Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons

Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ

Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ

AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 517

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies

strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms

UNIT I

Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market

structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp

significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of

marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour

UNIT II

Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash

significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product

product life cycle

UNIT III

Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies

and pricing methods

UNIT IV

Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and

standardization

UNIT V

Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural

products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in

agribusiness

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better

understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for

agricultural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH

Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall

Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control

Pearson Edu

Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu

Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India

FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 518

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food

marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen

and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural

political and economic forces over time

UNIT I

Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade

Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of

Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic

factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer

UNIT II

Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling

food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing

in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions

across the chain in food retail food service marketing

UNIT III

4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing

Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system

Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement

Strategies for food retailers

UNIT IV

Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling

Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food

Products

UNIT V

Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training

Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in

retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze

Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing

REFERENCE BOOKS

Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of

India

Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu

Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill

RETAIL GROUP

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in

the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it

UNIT- I

Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management

Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain

networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain

Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network

UNIT- II

Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer

service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs

multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier

Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants

UNIT- III

Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory

models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system

UNIT- IV

COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip

Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION

TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain

Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management

UNIT- V

Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a

Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance

measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics

quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics

COURSE OUTCOME

After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain

which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House

bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers

bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg

bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi

bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan

STORES MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 520

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different

terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned

areas

UNIT- I

Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the

location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design

UNIT- II

Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual

Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors

UNIT- III

Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at

Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores

Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments

UNIT- IV

Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies

Quick Response System

UNIT- V

Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact

on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space

Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization

COURSE OUTCOME

The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern

and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management

bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing

bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach

bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing

bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing

RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 521

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail

Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail

business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management

UNIT I

Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail

equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail

market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-

Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India

UNIT II

Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development

The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and

Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-

Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on

ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response

marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks

The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management

UNIT III

Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM

Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch

points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services

Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM

Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding

Common Barriers

UNIT IV

Services Management

Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the

service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-

Supply relationships vehicle routing

UNIT V

Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising

Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping

the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand

management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-

2nd edition 2006

MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational

edititionUS1798

Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education

New Delhi 2003

JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy

Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi

Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy

Pearson Education New Delhi 2004

KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005

Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007

Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House

Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution

rosenbloom and Education Foundation US

PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 522

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

UNIT- I

Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology

Change Implication

UNIT- II

Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying

UNIT- III

Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology

Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management

UNIT- IV

Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology

Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages

UNIT- V

Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise

Level

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to

manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009

bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009

bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson

PRODUCTIVITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 523

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

UNIT- I

Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and

external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work

Contents and Ineffective Time

UNIT- II

Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram

String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart

UNIT- III

Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart

UNIT- IV

Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be

Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement

UNIT- V

Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International

Labour Office Geneva

bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed

bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill

bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India

QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO

Course Code 1Y3BBA 524

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify

the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and

measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current

issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans

UNIT- I

Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives

UNIT- II

Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect

concept

UNIT- III

Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality

UNIT- IV

Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various

control Charts

UNIT- V

Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification

COURSE OUTCOME-

Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to

explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key

aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for

controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp

communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze

the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise

and evaluate quality implementation plans

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay

bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd

bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas

bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd

bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition

7th

Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012

bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM CONCEPTS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 525

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism

To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash

Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp

Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and

development of Tourism through the ages

UNIT II

COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash

Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism

inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious

Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions

incentives sports and adventure tourism

UNIT III

TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash

Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of

motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash

health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and

push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists

UNIT IV

IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash

Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts

- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism

UNIT V

SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-

Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote

Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable

Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and

experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of

tourism experiences

REFERENCES BOOKS

Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling

Publishers Private Limited New Delhi

Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism

Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited

Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill

International

Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors

New Delhi

Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas

Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New

Delhi

TOURISM MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 526

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the basic concept and various components of management

UNIT I

MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-

Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of

management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)

Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management

UNIT II

PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-

Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of

planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by

objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance

and limitation of decision making

UNIT III

ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash

Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of

staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance

appraisal

UNIT IV

DIRECTING ndash

Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation

(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy

theory)

UNIT V

LEADERSHIP-

Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path

Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to

communication

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives

Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of

tourism as well as the impacts of tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc

Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New

Delhi

Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition

AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing

House New Delhi

Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition

Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations

To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism

industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-

Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing

Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and

Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash

Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New

Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING -

Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION -

Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity

Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in

promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level

which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described

REFERENCES BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson

Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition

Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent

learning

UNIT I

Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health

Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural

History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention

UNIT II

Definition and meaning of hospital ndash

Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing

concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of

Hospitals

UNIT III

Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector

Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in

delivering healthcare in India

UNIT IV

Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural

hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description

UNIT V

The reforms of Healthcare System-

The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare

reforms amp Future of Healthcare System

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding

the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the

management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and

organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services

REFERENCE BOOKS

The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991

Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd

Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers

HEALTH ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 529

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and

understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict

peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different

social actions

UNIT I

Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and

importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below

Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits

UNIT II

Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve

techniques and properties of indifference curve

UNIT III

Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash

Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of

Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of

Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of

demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash

Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue

UNIT IV

Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two

variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves

UNIT V

Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash

Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and

monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market

situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price

determination

COURSE OUTCOME

To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from

an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic

evaluation of a health intervention or program

REFERENCE BOOKS

Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR

Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP

Managerial Economics - Gupta GS

Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani

Business Economics - Sharma NK

Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar

Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi

Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL

HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 530

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions

related to records management in the healthcare environment

UNIT I

Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record

keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records

UNIT II

Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health

Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research

UNIT III

Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics

investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing

Pharmacy etc Audits)

UNIT IV

Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems

associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic

Related Groups (DRG)

UNIT V

Medical Registers ndash

Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various

departments amp common problems faced

COURSE OUTCOME

Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New

Delhi 1999

Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995

Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi

George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003

Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 531

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India

To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India

UNIT I

Rural Society in India

Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-

urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and

subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural

life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion

UNIT II

Rural Society

Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social

institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity

and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of

rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT-III

Village India

Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance

contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and

political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology

Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class

UNIT IV

Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics

Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid

growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope

and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -

Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT-V

Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times

Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social

processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India

Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy

Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms

REFERENCE BOOKS

Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi

Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay

PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House

SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication

House Delhi

ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 532

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To explain the nature of environmental studies

To introduce aspects of Natural resources

To introduce aspects of ecosystems

To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation

To introduce aspects of environmental pollution

To create awareness on social issues and environment

To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

UNIT I

Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for

public awareness

UNIT II

Ecosystems

Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and

decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and

Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the

following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic

Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)

UNIT III

Biodiversity and its Conservation

Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification

of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option

Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports

of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-

Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ

Conservation of biodiversity

UNIT IV

Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil

pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste

Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an

individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods

earthquake cyclone and landslides

20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT V

Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water

Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of

People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible

responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and

holocaust

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the nature of environmental studies

Classify renewable and non-renewable resources

Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues

Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation

Analyze aspects of environmental pollution

Describe aspects of social issues and environment

Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner

Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental

Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai

Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA

RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 533

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts

To familiarize Rural marketing strategy

To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems

To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing

To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages

UNIT I

Overview of Rural Marketing

Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing

and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction

Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class

UNIT II

Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for

rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT III

Rural Distribution Systems

Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche

markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of

Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT IV

ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network

(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction

Methodology Group Project work

UNIT V

Market support

Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role

play

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Market their products

Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products

Choose an appropriate distribution system

Apply ICT in rural marketing

Source the finance for rural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India

Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education

Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi

SEMESTER- VI

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allot

ted

Cred

its

Course

Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mark

s

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-601

Core

Course

E- Commerce

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-602 Core

Course

Customer

Relationship Management

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-603 Practical

Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva

Voce

100

50

17

-

-

50

20

- - 4 4

1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Grand Total

550

22

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one

paper presentation certificate in related discipline

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management

1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing

1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA607 Management of Change

1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management

1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management

1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service

1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business

1Y3BBA614 E- Governance

1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management

1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing

1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour

1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning

1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design

1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control

1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan

1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing

1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management

1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care

1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law

(Rural Management Group)

1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System

1Y3BBA632

Panchayati Raj

1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy

E- COMMERCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 601

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is

designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the

technical foundation for understanding information systems

UNIT I

Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting

online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a

business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-

commerce

UNIT II

Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet

(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A

systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing

vs in-house development of a website)

UNIT III

Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension

definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security

intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)

technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and

protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)

UNIT IV

E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards

e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online

banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house

automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments

UNIT V

Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting

online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of

utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online

services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and

entertainment

COURSE OUTCOME-

Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information

systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Management Information System Jawadekar

bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon

bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana

bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)

bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty

CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 602

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of

Customer Relationship Management in the organizations

UNIT- I

Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature

of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive

and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and

evaluating customer business plans

UNIT- II

Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer

database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing

customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively

Planning and making persuasive presentations

UNIT- III

Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality

Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality

managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and

Cross- sell

UNIT- IV

Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations

Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority

setting Target setting setting standards

UNIT- V

Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction

COURSE OUTCOME-

To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship

Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd

Ed Response Books Sage Publication

Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House

Pvt Ltd

Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books

Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management

V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008

Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management

South Western Cengage Learning

Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press

Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age

International

Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan

Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of

India Private Limted New Delhi 2011

S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private

Limted New Delhi 2008

ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 603

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to

work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn

the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final

semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by

the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a

student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their

analytical capabilities and experience

DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)

Title of the study (Cover Page)

Declaration

Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)

Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)

Acknowledgement

Table of Contents

Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Introduction

12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research

12 Significance of the study

13 Scope of the study

14 Research Problem

15 Objective of the study

17 Hypothesis

18 Limitations of the study

2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students

to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they

learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After

the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is

evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report

should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to

provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also

able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business

operations and come up with the ways to tap the

Opportunities

3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

31 Introduction

32 Population of the study

33 Sampling Design

331 Sampling Technique

332 Sampling Method

333 Sample Size

34 Research Instrument

35 Sources of data

351 Primary Data

352 Secondary Data

4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION

5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION

Bibliography

COURSE OUTCOME-

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able

to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and

come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities

MARKETING GROUP

PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 604

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the

context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product

manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions

UNIT- I

Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused

organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management

Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-

cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product

Development

UNIT- II

Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods

of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in

international Market

UNIT- III

Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity

concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand

Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image

UNIT- IV

Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system

measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement

Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market

segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining

and establishing brand values

UNIT- V

Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand

extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time

Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand

Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation

COURSE OUTCOME

The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of

Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for

Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning

implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer

Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi

Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi

Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi

Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education

New Delhi

Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi

Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata

McGraw Hill New Delhi

Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi

STRATEGIC MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 605

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and

implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and

managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver

superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation

through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills

UNIT- I

Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash

Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of

Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying

Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting

Marketing Objectives

UNIT-II

Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching

Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy

Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle

Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies

UNIT-III

Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp

Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models

UNIT- IV

Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives

Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy

Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing

UNIT- V

Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at

different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by

executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and

interdisciplinary nature

REFERENCE BOOKS

Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt

D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin

OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage

Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill

Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp

Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson

Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann

Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India

George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press

J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and

Programs McGraw-Hill Companies

Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub

Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon

P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave

E-MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 606

COURSE OBJECTIVE

It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance

enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns

UNIT- I

Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics

Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan

Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing

UNIT- II

Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in

India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within

communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing

UNIT- III

Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet

as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet

User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-

branding

UNIT- IV

Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-

marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools

Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent

Trends in e-customer service

UNIT- V

Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web

Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing

campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising

Course Outcome

Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics

online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its

implication on marketing strategy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a

networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill

Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall

Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning

Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books

Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial

Times

HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP

MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 607

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be

Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students

Understand the importance of managing change

UNIT- I

Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-

Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of

human resource strategies in implementing Change

UNIT-II

Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR

implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation

and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions

UNIT-III

HR Processes amp Change

Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned

change

Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change

UNIT- IV

Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in

employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management

of change implications of downsizing

UNIT- V

Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to

promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and

feedback

Course Outcome

Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more

effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change

process

REFERENCE BOOKS

A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human

Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education

Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill

Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage

South Asia Edition

K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation

Response Books

VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books

CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 608

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical

relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand

anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions

to ensure the organizational and individual success

UNIT-I

Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of

organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business

environment

UNIT-II

Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars

Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations

UNIT- III

Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock

Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system

(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)

UNIT- IV

Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and

repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally

appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural

negotiation and conflicts management

UNIT- V

Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual

countries Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development

of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning

Private Limited

G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill

Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley

Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing

Co

Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell

Business

Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times

McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp

Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation

Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson

Education India

GROUP DYNAMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 609

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group

dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group

effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of

resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding

UNIT-I

Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group

dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B

UNIT-II

Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group

Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash

Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress

UNIT-III

Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group

decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash

conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict

UNIT- IV

Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De

individuation theory

UNIT- V

Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources

of Change in groups

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups

REFERENCE BOOKS

Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley

Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass

Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co

Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE

Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and

application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax

along with basic concepts of VAT

UNIT-I

Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of

Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment

of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-II

Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature

and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax

planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business

UNIT-III

Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net

Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and

Penalties (Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-IV

Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for

service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of

Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)

UNIT- V

VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview

of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT

Law)

COURSE OUTCOME

Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields

REFERENCE BOOKS

Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications

Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub

Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House

T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India

BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson

S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann

R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _

INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 611

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important

components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO

Analysis etc

UNIT-I

INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian

Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role

in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)

UNIT-II

FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different

Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players

Different types of Instruments

UNIT-III

CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI

Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank

UNIT- IV

COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp

Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A

REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA

UNIT- V

NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies

Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture

Capital Funds

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment

Banking companies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication

Financial Services MY Khan TMH

Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication

S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran

ML Seth

FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 612

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and

prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of

uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding

of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role

of internal audit assessments

UNIT I

Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview

UNIT II

Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax

fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and

inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds

UNIT III

Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion

investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports

UNIT IV

Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using

Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)

UNIT V Case Study

1 Two Indian

2 Two international cases

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread

nature of fraud and its economic impact

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation

Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination

Cengage Learning

IT GROUP

INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 613

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security

managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues

in the information assurance field

UNIT I

Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian

Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its

application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law

Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour

Laws E-Media and Print Media

UNIT II

E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security

Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature

UNIT III

Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil

Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-

detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of

Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA

UNIT IV

IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal

issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base

UNIT V

Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of

Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules

COURSE OUTCOME-

Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House

Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co

John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River

Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher

Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University

E-GOVERNANCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 614

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information

Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an

awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the

issues concerning the Cyber security

UNIT I

Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National

E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status

UNIT II

E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process

Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges

UNIT III

E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-

Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics

UNIT IV

Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic

data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber

audit implications for e-governance

Unit V

Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and

construction of a joining table

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill

Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing

Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in

India ICFAI Press Hyderabad

B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill

H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications

V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd

IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 615

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization

UNIT I

IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT

Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo

Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for

IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library

UNIT II

Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service

Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support

Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change

Management Release Management

UNIT III

Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve

Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine

Recovery Data Retention

UNIT IV

Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security

Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection

UNIT V

IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and

Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and

Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of

Internet on Technical Support

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology

REFERENCE BOOKS

Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce

(OGC) TSO UK

Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos

Management Tata McGraw Hill

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 616

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques

and their management

UNIT I

Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations

of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and

distribution

UNIT II

Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and

factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging

of foods

UNIT III

Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food

industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO

etc

UNIT IV

Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products

cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking

confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of

fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH

Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie

Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing

Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH

MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 617

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing

concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs

UNIT I

Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution

channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-

farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing

UNIT II

Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds

Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of

NSC and State Seed Corporation

UNIT III

Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers

Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash

marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer

marketing

UNIT IV

Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash

marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of

electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity

UNIT V

Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm

machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines

implementsEquipmentlsquos

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with

various functional areas of agribusiness

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp

IBH

Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management

Kalyani

Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ

House

FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 618

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis

of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions

UNIT I

Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management

decisions farm management problems

UNIT II

Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle

principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc

UNIT III

Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm

records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement

farm efficiency measures

UNIT IV

Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc

UNIT V

Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to

counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks

and uncertainty

COURSE OUTCOME

Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses

REFERENCE BOOKS

Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall

Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ

Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ

Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ

RETAIL GROUP

BUYER BEHAVIOUR

Course Code 1Y3BBA 619

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer

decisions making

UNIT-I

A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic

Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market

Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making

UNIT-II

Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles

of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer

Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and

Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product

Relationship

UNIT-III

Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to

information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-

Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors

Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications

UNIT-IV

Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing

Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-

Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions

Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy

UNIT-V

Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics

lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they

experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and

impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour

COURSE OUTCOME

Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the

choices consumers make

REFERENCE BOOKS

JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata

Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006

Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context

Excel Books NewDelhi-2001

Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous

DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing

Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi

Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining

Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005

Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000

RETAIL PLANNING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 620

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational

decision-making processes in the organized retail

UNIT I

Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail

Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-

Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative

methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management

UNIT II

Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics

Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp

non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion

designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting

Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-

Management of Obsolete goods

UNIT III

Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer

psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical

Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices

UNIT IV

Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-

Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp

Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective

Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer

Rights- Consumer Protection Acts

UNIT V

Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing

Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-

Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels

REFERENCE BOOKS

Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies

Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies

Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson

Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund

amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson

Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice

Hall of India New Delhi

Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies

Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best

People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd

RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 621

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the

value it creates

UNIT I

Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When

How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience

Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency

UNIT II

Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated

Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-

Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-

UNIT III

Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on

Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-

Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display

Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-

UNIT IV

Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium

Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and

Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-

Trade Dealing

UNIT V

Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-

Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating

Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing

to act in ways that increase loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -

Prentice-Hall

Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology

Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales

Promotion Techniques

Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate

Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page

Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books

George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing

Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill

PRODUCTION GROUP

PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL

Course Code 1Y3BBA 622

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a

basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of

facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality

control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an

understanding of the concept of aggregate planning

UNIT- I

Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors

Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-

requisites of PPC

UNIT- II

Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in

Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining

Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control

Models)

UNIT- III

Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection

Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master

production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of

software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II

UNIT- IV

Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n

job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling

Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)

UNIT- V

Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control

function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications

bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi

Deep and Deep Publications

PROCESS REENGINEERING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 623

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of

business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering

projects

UNIT- I

Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp

pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR

UNIT- II

Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering

project organizing for process reengineering

UNIT- III

Process analysis and design

a) Process analysis

(b) Process design

UNIT- IV

Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition

tracking and measuring process performance

UNIT- V

Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology

Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact

measurement

COURSE OUTCOME

To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the

considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-

engineering project

REFERENCE BOOKS

Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata

McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater

Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester

John Wiley amp Sons

WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn

the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time

standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering

to design of work systems

UNIT- I

Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos

productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity

Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time

Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities

Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was

developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph

UNIT- II

Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting

up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion

Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand

Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and

Design of Tools amp Equipment

UNIT- III

Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard

from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and

Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work

Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling

UNIT- IV

Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage

Incentive Plans

The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for

Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action

UNIT-V

Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion

Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System

Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts

Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional

including understanding the need for quality

REFERENCE BOOKS

iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill

ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation

Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp

Sons

Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall

Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall

Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press

Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall

Mall East and London

Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN

Course Code 1Y3BBA 625

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in

it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative

impacts of tourism development

UNIT I

Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism

Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of

Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in

Tourism Development

UNIT II

Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning

system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos

Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-

Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in

learning system

UNIT III

Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable

development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist

Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash

The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash

Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities

UNIT IV

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage

of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment

UNIT IV

Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the

Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National

Policy on Ecology and Environment

COURSE OUTCOME

To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global

perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international

tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for

sustainable tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash

Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications

Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers

Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William

Heinemann Ltd

Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices

London Pitman Publishing

Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York

Kendall Hunt Publishing Company

Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan

Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman

Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford

University Press

New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable

Development Approach VNR and New York

TOURISM MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 626

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism

and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing

that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products

before the stakeholders of tourism industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing

Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and

Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market

Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing

Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for

different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing

Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales

promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital

communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future

It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are

needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be

a part of this growth

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar

Thomson Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd

edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of

Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry

UNIT I

HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of

Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads

ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and

marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents

UNIT II

RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief

History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway

Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway

station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains

express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world

heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes

UNIT III

AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth

Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled

Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature

Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players

Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and

performance marketing strategies of Air India

UNIT IV

WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover

crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going

traffic) ndash National waterways

UNIT V

CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing

stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and

Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation

COURSE OUTCOME

Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of

the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management

REFERENCE BOOKS

RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 628

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of

its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing

knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital

Management

UNIT I

Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its

impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need

principles purpose

UNIT II

Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and

their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply

department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health

and patient safety

UNIT III

Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of

biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules

standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging

transportation amp storage

UNIT IV

Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier

methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal

decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of

wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan

UNIT V

Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party

insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash

meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural

disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague

typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics

COURSE OUTCOME

To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost

containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges

arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs

and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its

various components

REFERENCE BOOKS

Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication

First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn

Park k - Preventive and social medicine

Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot

MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 629

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted

advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public

relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any

potential crisis that may arise

UNIT I

Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches

to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of

marketing functions of marketing

UNIT II

Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment

Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market

segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash

positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing

UNIT III

Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior

(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying

decision process

UNIT IV

Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp

deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product

development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling

UNIT V

Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing

policies and strategies

Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management

decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels

COURSE OUTCOME

Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an

integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare

professionals and the public

REFERENCE BOOKS

Philip Kotler - marketing management

Wiliam jStanton - marketing management

Sherleker S A - marketing management

J C Gandhi - marketing management

Davar - modern marketing management

Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub

P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research

Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research

HOSPITALS RELATED LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 630

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of

common-law development

UNIT ndash I

Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties

sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance

act trust act societies registration act

UNIT ndashII

Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of

human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act

1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971

mental health act patient consent

UNIT ndash III

Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948

narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods

act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration

UNIT ndash IV

Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act

1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916

maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing

order) act trade union act industrial disputes act

UNIT ndashV

Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in

hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical

negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical

establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal

pronouncements rulings and regulations

REFERENCE BOOKS

Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer

Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law

Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 631

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India

To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural

Production system in India

To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India

To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development

UNIT -1

Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions

ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology

Case analysis and discussion

UNIT II

Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash

Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture

UNIT III

Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-

Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India

UNIT IV

Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of

holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus

land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas

UNIT V

Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash

Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and

schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM

COURSE OUTCOMES

Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management

Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India

Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development

REFERENCE BOOKS

Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution

Can We Make London Department for International Development

Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House

PANCHAYATI RAJ

Course Code 1Y3BBA632

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration

To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites

To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance

To provide insights on Rural Administration

To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes

UNIT I

Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction

Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges

Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration

(Official and non-official) and report submission

UNIT III

Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission

UNIT IV

Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and

Block- Panchayat relationship

Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play

UNIT V

Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government

Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan

Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

COURSE OUTCOMES

Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village

Development interventions

Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its

power Structure

Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and

Plans

Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes

32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959

Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise

Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi

Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New

Delhi

RURAL ECONOMY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 633

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy

To help students understand their role in rural economic development

To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources

To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation

To create awareness on rural economic development

UNIT I

Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-

Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries

(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in

agriculture individual production other production services

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-

Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash

Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land

Reforms

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

UNIT III

Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation

programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs

UNIT IV

Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work

UNIT V

Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing

ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for

the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy

Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village

Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues

Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation

Facilities

Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi

Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi

Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic

Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New

Delhi

INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER

Mid Semester Examination (MSE)

There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5

descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered

End Semester Examination (ESE)

There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks

each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of

10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered

Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations

The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment

Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be

applicable

(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )

Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type

End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size

Page 8: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020

BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA104 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To provide knowledge of the environment in which businesses operate the economic operational

and financial framework with particular application to the transaction of insurance business

UNIT I

Indian business Environment concept Nature Scope and importance Micro and macro

environment Impact of business environment on business decision process of environment analysis

for business decisions Environmental Scanning Social Responsibility of Business

UNIT II

Economic environment of Business Significance and elements of economic environment Economic

systems and business environment Economic Planning in India- Special focus on recent five years

plan Government policies- Industrial Policy Fiscal Policy monetary policy EXIM Policy Recent

economic initiatives NitiAyog

UNIT III

Socio Cultural environment and Financial System- Critical elements of socio cultural environment

problems of uneven income distribution Emerging rural sector in India Foreign Trade and Balance

of Payment Poverty in India Unemployment in India Inflation Human Development Rural

Development Problems of Growth

UNIT IV

Political and legal Environment in Business- Critical elements of Political environment

Government and business Changing dimensions of legal environment in India MRTP Act FEMA

and licensing Policy Consumer Protection Act Patents Act 1970 Competition Act

UNIT V

International and Technological Environment Multinational Corporations Transnational

Corporations Liberalization Globalization Privatization disinvestment SEZ(Special Economic

Zones) and their impact in international Business International Economic Institutions-

GATTWTOUNCTAD MOUs World Bank IMF and their Importance to India

COURSE OUTCOME

Outline how an entity operates in a business environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Cherunilam fracis Business Environment Himalaya pub House 1996

Ghosh Pk Business and Government 1998 Sultan Chand Delhi

Devis Keith and Blomstrom Robert C Business and society Environment 1998 Sultan

Chand Delhi

Adhikary M Economics Environment of Business (latest ed) Sultan Chand Delhi Jalan B Indian Economics crises 1991 Oxford univ Press New Delhi

PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA105

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to

articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate

effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the

consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and

quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods

UNIT-I

Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of

Management Functions of the Manager

UNIT- II

Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of

Planning

Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and

type of Policies

Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems

involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques

UNIT- III

Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of

Units and committees

Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship

UNIT- IV

Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training

Directing Nature and purpose and directing

UNIT- V

Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control

process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies

COURSE OUTCOME-

Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques

managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of

managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify

and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own

position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied

audiences

Reference Books

bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher

bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson

Education

bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt

Ltd 4th Ed

bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill

Publications

SEMESTER II

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distributio

n

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor

Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distribu

tion Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Ma

x

Ma

rks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme

nt

Compulsory

Course

English

communication

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA202 Core Course

Management concept amp

Principle

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA203 Core

Course

Environmental

Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA204 Core

Course

Monetary

Economics and

Indian Banking

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA205 Core

Course

Business

Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA205 Business

Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhanceme

nt

Skill Enhancement

Elective

Course-I

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand

Total 600 21 5 - 24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

ENGLISH COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA201

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English

language teaching and content writing sectors

UNIT I

Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning

Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening

UNIT II

Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive

writing expansion of an idea

UNIT III

Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing

(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume

writing covering letter

UNIT IV

Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases

UNIT V

Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb

agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions

(Advanced)

COURSE OUTCOME

To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill

Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul

Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan

Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das

Orient Blackswan

Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press

Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication

MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 202

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and

process of effective controlling in the organization

UNIT I

Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science

Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)

UNIT II

School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and

Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)

Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management

UNIT III

Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing

Staffing Directing and Coordinating

UNIT IV

Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command

Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control

UNIT V

Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure

determination Forms- formal amp informal organization

Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations

COURSE OUTCOME

Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial

functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management

REFERENCE BOOKS

LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management

VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management

James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB

Fred Luthans- OB

ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 203

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links

between human and natural systems

UNIT I

Introduction to environmental studies

Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability

and sustainable development

UNIT II

Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an

ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following

ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds

streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)

Unit III

Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to

mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and

over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international

ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate

energy sources growing energy needs case studies

UNIT IV

Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem

diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots

Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and

Informational value

UNIT V

Environmental Pollution

Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution

Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and

Industrial waste Pollution case studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social

and environmental processes

REFERENCE BOOKS

California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London

Routledge

Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security

Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press

Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of

ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006

Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37

McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books

McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the

Twentieth Century

Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders

Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic

Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt

Ltd

Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons

Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi

1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP

Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation

S Chand Publishing New Delhi

MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING

Course Code 1Y3BBA204

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using

statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills

within the contest of subject matter of economics

UNIT I

Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of

Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value

of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income

theory of Money

UNIT II

Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people

Money Market

UNIT III

Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial

Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks

UNIT IV

Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control

methods and Tools of Monetary Policy

UNIT V

RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative

Banks and Rural Banks

COURSE OUTCOME

Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and

mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of

economics

REFERENCE BOOKS

MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi

LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi

Crowther- An Out Line of Money

Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant

KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ

BUSINESS COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA205

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative

scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication

UNIT I

Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports

OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)

UNIT II

Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other

words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis

UNIT III

Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers

Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers

UNIT IV

Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a

Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication

Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)

UNIT V

Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written

Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp

minutes

COURSE OUTCOME

To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical

proficiency in the development of exposition and argument

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wren amp Martin

K Madhukar- Business Communication

VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication

Asha Laul- Business Communication

Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH

SEMESTER III

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotte

d

Credit

s

Course Code Course

Type

Course

Title

Total

Mark

s

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subjec

t wise

Distrib

ution

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA301

Ability

Enhancement

IT Tool for Business

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA302

Core Course

Introduction to Marketing

Management

100 50 17 20 7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA303 Core

Course

Business

Law

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA304 Core

Course

Business

statistics for

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA305

Core

Course

Retail

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA304 Practical

Business

statistics for Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill

Enhancemen

t Elective Course-II

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand Total 600 24

IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 301

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software

components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data

base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT

UNIT-I

Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and

Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World

Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept

UNIT-II

Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different

computer generation

UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and

Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming

Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-

principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart

examples

UNIT-IV

Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation

applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)

Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information

System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems

Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human

Resources Management Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations

Understand the hardware and software components of the computer

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford

2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication

3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication

4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill

INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 302

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply

these to a new or existing business

UNIT I

Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept

amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro

environment

UNIT II

Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of

Product Line amp Product- mix

UNIT III

Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing

decisions Overview of pricing process

UNIT IV

Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product

Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage

UNIT V

Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to

marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct

selling

COURSE OUTCOME

To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct

an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an

appropriate format

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Philip Kotler

2 TN Chabra

3 TK Panda

4 SH Kazmi

5 Arun Kumar

BUSINESS LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 303

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal

environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with

knowledge of legal principles

UNIT-I

Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration

capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts

Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp

Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency

UNIT-II

Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp

Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales

UNIT-III

Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -

Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a

negotiable instrument

UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of

non-registration Dissolution of a firm

UNIT-V

Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of

Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013

COURSE OBJECTIVE

On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to

individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context

Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 ND Kapoor

2 Tulsian

3 MC Kuchhal

4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business

BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 304

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management

UNIT I

Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance

Scope and Limitation of Statistic

UNIT II

Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar

Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive

UNIT III

Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic

Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures

of dispersion

UNIT IV

Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and

Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index

number CPI WPI IIP

UNIT V

Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank

Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series

COURSE OUTCOME

Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically

discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons

2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication

3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication

RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in

India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone

Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT

FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan

Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process

UNIT II

FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail

Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors

Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing

MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer

Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design

and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication

UNIT III

STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty

Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors

UNIT IV

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management

IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service

Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM

Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying

UNIT V

MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at

Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems

at Retail Centers

Course Outcome-

Reference Books

bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education

bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A

Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education

The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge

about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various

aspects of retail operations

After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with

the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the

entire retail operations

SEMESTER IV

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code Course

Type Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subject

wise

Distributio

n

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mark

s

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-401

Ability

Enhanceme

nt

Introduction to

soft skill amp

Team Building

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA-402 Core Course

Introduction to

financial

management

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-403 Core Course

Advertising

and Sales

Promotion

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-404 Core Course

Management

of Human resource

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of

Business

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group

Term End

Practical

Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-404 Practical

Management

of Human

resource

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-405 Practical

Macro

Economics of Business

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

Grand Total 550 22

INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 401

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate

students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners

by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are

learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for

their own learning

UNIT ndash I

General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of

Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences

Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making

Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of

communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of

Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation

UNIT ndash II

Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing

skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice

modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements

General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral

skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive

Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style

UNIT ndash III

Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format

and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in

Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active

Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD

UNIT ndash IV

Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction

Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview

Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing

Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of

Conversation

UNIT ndash V

Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional

Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers

COURSE OUTCOME

To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills

and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin

bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar

INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 402

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital

decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and

raising long-term finance

UNIT I

Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives

Role of finance manager

UNIT II

Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of

investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return

Comparison between NPV amp IRR

UNIT III

Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of

Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning

capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure

UNIT IV

The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage

Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating

Leverage

UNIT V

Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital

estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of

inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order

Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy

COURSE OUTCOME

Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial

manager in the current competitive business scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 IM Pandey

2 P Chandra

3 SP Gupta

4 MY Khan

ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 403

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may

review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos

homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions

UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising

budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for

Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising

UNIT II

Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy

Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role

types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council

of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)

UNIT III

Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring

awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of

design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet

advertising and evaluation of advertising

UNIT IV

Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors

influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option

Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of

consumer schemes and other methods of promotion

UNIT V

Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs

Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales

personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion

COURSE OUTCOME

Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how

these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its

relation to todaylsquos marketplace

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall

Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi

Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi

Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications

MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 404

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource

management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational

setting

UNIT-I

Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with

special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in

strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management

UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge

workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)

Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)

UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of

human resource department and the role of human resource manager

UNITndashIV

Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification

rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation

UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection

(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction

COURSE OUTCOME

To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training

Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical

Behaviour

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi

Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New

Delhi

Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York

HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications

A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications

MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the

important indicators of the economy and their significance

UNIT I

Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of

Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income

Personal and Personal disposable income

UNIT II

Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income

Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and

Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator

Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate

demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy

UNIT III

Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate

demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government

expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary

and fiscal policy

UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary

policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production

Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation

monetary measures fiscal measures

UNIT V

Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and

corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in

open economy

COURSE OUTCOME

To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the

role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson

2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill

3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers

4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson

SEMESTER V

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment

Internal Assessment Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-501

Ability Enhancement

Public Relation amp Corporate Image

50

25

8

10

4

15

6

2

-

-

2

1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and

small Business

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-503

Core Course Principle of

Economics

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-502

Practical Entrepreneurship and

small Business

50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics

50

25 08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Skill Course

Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill Enhancement

Elective Course-III

50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2

Grand Total

600

24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication

1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management

1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India

1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation

1Y3BBA509 Organization Development

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision

1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management

1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA513 Database Management System

1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service

1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy

1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management

1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management

1Y3BBA520 Stores Management

1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA522 Technology Management

1Y3BBA523 Productivity

1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept

1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management

1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System

1Y3BBA529 Health Economics

1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management

(Rural Management Group )

1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity

1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment

1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management

SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES

Non-Technical

Elective No Department Faculty Name

Faculty of Information Technology

I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)

II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)

IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)

V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Management

I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)

II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)

III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development

Faculty of Commerce

I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)

II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Humanities

I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)

II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)

III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Science

I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)

II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)

III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)

IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)

V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Education

I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)

II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)

PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA501

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts

of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling

and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization

UNIT- I

Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash

Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy

Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors

ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public

Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations

UNIT- II

Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service

Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social

Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy

for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation

Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event

Management

UNIT- III

Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash

Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public

Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of

Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control

UNIT IV

Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies

Components of an Individual Image

Advertising and Corporate Image

Public Relations of an Institutions

UNIT V

The Grapevine and Rumours

Stereotype

Propaganda

Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations

applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different

entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling

REFERENCE BOOKS

Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House

Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House

Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University

Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill

This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning

ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-

The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding

processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to

those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic

environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide

evidence which informs those debates

UNIT I

Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of

Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its

environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship

UNIT II

Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship

development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the

Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making

UNIT III

Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that

enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in

Social context Start Up

UNIT IV

Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional

source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital

UNIT V

Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication

2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd

3 Vasant Desai

4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH

PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 503

COURSE OBJECTIVES-

To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production

UNIT- I

Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits

UNIT-II

Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus

movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts

of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications

of demand and supply price rationing price floors

Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price

elasticity cross and income elasticity

UNIT-III

Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility

Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp

Producer surplus

UNIT-IV

Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant

and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue

and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale

UNIT-V

Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of

the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run

equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment

concept

COURSE OUTCOME-

To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011

bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th

edition

2007

bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA

bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press

Oxford

bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore

MARKETING GROUP

INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so

that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to

enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications

UNIT-I

Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC

in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising

appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion

relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship

between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods

Interactive Internet Marketing

UNIT-II

Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach

establishing and allocating promotional budget

UNIT-III

IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different

forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning

creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design

considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client

Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork

UNIT-IV

Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering

key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and

media research

Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration

client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc

UNIT-V

Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing

Communications

COURSE OUTCOME-

To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches

and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to

communicating to target audiences

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc

Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard

D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois

Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing

House

Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and

Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication

Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH

Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing

Communications Pearson Education Limited

Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc

Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House

Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning

Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc

Homewood Illinois

Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic

Approach Cengage Learning

Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India

Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education

SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT

Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE

It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and

distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and

distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners

UNIT-I

Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies

Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling

objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring

Procedure Socialization

UNIT-II

Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program

Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation

Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial

Evaluation of Contest

UNIT-III

Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel

Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales

Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process

UNIT-IV

Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key

tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market

Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation

UNIT-V

Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners

Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict

Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International

Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales

COURSE OUTCOME

Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the

sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans

participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables

REFERENCE BOOKS

Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres

Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books

Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI

L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills

Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets

Greenwood Publishing Group

Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub

ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH

Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing

consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing

research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students

within a course project

UNIT-I

Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing

Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research

Process Marketing Research Designs

UNIT-II

The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques

Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of

Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic

Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical

Analysis Tools

UNIT-III

Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)

ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor

Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental

Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores

Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-

hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number

UNIT-IV

Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product

Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant

Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification

Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing

Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and

their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity

UNIT-V

Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning

in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report

and class presentation of the same

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from

analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor

analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis

REFERENCE BOOKS

Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi

William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi

Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi

Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill

Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research

Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey

Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning

Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp

Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced

in the class

HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP

LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA

Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of

Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity

objectivity and understandings

UNIT-I

The Factories Act 1948

The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923

The Employees State Insurance Act 1948

UNIT-II

The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952

The Payment of gratuity Act 1972

UNIT-III

The Maternity Benefit Act 1961

The Minimum Wages act 1948

UNIT-IV

The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946

The Payment of Bonus Act 1965

UNIT-V

The Apprentices Act 1969

The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959

COURSE OUTCOME ndash

To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour

Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the

organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to

follow the Laws applicable to the establishment

REFERENCE BOOKS

S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications

S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi

Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot

V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House

N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons

INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE

In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our

country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of

Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be

acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the

concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India

UNIT-I

Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors

affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial

relation programme

Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact

of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes

lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry

UNIT-II

Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal

Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective

bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective

collective bargaining collective bargaining in India

UNIT-III

Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education

scheme in India- objectives functions and problems

Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation

schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India

UNIT-IV

Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India

major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions

registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union

UNIT-V

Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery

Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation

submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court

industrial tribunals

Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power

of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute

COURSE OUTCOME

Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective

bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute

resolution

REFERENCE BOOKS

Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts

IIPM Personnel Management in India

Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business

Publication Ltd

Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India

Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India

Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication

Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co

Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law

ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational

culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the

human values in individuals

UNIT-I

Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational

Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development

Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining

and survey research amp feedback methodology

UNIT-II

Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in

organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief

systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development

UNIT-III

Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component

interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief

of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action

UNIT-IV

OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team

building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process

interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions

important for successful OD efforts

UNIT ndash V

HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational

implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional

Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have

improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi

Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York

McGrawhill

Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in

addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a

good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company

UNIT-I

Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm

Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-

Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of

Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering

UNIT-II

Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the

analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount

of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a

Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and

Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis

UNIT-III

Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues

and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements

medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings

Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project

finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing

UNIT-IV

Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of

financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing

Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect

cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization

UNIT-V

Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value

Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic

indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added

Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total

Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)

COURSE OUTCOME

Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and

corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts

REFERENCE BOOKS

Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill

Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial

environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a

multinational corporation

UNIT-I

Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation

functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial

management International monetary system

UNIT-II

Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories

ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible

exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer

Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options

Currency swaps and interest rate swaps

UNIT-III

Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction

transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction

exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The

national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International

capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)

UNIT-IV

International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic

considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)

Financial risk and cost of capital

Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of

capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-

20 subsidiaries and tax havens

UNIT-V

International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their

comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets

Recent developments in the Euro bond market

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations

and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley

PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall

Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall

Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis

Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co

Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall

Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers

Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath

FINANCIAL INCLUSION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion

such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss

the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to

promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models

UNIT-I

Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting

Access to Financial Services

Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive

Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators

UNIT-II

Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey

Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional

Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card

UNIT-III

Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India

Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations

Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor

UNIT-IV

SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of

microfinance evolved in India

Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial

Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for

Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for

Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People

UNIT-V

Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises

Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion

and Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account

initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage

Publication

Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House

Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech

Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications

Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications

Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing

Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI

Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI

Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag

Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion

Academic Foundation

IT GROUP

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to

manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the

hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment

UNIT-I

The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures

File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base

Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial

Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness

UNIT-II

Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface

with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database

Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design

UNIT-III

Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database

Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database

Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases

UNIT-IV

DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance

Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues

UNIT-V

Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the

field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective

faculty during the coverage of syllabus

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic

concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational

algebra and SQL

REFERENCE BOOKS

Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs

Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan

Press

McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co

MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It

aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing

implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services

UNIT-I

The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development

Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The

Enabling Environment for ITES

UNIT-II

Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled

Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of

Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services

UNIT-III

Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support

Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions

UNIT-IV

International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting

Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in

facilitating Trade in ITESTITES

UNIT-V

Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of

Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of

Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace

Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations

and integrate the learning in handling these complexities

REFERENCE BOOKS

Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat

E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing

SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information

technology with various aspects of Software Project Management

UNIT-I

Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision

and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM

Framework

UNIT-II

Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning

Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan

Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration

and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning

UNIT-III

Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an

Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques

Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule

Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools

UNIT-IV

Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance

Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior

Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review

UNIT-V

Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks

Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk

COURSE OUTCOME

Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business

context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business

scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson

Education Ltd

P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp

Tsinghua University Press

R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance

Management Concepts Pub

Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group

B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science

Press

A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications

G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on

understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business

UNIT I

Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm

production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country

UNIT II

Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms

and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business

sector

UNIT III

Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations

relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries

UNIT IV

Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment

and policy

UNIT V

Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies

COURSE OUTCOME

Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper

and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain

REFERENCE BOOKS

Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons

Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ

Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ

AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 517

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies

strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms

UNIT I

Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market

structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp

significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of

marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour

UNIT II

Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash

significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product

product life cycle

UNIT III

Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies

and pricing methods

UNIT IV

Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and

standardization

UNIT V

Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural

products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in

agribusiness

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better

understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for

agricultural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH

Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall

Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control

Pearson Edu

Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu

Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India

FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 518

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food

marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen

and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural

political and economic forces over time

UNIT I

Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade

Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of

Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic

factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer

UNIT II

Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling

food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing

in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions

across the chain in food retail food service marketing

UNIT III

4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing

Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system

Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement

Strategies for food retailers

UNIT IV

Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling

Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food

Products

UNIT V

Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training

Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in

retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze

Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing

REFERENCE BOOKS

Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of

India

Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu

Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill

RETAIL GROUP

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in

the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it

UNIT- I

Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management

Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain

networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain

Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network

UNIT- II

Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer

service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs

multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier

Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants

UNIT- III

Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory

models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system

UNIT- IV

COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip

Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION

TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain

Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management

UNIT- V

Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a

Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance

measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics

quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics

COURSE OUTCOME

After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain

which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House

bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers

bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg

bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi

bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan

STORES MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 520

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different

terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned

areas

UNIT- I

Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the

location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design

UNIT- II

Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual

Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors

UNIT- III

Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at

Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores

Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments

UNIT- IV

Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies

Quick Response System

UNIT- V

Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact

on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space

Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization

COURSE OUTCOME

The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern

and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management

bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing

bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach

bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing

bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing

RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 521

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail

Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail

business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management

UNIT I

Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail

equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail

market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-

Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India

UNIT II

Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development

The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and

Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-

Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on

ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response

marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks

The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management

UNIT III

Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM

Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch

points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services

Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM

Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding

Common Barriers

UNIT IV

Services Management

Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the

service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-

Supply relationships vehicle routing

UNIT V

Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising

Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping

the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand

management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-

2nd edition 2006

MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational

edititionUS1798

Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education

New Delhi 2003

JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy

Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi

Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy

Pearson Education New Delhi 2004

KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005

Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007

Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House

Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution

rosenbloom and Education Foundation US

PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 522

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

UNIT- I

Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology

Change Implication

UNIT- II

Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying

UNIT- III

Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology

Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management

UNIT- IV

Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology

Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages

UNIT- V

Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise

Level

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to

manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009

bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009

bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson

PRODUCTIVITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 523

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

UNIT- I

Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and

external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work

Contents and Ineffective Time

UNIT- II

Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram

String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart

UNIT- III

Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart

UNIT- IV

Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be

Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement

UNIT- V

Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International

Labour Office Geneva

bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed

bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill

bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India

QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO

Course Code 1Y3BBA 524

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify

the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and

measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current

issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans

UNIT- I

Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives

UNIT- II

Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect

concept

UNIT- III

Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality

UNIT- IV

Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various

control Charts

UNIT- V

Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification

COURSE OUTCOME-

Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to

explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key

aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for

controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp

communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze

the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise

and evaluate quality implementation plans

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay

bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd

bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas

bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd

bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition

7th

Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012

bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM CONCEPTS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 525

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism

To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash

Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp

Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and

development of Tourism through the ages

UNIT II

COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash

Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism

inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious

Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions

incentives sports and adventure tourism

UNIT III

TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash

Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of

motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash

health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and

push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists

UNIT IV

IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash

Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts

- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism

UNIT V

SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-

Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote

Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable

Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and

experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of

tourism experiences

REFERENCES BOOKS

Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling

Publishers Private Limited New Delhi

Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism

Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited

Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill

International

Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors

New Delhi

Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas

Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New

Delhi

TOURISM MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 526

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the basic concept and various components of management

UNIT I

MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-

Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of

management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)

Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management

UNIT II

PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-

Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of

planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by

objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance

and limitation of decision making

UNIT III

ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash

Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of

staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance

appraisal

UNIT IV

DIRECTING ndash

Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation

(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy

theory)

UNIT V

LEADERSHIP-

Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path

Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to

communication

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives

Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of

tourism as well as the impacts of tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc

Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New

Delhi

Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition

AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing

House New Delhi

Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition

Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations

To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism

industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-

Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing

Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and

Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash

Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New

Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING -

Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION -

Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity

Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in

promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level

which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described

REFERENCES BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson

Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition

Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent

learning

UNIT I

Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health

Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural

History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention

UNIT II

Definition and meaning of hospital ndash

Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing

concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of

Hospitals

UNIT III

Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector

Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in

delivering healthcare in India

UNIT IV

Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural

hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description

UNIT V

The reforms of Healthcare System-

The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare

reforms amp Future of Healthcare System

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding

the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the

management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and

organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services

REFERENCE BOOKS

The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991

Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd

Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers

HEALTH ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 529

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and

understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict

peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different

social actions

UNIT I

Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and

importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below

Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits

UNIT II

Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve

techniques and properties of indifference curve

UNIT III

Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash

Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of

Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of

Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of

demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash

Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue

UNIT IV

Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two

variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves

UNIT V

Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash

Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and

monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market

situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price

determination

COURSE OUTCOME

To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from

an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic

evaluation of a health intervention or program

REFERENCE BOOKS

Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR

Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP

Managerial Economics - Gupta GS

Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani

Business Economics - Sharma NK

Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar

Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi

Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL

HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 530

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions

related to records management in the healthcare environment

UNIT I

Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record

keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records

UNIT II

Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health

Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research

UNIT III

Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics

investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing

Pharmacy etc Audits)

UNIT IV

Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems

associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic

Related Groups (DRG)

UNIT V

Medical Registers ndash

Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various

departments amp common problems faced

COURSE OUTCOME

Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New

Delhi 1999

Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995

Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi

George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003

Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 531

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India

To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India

UNIT I

Rural Society in India

Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-

urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and

subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural

life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion

UNIT II

Rural Society

Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social

institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity

and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of

rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT-III

Village India

Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance

contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and

political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology

Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class

UNIT IV

Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics

Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid

growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope

and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -

Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT-V

Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times

Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social

processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India

Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy

Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms

REFERENCE BOOKS

Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi

Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay

PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House

SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication

House Delhi

ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 532

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To explain the nature of environmental studies

To introduce aspects of Natural resources

To introduce aspects of ecosystems

To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation

To introduce aspects of environmental pollution

To create awareness on social issues and environment

To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

UNIT I

Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for

public awareness

UNIT II

Ecosystems

Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and

decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and

Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the

following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic

Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)

UNIT III

Biodiversity and its Conservation

Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification

of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option

Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports

of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-

Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ

Conservation of biodiversity

UNIT IV

Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil

pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste

Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an

individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods

earthquake cyclone and landslides

20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT V

Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water

Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of

People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible

responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and

holocaust

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the nature of environmental studies

Classify renewable and non-renewable resources

Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues

Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation

Analyze aspects of environmental pollution

Describe aspects of social issues and environment

Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner

Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental

Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai

Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA

RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 533

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts

To familiarize Rural marketing strategy

To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems

To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing

To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages

UNIT I

Overview of Rural Marketing

Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing

and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction

Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class

UNIT II

Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for

rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT III

Rural Distribution Systems

Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche

markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of

Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT IV

ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network

(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction

Methodology Group Project work

UNIT V

Market support

Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role

play

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Market their products

Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products

Choose an appropriate distribution system

Apply ICT in rural marketing

Source the finance for rural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India

Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education

Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi

SEMESTER- VI

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allot

ted

Cred

its

Course

Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mark

s

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-601

Core

Course

E- Commerce

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-602 Core

Course

Customer

Relationship Management

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-603 Practical

Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva

Voce

100

50

17

-

-

50

20

- - 4 4

1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Grand Total

550

22

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one

paper presentation certificate in related discipline

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management

1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing

1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA607 Management of Change

1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management

1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management

1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service

1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business

1Y3BBA614 E- Governance

1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management

1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing

1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour

1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning

1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design

1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control

1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan

1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing

1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management

1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care

1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law

(Rural Management Group)

1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System

1Y3BBA632

Panchayati Raj

1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy

E- COMMERCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 601

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is

designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the

technical foundation for understanding information systems

UNIT I

Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting

online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a

business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-

commerce

UNIT II

Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet

(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A

systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing

vs in-house development of a website)

UNIT III

Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension

definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security

intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)

technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and

protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)

UNIT IV

E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards

e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online

banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house

automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments

UNIT V

Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting

online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of

utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online

services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and

entertainment

COURSE OUTCOME-

Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information

systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Management Information System Jawadekar

bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon

bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana

bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)

bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty

CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 602

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of

Customer Relationship Management in the organizations

UNIT- I

Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature

of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive

and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and

evaluating customer business plans

UNIT- II

Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer

database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing

customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively

Planning and making persuasive presentations

UNIT- III

Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality

Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality

managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and

Cross- sell

UNIT- IV

Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations

Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority

setting Target setting setting standards

UNIT- V

Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction

COURSE OUTCOME-

To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship

Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd

Ed Response Books Sage Publication

Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House

Pvt Ltd

Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books

Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management

V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008

Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management

South Western Cengage Learning

Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press

Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age

International

Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan

Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of

India Private Limted New Delhi 2011

S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private

Limted New Delhi 2008

ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 603

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to

work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn

the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final

semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by

the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a

student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their

analytical capabilities and experience

DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)

Title of the study (Cover Page)

Declaration

Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)

Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)

Acknowledgement

Table of Contents

Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Introduction

12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research

12 Significance of the study

13 Scope of the study

14 Research Problem

15 Objective of the study

17 Hypothesis

18 Limitations of the study

2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students

to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they

learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After

the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is

evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report

should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to

provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also

able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business

operations and come up with the ways to tap the

Opportunities

3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

31 Introduction

32 Population of the study

33 Sampling Design

331 Sampling Technique

332 Sampling Method

333 Sample Size

34 Research Instrument

35 Sources of data

351 Primary Data

352 Secondary Data

4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION

5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION

Bibliography

COURSE OUTCOME-

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able

to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and

come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities

MARKETING GROUP

PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 604

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the

context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product

manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions

UNIT- I

Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused

organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management

Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-

cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product

Development

UNIT- II

Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods

of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in

international Market

UNIT- III

Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity

concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand

Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image

UNIT- IV

Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system

measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement

Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market

segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining

and establishing brand values

UNIT- V

Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand

extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time

Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand

Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation

COURSE OUTCOME

The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of

Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for

Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning

implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer

Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi

Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi

Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi

Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education

New Delhi

Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi

Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata

McGraw Hill New Delhi

Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi

STRATEGIC MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 605

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and

implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and

managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver

superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation

through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills

UNIT- I

Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash

Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of

Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying

Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting

Marketing Objectives

UNIT-II

Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching

Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy

Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle

Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies

UNIT-III

Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp

Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models

UNIT- IV

Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives

Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy

Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing

UNIT- V

Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at

different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by

executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and

interdisciplinary nature

REFERENCE BOOKS

Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt

D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin

OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage

Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill

Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp

Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson

Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann

Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India

George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press

J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and

Programs McGraw-Hill Companies

Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub

Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon

P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave

E-MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 606

COURSE OBJECTIVE

It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance

enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns

UNIT- I

Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics

Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan

Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing

UNIT- II

Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in

India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within

communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing

UNIT- III

Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet

as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet

User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-

branding

UNIT- IV

Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-

marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools

Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent

Trends in e-customer service

UNIT- V

Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web

Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing

campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising

Course Outcome

Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics

online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its

implication on marketing strategy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a

networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill

Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall

Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning

Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books

Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial

Times

HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP

MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 607

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be

Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students

Understand the importance of managing change

UNIT- I

Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-

Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of

human resource strategies in implementing Change

UNIT-II

Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR

implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation

and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions

UNIT-III

HR Processes amp Change

Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned

change

Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change

UNIT- IV

Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in

employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management

of change implications of downsizing

UNIT- V

Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to

promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and

feedback

Course Outcome

Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more

effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change

process

REFERENCE BOOKS

A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human

Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education

Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill

Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage

South Asia Edition

K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation

Response Books

VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books

CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 608

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical

relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand

anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions

to ensure the organizational and individual success

UNIT-I

Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of

organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business

environment

UNIT-II

Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars

Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations

UNIT- III

Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock

Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system

(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)

UNIT- IV

Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and

repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally

appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural

negotiation and conflicts management

UNIT- V

Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual

countries Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development

of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning

Private Limited

G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill

Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley

Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing

Co

Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell

Business

Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times

McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp

Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation

Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson

Education India

GROUP DYNAMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 609

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group

dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group

effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of

resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding

UNIT-I

Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group

dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B

UNIT-II

Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group

Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash

Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress

UNIT-III

Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group

decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash

conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict

UNIT- IV

Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De

individuation theory

UNIT- V

Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources

of Change in groups

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups

REFERENCE BOOKS

Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley

Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass

Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co

Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE

Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and

application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax

along with basic concepts of VAT

UNIT-I

Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of

Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment

of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-II

Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature

and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax

planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business

UNIT-III

Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net

Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and

Penalties (Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-IV

Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for

service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of

Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)

UNIT- V

VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview

of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT

Law)

COURSE OUTCOME

Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields

REFERENCE BOOKS

Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications

Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub

Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House

T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India

BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson

S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann

R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _

INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 611

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important

components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO

Analysis etc

UNIT-I

INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian

Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role

in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)

UNIT-II

FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different

Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players

Different types of Instruments

UNIT-III

CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI

Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank

UNIT- IV

COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp

Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A

REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA

UNIT- V

NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies

Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture

Capital Funds

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment

Banking companies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication

Financial Services MY Khan TMH

Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication

S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran

ML Seth

FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 612

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and

prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of

uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding

of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role

of internal audit assessments

UNIT I

Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview

UNIT II

Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax

fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and

inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds

UNIT III

Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion

investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports

UNIT IV

Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using

Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)

UNIT V Case Study

1 Two Indian

2 Two international cases

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread

nature of fraud and its economic impact

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation

Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination

Cengage Learning

IT GROUP

INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 613

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security

managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues

in the information assurance field

UNIT I

Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian

Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its

application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law

Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour

Laws E-Media and Print Media

UNIT II

E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security

Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature

UNIT III

Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil

Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-

detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of

Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA

UNIT IV

IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal

issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base

UNIT V

Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of

Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules

COURSE OUTCOME-

Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House

Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co

John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River

Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher

Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University

E-GOVERNANCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 614

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information

Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an

awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the

issues concerning the Cyber security

UNIT I

Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National

E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status

UNIT II

E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process

Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges

UNIT III

E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-

Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics

UNIT IV

Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic

data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber

audit implications for e-governance

Unit V

Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and

construction of a joining table

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill

Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing

Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in

India ICFAI Press Hyderabad

B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill

H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications

V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd

IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 615

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization

UNIT I

IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT

Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo

Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for

IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library

UNIT II

Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service

Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support

Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change

Management Release Management

UNIT III

Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve

Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine

Recovery Data Retention

UNIT IV

Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security

Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection

UNIT V

IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and

Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and

Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of

Internet on Technical Support

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology

REFERENCE BOOKS

Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce

(OGC) TSO UK

Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos

Management Tata McGraw Hill

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 616

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques

and their management

UNIT I

Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations

of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and

distribution

UNIT II

Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and

factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging

of foods

UNIT III

Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food

industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO

etc

UNIT IV

Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products

cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking

confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of

fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH

Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie

Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing

Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH

MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 617

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing

concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs

UNIT I

Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution

channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-

farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing

UNIT II

Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds

Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of

NSC and State Seed Corporation

UNIT III

Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers

Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash

marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer

marketing

UNIT IV

Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash

marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of

electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity

UNIT V

Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm

machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines

implementsEquipmentlsquos

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with

various functional areas of agribusiness

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp

IBH

Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management

Kalyani

Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ

House

FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 618

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis

of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions

UNIT I

Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management

decisions farm management problems

UNIT II

Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle

principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc

UNIT III

Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm

records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement

farm efficiency measures

UNIT IV

Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc

UNIT V

Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to

counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks

and uncertainty

COURSE OUTCOME

Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses

REFERENCE BOOKS

Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall

Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ

Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ

Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ

RETAIL GROUP

BUYER BEHAVIOUR

Course Code 1Y3BBA 619

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer

decisions making

UNIT-I

A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic

Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market

Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making

UNIT-II

Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles

of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer

Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and

Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product

Relationship

UNIT-III

Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to

information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-

Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors

Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications

UNIT-IV

Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing

Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-

Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions

Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy

UNIT-V

Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics

lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they

experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and

impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour

COURSE OUTCOME

Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the

choices consumers make

REFERENCE BOOKS

JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata

Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006

Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context

Excel Books NewDelhi-2001

Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous

DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing

Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi

Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining

Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005

Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000

RETAIL PLANNING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 620

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational

decision-making processes in the organized retail

UNIT I

Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail

Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-

Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative

methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management

UNIT II

Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics

Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp

non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion

designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting

Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-

Management of Obsolete goods

UNIT III

Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer

psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical

Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices

UNIT IV

Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-

Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp

Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective

Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer

Rights- Consumer Protection Acts

UNIT V

Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing

Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-

Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels

REFERENCE BOOKS

Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies

Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies

Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson

Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund

amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson

Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice

Hall of India New Delhi

Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies

Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best

People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd

RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 621

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the

value it creates

UNIT I

Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When

How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience

Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency

UNIT II

Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated

Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-

Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-

UNIT III

Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on

Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-

Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display

Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-

UNIT IV

Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium

Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and

Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-

Trade Dealing

UNIT V

Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-

Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating

Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing

to act in ways that increase loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -

Prentice-Hall

Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology

Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales

Promotion Techniques

Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate

Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page

Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books

George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing

Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill

PRODUCTION GROUP

PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL

Course Code 1Y3BBA 622

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a

basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of

facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality

control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an

understanding of the concept of aggregate planning

UNIT- I

Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors

Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-

requisites of PPC

UNIT- II

Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in

Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining

Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control

Models)

UNIT- III

Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection

Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master

production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of

software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II

UNIT- IV

Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n

job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling

Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)

UNIT- V

Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control

function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications

bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi

Deep and Deep Publications

PROCESS REENGINEERING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 623

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of

business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering

projects

UNIT- I

Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp

pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR

UNIT- II

Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering

project organizing for process reengineering

UNIT- III

Process analysis and design

a) Process analysis

(b) Process design

UNIT- IV

Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition

tracking and measuring process performance

UNIT- V

Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology

Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact

measurement

COURSE OUTCOME

To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the

considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-

engineering project

REFERENCE BOOKS

Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata

McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater

Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester

John Wiley amp Sons

WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn

the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time

standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering

to design of work systems

UNIT- I

Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos

productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity

Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time

Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities

Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was

developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph

UNIT- II

Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting

up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion

Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand

Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and

Design of Tools amp Equipment

UNIT- III

Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard

from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and

Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work

Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling

UNIT- IV

Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage

Incentive Plans

The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for

Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action

UNIT-V

Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion

Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System

Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts

Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional

including understanding the need for quality

REFERENCE BOOKS

iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill

ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation

Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp

Sons

Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall

Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall

Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press

Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall

Mall East and London

Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN

Course Code 1Y3BBA 625

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in

it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative

impacts of tourism development

UNIT I

Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism

Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of

Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in

Tourism Development

UNIT II

Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning

system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos

Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-

Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in

learning system

UNIT III

Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable

development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist

Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash

The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash

Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities

UNIT IV

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage

of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment

UNIT IV

Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the

Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National

Policy on Ecology and Environment

COURSE OUTCOME

To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global

perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international

tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for

sustainable tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash

Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications

Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers

Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William

Heinemann Ltd

Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices

London Pitman Publishing

Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York

Kendall Hunt Publishing Company

Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan

Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman

Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford

University Press

New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable

Development Approach VNR and New York

TOURISM MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 626

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism

and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing

that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products

before the stakeholders of tourism industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing

Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and

Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market

Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing

Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for

different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing

Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales

promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital

communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future

It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are

needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be

a part of this growth

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar

Thomson Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd

edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of

Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry

UNIT I

HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of

Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads

ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and

marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents

UNIT II

RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief

History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway

Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway

station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains

express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world

heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes

UNIT III

AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth

Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled

Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature

Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players

Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and

performance marketing strategies of Air India

UNIT IV

WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover

crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going

traffic) ndash National waterways

UNIT V

CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing

stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and

Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation

COURSE OUTCOME

Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of

the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management

REFERENCE BOOKS

RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 628

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of

its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing

knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital

Management

UNIT I

Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its

impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need

principles purpose

UNIT II

Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and

their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply

department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health

and patient safety

UNIT III

Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of

biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules

standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging

transportation amp storage

UNIT IV

Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier

methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal

decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of

wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan

UNIT V

Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party

insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash

meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural

disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague

typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics

COURSE OUTCOME

To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost

containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges

arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs

and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its

various components

REFERENCE BOOKS

Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication

First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn

Park k - Preventive and social medicine

Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot

MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 629

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted

advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public

relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any

potential crisis that may arise

UNIT I

Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches

to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of

marketing functions of marketing

UNIT II

Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment

Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market

segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash

positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing

UNIT III

Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior

(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying

decision process

UNIT IV

Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp

deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product

development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling

UNIT V

Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing

policies and strategies

Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management

decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels

COURSE OUTCOME

Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an

integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare

professionals and the public

REFERENCE BOOKS

Philip Kotler - marketing management

Wiliam jStanton - marketing management

Sherleker S A - marketing management

J C Gandhi - marketing management

Davar - modern marketing management

Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub

P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research

Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research

HOSPITALS RELATED LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 630

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of

common-law development

UNIT ndash I

Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties

sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance

act trust act societies registration act

UNIT ndashII

Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of

human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act

1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971

mental health act patient consent

UNIT ndash III

Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948

narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods

act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration

UNIT ndash IV

Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act

1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916

maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing

order) act trade union act industrial disputes act

UNIT ndashV

Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in

hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical

negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical

establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal

pronouncements rulings and regulations

REFERENCE BOOKS

Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer

Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law

Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 631

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India

To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural

Production system in India

To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India

To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development

UNIT -1

Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions

ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology

Case analysis and discussion

UNIT II

Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash

Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture

UNIT III

Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-

Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India

UNIT IV

Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of

holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus

land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas

UNIT V

Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash

Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and

schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM

COURSE OUTCOMES

Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management

Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India

Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development

REFERENCE BOOKS

Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution

Can We Make London Department for International Development

Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House

PANCHAYATI RAJ

Course Code 1Y3BBA632

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration

To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites

To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance

To provide insights on Rural Administration

To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes

UNIT I

Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction

Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges

Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration

(Official and non-official) and report submission

UNIT III

Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission

UNIT IV

Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and

Block- Panchayat relationship

Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play

UNIT V

Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government

Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan

Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

COURSE OUTCOMES

Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village

Development interventions

Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its

power Structure

Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and

Plans

Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes

32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959

Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise

Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi

Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New

Delhi

RURAL ECONOMY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 633

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy

To help students understand their role in rural economic development

To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources

To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation

To create awareness on rural economic development

UNIT I

Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-

Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries

(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in

agriculture individual production other production services

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-

Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash

Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land

Reforms

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

UNIT III

Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation

programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs

UNIT IV

Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work

UNIT V

Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing

ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for

the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy

Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village

Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues

Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation

Facilities

Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi

Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi

Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic

Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New

Delhi

INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER

Mid Semester Examination (MSE)

There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5

descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered

End Semester Examination (ESE)

There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks

each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of

10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered

Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations

The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment

Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be

applicable

(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )

Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type

End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size

Page 9: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020

PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA105

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Controlling Identify and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to

articulate ones own position on a specific management issue and communicate

effectively with varied audiences Evaluate leadership styles to anticipate the

consequences of each leadership style Gather and analyze both qualitative and

quantitative information to isolate issues and formulate best control methods

UNIT-I

Nature and Scope of Management Process Management Science Art Development of

Management Functions of the Manager

UNIT- II

Planning The meaning and purpose of planning steps in planning Types of

Planning

Objectives and Policies Objective Policies Procedures and methods Nature and

type of Policies

Decision-making Process of Decision-making Type of Decisions Problems

involved in decision-making Quantitative techniques

UNIT- III

Organizing Types of organization Organizational structure span of control Use of

Units and committees

Delegation Delegation and centralization line and staff relationship

UNIT- IV

Staffing Sources of recruitment Selection process training

Directing Nature and purpose and directing

UNIT- V

Controlling Need for co-ordination-meaning and importance of controls Control

process Budgetary and non-Budgetary controls Case studies

COURSE OUTCOME-

Explain how organizations adapt to an uncertain environment and identify techniques

managers use to influence and control the internal environment Practice the process of

managements four functions planning organizing leading and controlling Identify

and properly use vocabularies within the field of management to articulate ones own

position on a specific management issue and communicate effectively with varied

audiences

Reference Books

bull Luthans Fred(2010) Organizational Behaviour12th edition MGH publisher

bull SPRobbinsons TA Judge Sanghai S(2016) Organizational Behaviour Pearson

Education

bull Govindrajan M Natarajan S (2007) Principles of Management Prentice Hall of India Pvt

Ltd 4th Ed

bull Hill Charles WL and McShane Steven (2016) Principles of Management McGraw Hill

Publications

SEMESTER II

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA IInd SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distributio

n

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor

Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distribu

tion Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Ma

x

Ma

rks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA201 Ability Enhanceme

nt

Compulsory

Course

English

communication

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA202 Core Course

Management concept amp

Principle

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA203 Core

Course

Environmental

Studies 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA204 Core

Course

Monetary

Economics and

Indian Banking

100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

1Y3BBA205 Core

Course

Business

Communication 100 50 17 20 08 30 12 4 1 - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA205 Business

Communication 50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhanceme

nt

Skill Enhancement

Elective

Course-I

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand

Total 600 21 5 - 24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical Major- Term End Theory Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

ENGLISH COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA201

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To train and prepare the students to seek and find employment in the corporate media English

language teaching and content writing sectors

UNIT I

Communication ndash Definition stages barriers types verbal and non-verbal Listening- Meaning

Nature and importance Principles of Good Listening

UNIT II

Class-presentation (Oral for five minutes) on any of the above-mentioned topics Descriptive

writing expansion of an idea

UNIT III

Writing skills ndash notice writing advertisement writing preacutecis writing essay writing letter writing

(applications) and Business letter formats (letters of enquiry replies and complaints) resume

writing covering letter

UNIT IV

Vocabulary building One word substitution synonyms and antonyms idioms and phrases

UNIT V

Language Skills - Correction of common errors in sentence structure usage of pronouns subject verb

agreement word order gender compound nouns collective nouns possessives articles and prepositions

(Advanced)

COURSE OUTCOME

To guide the students to establish self-employment strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Technical Communication MH Rizvi Tata McGrawhill

Effective Business Communication Asha Kaul

Developing Communication Skills Krishnamohan

Functional Grammar and Spoken and Written Communication in English Bikram K Das

Orient Blackswan

Precis Paraphrase and SummaryPN Gopalkrishnan Authors Press

Communication Skills Sanjay Kumar and Pushplata Oxford Publication

MANAGEMENT CONCEPT AND PRINCIPLE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 202

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To enable the effective and barriers communication in the organization and study the system and

process of effective controlling in the organization

UNIT I

Concept amp nature of management Definition Nature Roles of Manager Management as science

Arts or profession functions of management Managerial functions and roles (Henry Mintzberg)

UNIT II

School of management thought Scientific and Process School of thought (Taylor Fayol and

Gullick) Principle of management Human relation school (Elton mayo Hawthorne studies)

Behavioral and Contingency and system approach to management

UNIT III

Planning and decision making Meaning Process Types Principles Limitations Organizing

Staffing Directing and Coordinating

UNIT IV

Authority Responsibility amp Accountability Delegation of Authority Unity of command

Centralization (Line and staff) Decentralization Span of control

UNIT V

Organization design amp structure Meaning Process Principles Organization structure

determination Forms- formal amp informal organization

Controlling Meaning Steps Types techniques significance and limitations

COURSE OUTCOME

Upon completion of the course students will be able to have clear understanding of managerial

functions like planning and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management

REFERENCE BOOKS

LM Prasad- Principle and practice of management

VSP Rao amp V Harikrishna- Principle and practice of management

James AF Stonner- Management Jtepions Robbins- OB

Fred Luthans- OB

ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 203

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Appreciate the ethical cross-cultural and historical context of environmental issues and the links

between human and natural systems

UNIT I

Introduction to environmental studies

Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies Scope and importance Concept of sustainability

and sustainable development

UNIT II

Ecosystems-What is an ecosystem Structure and function of ecosystem Energy flow in an

ecosystem food chains food webs and ecological succession Case studies of the following

ecosystems Forest ecosystem Grassland ecosystem Desert ecosystem Aquatic ecosystems (ponds

streams lakes rivers oceans estuaries)

Unit III

Natural Resources Renewable and Non-‐renewable Resources Land resources and land use change Land degradation soil erosion and desertification Deforestation Causes and impacts due to

mining dam building on environment forests biodiversity and tribal populations Water Use and

over exploitation of surface and groundwater floods droughts conflict overwater (international

ampinter-‐state) Energy resources Renewable and non-renewable energy sources use of alternate

energy sources growing energy needs case studies

UNIT IV

Biodiversity and Conservation Levels of biological diversity genetic species and ecosystem

diversity Biogeographic zones of India Biodiversity patterns and global biodiversity hot spots

Indians amega-‐biodiversity nation Endangered and endemic species of India Ecosystem and biodiversity services Ecological economic social ethical aesthetic and

Informational value

UNIT V

Environmental Pollution

Environmental pollution types causes effects and controls Air water soil and noise pollution

Nuclear hazards and human health risks Solid waste management Control measures of urban and

Industrial waste Pollution case studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand interactions between social

and environmental processes

REFERENCE BOOKS

California Press Gleeson B and Low N (eds) 1999Global Ethics and Environment London

Routledge

Gleick P H 1993 Water in Crisis Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev Environment amp Security

Stockholm Env Institute Oxford Univ Press

Groom Martha J Gary K Meffe and Carl Ronald Carroll Principles of

ConservationBiologySunderland Sinauer Associates 2006

Grumbine REdwardand PanditMK2013Threats fromIndialsquosHimalayadamsScience33936--‐37

McCully P1996Riversnomore the environmental effects of dams(pp29--‐64)Zed Books

McNeill John R 2000 Something New Under the Sun An Environmental History of the

Twentieth Century

Odum EP Odum HT amp Andrews J 1971Fundamentals of Ecology Philadelphia Saunders

Pepper IL Gerba CP amp Brusseau ML 2011 Environmental and Pollution Science Academic

Press Rao MN amp Datta AK 1987 Waste Water Treatment Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt

Ltd

Raven PH Hassenzahl DM amp Berg LR 2012Environment 8th edition John Wiley amp Sons

Rosencranz A Divan S amp Noble M L 2001 Environmental law and policy in India Tripathi

1992 Sengupta R 2003 Ecology and economics An approach to sustainable development OUP

Singh JS Singh SP and Gupta SR 2014 Ecology Environmental Science and Conservation

S Chand Publishing New Delhi

MONETARY ECONOMICS amp INDIAN BANKING

Course Code 1Y3BBA204

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To demonstrate quantitative reasoning skills of collecting processing and interpreting data using

statistical and mathematical methods and computer packages To induce critical thinking skills

within the contest of subject matter of economics

UNIT I

Money- An introduction definition and classification of money function and importance of

Money in Capitalism Socialism amp Mixed economy merits and demerits of money Standard Value

of Money The Supply and Demand Theory of Money the Quantity Theory of Money The Income

theory of Money

UNIT II

Inflation Deflation amp Reflation- Their causes and effects on different classes of people

Money Market

UNIT III

Nature of Banking- Types of banks- Unit banking and Branch banking their Functions Commercial

Banks- Creation of credit and other functions of Commercial Banks

UNIT IV

Investment Policy of Commercial Banks Central Bank - Functions of Central Bank Credit control

methods and Tools of Monetary Policy

UNIT V

RBI and its Functions Success and Failure of RBI and Agricultural credit NABARD Co-operative

Banks and Rural Banks

COURSE OUTCOME

Having skills to use quantitative data collections analysis and interpretation using statistical and

mathematical methods and computer packages Having critiquing in relation to subject matter of

economics

REFERENCE BOOKS

MY Khan- Indian Financial System TMH New Delhi

LM Bhole- Financial Market and Institution TMH New Delhi

Crowther- An Out Line of Money

Shridhar Pandey- Mudrik Siddhant

KPM Sundharam- Money Banking trade finance Sultan Chand publ

BUSINESS COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA205

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand and appropriately apply modes of expression ie descriptive expositive narrative

scientific and self-expressive in written visual and oral communication

UNIT I

Comprehension Precise Writing Report writing ndash Types of report need for writing effective reports

OTVV Essay Writing Letter Writing Types of Formal letter (complain claim inquiry and order)

UNIT II

Grammar Verbs Prepositions Transformation of sentences Vocabulary Business terms amp other

words Paper Presentation- Expansion of Ideas Role plays on selected topics with case analysis

UNIT III

Communication need purpose nature models channels barriers overcoming the barriers

Effective listening Definition levels Types barriers

UNIT IV

Effective speaking polite amp effective enquiries amp responses addressing a group qualities of a

Good speaker Purpose Of speech Telephone amp E-mail etiquette Nonverbal --communication

Definition its importance inevitability Kinetics Personality Development (Practical Application)

UNIT V

Communication with group Nature Purpose merits demerits Brainstorming Written

Communication Memos Circulars Notices Handling meetings Types structure agenda amp

minutes

COURSE OUTCOME

To understand and apply basic principles of critical thinking problem solving and technical

proficiency in the development of exposition and argument

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wren amp Martin

K Madhukar- Business Communication

VK Gain amp Om Prakash Biyani - Business Communication

Asha Laul- Business Communication

Sharma- Business Correspondence amp Report Writing TMH

SEMESTER III

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective II ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER III

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotte

d

Credit

s

Course Code Course

Type

Course

Title

Total

Mark

s

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subjec

t wise

Distrib

ution

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA301

Ability

Enhancement

IT Tool for Business

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA302

Core Course

Introduction to Marketing

Management

100 50 17 20 7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA303 Core

Course

Business

Law

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA304 Core

Course

Business

statistics for

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA305

Core

Course

Retail

Management

100 50 17 20

7

30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam Sessional

1Y3BBA304 Practical

Business

statistics for Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA305 Practical Retail Management

50 25 08 - - 25 10 - - 2 2

Skill Course Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill

Enhancemen

t Elective Course-II

50 - - - - 50 20

1 - 1 2

Grand Total 600 24

IT TOOL FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 301

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course has been designed to provide knowledge on various hardware and software

components of computer operating system various packages used for different applications data

base concepts amp operations and various issues related to IT and application of IT

UNIT-I

Introduction to Computers Hardware - Software - Systems Software Application Software and

Packages Fundamentals of operating system- windows UnixLinux Introduction to World

Wide-Internet operations Data and Information-meaning amp concept

UNIT-II

Programming language and generation lower level and high level language and different

computer generation

UNIT-III Telecommunication and Networks Fundamental of Data Communication- Network Concepts and

Classification Telecommunications Media Network Topologies Introduction to Programming

Concepts amp flow charting Models of computer data processing flow charting Technique-

principles of flow charting symbols used in flow charts Benefits amp limitations of flow chart

examples

UNIT-IV

Overview of Computer Applications in Public Services and Business Office Automation

applications - Word Processor (MS -Word) Spreadsheet amp Presentation (MS PowerPoint)

Unit-V Functional and Enterprise Management Systems Introduction to Management Information

System- Transaction Processing Information Systems Accounting and Finance Systems

Marketing and Sales Systems Production and Operation Management Systems Human

Resources Management Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Acquire the foundation level knowledge required to understand computer and its operations

Understand the hardware and software components of the computer

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Fundamentals of Computer Reema Thareja Oxford

2 Computer Fundamentals B Ram New Age Publication

3 Fundamentals of IT Alexis Leon Mathwes Leon Vikas Publication

4 Management Information System Waman S Jawadkar Mc Graw Hill

INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 302

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To develop understanding about marketing management concepts and frameworks and apply

these to a new or existing business

UNIT I

Nature amp scope of marketing management the core concept of Marketing Marketing concept

amp selling concept The Marketing environment- Element of Micro environment amp Macro

environment

UNIT II

Market segmentation Concept of Target Market Product Management Product forms Concept of

Product Line amp Product- mix

UNIT III

Concept of Product Life cycle amp strategies for managing different stages in the PLC Pricing

decisions Overview of pricing process

UNIT IV

Marketing Planning- the strategic planning Process Concepts of SBU BCG Matrix Product

Differentiation - Concept of Positioning amp Competitive advantage

UNIT V

Physical distribution channel design management decisions channel conflicts Introduction to

marketing research amp Marketing information system Meaning amp Role of Promotion Mix Direct

selling

COURSE OUTCOME

To formulate and assess strategic operational and tactical marketing decisions plan and conduct

an investigation into an organizationlsquos marketing strategy and communicate findings in an

appropriate format

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Philip Kotler

2 TN Chabra

3 TK Panda

4 SH Kazmi

5 Arun Kumar

BUSINESS LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 303

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is designed to provide the student with knowledge of the legal

environment in which a consumer and businesses operates and to provide the student with

knowledge of legal principles

UNIT-I

Contract Act 1872- Definitions amp nature of contracts offer amp acceptance consideration

capacity of parties free - Consent Legality of object void agreements Contingent contracts

Performance of contracts Discharge of contract Remedies for breach of Contract Indemnity amp

Guarantee Bailment amp Pledge Agency

UNIT-II

Sales of Goods Act 1932 Nature of contract of sale classification of goods Conditions amp

Warranties unpaid Seller and right of unpaid Seller Remedies for breach of Contract of Sales

UNIT-III

Negotiable Instruments Act 1881 Definition amp character of Negotiable instruments -

Promissory notes Bills of Exchange amp Cheques Parties to Negotiable instruments Dishonor of a

negotiable instrument

UNIT-IV Indian Partnership Act 1932- Definition Partnership Deed Registration of a Firm effect of

non-registration Dissolution of a firm

UNIT-V

Companies Act 1956- A brief introduction of Companies Types of companies Articles of

Association and Memorandum of Association Companies Act 2013

COURSE OBJECTIVE

On completion of this course learners will be able to appreciate the relevance of business law to

individuals and businesses and the role of law in an economic political and social context

Identify the fundamental legal principles behind contractual agreements

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 ND Kapoor

2 Tulsian

3 MC Kuchhal

4 Pathak amp Akhileswer - Legal Aspects of Business

BUSINESS STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 304

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To have a proper understanding of Statistical applications in Economics and Management

UNIT I

Introduction of Business Statistic What is Statistics Statistical method function Importance

Scope and Limitation of Statistic

UNIT II

Collection of Presentation of Data Classification of Data Two dimensional Diagram and Bar

Pie diagram Graph of Frequency Distribution- Histogram Frequency Polygon and Ogive

UNIT III

Measures of Central Tendency Arithmetic Mean Median Mode Geometric Mean Harmonic

Mean Characteristics of good average Measure of dispersion Absolute and Relative measures

of dispersion

UNIT IV

Measures of Variation Range Quartile Deviation Mean Deviation Standard Deviation and

Skew ness Index number Un-weighted Index number weighted index number Chain Index

number CPI WPI IIP

UNIT V

Correlation Analysis Types of Correlation Karl Person Coefficient of correlation Rank

Correlation coefficient Regression Analysis and Time Series

COURSE OUTCOME

Critically evaluate the underlying assumptions of analysis tools understand and critically

discuss the issues surrounding sampling and significance

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Business Statistics SP Guptad MP Gupta Sultan Chand and Sons

2 Quantitative Methods Dr Agarwal Vrinda Publication

3 Fundamentals of Statistics SC Gupta Himalay Publication

RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA305 Course Objective-

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL MANAGEMENT - Retail and Retailing Types of Retailers Retailing in

India RETAIL MARKET STRATEGY AND CONSUMERISM -Retail Market Strategy Standalone

Stores Rural Retailing International Retailing PLANNING AND MERCHANDISE MANAGEMENT

FOR RETAIL OUTLETS- Categorizing the buying Process Setting Objectives for Merchandising Plan

Sales Forecasting Assortment Planning Process

UNIT II

FINANCE AND LOCATION STRATEGIES FOR RETAILING- Activity Based Costing (ABC) Retail

Location Strategies LOCATION SELECTION AND HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Factors

Affecting the Location of Retail Outlet Importance of Human Resource Management (HRM) in Retailing

MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND RELATED ISSUES IN RETAILING- Understanding Consumer

Behaviour Stages in the Buying Process Factors Influencing Customers Buying Decisions Store Design

and Layout Pricing Strategies and Types Retail Promotion and communication

UNIT III

STORES LOYALTY MANAGEMENT AND VISUAL MERCHANDISING - Customer Loyalty

Variables Influencing Store Loyalty Motives for shopping and within the store Factors

UNIT IV

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT - Retail Logistics Merchandise Flows Online Logistics Management

IMPORTANCE OF CUSTOMER SERVICE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT - Customer Service

Customerlsquos perspective of service Quality the GAPS Modellsquo CRM- Meaning amp Importance of CRM

Steps Involved in the CRMlsquo Process Relationship based Buying

UNIT V

MANAGEMENT OF WOES FRANCHISING BRAND AND MALLS- Focus on safety Security at

Retail Outlets Handling of Inventory Shrinkages Measures to Reduce shoplifting Parking space problems

at Retail Centers

Course Outcome-

Reference Books

bull Gilbert David (2016) Retail Marketing Management Pearson Education

bull Berman Barry Evans Joel R and Shrivastava Ritu (2017) Retail Management ndash A

Strategic Approach Pearson Education 13th Education

The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental knowledge

about retail and retailing concepts in India along with various

aspects of retail operations

After completing this subject students becomes familiarize with

the concepts and various aspects of retail and able to manage the

entire retail operations

SEMESTER IV

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years)

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA SEMESTER IV

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code Course

Type Course Title

Total

Mar

ks

Major Minor Sessional

L T P

Subject

wise

Distributio

n

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mark

s

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Mar

ks

Min

Mar

ks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-401

Ability

Enhanceme

nt

Introduction to

soft skill amp

Team Building

50 25 8 10 4 15 6 2 - - 2

1Y3BBA-402 Core Course

Introduction to

financial

management

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-403 Core Course

Advertising

and Sales

Promotion

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-404 Core Course

Management

of Human resource

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

1Y3BBA-405 Core Course Macro Economics of

Business

100 50 17 20 7 30 12 4 - - 4

Practical Group

Term End

Practical

Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-404 Practical

Management

of Human

resource

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-405 Practical

Macro

Economics of Business

50

25 08 - - 25 10

- - 2 2

Grand Total 550 22

INTRODUCTION TO SOFT SKILL amp TEAM BUILDING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 401

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The module content is centered on students‟ learning and development It seeks to motivate

students by helping them to be more effective independent and confident self-directed learners

by improving their capacity to understand what they have learned how and when they are

learning and to encourage them to monitor reflect on evaluate plan and take responsibility for

their own learning

UNIT ndash I

General Introduction of self by students Importance of the Training sessions Importance of

Presentation Skills Public Speaking Basic English Grammar Vocabulary Kinds of Sentences

Verb Adverb Tenses Preposition Conjunction Formation of Sentences Sentence Making

Translation Communication Skills Communication meaning Function Process Types of

communication Barriers of communication Guidelines for effective communication Purpose of

Good communication Importance of right Pronunciation

UNIT ndash II

Listening and Writing Skills Importance of effective listening Importance of effective writing

skills Conversation Practice Guidelines for Effective writing Body Language Gestures Voice

modulation Eye Contact Facial Expression Posture Dressing Sense Attire Hand movements

General Etiquette Mannerism Smiling Gestures Confidence building Exit walk Behavioral

skills Team Management Time Management Stress Management Decision Making Positive

Thinking Attitude self-actualization working style

UNIT ndash III

Email Skills Email Etiquette Email Drafting Creating a Resume Resume writing tips Format

and Content Resume Freshers Resume Helpful Tips For Resume Writing Things to avoid in

Resume Group Discussion Introduction ―what is GDAbility to Influence Importance of Active

Listening Key Steps to succeed in GD Dolsquos and Donlsquots of GD

UNIT ndash IV

Interview Skills Tips Groundwork before the Interview Greeting Etiquettes Self-Introduction

Tips to answer ―questions Dolsquos and Donlsquots of Interview Preparing a day before the interview

Things to remember during the Interview Telephonic Interview and Video Conferencing

Interview Tips Treat the Interview like a face to face Interview Telephone Etiquette and Flow of

Conversation

UNIT ndash V

Corporate Etiquette Professional Attitude at work Punctuality Meeting etiquettes Professional

Dressing sense Cordial Relation with Fellow workers

COURSE OUTCOME

To fulfill the demand of the corporate world by creating a labor force who possess the soft skills

and the ability to achieve workplace targets through practical team engagement

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull English Grammar- Wren amp Martin

bull Putting your best foot forward- Lt Co (Dr) Pramod Deogirikar

INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 402

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Enhancing studentlsquos ability in dealing short-term dealing with day-to-day working capital

decision and also longer-term dealing which involves major capital investment decisions and

raising long-term finance

UNIT I

Financial Management Meaning nature scope financial goal Wealth maximization Objectives

Role of finance manager

UNIT II

Concept of Ratio Analysis Nature Classification of ratios Capital budgeting Nature of

investment decisions Investment evaluation criteria Net Present Value internal rate of return

Comparison between NPV amp IRR

UNIT III

Cost of Capital Meaning amp Significance of cost of Capital Cost of borrowed capital Cost of

Preference capital Cost Of equity share capital Capital structure Steps in financial planning

capitalization designing of capital structure Optimum capital structure

UNIT IV

The concept of Leverages Degree of operation Leverage Significance of operating leverage

Finance Leverage Impact of different leverage on profit combined financial amp operating

Leverage

UNIT V

Working capital amp its role operating cycle Factors determining the size of working capital

estimating working Capital requirements Objective of Inventory Management Size amp cost of

inventory Analysis of inventory Inventory turnovers Inventory Control- Economic order

Quantity Re-order point ABC analysis Dividend policy

COURSE OUTCOME

Improving studentslsquo understanding of the time value of money concept and the role of a financial

manager in the current competitive business scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 IM Pandey

2 P Chandra

3 SP Gupta

4 MY Khan

ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 403

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Assignments must be submitted for each unit as they are completed so that the teacher may

review and assess your performance Do not hold your work you must submit each unitlsquos

homework as it is completed demonstrating weekly assignment completions

UNIT I Advertising Meaning features types functions amp setting of advertising objectives Advertising

budget approaches of Advertising- DAGMAR amp AIDA model (defining Advertising Goals for

Measured Advertising Results) social amp economic aspects of advertising

UNIT II

Advertising Copy concepts and elements Requisites of a good and effective advertising copy

Advertising appeals measuring advertising effectiveness Advertising Agencies Concept role

types and selection of advertising agencies Regulating Agencies Advertising standards Council

of India (ASCI) The Advertising Agencies Association of India (AAAI)

UNIT III

Advertising Planning Product personality Receptions objective Research measuring

awareness Attitude Brand Usage copy Testing Art amp layout of an advertisement Principles of

design layout stages difference in designing of television audio amp print advertisement internet

advertising and evaluation of advertising

UNIT IV

Media planning amp scheduling Introduction to broadcast amp non-broadcast media Key factors

influencing media planning Media decisions media class media vehicle amp media option

Management of sales promotion Importance amp need for sales promotion different types of

consumer schemes and other methods of promotion

UNIT V

Sales Promotion Concept Objectives Schemes and Importance exhibition and trade fairs

Sales Planning and Control Selection Training Motivation and Compensation of Sales

personnel Ethical and legal aspects of advertising and sales promotion

COURSE OUTCOME

Categorize business activities such as production management and finance and describe how

these activities relate to marketing Describe the history of the advertising industry and its

relation to todaylsquos marketplace

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wells Moriarity amp Burnett Advertising Principles amp practices Prentice Hall

Jethwaney and Jain Advertising Management Oxford Publishers New Delhi

Chunnawala Advertising Himalaya Publishing House New Delhi

Advertising Jay Bansal SBPD Publications

MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 404

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The students of human resources management must aware of basic aspects of human resource

management to understand the functioning of human resource management in an organizational

setting

UNIT-I

Human Resource Management Evolution and growth of human resource management (with

special reference to scientific management and Human relations approach) role of HR in

strategic management nature Objective scope and functions of HR management

UNITndashII Challenges of HR Changing environment (the changing profile of the workforce knowledge

workers employment opportunities in BPOs IT and service industries Flexi options)

Workforce diversity (causes paradox resolution of diversity by management)

UNITndashIII HRD Human resource management as a profession Concepts of line-staff in the structure of

human resource department and the role of human resource manager

UNITndashIV

Manpower planning objectives elements advantages process Job design- (simplification

rotation enlargement enrichment and approaches Job analysis Job evaluation

UNITndashV Orientation Recruitment (factors affecting sources policy and evaluation) Selection

(Procedure tests interviews) Placement and induction

COURSE OUTCOME

To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment Selection Training

Development Performance appraisals and Reward Systems Compensation Plans and Ethical

Behaviour

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aswathappa K (2002) Human Resource and Personnel Management Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi

Bhattacharyya Kumar Deepak (2006) Human Resource Managing Excel Books New

Delhi

Cascio FW (2003) Managing Human Resources Productivity Quality of Life Profits Tata McGraw Hill New York

HRM Dr FC Sharma SBPD Publications

A M Sheikh Human Resource Development amp Management 3e SChand Publications

MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 405 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand how the economy is regulated through monetary and fiscal policies To study the

important indicators of the economy and their significance

UNIT I

Introduction to Macroeconomics Objective and Instruments of Macroeconomics Measurement of

Macroeconomic variables National Income Accounts Gross Domestic Product National Income

Personal and Personal disposable income

UNIT II

Measurement of National Income Circular Flow of Income Approach to National Income

Measures of Aggregate Income Gross and Net concept Domestic and National concept Market and

Factor cost Nominal and Real GDPGDP Deflator

Classical theory of income and employment Quantity Theory of Money Classical aggregate

demand curve Classical theory of interest rate effect of fiscal and monetary policy

UNIT III

Keynesian theory of Income and employment simple Keynesian model components of aggregate

demand equilibrium Income changes in equilibrium multiplier (investment Government

expenditure lump sum tax foreign trade) effect Of fiscal and monetary policy effect of monetary

and fiscal policy

UNIT IV Inflation meaning demand and supply side factors consequences of inflation anti-inflationary

policies natural rate theory monetary policy-output and inflation Impact of inflation on production

Phillips curve (short run and long run) Measuring Inflation WPI CPI Measures to control Inflation

monetary measures fiscal measures

UNIT V

Open Economy brief introduction to BOP account Causes and type of disequilibrium in Bop and

corrective measures Market for foreign exchange and exchange rate monetary and fiscal policy in

open economy

COURSE OUTCOME

To analyse the income determination through classical and Keynesian economics To integrate the

role of fiscal and monetary policies in regulating economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Froyen RP (2011) Macroeconomics-theories and policies (Sih Ed) Pearson

2 Dornbusch and Fischer (2010) Macroeconomics (Imed) Tata McGraw Hill

3 N Gregory Mankiw (2010) Macroeconomics (7dhed) Worth Publishers

4 Olivier Blanchard Macroeconomics (2009) (5thed) Pearson

SEMESTER V

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA Vth SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment

Internal Assessment Credit

Distribution

Allotted

Credits

Course Code

Course Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Marks

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-501

Ability Enhancement

Public Relation amp Corporate Image

50

25

8

10

4

15

6

2

-

-

2

1Y3BBA-502 Core Course Entrepreneurship and

small Business

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-503

Core Course Principle of

Economics

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-502

Practical Entrepreneurship and

small Business

50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

1Y3BBA-503 Practical Principle of Economics

50

25 08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Skill Course

Sessional

Skill

Enhancement

Skill Enhancement

Elective Course-III

50 - - - - 50 20 1 - 1 2

Grand Total

600

24

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D

L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Skill Elective III ndash Any other course being offered in this semester as per the list given at the end of

course structure

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA504 Integrated Marketing Communication

1Y3BBA505 Sales amp Distribution Management

1Y3BBA506 Advanced Marketing Research

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA507 Labour amp Employment Laws in India

1Y3BBA508 Industrial Relation

1Y3BBA509 Organization Development

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA510 Corporate Finance Decision

1Y3BBA511 International Financial Management

1Y3BBA512 Financial Inclusion

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA513 Database Management System

1Y3BBA514 Managing IT Enabled Service

1Y3BBA515 Software Project Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA516 Agribusiness Environment amp Policy

1Y3BBA517 Agricultural Marketing Management

1Y3BBA518 Food Retail Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA519 Supply Chain Management

1Y3BBA520 Stores Management

1Y3BBA521 Retail Operation Management

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA522 Technology Management

1Y3BBA523 Productivity

1Y3BBA524 Technology Management and ISO

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA525 Tourism Concept

1Y3BBA526 Tourism Management

1Y3BBA527 Tourism Marketing

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA528 Hospital and Health System

1Y3BBA529 Health Economics

1Y3BBA530 Hospital medical Records Management

(Rural Management Group )

1Y3BBA531 Rural Society and polity

1Y3BBA532 Ecology amp Environment

1Y3BBA533 Rural Marketing Management

SKILL ENHANCEMENT ELECTIVE COURSES

Non-Technical

Elective No Department Faculty Name

Faculty of Information Technology

I SCIT 201 Data Entry Operation 2(1+0+1)

II SCIT 301 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCIT 501 Web Designing with HTML 2(1+0+1)

IV SCMIT 201 Web Development 2(1+0+1)

V SCMIT 301 LINUX 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Management

I SMGT 201 Briefing and Presentation Skills 2(1+0+1)

II SMGT 301 Resolving Conflicts and Negotiation Skills 2(1+0+1)

III SMGT802 Entrepreneurship Development

Faculty of Commerce

I SCOM 201 Tally ERP 9 2(1+0+1)

II SCOM 302 Multimedia 2(1+0+1)

III SCOM 803 Data Analyst 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Humanities

I SHBA 301 Pursuing Happiness 2(1+0+1)

II SHBA302 Communication Skill and Personality Development 2(1+0+1)

III SHMA301 Tourism in MP 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Science

I SSBI 301 Mushroom Cultivation 2(1+0+1)

II SSPH 301 House Hold Wiring 2(1+0+1)

III SSPH 301 Basic Instrumentation 2(1+0+1)

IV SSPH 301 DTP Operator 2(1+0+1)

V SSCH 301 Graphic Designing 2(1+0+1)

Faculty of Education

I SCBE 403 Understanding of ICTC (Information Communication Technology) 2(1+0+1)

II SCPE 201 Yoga Education 2(1+0+1)

PUBLIC RELATION amp CORPORATE IMAGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA501

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

The course objective is to make the students understand appreciate and expose them to the concepts

of Public Relations philosophies essentiality and principles with an aim to managing controlling

and improving corporate image and related aspects for any organization

UNIT- I

Public Relations Definition ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Objectives ndash Scope and Functions ndash

Organization of Public Relations of Corporate Bodies ndash Internal Organization ndash Seeking Consultancy

Service -Role of Public Relations for Corporate Internal Security in managing Delegates and Visitors

ndash Qualities of Good Public Relations Personnel ndash Selection Training and Development of Public

Relations Staff ndash Importance of Mannerisms and Body Language in Public Relations

UNIT- II

Public Relations Strategy ndash Meaning ndash Importance ndash Strategy for Marketing ndash Tangible amp Service

Products Marketing Strategy for Creating Corporate Image ndash Strategy for Promoting Social

Awareness amp Public Education for National Integrity Social Reforms Health amp Education ndash Strategy

for Damage Control ndash Meaning and Importance ndash Case Study of Corporates in India ndash Public Relation

Activities Before During amp After General Meetings of Corporate Bodies ndash Public Meetings ndash Event

Management

UNIT- III

Public Relations Management ndash Ethics ndash Dolsquos amp Donlsquots in Public Relations Management ndash

Customers amp Investors Education ndash Selection amp Importance of Brand Ambassadors ndash Public

Relations Functions in the light of Right to Information ndash Consumerism ndash NGO Activism ndash Code of

Conduct in Advertisement ndash Outsourcing of Public Relations ndash Importance Selection Control

UNIT IV

Corporate Image in Contemporary Management Studies

Components of an Individual Image

Advertising and Corporate Image

Public Relations of an Institutions

UNIT V

The Grapevine and Rumours

Stereotype

Propaganda

Case Histories of Corporate Image in Private and Public Sector

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop an understanding of the concept of Public Relations and the tools of Public relations

applicable in todaylsquos business scenario and develop the ways to build reputation with different

entities using Public relation tools and effective media handling

REFERENCE BOOKS

Public relations for your business Frank Jefkins Jaico Publishing House

Hand Book of Public Relations and Communications Philip Lesly Jaico Publishing House

Public Relations by Averill Alizabeth New Delhi Oxford University

Public Relation the Profession and the Practice Baskin Oits Aronoff Craig Lattimore Dan McGraw Hill

This is PR- The Realities of Public Relations Newson Turk Kruckeberg Wadsworth ndash Thomson Learning

ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 502 COURSE OBJECTIVES-

The main aims of the course are to familiarize students with various concepts used in understanding

processes involved in entrepreneurship and business formation and development Provide context to

those processes in the form of differences between small and large firms and the economic

environment Introduce key debates around entrepreneurship and small businesses and provide

evidence which informs those debates

UNIT I

Definition amp concept of Entrepreneurship Classification amp Type Nature amp Importance of

Entrepreneurs John Kao Model of Entrepreneurship amp small business Entrepreneurship amp its

environmental problems Social Entrepreneurship characteristic and role of Social Entrepreneurship

UNIT II

Choice of business Size of a business unit Optimum firm Representative firm Entrepreneurship

development - Role of EDIs NIESBUD NSIC and DICs in promoting entrepreneurs the

Entrepreneurial process Entrepreneurial decision making

UNIT III

Entrepreneurship Creativity amp Innovation Stimulating Creativity Organizational actions that

enhance hinder creativity source of innovation in business Innovation and Entrepreneurship in

Social context Start Up

UNIT IV

Preparing projects process Sources of finance for small business arrangement of funds traditional

source of financing Loan syndication and consortium finance venture capital

UNIT V

Setting up a small industry - Steps involved sickness in small scale industries

COURSE OUTCOME-

Develop and demonstrate competence in basic business and marketing planning

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Hisrica Peters TMH Publication

2 David H Holt Prentice Hall of India Ltd

3 Vasant Desai

4 Jerry Katz- Entrepreneurial Small Business St Louis University TMH

PRINCIPLE OF ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 503

COURSE OBJECTIVES-

To familiarise students with the production and cost structure under different stages of production

UNIT- I

Introduction Definition given by different economists Nature amp Scope merits and demerits

UNIT-II

Demand and Supply Law of demand determinants of demand shifts of demand curve versus

movements along a demand curve market demand Law of supply - Determinants of supply shifts

of supply versus movements along a supply curve market supply market equilibrium Applications

of demand and supply price rationing price floors

Elasticity of Demand price elasticity of demand calculating elasticity determinants of price

elasticity cross and income elasticity

UNIT-III

Consumer Theory Concept of utility Diminishing marginal utility Equi-marginal utility

Indifference curves budget constraint Price income and substitution effects Consumer Surplus amp

Producer surplus

UNIT-IV

Production and Costs production functions law of variable proportions returns to scale isoquant

and iso-cost lines producer equilibrium Costs costs in the short run costs in the long run revenue

and profit maximizations economies and diseconomies of scale

UNIT-V

Market Structures Perfect Competition theory of a firm under perfect competition equilibrium of

the firm in the short run and long run Imperfect Competition- Monopoly short run and long run

equilibrium comparison of perfect competition and monopoly price discrimination wages payment

concept

COURSE OUTCOME-

To integrate the concept of price and output decisions of firms under various market structure

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Lipsey R and Alec Chrystal Economics Oxford University Press Twelfth Edition 2011

bull Case Karl E amp Ray C Fair Principles of Economics Pearson Education Inc 8th

edition

2007

bull Barro RobertJ Macroeconomics MIT Press Cambridge MA

bull Burda Michael Wyplosz Macroeconomics A European Text Oxford University Press

Oxford

bull Salvatore Dominick International Economics John Wiley amp Singapore

MARKETING GROUP

INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 504 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the different elements of integrated marketing communications so

that they can look at marketing communications with a holistic approach The course is designed to

enable the students to learn the basics of marketing communications

UNIT-I

Introduction Concept of Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) Process and Role of IMC

in Marketing Promotion mix - Advertising (Classification of advertising types advertising

appropriation advertising campaigns) Sales Promotion (Different types of Sales Promotion

relationship between Sales promotion and advertising) Publicity (Types of Publicity relationship

between advertising and publicity) Personal Selling Direct marketing and direct response methods

Interactive Internet Marketing

UNIT-II

Objectives for IMC Programs Determining Promotional Objectives DAGMAR approach

establishing and allocating promotional budget

UNIT-III

IMC Message Design-The Creative concept development the creative processes of the different

forms of IMC AIDA model Considerations for creative idea Visualization (Creative planning

creative strategy development Communications appeals and execution Message strategy design

considerations Source of the message Message integration Advertorials and Infomercials Client

Evaluation and approval of Creative Strategywork

UNIT-IV

Media Management-Media Types and their characteristics Setting Media objectives Considering

key media concepts Media planning Media Strategy Media buying Cross media concept and

media research

Facilitators in IMC-Advertising Agencies ndash their role functions organization Remuneration

client agency relationship account Planning Hoarding Contractors Printers etc

UNIT-V

Ethics and social responsibility in IMC campaigns Emerging Concepts and Issues Marketing

Communications

COURSE OUTCOME-

To develop positive communication skills by extending the marketing communication approaches

and techniques into effective marketing strategy and programs which are necessary to

communicating to target audiences

REFERENCE BOOKS

Aaker amp Myers Advertising Management Prentice Hall Inc

Borden amp Marshall Advertising Management MV Taraporevala Sonslsquo Co Pvt Ltd Richard

D Irwin Inc Homewood Illinois

Chunawala amp Sethia Foundations of Advertising Theory amp Practice Himalaya Publishing

House

Copley Paul Marketing Communications Management Concepts amp theories Cases and

Practices Butterworth- Heinemann Publication

Duncon Integrated Marketing Communications TMH

Kenneth Clow amp Donald Baack Integrated Advertising Promotion amp Marketing

Communications Pearson Education Limited

Otto Kelppner Advertising Procedure Prentice Hall Inc

Rathore Advertising Management Himalaya Publishing House

Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication Cengage Learning

Sandage Fryburger amp Rotzoll Advertising Theory amp Practices Richard D Irwin Inc

Homewood Illinois

Siraj M Joseph amp Rahtz Don R Integrated Marketing Communication ndash A Strategic

Approach Cengage Learning

Wells Burnett amp Mariarity Advertising Principles amp Practices Prentice Hall of India

Wright Warner Winter amp Zeigler Advertising McGrawHill Education

SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT

Code 1Y3BBA 505 COURSE OBJECTIVE

It aims to help management students understand the fundamentals of Sales management and

distribution management so as to recognize the need of Business and to have the effective Sales and

distribution strategies for the satisfaction of channel partners

UNIT-I

Evolution of Sales Management-Nature and Role of Sales Management Sales Strategies

Relationship Strategy Double win Hard Sale Vs Soft Sale Strategy Setting Personal selling

objective Recruiting Sales Personnel Planning Sources Selecting a Sales Personnel Hiring

Procedure Socialization

UNIT-II

Sales Training Program-Role of a trainer Training Method Designing sales training program

Motivating Sales Personnel Designing and Administering Compensation Financial Compensation

Methods Nonfinancial Methods Sales Meeting Sales Contests Contest Prizes Managerial

Evaluation of Contest

UNIT-III

Sales Organization Sales Organization Concepts - Structures Quotas for Sales personnel

Procedure Types Methods Territories Size Allocation Designing Allocating Sales Efforts Sales

Information System Planning Reports Evaluation of Sales Force Process

UNIT-IV

Marketing Channel-Importance Structure Flow Wholesaling Functions Classification Key

tasks Retailing Organized Retail in India Types of Retailer Role of Retailer E-Tailing Market

Logistics Scope Inventory Management Warehousing Transportation

UNIT-V

Designing Channel System-Channel Design Channel Planning Selecting Channel Partners

Change Training Motivating Evaluating Channel Management Use of Power Channel Conflict

Channel Information System Elements Purpose Channel Performance Evaluation International

Channels Mode of Entry Decision Case Studies in Sales

COURSE OUTCOME

Course participants should be able to understand amp appreciate the diverse variables affecting the

sales amp distribution function participants should be able to develop sales and distribution plans

participants should be able to link distribution with other marketing variables

REFERENCE BOOKS

Panda T Sachdev S Sales and Distribution Management Oxford University pres

Havaldar Krishna K Sales and Distribution Management Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta S L Sales amp Distribution Management Text amp Cases in Indian Perspectives Excel Books

Still Kundiff Govoni Sales and Distribution Management PHI

L Gorchels C West E J Marien The Managers Guide to Distribution Channels McGrawHills

Russell W McCalley Marketing Channel Management People Products Programs and Markets

Greenwood Publishing Group

Robert Hastings Channel Sales amp Management In Distribution Businessman Pub

ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH

Course Code 1Y3BBA 506 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to start a discussion on the challenges of marketing research and analyzing

consumer behavior in the dynamically developing global environment Relevant advanced marketing

research approaches concepts and tools are being presented discussed and applied by students

within a course project

UNIT-I

Introduction to Marketing Research-Nature and Scope of Marketing Research Role of Marketing

Research in the Designing and Implementation of Marketing Programs the Marketing Research

Process Marketing Research Designs

UNIT-II

The Source amp Collection of Data-Observational Methods Attitude Measurement Techniques

Motivational Research Techniques Administration of Surveys ndash Methods amp Techniques Use of

Questionnaire amp Schedules Introduction to Marketing Data Analysis-Review of Basic

Descriptive Statistics Introduction to SPSS Data Reading amp Coding Simple Inferential Statistical

Analysis Tools

UNIT-III

Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques-Regression Analysis (Advertising Budget Decisions etc)

ndash Violation of Assumptions in Regression Analysis amp Therapy Types of Regression Analysis Factor

Analysis (Questionnaire Development amp Advertising Theme Decisions etc) ndash Fundamental

Theorem amp Central Concept Factor Extraction Methods amp Criteria Factor Rotation amp Scores

Cluster Analysis (Market Segmentation etc) ndash Concepts and Process Hierarchical versus Non-

hierarchical Cluster Algorithms Linkage Methods Determination of Cluster Number

UNIT-IV

Interpretation and Profiling of Cluster Solutions Discriminant Function Analysis (Brand amp Product

Line Decisions etc) - Significance Tests and Wilks Lambda Standardized Canonical Discriminant

Function Coefficients Structure Matrix Interpreting Discriminant Functions and Classification

Multidimensional Scaling (Strategy Formulation) - Basic Principles and Application in Marketing

Data Collection Methods Determining Proximity The MDS Algorithm Number of Dimensions and

their Interpretation Assessing Reliability and Validity

UNIT-V

Marketing Research Project-The student or group of students needs to apply this course learning

in a real marketing research project of their interest area with submission of research project report

and class presentation of the same

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding multivariate techniques used in modern marketing practice Topics to be drawn from

analysis of variance regression analysis discriminant analysis canonical correlation analysis factor

analysis cluster analysis multi-dimensional scaling conjoint analysis

REFERENCE BOOKS

Malhotra NK Marketing Research ndash An Applied Orientation Pearson Education New Delhi

William G Zikmund Business Research Methods Cengage Learning New Delhi

Tull amp Hawkins Marketing Research Prentice Hall of IndiaDelhi

Beri GC Marketing Research Tata McGraw Hill

Karlinger Fred N Foundations of Behavioural Research

Aaker Kumar and Day Marketing Research John Willey

Churchill and Iaccubucci Marketing Research Methodological Foundations Cengage Learning

Coakes Sheridan and Clara On SPSS Version 180 for Windows Analysis without Anguish John Wiley amp

Sons Inc List of cases and specific references including research papers articles and books will be announced

in the class

HUMAN RESOURCE GROUP

LABOUR AND EMPLOYMENT LAWS IN INDIA

Course Code 1Y3BBA 507 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The Course intends to educate and create awareness among the students about various aspects of

Labour and Employment Law and thus equip them to handle this delicate subject with maturity

objectivity and understandings

UNIT-I

The Factories Act 1948

The Workmenlsquos Compensations Act 1923

The Employees State Insurance Act 1948

UNIT-II

The Employeeslsquo Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952

The Payment of gratuity Act 1972

UNIT-III

The Maternity Benefit Act 1961

The Minimum Wages act 1948

UNIT-IV

The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946

The Payment of Bonus Act 1965

UNIT-V

The Apprentices Act 1969

The Employment Exchange (Compulsory Notification of Vacancies) Act 1959

COURSE OUTCOME ndash

To understand the implications of non- implementation of various provisions of essential Labour

Laws and the penal consequences that will follow In order to manage an establishment and the

organisation to be respected by the society one should have the knowledge and commitment to

follow the Laws applicable to the establishment

REFERENCE BOOKS

S N Mishra Labour Laws Deep amp Deep Publications

S C Srivastava Social Security and Labour Laws Universal Delhi

Madhavan Pillai Labour and Industrial Laws Jain Book Depot

V V Giri Labour problems in Indian Industry Asia Pub House

N D Kapoor Elements of Mercantile Law Sultan Chand and Sons

INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 508 COURSE OBJECTIVE

In this course the students are to be acquainted with the Industrial relations framework in our

country the importance of the maintenance of Industrial peace and efforts to reduce the incidence of

Strikes and Lockout and Industrial Strike are to be emphasized Further the students are to be

acquainted with Social Security Frame-work prevailing in our Country It is necessary to know the

concept of social security its importance and also constitutional basis for the same in India

UNIT-I

Introduction to Industrial Relation-Concept evolution characteristics scope components factors

affecting industrial relations approaches to IR IR in India prerequisites of successful industrial

relation programme

Industrial ConflictsDisputes- Meaning essentials classification recognition of disputes impact

of industrial disputes factors of industrial disputesconflicts Strikes-forms prevention of strikes

lock-outs gheraos Ways to achieving industrial peace Code of discipline in industry

UNIT-II

Grievances Handling- meaning nature causes of grievances procedure for redressal

Collective Bargaining-meaning principles contents forms process and levels of collective

bargaining formats of agreements Typologies productivity bargaining pre-requisite of effective

collective bargaining collective bargaining in India

UNIT-III

Workersrsquo Education-content significance rationale behind workerslsquo education workerslsquo education

scheme in India- objectives functions and problems

Workersrsquo Participation in Management concept determinants form and levels of participation

schemes of workerslsquo participation in management in India

UNIT-IV

Trade Union concept purpose functions types trade union and politics trade union in India

major all-India trade unions employerslsquo organizations Trade Union Act 1926- major definitions

registration rights privileges obligations and liabilities of a registered trade union

UNIT-V

Settlement Machinery-Mediation and Conciliation- function process conciliation machinery

Arbitration advantages disadvantages types qualification of arbitration procedure of investigation

submission of award Adjudication-importance types and three-tier adjudication labour court

industrial tribunals

Industrial Dispute Act 1947 Causes of disputes Authorities under the Act Procedure and Power

of Authorities Award and Settlement of industrial dispute

COURSE OUTCOME

Be acquainted with the concepts principles and issues connected with trade unions collective

bargaining workers participation grievance redressal and employee discipline and dispute

resolution

REFERENCE BOOKS

Owen WV amp Finston HV Industrial Relations Appleton-Century-Crofts

IIPM Personnel Management in India

Heckman IL amp Hunuyager SC Management of Personnel Function London Business

Publication Ltd

Mehrotra SN Labour Problems in India

Sen Ratna Industrial Relations in India Macmillan Publishers India

Memoria CB Industrial Relations Himalaya Publication

Chhabara TN and RK Suri Industrial Relations- Concepts and Issues Dhanpatria amp Co

Any book concerned with Labour Acts and Industrial Law

ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 509 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective is to gain familiarity with the concept and skills to manage and improve organizational

culture collaboratively It seeks to educate how organizational goals are attained by furthering the

human values in individuals

UNIT-I

Understanding the Concept of Intervention-Nature scope and definition of Organizational

Development achieving organizational improvement with Organizational Development

Organizational Development vs the traditional interventions brief overview of Laboratory ndashtraining

and survey research amp feedback methodology

UNIT-II

Underlying Assumptions about People as Individuals-about people in groups and about people in

organizational systems assumptions relating to values in the client organization values and belief

systems of Change agents Concept of System amp Organizational Development

UNIT-III

Operational Components of Organizational Development- the diagnostic component

interventionaction taking component and process maintenance component Understanding the belief

of action-should follow ndash research and researchndashshould follow ndash action

UNIT-IV

OD Interventions-overview team building interventions and their rationales Intergroup team

building and the organization mirror intervention personal interpersonal and group process

interventions nature of comprehensive OD interventions structural interventions amp OD conditions

important for successful OD efforts

UNIT ndash V

HR and Technological change Introduction special features of new technology organizational

implications of technological change Emerging profile HR Employee Empowerment Emotional

Intelligence and employee productivity Managing work stress

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the roles that consultants internal or external can play in the OD process and have

improved their own facilitation skills through a team facilitation assignment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Wendell LFreanch amp Cecil H Bell Jr Organizational Development PHI New Delhi

Management amp Organizational Development The Path from XA to YB New York

McGrawhill

Organizational Renewal Gordon LLippit New York Century Crofts

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE FINANCIAL DECISIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 510 COURSE OBJECTIVE

To equip the students with the knowledge and skills needed by the finance professionals in

addressing practical problems in corporate finance From a finance professionallsquos point of view a

good understanding of Corporate Finance is crucial to assist a company

UNIT-I

Introduction- The objectives of the firm finance function Role of finance within the firm

Corporate financing meaning patterns and sources Linking Corporate and Financial Strategies-

Assessing business risk Financial risk Correlation between business risk and financial risk Role of

Financial Markets and Financial Intermediation Corporate governance Financial engineering

UNIT-II

Long-Term Investment Decision- Definition and Classification of investments Stages in the

analysis of investments Evaluation of investments (Fundamental evaluation)-role of taxes amount

of investment Net Cash Flows Investmentlsquos Terminal Value Economic Evaluation of a

Investments- Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return Relevant Cash Flows Payback and

Accounting Rate of Return Risk analysis in investment Sensitivity Analysis

UNIT-III

Long-Term Financing Decision- External Financing Equity capital- equity markets rights issues

and private equity Long-Term Debt- Bank Financing the capital markets private placements

medium-term notes commercial paper and corporate bonds Internal Financing Retained Earnings

Amortization Provisions Other Financing Sources Intercompany funding Trade finance Project

finance Asset backed finance Leasing Islamic financing

UNIT-IV

Financial Distress and Bankruptcy Cost- Financial distress Meaning Causes and Evaluation of

financial distress with help of various model (Beaver Model Wilcox Model Blum Marclsquos Failing

Company Model Altmanlsquos Z score Model LC Gupta Model) Bankruptcy cost- direct and indirect

cost bankruptcy process liquidation and reorganization

UNIT-V

Value Based Management- Shareholder value Earnings-based management Creating value Value

Strategy Measuring the value creation Accounting indicators- EPS ROE ROCE Economic

indicators- cash flow Shareholder value analysis Economic profit and Economic Value Added

Cash Flow Return on Investment Market indicators or Entire firm value measurement-Total

Shareholder return Wealth added index Market Value Added market to book ratio Tobin Q)

COURSE OUTCOME

Distinguish different types of business structure identify the major corporate financial decisions and

corporate objective and describe some important basic concepts

REFERENCE BOOKS

Breale Myers Marcus Fundamentals of Corporate Finance McGraw-Hill

Bodie Zvi kane Alex Marcus Alan J Essentials of Investments McGraw HillIrwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Essentials of Corporate Finance Irwin

Ross Westerfield and Jordon Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Robert Parrino David S Kidwell Fundamentals of Corporate Finance John Wiley and Sons

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 511 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the international financial

environment and the special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function in a

multinational corporation

UNIT-I

Global Financial Environment-Objective of financial management in a multinational corporation

functions of international financial management Special decision variables in international financial

management International monetary system

UNIT-II

Forex and Financial Derivatives-Foreign exchange markets exchange rates exchange rate theories

ndash Mint parity Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) Balance of Payments theory Stable and flexible

exchange rate An integrated framework of exchange rate interest rate and inflation rate Fischer

Effect International fisher effect Forward contracts currency futures and currency options

Currency swaps and interest rate swaps

UNIT-III

Management of exposure amp risk- Concept of exposure and risk Types of exposure ndash transaction

transnational and economic exposure Measurement of transaction exposure Managing transaction

exposure Hedging Strategies International Portfolio Investment-Economic determinants The

national FDI policy framework Benefits of inter-national equity and bond investing International

capital asset pricing model (ICAPM)

UNIT-IV

International Capital Budgeting-The basic framework for analysis Issues and strategic

considerations in international capital budgeting The adjusted present value approach (APV)

Financial risk and cost of capital

Exchange risk and cost of capital Political risk and cost of capital Impact of hedging on cost of

capital Tax consideration ndash Branch vs subsidiary withholding tax Foreign sales corporations 80-

20 subsidiaries and tax havens

UNIT-V

International Financing Decisions International Equity markets Foreign equity market and their

comparative performance Recent developments and innovations in international capital markets

Recent developments in the Euro bond market

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations

and express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Alan C Shapiro Foundations of Multinational Financial Management Wiley

PG Apte Global Financial Management Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Abdullah Faud A Financial Management for the Multinational Firms Prentice-Hall

Zenoff David B amp Zwick Jack International Financial Management Prentice-Hall

Maurice D Levi International Finance Taylor amp Francis

Eiteman David K amp Stonehill Arthur I Multinational Business Finance Addison-Wesley Pub Co

Bucklay Adrain Multinational Finance Financial Times Prentice Hall

Nehrt Lea C International Finance for Multinational Business Intext Educational Publishers

Ian H Giddy Global Financial Markets DC Heath

FINANCIAL INCLUSION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 512 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course is designed to provide a resourceful insight of the various pillars of financial inclusion

such as micro remittance micro-savings micro-credit and micro-insurance The Course will discuss

the causes for ineffectiveness of formal lending amp evaluates a few current initiatives that attempt to

promote higher financial inclusion in the country under different models

UNIT-I

Financial Inclusion-Meaning and Definition Problems of Financial Inclusion Factors Affecting

Access to Financial Services

Financial Exclusion-Meaning Nature Participants Causes and Consequences Benefits Of Inclusive

Financial Growth Relationship between Financial Inclusion and Development Indicators

UNIT-II

Initiatives of Financial Inclusion in India-Cooperative Societies Act Rural Credit Survey

Committee Nationalization of banks Introduction of Lead Bank Scheme Setting up of Regional

Rural banks Introduction of Kisan Credit Card

UNIT-III

Genesis and Evolution of Microfinance-different models of microfinance operating in India

Emerging Trends in Microfinance Micro-insurance- Concept Practices and Innovations

Understanding Rural Debt Safe Remittances for the Poor

UNIT-IV

SHG Study of the Self Help Group-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP) as an innovative strategy of

microfinance evolved in India

Extending Financial Services to Poor- Linkages between Formal and Informal Financial

Institutions to Extend Financial Service to Poor People Efforts in reducing Transaction Costs for

Banks and Their Clients Business Correspondent and Business Facilitator Outreach Model for

Banks The Post Office model Financial Literacy and Counseling of Rural People

UNIT-V

Challenges for the Future-Inclusive Growth through Rural Employment the Micro-enterprises

Model Unique Identification Number and Financial Inclusion Best Practices in Financial Inclusion

and Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Formulate a strategy for policies to support financial development in a country taking into account

initial conditions and links between the financial sector and the macro economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

K G Karmarkar G D Banerjee N P Mohapatra Towards Financial Inclusion In India Sage

Publication

Desai Vasant Rural Development in India Himalaya Publishing House

Rohtagi Rural Banking amp Overdues Management Cybertech

Patnaik UC Rural Banking in India Anmol Publications

Basu Priy Improving Access to Finance for Indialsquos Rural Poor World Bank Publications

Bhatnagar Amitabh Rural Micro finance amp Microenterprise Concept Publishing

Sohano amp Balakrishna Indian Rural Banking ndash the Changing Paradigm ICFAI

Sujatha B Financial Inclusion Concepts and Strategies ICFAI

Ravichandran Krishnamurthy Financial Inclusion VDM Verlag

Sameer Kocchar K C Chakrabarty and C Rangarajan Speeding Financial Inclusion

Academic Foundation

IT GROUP

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Course Code 1Y3BBA 513 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course has been designed to introduce the students with the applications of systems designed to

manage the data resources of organizations It provides the students an opportunity to study the

hands-on implementation of a database in corporate environment

UNIT-I

The Foundation of Database Management System-Data Processing Concepts Data Structures

File Processing and Access Methods Taxonomy of Data Management Systems Various Data Base

Management Models Evaluation of Commercially Available Software Systems with Managerial

Emphasis on Tradeoffs among Cost Capacity and Responsiveness

UNIT-II

Database Environment-Functions of Transaction Processes and Their Communications Interface

with Database Management Systems Distributed Data Processing Systems and a Need for Database

Environment for Such a System Normalization and Logical Design

UNIT-III

Types of DBMS-Physical Database Structures Structured Query Language Relational Database

Management Systems for Successful Implementation of Distributed Systems Distributed Database

Systems On-line Data Bases Object-oriented Data Bases

UNIT-IV

DBMS Administration-Managerial Issues Related to DBMS Evaluation Criteria Performance

Analysis Recovery Issues Re-organization Problems Implementation and Maintenance Issues

UNIT-V

Contemporary Issues in SCM-The content of the unit depends upon the recent developments in the

field of DBMS such as Cloud Computing etc which would be specifically declared by the respective

faculty during the coverage of syllabus

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe the fundamental elements of relational database management systems and explain the basic

concepts of relational data model entity-relationship model relational database design relational

algebra and SQL

REFERENCE BOOKS

Coad Peter amp Edward Y Object Oriented Analysis Englewood Cliffs

Kroenke David M Database Processing Fundamental Design Implementation MacMillan

Press

McFaden Fred R amp Hoffer JA Database Management BenjaminCummings Pub Co

MANAGING IT-ENABLED SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 514 COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course is for the students of MBA program who are specializing in Information Technology It

aims at acquainting these students with tools amp techniques of planning analyzing designing

implementing and maintaining Information Technology based services

UNIT-I

The ITITES Enabled Revolution Challenges and Opportunities-IT Enabled Development

Innovation and Business Transformation Opportunities and Strategies in IT Enabled Services The

Enabling Environment for ITES

UNIT-II

Enabled Out-Sourcing Services-Extended Enterprise Outsourcing Context IT-Enabled

Outsourcing Service Segments Development of the eServices Capability Model An Analysis of

Quality Models and their Applicability to IT enabled Outsourcing Services

UNIT-III

Human and Institutional Capital-Human Capital Requirements for ITES Private sector support

Institutions Public Sector Support Institutions

UNIT-IV

International Trade Negotiations and Ites Export Development-The IC Revolution Promoting

Export development Barriers to Trade in ITES Role of International Bodies (WTO amp UNCTAD) in

facilitating Trade in ITESTITES

UNIT-V

Introduction to Technical Communication What Is Technical Communication The Challenges of

Producing Technical Communication Characteristics of a Technical Document Measures of

Excellence in Technical Documents Skills and Qualities Shared by Successful Workplace

Communicators How Communication Skills and Qualities Affect Your Career

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the complexities associated with management of human resources in the organizations

and integrate the learning in handling these complexities

REFERENCE BOOKS

Nikhil Treebhoohun (Ed) Promoting IT Enabled Services Commonwealth Secretariat

E B Hyder M C Paulk K M Histon amp B Hefley eSourcing Capability Model for service providers Van Haren Publishing

SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 515

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The aim of this paper is to acquaint the students of BBA Program specializing in Information

technology with various aspects of Software Project Management

UNIT-I

Introduction-Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM) Need Identification Vision

and Scope Document Project Management Cycle SPM Objectives Management Spectrum SPM

Framework

UNIT-II

Software Project Planning-Steps in Project Planning Software Project Planning Planning

Objectives Types of Project Plans Projection and Estimation Software Project Management Plan

Creating the Work Breakdown Structure Identifying the Tasks and Activities Estimating Duration

and Cost Manpower Planning Project Quality Planning

UNIT-III

Project Organization-Software Development Process Assigning Resources Choosing an

Organizational Form Software Architecture Management Strategies and Techniques

Project Scheduling-Activity Sequencing Network Diagram Schedule Development Schedule

Compression Techniques Software Project Scheduling Tools

UNIT-IV

Project Monitoring and Control-Software Metrics Software Testing Software Quality Assurance

Software Configuration Management Measure Productivity Taking corrective Actions Senior

Management Review Meetings Projects Audit and Review

UNIT-V

Project Risk-Risk Assessment Risk analysis- Qualitative and Quantitative Prioritization of Risks

Risk Response Planning Monitoring the Risk

COURSE OUTCOME

Determine an appropriate project management approach through an evaluation of the business

context and scope of the project Skills Suggesting an efficient management strategy for a business

scenario

REFERENCE BOOKS

R T Futrell D F Shafer amp L I Shafer Quality Software Project Management Pearson

Education Ltd

P Jalote Software Project Management in Practice Pearson Education Asia Limited amp

Tsinghua University Press

R B Kelsey Software Project Management Measures for Improving Performance

Management Concepts Pub

Software Project Management From Concepts to Development Coriolis Group

B B Agarwal S Dhall S P Tayal Software Project Management University Science

Press

A Singh and K K Singh Software Project Management Umesh Publications

G P Sudhakar Elements of Software Project management PHI

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

AGRIBUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND POLICY Course Code 1Y3BBA 516

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To expose learners to the environment in which the agri-business is conducted Focus will be on

understanding micro and macro environmental forces and their impact on agri-business

UNIT I

Role of agriculture in Indian economy problems and policy changes relating to farm supplies farm

production agro processing agricultural marketing agricultural finance etc in the country

UNIT II

Structure of Agriculture - Linkages among sub-sectors of the Agribusiness sector economic reforms

and Indian agriculture impact of liberalization privatization and globalization on Agri business

sector

UNIT III

Emerging trends in production processing marketing and exports policy controls and regulations

relating to the industrial sector with specific reference to agro-industries

UNIT IV

Agribusiness policies- concept and formulation and new dimensions in Agri business environment

and policy

UNIT V

Agricultural price and marketing policies public distribution system and other policies

COURSE OUTCOME

Various linkages of agribusiness in academic industry and public sector Developing a policy paper

and Relationship in different components of agribusiness and predicting trends in the domain

REFERENCE BOOKS

Adhikary M 1986 Economic Environment of Business S Chand amp Sons

Aswathappa K 1997 Essentials of Business Environment Himalaya Publ

Francis Cherunilam 2003 Business Environment Himalaya Publ

AGRICULTURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 517

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of concept various policies

strategies and decisions relating to marketing that can be developed by agribusiness firms

UNIT I

Meaning and scope agricultural marketing and economic development Agricultural market

structure ndash meaning components and dynamics of market structure marketing strategy ndash meaning amp

significance formulation of marketing strategy agribusiness marketing environment design of

marketing mix market segmentation and targeting determinants of consumerlsquos behaviour

UNIT II

Product management - product management process and decisions new product development ndash

significance and classification of new product stages and estimation of demand of new product

product life cycle

UNIT III

Pricing policies and practice for agribusiness - determinants of price objectives of pricing policies

and pricing methods

UNIT IV

Promotional management - advertising planning and execution sales promotion grading and

standardization

UNIT V

Distribution management - storage and warehousing and transportation management for agricultural

products marketing agenciesintermediaries ndash roles and functions distribution channels involved in

agribusiness

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate understanding of various components of the agriculture complex to better

understand and make sound technical decisions in response to an ever-changing demand for

agricultural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp IBH

Kohls RL amp Uhj JN 2005 Marketing of Agricultural Products 9th Ed Prentice Hall

Kotler P 2002 Marketing Management ndash Analysis Planning Implementation and Control

Pearson Edu

Krishnamacharyulu C amp Ramakrishan L 2002 Rural Marketing Pearson Edu

Ramaswamy VS amp Nanakumari S 2002 Marketing Management 2nd Ed Mac Millan India

FOOD RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 518

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to assist students in understanding the structure and working of food

marketing system in India to examine how the system affects farmers consumers and middlemen

and to illustrate the response of this dynamic marketing system to technological socio-cultural

political and economic forces over time

UNIT I

Introduction to International Food market Indialsquos Competitive Position in World Food Trade

Foreign Investment in Global Food Industry Retail management and Food Retailing The Nature of

Change in Retailing Organized Retailing in India E-tailing and Understanding food preference of Indian Consumer Food consumption and Expenditure pattern Demographic and Psychographic

factors affecting Food Pattern of Indian Consumer

UNIT II

Value Chain in Food Retailing Principal trends in food wholesaling and retailing food wholesaling

food retailing the changing nature of food stores various retailing formats competition and pricing

in food retailing market implications of new retail developments value chain and value additions

across the chain in food retail food service marketing

UNIT III

4 Plsquos in Food Retail Management Brand Management in Retailing Merchandise pricing Pricing

Strategies used in conventional and nonconventional food retailing Public distribution system

Promotion mix for food retailing Management of sales promotion and Publicity Advertisement

Strategies for food retailers

UNIT IV

Managing Retail Operations Managing Retailerslsquo Finances Merchandise buying and handling

Merchandise Pricing Logistics procurement of Food products and Handling Transportation of Food

Products

UNIT V

Retail Sales Management Types of Retail Selling Salesperson selection Salesperson training

Evaluation and Monitoring Customer Relationship Management Managing Human Resources in

retailing Legal and Ethical issues in Retailing

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand key drivers of Food retail supply chain and how to select a retail store location Analyze

Food Retail Market and Financial Strategy including product pricing

REFERENCE BOOKS

Berman amp Evans 2008 Retail Management A Strategic Approach 10th Ed Prentice Hall of

India

Cox 2006 Retailing An Introduction 5th Ed Pearson Edu

Levy M amp Weitz BW 2004 Retailing Management 5th Ed McGraw Hill

RETAIL GROUP

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 519 COURSE OBJECTIVE

The basic aim of this subject is to provide the knowledge about supply chain management exists in

the organization so as to understand the key focus area for optimizing it

UNIT- I

Concept of Supply Chain Management Importance and objectives of Supply Chain Management

Integrated Supply Chain Management Supply chain Management and Logistics Supply chain

networks Network design Network design process Role of Facility decisions in a supply chain

Strategic planning of logisticssupply chain network

UNIT- II

Customer service Elements of customer service Establishing customer service strategy Customer

service audit Location strategy in a supply chain Major location determinants Single facility vs

multi facility location TRANSPORT Role of Transportation in SCM Modes of Transport Carrier

Selection Decision Carrier Selection determinants

UNIT- III

Inventory management basics Importance Impact of demand on inventory management inventory

models Inventory control systems MRP-I MRP-II ―just-in time system

UNIT- IV

COORDINATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN Importance of Coordination in Supply Chain Bullwhip

Effect Effect of lack of Coordination on performance Obstacles to Coordination INFORMATION

TECHNLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAIN Application and impact of e Commerce in Supply Chain

Management Role and Importance of IT in Supply Chain Management

UNIT- V

Facilities Design Exteriors Interiors and Fixtures Point-of-Purchase Display Execution of a

Visual Presentation Creating the Overall Concept From Conception to Supply chain performance

measurement Definition Dimensions of performance measures Performance categories Logistics

quantification pyramid Supply chain performance measures Supply chain metrics

COURSE OUTCOME

After teach this subjects students will able to understand the key focus area in the entire supply chain

which need to focused and optimized for improving delivery and efficiency of the supply chain

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull K Shridhara Bhatt Supply Chain Management ndash Himalaya Publishing House

bull Supply Chath Management by Pankaj Madan New Delhi Global Acedemic Publishers

bull Supply Chain Management A Balanced Approach Wiser Tan Leorg

bull Operations Management Kumar Meenakshi

bull Handbook for Supply Chain Risk Management Khan

STORES MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 520

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The operation of retail stores is different therefore it requires the different understand with different

terminologies To fulfill this object this particular subject has an aim to elaborate the concerned

areas

UNIT- I

Setting up Retail organization Size and space allocation location strategy factors affecting the

location of Retail Retail location Research and Techniques Objectives of Good store Design

UNIT- II

Store Layout and Space planning Types of Layouts role of Visual Merchandiser Visual

Merchandising Techniques Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss Exteriors Interiors

UNIT- III

Store Management Responsibilities of Store Manager Store Security and Parking Space Problem at

Retail Centers Store Record and Accounting System Coding System Material Handling in Stores

Mall Management Factor influencing Mall establishments

UNIT- IV

Logistic and Information system improved product availability improved assortments Strategies

Quick Response System

UNIT- V

Space Management The Cost of Space Drivers of the Size of the Store The SMG Model Impact

on Space of Future Changes Space Management Methods in Various Sectors Promoting Space

Efficiency in Building Design Space Utilization

COURSE OUTCOME

The student will analyze the improvement business process in service and manufacturing concern

and will learn how to increase productivity and deliver higher quality standards

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management

bull A J Lamba- The Art of Retailing

bull Barry Berman Joel R Evans- Retail Management A Strategic Approach

bull Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing

bull George H Lucas Jr Robert P Bush Larry G Greshan- Retailing

RETAIL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 521

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Become familiar with how the retail industry works Understand the areas of accountability for retail

Operations management Understand how the role of the manager impacts the success of a retail

business And determine level of interest in pursuing a career in retail operations management

UNIT I

Retailing Introduction to Retail What is Retail- Functions of a retailer-The Marketing-Retail

equation-The Rise of the Retailer ndash Proximity to customer ndash Rise of consumerism-Global retail

market- Challenges and opportunities-Empowered consumer-Technology enabled Effectiveness-

Evolution of Retail in India-Drivers of Retail change in India

UNIT II

Retail Models and Theories of Retail Development

The Evolution of Retail formats ndash Theories of retail development-Environmental Cyclical and

Conflict Theory-The Concept of life cycle in Retail-Innovation accelerative growth- Maturity-

Decline-Phares of growth in retail markets-Business models in retail-Classification based on

ownership Merchandise offeredFranchising Non Store RetailingDirect sellingDirect response

marketingTelemarketingFairs and Road ShowsEvent ManagementAutomated Vendingkiosks

The Cash amp Carrycredit MarketingBrand Management

UNIT III

Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

CRM What is CRM-Common Misconceptions-Definition-Components off CRM-Defining CRM

Concepts ndash Customer Life Cycle- B to B CRM- Understanding Goal of CRM-Using Customer touch

points ndash Deciding who should lead the CRM Functions MarketingSalesCustomer Services

Product Support-Channel and other partners-CRM Planning ndash Developing Strategy- Building CRM

Component-Analyzing and Segmenting Customers-Taking it to Customers ndash Get Ready Avoiding

Common Barriers

UNIT IV

Services Management

Distinctive characteristics service operations-Service Bench marking-Service strategy -Designing the

service enterprise ndash Service quality-Service facility location-Managing service operations-Service-

Supply relationships vehicle routing

UNIT V

Marketing Channels Brand Management Franchising

Marketing channel systems ndash Concepts participants environment behavioral process ndashDeveloping

the marketing channel-Strategy design channel platform-ProductPricing issues Parameters -Brand

management-positioning and Repositioning ndash Franchising

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how to create a shopping experience that builds customer loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Swapna pradhan Retailing Management Text and Cases Tata McGraw hill New Delhi-

2nd edition 2006

MChael hevy and bartonA WeitzRetail Management Irwin Mcgraw hillinternational

edititionUS1798

Judith WKincaidCustomer Relationship Management Getting it rightPearson Education

New Delhi 2003

JamesA Fitzsimmms and MinaJ Fitzsimmms Service Management Operations Strategy

Information Technology Tata Mc Grawhill2006 New Delhi

Christoper Louchock and Jochen Wirtz Service Marketing People Technology Strategy

Pearson Education New Delhi 2004

KRamamohan Roa Services Marketing Pearson Education New Delhi 2005

Bert Rosenbloom Marketing Channels A Management View Thomson New Delhi 2007

Bert RosenbloomRetail Marketing Random House

Bert RosenbloomMarketing Functions and the whole sale distribution distribution

rosenbloom and Education Foundation US

PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 522

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge is to create a strategic plan to manage the disruptive nature of technology and

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

UNIT- I

Technology Issue and Implications Concepts and Definition Aspects and Issues Technology

Change Implication

UNIT- II

Technology Development and Acquisition Forecasting and De-casting Identifying

UNIT- III

Technological Change Generation and Development and Technology Transfer Technology

Absorption and Diffusion Absorption Accommodate and Management

UNIT- IV

Technological Change Evaluation and Assessment and Diffusion Technology

Environment Science and Technology in India Policies Linkages

UNIT- V

Technology Support Systems Financing Information Systems and Organization at Enterprise

Level

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course student get contemporary business knowledge to create a strategic plan to

manage the disruptive nature of technology and Research business innovation and technology

management strategies to develop ethical solutions for business problems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Khalil Tarek Management of Technology 1e TMH 2009

bull Burgelman Robert Strategic Management of Technology amp Innovation 4e TMH 2009

bull Narayanan Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage 2010 Pearson

PRODUCTIVITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 523

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

UNIT- I

Concepts and Definition of Productivity Productivity Improvement Factors (Both Internal and

external to the Organization)Work Content of a Job Management Techniques to Reduce Work

Contents and Ineffective Time

UNIT- II

Human Aspects in Application of Work Study Introduction and Selection of Jobs Flow Diagram

String Diagram Flow Process Chart Multiple Activity Chart Travel Chart

UNIT- III

Principles of Motion Economy Classification of Movements Micro Motion Study Simo-chart

UNIT- IV

Purpose Use Techniques and Procedure of Work Measurement Time Study Selecting Jobs to be

Studied and Making a Time Study Rating Allowance Techniques of Work measurement

UNIT- V

Activity Sampling Synthesis Analytical Estimating Predetermined motion Time Systems

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will identify operations by investigation of all the factors affecting the jobs and applying

work-study as a means of enhancing the production efficiency (productivity) of the firm by

elimination of waste and unnecessary operation

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Barnes Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work 2009 Wiley International

Labour Office Geneva

bull Introduction to Work Study Universal Book Corporation 3rd Revised Ed

bull Dobler DW Material Management Tata Me Graw Hill

bull Gopal Krisan Pamp M Suderashan Hand Books of Material Management prentice Hall of India

QUALITY MANAGEMENT amp ISO

Course Code 1Y3BBA 524

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Learning objectives of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management to identify

the key aspects of the quality improvement tools and techniques for controlling improving and

measuring quality to critically analyze the strategic issues in quality management including current

issues and developments and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans

UNIT- I

Concept amp Terminology of Quality Management Quality policy amp objectives

UNIT- II

Organization for Quality Quality Circles Economics of Quality Quality Assurance Zero defect

concept

UNIT- III

Quality Specifications Inspection Manufacturing Planning for Quality

UNIT- IV

Statistical aids in Limits amp Tolerances Sampling plans for Attributes amp Variables and various

control Charts

UNIT- V

Total Quality Controls Concept Utility amp application of ISO specification

COURSE OUTCOME-

Learning Outcomes of the subjects are to evaluate the principles of quality management and to

explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems to identify the key

aspects of the quality improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for

controlling improving and measuring quality to critically appraise the organizational amp

communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality management to critically analyze

the strategic issues in quality management including current issues and developments and to devise

and evaluate quality implementation plans

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Juran amp Gryna Quality Planning amp Analysis Tata Mcgrow Hill Publication ltd Bombay

bull Paneerselvam R amp Sivasankaran P (2014) Quality Management PHI Learning Pvt Ltd

bull Total Quality Management Principles amp Practice by SK Mandal Noida Vikas

bull Manson Bestrand Quality Control Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd

bull Douglas C Montgomory Introduction to Statistical Quality Control Wiley Student Edition

7th

Edition Wiley India Pvt Limited 2012

bull James R Evans and William M Lindsay The Management and Control of Quality Sixth Edition

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM CONCEPTS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 525

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To introduce the fundamental concept of Tourism

To familiarize with the significance and emerging trends in tourism

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL ndash

Meaning amp definitions of tourism traveler excursionist tourists - Objectives nature amp

Classification of tourism amp tourists Tourism recreation amp leisure inter-relationship Growth and

development of Tourism through the ages

UNIT II

COMPONENTS TYPES AND FORMS OF TOURISM ndash

Components of tourism - Types and Forms of Tourism Inter-regional and intrandashregional tourism

inbound and outbound tourism domestic international tourism Forms of Tourism religious

Medical Tourism historical social adventure health business conferences conventions

incentives sports and adventure tourism

UNIT III

TRAVEL MOTIVATIONS ndash

Travel Motivations amp travel deterrents - Definition of Motivation ndash concept of motivation - types of

motivations ndash Mackintoshlsquos Classification physical motivators ndash rest and relaxation motivators ndash

health motivators ndash ethnic and family motivators ndash professional and business motivators Pull and

push forces in tourism- Sun lust and Wanderlust tourists

UNIT IV

IMPACTS OF TOURISM ndash

Tourism Impacts Economic Impacts Social Impacts Cultural Impacts and Environmental Impacts

- Strategies to overcome or reduce the negative impacts of tourism

UNIT V

SUSTAINABLE TOURISM-

Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable development- Forces which promote

Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable

Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the diverse nature of tourism including culture and place globallocal perspectives and

experience design and provision Apply relevant technology for the production and management of

tourism experiences

REFERENCES BOOKS

Bhatia AK (2003) International Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Bhatia AK (2002) Tourism Development Principles and Practices Revised edition Sterling

Publishers Private Limited New Delhi

Chris Cooper Fletcher John Fyall Alan Gilbert David Wall Stephen (2008) Tourism

Principles and Practices4th edition Pearson Education Limited

Dennis L amp Foseter ndash Glencoe (2003) an Introduction to Travel amp Tourism McGraw-Hill

International

Dr Revathy Girish (2007) Indian Tourist Panorama Dominant Publishers and Distributors

New Delhi

Ghosh Bishwanth (2000) Tourism amp Travel Management Second Revised Edition Vikas

Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi

Kaul RN 91991) Dynamics of Tourism Sterling Publishers Pvt Ltd Volume 12 amp 3 New

Delhi

TOURISM MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 526

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the basic concept and various components of management

UNIT I

MANAGEMENT THEORIES AND CONCEPTS-

Meaning and definitions of management Nature Significance objectives and functions of

management levels of management principles of management (Henry Fayol and FW Taylor)

Role attributes and qualities of manager approaches to management

UNIT II

PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING-

Nature and purpose of planning types of plans planning process advantages and limitations of

planning Objectives Nature and types of objectives Importance of Objectives Management by

objective - Decision-making process of decision making decision making techniques importance

and limitation of decision making

UNIT III

ORGANISING amp STAFFING ndash

Nature and purpose of organizing formal and informal organization Delegation of Authority and responsibility Decentralization Methods of decentralization- Staffing Nature and purpose of

staffing human resource planning recruitment selection training compensation and performance

appraisal

UNIT IV

DIRECTING ndash

Nature and importance of direction Motivation meaning amp importance theories of motivation

(Maslowlsquos Need Hierarchy theory Herzberglsquos motivation Hygiene theory roomlsquos Expectancy

theory)

UNIT V

LEADERSHIP-

Meaning theories of leadership (Trait theory Behavioural theories Situation theories The Path

Goal Theory Integrated Leadership Model) Communication Meaning process and barriers to

communication

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand fundamentals of tourism from the management marketing and financial perspectives

Understand the concepts of travel and tourism the framework of the system types and form of

tourism as well as the impacts of tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Koontz Herold amp Weihrich Heinz (2006) Essentials of Management 7th edition Tata Mc

Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

Agarwal RD (2001) Organization and Management Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New

Delhi

Terry R George amp Franklin G Stephen (1997) Principles of Management 8th edition

AITBS Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sherleker amp Das Suresh (2011) Principles of Management (2011) Himalaya Publishing

House New Delhi

Herold Koontz Heinz Weihrich (1994) Management A Global Perspective 10th edition

Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi

TOURISM MARKETING Course Code 1Y3BBA 527

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism and their applications to real life situations

To focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products before the stakeholders of tourism

industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-

Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing Concepts ndash Marketing

Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and Services ndash Technology and

Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash

Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing Product mix and product line New

Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING -

Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION -

Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales promotion Publicity

Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital communications) Emerging trends in

promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

The course learning outcomes specific knowledge skills and competences of an appropriate level

which the students will acquire with the successful completion of the course are described

REFERENCES BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar Thomson

Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd edition

Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and Tourism

6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL amp HEALTH SYSTEM (HISTORY amp EVOLUTION) Course Code 1Y3BBA 528

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To offer opportunities to develop the ability to think analytically and build capacity for independent

learning

UNIT I

Definition and meaning of Health ndash Concept of Health Holistic approach to health Determinants to health Responsibility for Health

Health amp Development Indicators of Health Concept of Disease Concept of Causation Natural

History of Disease Spectrum of disease Concepts of Control Modes of Intervention

UNIT II

Definition and meaning of hospital ndash

Historical development of hospitals globally Systems of medicine Modern medicine changing

concept of hospitals present status of hospitals (public amp private) in India Classification of

Hospitals

UNIT III

Healthcare ndash Concepts changing concepts levels healthcare delivery system in India public private sector

Indigenous system of medicine Importance of Voluntary health agencies and health programs in

delivering healthcare in India

UNIT IV

Hospital as a system ndash Peculiarities of hospital system Roles amp Responsibilities of Hospitals Administration of rural

hospitals staffing pattern amp Job description

UNIT V

The reforms of Healthcare System-

The healthcare system in USUK Canada China Singapore Canadian lessons in Healthcare

reforms amp Future of Healthcare System

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop awareness of the responsibilities of senior hospital management including understanding

the role and functions of hospitals and their health care context and prepare to handle the

management and development issues faced by a hospital manager including structure and

organization planning and managing resources and reviewing and evaluating services

REFERENCE BOOKS

The Evolution of International Health System Cumper GE OUP New York 1991

Management of Hospital (4 Vols) SL Goel amp R Kumar Deep amp Deep Publications Pvt Ltd

Preventive and Social Medicine K Park Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers

HEALTH ECONOMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 529

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Summaries which health indices that can be used to combine different aspects of health and

understand how to derive the societies cost for illness Understand how you can explain and predict

peopleslsquo health related Behaviour and use this understanding to predict the consequences of different

social actions

UNIT I

Business Economics ndash Nature amp scope of Business Economics Micro and Macroeconomics Need Objectives and

importance of Business Economics Goals of business ndash Economics Goals social Goals Below

Poverty Line Strategic Goals Profit maximization Vs Optimization of profits

UNIT II

Consumer Behavior ndash The Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility The law of equi-marginal utility the indifference curve

techniques and properties of indifference curve

UNIT III

Demand and Revenue Concepts ndash

Meaning of demand Determinants of demands Demand Schedule The Demand curve The Law of

Demand Exceptions to the law of demand Demand Distinction (types of demand) Elasticity of

Demand Price elasticity ndash Types Measurement of Price elasticity factors influencing elasticity of

demand Income elasticity of demand ndash Types Cross elasticity of demand Demand Forecasting ndash

Types Techniques Revenue concepts ndash Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue

UNIT IV

Production ndash Introduction Production Functions and Law of Variable Proportions Production functions with two

variable inputs (isoquants amp iso costs) Equilibrium through Iso quants and Iso cost curves

UNIT V

Analysis of Market situations and Pricing ndash

Kinds of competitive situation features of perfect competition monopoly duopoly oligopoly and

monopolistic competition Pricing - Meaning Types of pricing Pricing under different market

situation Perfect competition Price determination under monopoly price discrimination and Price

determination

COURSE OUTCOME

To know which methods can be used to judge if a public health work should be recommended from

an economic perspective And especially conduct analyses and appraise a health economic

evaluation of a health intervention or program

REFERENCE BOOKS

Business Economics - Reddy PN and Appanniah HR

Managerial Economics - Srivayya Gangadhara Rao Rao VSP

Managerial Economics - Gupta GS

Managerial Economics - Dr DM Mithani

Business Economics - Sharma NK

Business Economics - Wali and Kalkundikar

Managerial Economics - DN Dwivedi

Business Economics - Lekhi RK and Aggarwal SL

HOSPITAL MEDICAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 530

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To apply logical critical and analytical processes in identifying problems and alternate solutions

related to records management in the healthcare environment

UNIT I

Records Management- Introduction meaning and importance definition of registers records amp forms principles of record

keeping merits and limitations recent trends in record maintenance electronic forms of records

UNIT II

Hospital Records ndash Meaning Functions Importance of medical records to Patients Doctors Hospitals Public health

Press Insurance Police Court of Law Education and Research

UNIT III

Hospital Record Types ndash Types - Out Patient record Causality Emergency Surgery Obstetrics and Gynecology Pediatrics

investigation and diagnosis Hospital Statistics - Evaluation of Medical Care (Medical Nursing

Pharmacy etc Audits)

UNIT IV

Records organization and Management ndash Classification of records Bases for classification indexing and Filling of records Problems

associated with medical records International classification of Diseases (ICD) and Diagnostic

Related Groups (DRG)

UNIT V

Medical Registers ndash

Meaning Principles Types Purposes Advantages of designing registers Registers in various

departments amp common problems faced

COURSE OUTCOME

Use simulated office hardware and software to maintain office systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

Rajendra Pal Korlahalli JS Essentials of Business Communication Sultan Chand and Sons New

Delhi 1999

Prasantha Ghosh K Office Management Sultan Chand and Sons New Delhi 1995

Francis CM amp Mario C de Souza Hospital Administration 3rd Ed Jaypee Brothers N Delhi

George MA Hospital Administrator Jaypee Brothers NDelhi 2003

Mogli J D Medical Records-Organisation amp Management JAYPEE Brothers

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL SOCIETY AND POLITY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 531

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate the students to understand the basic nature of rural society in India

To explain important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

To explain the nature of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

To enable the students to have basic ideas of rural demography and rural economy in Contemporary India

UNIT I

Rural Society in India

Historical understanding and Perspectives India and its villages- historical understanding rural-

urban differences and continuum- Various perspectives for understanding rural India- nationalist and

subaltern perspectives stereotypes and myths about Indian villages- Various dimensions of rural

life economic political and religious Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and discussion

UNIT II

Rural Society

Basic Social Structure Understanding village through various social categories-Caste as a social

institution- privileges and exclusions- TribesIndigenous people in rural India- problems of identity

and development relation between state and the Adivasis indigenous people- Gender aspects of

rural society- impact on life chances Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

16 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT-III

Village India

Political Structure and Processes Historical understanding of village political self-governance

contemporary rural local self-governance after 73rd Constitutional amendment structure and

political process Challenges for Panchayati-raj governance in rural India Transaction Methodology

Village visit Participative Rural Appraisal and debriefing in the class

UNIT IV

Fundamentals of Rural Demography and Economics

Rural population (size birth and death rates causes and socio-economic implications of rapid

growth in rural population and pressure on occupational structure) ndash Rural Economics (Nature scope

and importance) ndash Analysis of rural labour force - Participation of women in rural labour force -

Rural poverty (Inequality Rural unemployment) Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT-V

Rural Social Transformation in Contemporary Times

Education health and sanitation challenges in rural society religion and caste based social

processes consumerism and aspiration of rural population challenges for rural transformation

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching and Discussion

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the key aspects of Rural Society in India

Identify important structural components of Indian society and their significance for rural Social life

Apply the knowledge of local governance structure and social processes of rural India

Analyze the dynamics of local rural population and local rural economy

Comprehend on rural transformation in contemporary terms

REFERENCE BOOKS

Choudhary B (1982)Tribal Development in India Inter-India Publications New Delhi

Desai AR (1969) Rural Sociology and India Popular Prakashan Bombay

PuriVK and MisraSK (2014) Indian Economy Himalaya Publishing House

SinghS (1987)Scheduled Castes and India- Dimensions of Social Change Jain Publication

House Delhi

ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 532

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To explain the nature of environmental studies

To introduce aspects of Natural resources

To introduce aspects of ecosystems

To provide insights into bio-diversity and its conservation

To introduce aspects of environmental pollution

To create awareness on social issues and environment

To provide insights on symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

UNIT I

Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies Definition scope and importance-Need for

public awareness

UNIT II

Ecosystems

Concept of an ecosystem- Structure and function of an ecosystem- Producers consumers and

decomposers- Energy flow in the ecosystem-Ecological succession-Food chains food webs and

Ecological pyramids-Introduction types characteristic features structure and function of the

following ecosystem - a Forest ecosystem b Grassland ecosystem c Desert ecosystem d Aquatic

Ecosystems (ponds streams lakes rivers oceans and estuaries)

UNIT III

Biodiversity and its Conservation

Introduction ndash Definition genetic species and ecosystem diversity-Bio-geographical classification

of India-Value of biodiversity consumptive use productive use social ethical aesthetic and option

Values-Biodiversity at global National and local levels-India as a mega-diversity nation- Hot-sports

of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity habitat loss poaching of wildlife and man-wildlife conflicts-

Endangered and endemic species of India-Conservation of biodiversity In-situ and Ex-situ

Conservation of biodiversity

UNIT IV

Environmental Pollution Definition- Cause effects and control measures of - a Air pollution b Water pollution c Soil

pollution d Marine pollution e Noise pollution f Thermal pollution g Nuclear hazards- Solid waste

Management Causes effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes - Role of an

individual in prevention of pollution- Pollution case studies- Disaster management floods

earthquake cyclone and landslides

20 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

UNIT V

Social Issues and the Environment From Unsustainable to Sustainable development-Urban challenges related to energy-Water

Conservation rain water harvesting watershed management-Resettlement and rehabilitation of

People its challenges and concerns Case Studies-Environmental ethics Issues and possible

responses- Climate change global warming acid rain ozone layer depletion nuclear accidents and

holocaust

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Describe the nature of environmental studies

Classify renewable and non-renewable resources

Value the moral diverse and authentic setting of ecological issues

Explain aspects of bio-diversity and its conservation

Analyze aspects of environmental pollution

Describe aspects of social issues and environment

Explain the symbiotic relationship between human population and environment

REFERENCE BOOKS

Agarwal KC (2001) Environmental Biology Nidi Publ Ltd Bikaner

Cunningham WP Cooper TH Gorhani E and Hepworth MT (2001) Environmental

Encyclopedia Jaico Publ House Mumbai

Wanger KD (1998) Environmental Management WB Saunders Co Philadelphia USA

RURAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 533

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To provide an understanding of Rural Marketing issues and concepts

To familiarize Rural marketing strategy

To create awareness about Rural Communication Channels and distribution systems

To provide insights on ICTs in Rural Marketing

To make the students acquainted with commercial bank rural credit and marketing linkages

UNIT I

Overview of Rural Marketing

Meaning and definition of Rural Markets Marketing the Rural Products - Issues in Rural Marketing

and Rural Consumer Behavior ndash Rural Products and Consumer Behaviour Transaction

Methodology Project- Ask students to market a product and debriefing in the class

UNIT II

Rural Marketing Strategy Tangible and intangible rural products - Evolving Rural Marketing Strategy - marketing strategy for

rural products role of informal communication Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT III

Rural Distribution Systems

Rural Communication and Distribution systems Distribution system for small markets niche

markets and exclusive products market segmentation Agricultural Marketing and Role of

Agricultural Produce Marketing Committees (APMCs) Transaction Methodology Case analysis and

discussion

UNIT IV

ICTs in Rural Marketing ICTs in Rural Marketing Role of Social Media e-NAM Agricultural Marketing Network

(AGMARKNET) and rural warehouse Rural as well as urban storage systems Transaction

Methodology Group Project work

UNIT V

Market support

Role of commercial bank and Rural Credit and Marketing linkages Transaction Methodology Role

play

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Market their products

Strategies how to increase the marketing of rural products

Choose an appropriate distribution system

Apply ICT in rural marketing

Source the finance for rural products

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler P and Armstrong G (2015) Principles of Marketing Pearson Education India

Kotler P et al (2017) Marketing Management Pearson Education

Rajagopal (1994) Rural Marketing Management Discovery Publishing House New Delhi

SEMESTER- VI

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Duration 36 Months (3 Years) Eligibility 12th Pass

COURSE STRUCTURE OF BBA VI th SEMESTER

Course Details External

Assessment Internal Assessment

Credit

Distribution

Allot

ted

Cred

its

Course

Code

Course

Type

Course Title

Total

Marks

Major Minor Sessional

L

T

P

Subject

wise

Distributi

on

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mar

ks

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

Max

Mark

s

Min

Mark

s

Theory Group

1Y3BBA-601

Core

Course

E- Commerce

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

1Y3BBA-602 Core

Course

Customer

Relationship Management

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific

Elective-I

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Core

Course

Discipline Specific Elective-II

100

50

17

20

7

30

12

4

-

-

4

Practical Group Term End

Practical Exam

Sessional

1Y3BBA-603 Practical

Entrepreneurial Project Work amp Viva

Voce

100

50

17

-

-

50

20

- - 4 4

1Y3BBA-601 Practical E- Commerce 50

25

08

-

-

25

10

- - 2 2

Grand Total

550

22

Minimum Passing Marks are equivalent to Grade D L- Lectures T- Tutorials P- Practical

Major- Term End Theory Exam Practical Exam

Minor- Pre University Test

Sessional weightage ndash Attendance 50 Three Class TestsAssignments 50

Compulsory ProjectDissertation with choice in any Disciplinary specific elective Compulsory one

paper presentation certificate in related discipline

Discipline Specific Elective for Vth Semester ndash Choose any two group and per group of any Two

paper from the following

(Marketing Group)

1Y3BBA604 Product amp Brand Management

1Y3BBA605 Strategic Marketing

1Y3BBA606 E- Marketing

(HR Group)

1Y3BBA607 Management of Change

1Y3BBA608 Cross Cultural Management

1Y3BBA609 Group Dynamic

(Finance Group)

1Y3BBA610 Corporate Tax Planning amp Management

1Y3BBA611 Investment Banking amp Financial service

1Y3BBA612 Forensic Analysis amp Fraud Investigation

(IT Group)

1Y3BBA613 Information security and Cyber laws in Business

1Y3BBA614 E- Governance

1Y3BBA615 IT Infrastructure Management

(Agri Business Group)

1Y3BBA616 Food Technology And Processing Management

1Y3BBA617 Management of Agricultural Input Marketing

1Y3BBA618 Farm Business Management

(Retail Group)

1Y3BBA619 Buyer Behaviour

1Y3BBA620 Retail Planning

1Y3BBA621 Retail Sales Technique and Promotion

(Production Group)

1Y3BBA622 Work System And Analysis Design

1Y3BBA623 Process Planning amp Control

1Y3BBA624 Process Reengineering

(Travel amp Tourism Group)

1Y3BBA625 Tourism Policies amp Plan

1Y3BBA626 Tourism Marketing

1Y3BBA627 Transportation Management

( Hospital Administration Group)

1Y3BBA628 Hospital Hazards and Disaster Management

1Y3BBA629 Marketing Management and Public Relation in Health Care

1Y3BBA630 Hospital Related Law

(Rural Management Group)

1Y3BBA631 Rural Livelihoods and Production System

1Y3BBA632

Panchayati Raj

1Y3BBA633 Rural Economy

E- COMMERCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 601

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

This course provides an introduction to information systems for business and management It is

designed to familiarize students with organizational and managerial foundations of systems the

technical foundation for understanding information systems

UNIT I

Introduction- Meaning nature concepts advantages disadvantages and reasons for transacting

online types of E-Commerce e-commerce business models (introduction key elements of a

business model and categorizing major E-commerce business models) forces behind e-

commerce

UNIT II

Technology- technologies used in E-commerce The dynamics of world wide web and internet

(meaning evolution and features) Designing building and launching E-commerce website (A

systematic approach involving decisions regarding selection of hardware software outsourcing

vs in-house development of a website)

UNIT III

Security and Encryption- Need and concepts E-commerce security environment dimension

definition and scope of E-security security threats in the E-commerce environment(security

intrusions and breaches attacking methods like hacking sniffing cyber vandalism etc)

technology solutions (Encryption security channels of communication protecting networks and

protecting servers and clients) IT Act 2000 (meaning and provisions)

UNIT IV

E-payments system- Models and methods of Endashpayments (Debit Card Credit Card smart cards

e-money) digital signatures (procedure working and legal position) payment gateways online

banking (meaning concepts importance electronic fund transfer automated clearing house

automated ledger posting etc) risks involved in E-payments

UNIT V

Online Business Transactions- meaning purpose advantages and disadvantages of transacting

online E-commerce applications in various industries like banking insurance payment of

utility bills online marketing E-tailing (popularity benefits problems and features) online

services (financial travel and career) auctions online portal online earning publishing and

entertainment

COURSE OUTCOME-

Understand the basic concepts and technologies used in the field of management information

systems

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull Management Information System Jawadekar

bull Management Information System Laudon amp Laudon

bull The Essential Guide to Knowledge management Amrit Tiwana

bull Internet (Use of Search Engines Google amp yahoo etc)

bull EndashCommerce CVS Murty

CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 602

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

To enable the students understand the technological and human issues relating to implementation of

Customer Relationship Management in the organizations

UNIT- I

Introduction to CRM Definition and Concepts CRM as an integral business strategy The nature

of the CRM strategy The business environment of CRM Legal ethical economic competitive

and social Retail and business customer profiling Relationship life cycles Understanding and

evaluating customer business plans

UNIT- II

Managing Customer relationships Customer identification Expanding the size of the customer

database Customer profiling Understanding and managing customer expectations developing

customer confidence Building relationships by adding value to customers cost effectively

Planning and making persuasive presentations

UNIT- III

Developing CRM strategy The role of CRM in business strategy Understanding service quality

Technical quality product knowledge functional quality determinants of service quality

managing customer communications Planning and managing CRM projects Retention and

Cross- sell

UNIT- IV

Managing CRM Managing customer contact strategies dealing with difficult situations

Imparting Bad news closing accounts Exit strategies Time management and CRM priority

setting Target setting setting standards

UNIT- V

Measuring Performance of CRM Customer Satisfaction

COURSE OUTCOME-

To understand marketing aspects and understand the basic concepts of Customer relationship

Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

S Bolachandra Customer Relationship Management ndash Driven Services Management 2nd

Ed Response Books Sage Publication

Customer Relationship Management 1ed Mohamed HpSagdevan Vikas Publication House

Pvt Ltd

Customer Driven Services Management By S Balachandra New Delhi Response Books

Jagdish Seth Et Al Customer Rela Tionship Management

V Kumar amp Werner J Customer Rela Tionship Management Willey India 2008

Roger J Baran Robert J Galka Daniel P Strunll Customer Relationship Management

South Western Cengage Learning

Keshu Patnaik What Customers Really Want Lotus Press

Customer Satisfaction Research Management By Derek R Allen New Delhi New Age

International

Strategic Costomer Planning By Alan Helkhan

Alok Kumar Rai Customer Relationship Management Concept amp Cases Prentice Hall Of

India Private Limted New Delhi 2011

S Shanmugasundaram Customer Relationship Management Prentice Hall Of India Private

Limted New Delhi 2008

ENTREPRENEURIAL PROJECT WORK amp VIVA VOCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 603

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students to

work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they learn

the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After the final

semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is evaluated by

the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report should show how a

student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to provide based on their

analytical capabilities and experience

DISSERTATION PROJECT FORMAT (SUMMER TRAININGPROJECT WORK)

Title of the study (Cover Page)

Declaration

Company Certificate (In case of Summer Training)

Guide Certificate (In case of Final Project)

Acknowledgement

Table of Contents

Table of Graphs amp Pictures Used

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Introduction

12 Purpose for Undertaking the Research

12 Significance of the study

13 Scope of the study

14 Research Problem

15 Objective of the study

17 Hypothesis

18 Limitations of the study

2 LITERATURE REVIEW (Theory related To Company Product or Topic)

After completing third semester the Faculty members will be assigned as guides to the students

to work on the topic selected from their area of specialization for conducting a field research or

research work with reference to their selected organization firm company etc where they

learn the actual research process to come up with a solution to the problems identified After

the final semester exams reports of the research will be submitted in the department which is

evaluated by the external examiner followed by viva vocepresentation The research report

should show how a student has conducted the research and what solutions will they able to

provide based on their analytical capabilities and experience

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also

able to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business

operations and come up with the ways to tap the

Opportunities

3 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

31 Introduction

32 Population of the study

33 Sampling Design

331 Sampling Technique

332 Sampling Method

333 Sample Size

34 Research Instrument

35 Sources of data

351 Primary Data

352 Secondary Data

4 DATA ANALYSIS amp INTERPRETATION

5 FINDINGS amp RECOMMENDATIONS amp CONCLUSION

Bibliography

COURSE OUTCOME-

After successful completion of research project students will able to know the actual research

process and its usefulness in the organization as a problem solving technique They will also able

to know the potential opportunities persist in the market for extending the business operations and

come up with the ways to tap the Opportunities

MARKETING GROUP

PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 604

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course aims to make the learner familiar with the management of product and brands in the

context of marketing It orients the learner to carefully understand the pivotal role a product

manager and the significance of product and brand related decisions

UNIT- I

Product Management Product Development Product focused organization Market focused

organization Factors influencing design of the product Changes affecting product management

Developing Product Strategy Setting objectives amp alternatives Product strategy over the life-

cycle Customer analysis Competitor analysis Design of manufacture New Product

Development

UNIT- II

Market Potential amp Sales Forecasting Forecasting target market potential and sales Methods

of estimating markets and sales potential Sales forecasting planning for involvement in

international Market

UNIT- III

Brand amp Brand Management Commodities Vs Brands The role of Brands The brand equity

concept Brand Equity Models- Brand Asset Valuation Aaker Model BRANDZ Brand

Resonance Building Brand Equity Brand Identity and Brand Image

UNIT- IV

Brand Leveraging amp Brand Performance Establishing brand equity management system

measuring sources of brand equity and consumer mind-set Co-branding celebrity endorsement

Brand Positioning amp Brand Building Brand knowledge Brand portfolios and market

segmentation Steps of brand building Identifying and establishing brand positioning Defining

and establishing brand values

UNIT- V

Designing amp Sustaining Branding Strategies Brand Hierarchy Branding Strategy Brand

extension and brand transfer Managing brand over time

Managing amp Measuring Brand Equity Brand Reinforcement Brand Revitalization Brand

Crisis Brand Value chain Brand Audits Brand Tracking Brand Valuation

COURSE OUTCOME

The Course Outcome of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of

Branding role of brands elements and components of brands brand equity etc The main aim for

Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning

implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Product Management ndash Donal R Lehmann Russel S Winer

Keller Kevin Lane Strategic Brand Management Pearson education New Delhi

Verma Harsha Brand Management Excel Books New Delhi

Kapferer Jean Noel Strategic Brand Management Kogan Page NewDelhi

Kumar S Ramesh marketing and Branding ndash The Indian Scenario Pearson Education

New Delhi

Kapoor Jagdeep 24 Brand Mantras Sage Publications New Delhi

Sengupta Subroto Brand Positioning Strategies for competitive advantage Tata

McGraw Hill New Delhi

Clifton Rita amp Simmons John Brands and Branding The Economist Delhi

STRATEGIC MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 605

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of the present course is to develop analytical skills for the formulation and

implementation of market driven strategies It also aims at recognizing embracing and

managing change by focusing on higher-level strategic issues and decision making to deliver

superior value to customers in global market and competitive situations Class participation

through case discussion will be fundamental to the development of these skills

UNIT- I

Introduction-An Introduction to Strategic Marketing The Changing Role of Marketing ndash

Marketing in 21st century Factors responsible for the change and their impact Dimensions of

Strategic Marketing Challenges of Strategic Marketing Market Driven Strategy ndash Identifying

Distinctive Capabilities Creating Value for Customer Establishing Strategic Focus Setting

Marketing Objectives

UNIT-II

Relationship Strategy-Market Segmentation Strategy ndash Creating New Market Space Matching

Value Opportunities and Capabilities Target Market Strategies Positioning Strategy

Product Strategy-Product Strategies - Product Strategy Issues amp Challenges Product Life-Cycle

Strategies Strategies New Product Branding Strategies Packaging Strategies

UNIT-III

Pricing Strategies ndash Analyzing Customer Price Sensitivity and Competitorslsquo Response Legal amp

Ethical Issues in Pricing Price Positioning Pricing Strategies amp Pricing models

UNIT- IV

Product Strategy-Integrated Marketing Communication Strategies ndash Setting IMC Objectives

Deciding Role of Promotion Pull vs Push Strategies Advertising Strategy Creative Strategy

Media Strategy Strategies for Sales Promotion Publicity amp Direct Marketing

UNIT- V

Distribution Strategy-Channel Objectives Role Performed by Distribution System Strategies at

different Channel Levels Implementation Strategies

COURSE OUTCOME

Students will demonstrate a clear understanding of the concepts tools amp techniques used by

executives in developing and executing strategies and will appreciate its integrative and

interdisciplinary nature

REFERENCE BOOKS

Carol H Anderson Strategic Marketing Houghton Mifflin Harcourt

D W Cravens amp N F Piercy Strategic Marketing McGraw HillIrwin

OC Ferrell Michael D Hartline Strategic Marketing South-Western Cengage

Boyod Wlker Mullins Larrech Marketing Strategy McGraw Hill

Colin David J Strategic Marketing Management Planning Implementation amp

Control Pearson Richard M S Wilson

Gilligan Oxford Butterworth-Heinemann

Aaker David Strategic Marketing Wiley-India

George S Market Driven Strategy Day Process of Creating Value Free Press

J P Guiltinan G W Paul T J Madden Marketing Management Strategies and

Programs McGraw-Hill Companies

Jain Subhash Marketing Planning and StrategySouth-Western College Pub

Kerin Roger Peterson Robert Strategic Marketing Management Allyn and Bacon

P Baines R Brennan amp P Garneau Contemporary Strategic Marketing Palgrave

E-MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 606

COURSE OBJECTIVE

It will acquaint the students with the basics of e-marketing enhancing e-marketing performance

enhancing customer experience evaluating and measuring e-marketing campaigns

UNIT- I

Framework for e-marketing - Evolution Commercial beginnings of the Web Characteristics

Drivers of Internet Economy Internet Business models and Strategies e-marketing Plan

Internet as a marketing platform opportunities challenges barriers and benefits of e-marketing

UNIT- II

Applications of Web 20-in Marketing tools of web 20 Blogs Applications of web 20 in

India Internet communities and marketing the creation and transfer of value within

communities Overview of Global E marketing Future of e-Marketing

UNIT- III

Marketing Environment - Ethical legal Social and regulatory issues in e-Marketing Internet

as a direct Response Medium Understanding the e-Consumer e-Consumer Behavior Internet

User Segments Internet Building e- Brands Interactive Brand Building Recent Trends in e-

branding

UNIT- IV

Differentiation and Positioning - Strategies in e-marketing Distribution in e-marketing e-

marketing Communication - Online Advertising Search Email and other marketing tools

Customer Relationship in e- Marketing Customer Service and Support in web space Recent

Trends in e-customer service

UNIT- V

Developing and maintaining website for e-marketing - Measuring and Evaluating Web

Marketing Programs Variables used to measure website traffic audiences and marketing

campaigns Measuring internet advertising effectiveness Role of Social media in advertising

Course Outcome

Recognize e-marketing concepts theories and context e-business models performance metrics

online advertising and principles and practices of e-commerce and m-commerce and its

implication on marketing strategy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mohammed Fisher Jaworski and Cahill Internet Marketing ndash Building Advantage in a

networked economy Tata McGraw-Hill

Strauss and Frost E-Marketing Prentice-Hall

Mary Roberts Internet Marketing Cengage Learning

Vassos Strategic Internet Marketing ndash Practical e-commerce and branding Tactics Que Books

Chaffey Meyer Johnston and Ellis ndash Chadwick Internet Marketing Prentice- HallFinancial

Times

HUMAN RESOURSE GROUP

MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 607

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The course intends to develop an orientation towards the change It shall coach the students to be

Proactive towards a planned change It details the relevant aspects of change that help the students

Understand the importance of managing change

UNIT- I

Introduction-Overview of change Importance and impact of change Origins of change-

Institutional amp Structural Technological Social Behavioral Development of strategy role of

human resource strategies in implementing Change

UNIT-II

Organizational Structure Culture and Change-The significance of structure for change HR

implications of structural choice and change Organizational culture ndashintegration differentiation

and fragmentation Linking Organizational cultural through HR change interventions

UNIT-III

HR Processes amp Change

Relevance amp development of recruitment amp selection processes for planned and unplanned

change

Performance management and organizational change HRD amp organizational change

UNIT- IV

Strategic reward management and its role in changing employee behavior changing focus in

employee relations managing change through employee involvement Downsizing management

of change implications of downsizing

UNIT- V

Evaluating and Promoting Change-approaches to evaluate change from evaluating to

promoting change clarity of purpose and strategies data collection for analysis analysis and

feedback

Course Outcome

Understand the human side of change and know how to help people deal with change more

effectively maintaining their commitment and bringing them successfully through the change

process

REFERENCE BOOKS

A Thornhill P Lewis Mikemillmore amp M Saunders Managing Change A Human

Resources Strategy Approach Pearson Education

Basil amp Cook The Management of Change McGraw Hill

Robert A Paton Change ManagementA Guide to Effective Implementation Sage

South Asia Edition

K Harigopal Management of Organizational Change Leveraging Transformation

Response Books

VNilakant amp S Ramnarayan Change Management Response Books

CROSS CULTURAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 608

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Present course Aims at developing the understanding of cross cultural issues its economical

relevance for business and helps them to become familiar with ways to effectively understand

anticipate and address the impacts of cross-cultural differences on various management functions

to ensure the organizational and individual success

UNIT-I

Introduction-The genesis and concepts of culture Dimensions and determinants of

organizational Culture Importance of cross cultural management in globalized business

environment

UNIT-II

Various Scientific Approaches to the Cross Cultural Issue-Theory of Hall Trompenaars

Geert Hofstede and John Mole Mapping cross-cultural differences within and across nations

UNIT- III

Implications of Cross-Cultural Management-in Globalization Diversity culture shock

Technology Organizational change mergers and acquisitions and Quality management system

(BPR TQM Lean and Six sigma)

UNIT- IV

Training of the specific skills ndash Cross cultural decision making staffing expatriation and

repatriation communication and cooperation in an international team managing culturally

appropriate leadership style Designing result oriented motivational tools Intercultural

negotiation and conflicts management

UNIT- V

Ethical Issues and Values in Cross Cultural Management-Cultural clustering of individual

countries Case Studies

COURSE OUTCOME

Understanding the major peculiarities of the cross-cultural management process and development

of the skills based on cross-cultural differences application to the companylsquo management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Deepak Kumar Bhattacharya Cross cultural management Text and cases PHI Learning

Private Limited

G Hofstede Cultures and organizations Software of the mind McGraw-Hill

Gallois C Callan V J Communication and culture a guide for practice Wiley

Gatley S Comparative Management A Transcultural Odyssey McGraw-Hill Publishing

Co

Puffer S Management across Cultures Insights from Fiction amp Practice Blackwell

Business

Schneider S C Barsoux J Managing across cultures Prentice HallFinancial Times

McFarlin DBSweeney PD International Management Strategic Opportunities amp

Cultural Challenges Xlibris Corporation

Deresky Helen International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures Pearson

Education India

GROUP DYNAMICS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 609

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize the students with the meaning scope and significance of group and group

dynamics to examine the factors and issues that influence group performance and group

effectiveness to identify causes of intra-group and intergroup conflict and ways and means of

resolving the conflict and to cultivate skills for group decision-making and teambuilding

UNIT-I

Introduction-Nature of groups and Group dynamics ndash Studying groups ndash Measurement in Group

dynamics Group formation ndash value of groups ndash interpersonal attraction ndash FIRO-B

UNIT-II

Group Development and Socialization-Group development ndash Group socialization Group

Structure ndash roles ndash authority ndash attraction ndash communication networks ndash Conformity and influence ndash

Power Environmental Processes ndash territoriality ndash spatial behaviour ndash environmental stress

UNIT-III

Group Decision Making-Anatomy ndash groupthink ndash group polarization ndash Methods of group

decision-making Group Conflict-Sources of Conflict in Groups ndash Conflict process ndash Coalitions ndash

conflict resolution Conflict between groups ndash sources ndash resolving inter-group conflict

UNIT- IV

Crowds and Collective Behavior-Crowds and collectives ndash Theoretical viewpoints ndash De

individuation theory

UNIT- V

Groups and Change-The Group as an agent of change ndash The effectiveness controversy ndash Sources

of Change in groups

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how gender power diversity and the environment impacts groups

REFERENCE BOOKS

Forsyth DR Group Dynamics Addison-Wesley

Zander A Making Groups Effective Jossey-Bass

Davis Group Performances Addison-Wesley Publishing Co

Dyer Team Building Issues and Alternatives Addison- Wesley Publishing

FINANCE GROUP

CORPORATE TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 610 COURSE OBJECTIVE

Course aims to provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and

application to different business situations ampto understand principles underlying the Service Tax

along with basic concepts of VAT

UNIT-I

Assessment of Various Entities-Assessment of firms and their partners Assessment of

Companies Assessment of Co-operative Societies Assessment of Local Authority Assessment

of Mutual Concerns Assessment of Charitable Trusts(Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-II

Tax Planning-Meaning of tax planning and management tax evasion and tax avoidance-Nature

and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector-Justification of corporate tax

planning and management Tax Planning considerations in relation to Business

UNIT-III

Wealth Tax-Scheme of Wealth Tax-Incidence of Wealth Tax-Assets to be included in Net

Wealth-Exempted Assets-Valuation of Assets and Wealth Tax Liability -Assessment and

Penalties (Theory amp Problems)

UNIT-IV

Service Tax-Service Tax Applicability and Services covered ndash Valuation of taxable services for

service tax Payment of Service Tax ndash Registration ndash Furnishing of Return ndash Maintenance of

Record ndash Other obligations (Theory only)

UNIT- V

VAT-The Basic concept of VAT-how VAT operates-meritsamp demerits of VAT-a brief overview

of State level VAT in India (VAT is not to be studied with reference to any particular State VAT

Law)

COURSE OUTCOME

Seek variety of career options in accounting management and business related fields

REFERENCE BOOKS

Vinod Singhania Direct Taxes Law and Practice Taxmann Publications

Bhagawati Prasad Direct Taxes New Age International Pub

Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta Direct Taxes Bharat Law House

T N Manoharan Hand Book of Income Tax Laws Institute of Chartered Accountants of India

BBLal amp NVashisht Direct Taxes Pearson

S S Gupta Service Tax Taxmann

R Mohan Lavis Service Tax Bharat Publishers New Delhi _

INVESTMENT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES

Course Code 1Y3BBA 611

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will help you to perform valuation of companies amp prepare reports on important

components of Investment Banking such as Mergers amp Acquisitions Project Finance IPO

Analysis etc

UNIT-I

INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Indian Financial System Financial Services in Indian

Financial Market Concept of Financial Assets Different types of Financial Assets amp Their Role

in Economic Development (The module deals with country Specific Financial System)

UNIT-II

FINANCIAL MARKET Organizational Structure Money Market - organization Different

Players Different Types Of Instruments Capital Market-Organization Different Players

Different types of Instruments

UNIT-III

CENTRAL BANK Organizational Structure of RBI Role of RBI Monetary Policy of RBI

Credit Control Measures International Monetary Fund Asian Development Bank World Bank

UNIT- IV

COMMERCIAL BANKING Functions Different Types of Commercial Banking Unit amp

Branch Banking NPA Capital Adequacy Agreement BASAL norms SEBI AS A

REGULATORY BODY SEBI and Guideline of SEBI FERA FEMA

UNIT- V

NON BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES Introduction of NBFC Investment Companies

Hire Purchase Companies Lease Companies Housing Finance Merchant Banks Venture

Capital Funds

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply learning from this program will help you to get opportunities to work with Investment

Banking companies

REFERENCE BOOKS

Indian Financial System Sapna Nibsiya Vikash Publication

Financial Services MY Khan TMH

Indian Financial System HR Manchiraju Vikash Publication

S Natrajan amp R Parameswaran

ML Seth

FORENSIC ANALYSIS AND FRAUD INVESTIGATION

Course Code 1Y3BBA 612

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The student will gain an understanding of the various types of fraud as well as how to detect and

prevent these frauds It will explore methods of concealment and discuss various ways of

uncovering accounting fraud and detecting creative accounting It will provide an understanding

of how to use trend analysis of financial statements to uncover certain types of fraud and the role

of internal audit assessments

UNIT I

Introduction to fraud Nature of fraud why commit fraud fighting frauds-An overview

UNIT II

Types of Fraud Frauds against organization consumer frauds bankruptcy divorce and tax

fraud fraud in e-commerce security fraud bank fraud financial statement fraud revenue and

inventory related fraud liability assets and corporate disclosure frauds

UNIT III

Fraud Investigation Investigating theft acts investigating concealments conversion

investigation methods inquiry method business intelligence and fraud reports

UNIT IV

Fraud detection Recognizing the symptoms of fraud Data driven fraud detection using

Predictive Analytics and forensic analytics (Nigrini approach)

UNIT V Case Study

1 Two Indian

2 Two international cases

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain the legal elements of fraud describe white collar crime and discuss the widespread

nature of fraud and its economic impact

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mark J Nigrini Forensic Analytics Methods and Techniques for Forensic Accounting Investigation

Hoboken Nj John Wiley amp Sons Inc Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination

Cengage Learning

IT GROUP

INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAWS IN BUSINESS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 613

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course will assist students in their career preparation as information system security

managers The course would enable the students to articulate current and developing legal issues

in the information assurance field

UNIT I

Introduction to Information Security-Basics of Information Technology Basics of Indian

Legal System Overview of IT Law Cyber Law in India IT Act 2000 - Introduction and its

application Relevant amendments in all other law Constitutional protection under Cyber law

Freedom of speech and expression Human Rights violations Revisiting industrial and Labour

Laws E-Media and Print Media

UNIT II

E-Contract-The Law of Contract Construction of Electronic contracts Issues of security

Employment Contracts Consultant Agreements and Digital Signature

UNIT III

Cyber Crimes amp Intermediaries-Crime Meaning amp Concept Rights and liability-Civil

Criminal and tortuous Offences- concept and Legal parameters under IT Law Offences-

detection and investigation Offences and punishments-global scenario Rights amp liabilities of

Intermediaries Overlapping between IPC amp ITA

UNIT IV

IPR regime and Cyber Laws-Understanding Copy right in information Technology Legal

issues in Internet and Software Copy right Patents Trade Marks amp Data Base

UNIT V

Jurisdiction amp Future Perspective of Cyber Law-Concept of Jurisdiction Indian context of

Jurisdiction Information Technology Amendment Bill 2006 Information Technology Rules

COURSE OUTCOME-

Analyze and evaluate the cyber security needs of an organization

REFERENCE BOOKS

Raheja R amp Ahmed S S A handbook on Information technology Cyber law amp E- Commerce Capital Law House

Rodney D Ryder Business Process Outsourcing Date Protection and Information Security Wadhwa amp Co

John Vacca Computer Forensic Computer Crime Scene Investigation Charles River

Yatindra Singh Cyber Laws Justice Universal Publisher

Ranabir Singh amp Ghana Syam Singh Cyber Space amp The Law Issues amp Challenges Nalsar University

E-GOVERNANCE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 614

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The present course aims to develop an understanding of the importance of IT (Information

Technology) in bringing about developments in the affairs of public life It intends to develop an

awareness of the e-governance technology being used for delivering pubic services and the

issues concerning the Cyber security

UNIT I

Introduction-Overview of e-Government and e-Governance Stages of e-Governance National

E-Governance Plan (NeGP) Mission Mode Projects and their implementation status

UNIT II

E-Governance Systems- e-Governance Systems Development Practices Business Process

Reengineering in Government e-Governance success stories and implementation challenges

UNIT III

E-Governance Practices- e-Governance Project Management Practices Models of e-

Governance Projects Security threats and Cyber Forensics

UNIT IV

Cyber Security-Symmetric and Asymmetric cryptography (including Credit CardElectronic

data capture) establishing security norms in cyberspace [ISO 270001] Cyber security and cyber

audit implications for e-governance

Unit V

Contemporary Issues-Change Management Issues IT Act 2000 and the related cases in India

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand how a relational database differs from a flat database including the function and

construction of a joining table

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gupta MP (ed) Promise of e-Governance Tata McGraw Hill

Bhattacharya J (ed) Technology in Government GIFT Publishing

Bagga RK and Gupta P (ed)Transforming Government e-Governance Initiatives in

India ICFAI Press Hyderabad

B A Forouzan Cryptography And Network Security Tata McGraw Hill

Gupta MP Kumar P amp Bhattacharya J Government Online Tata McGraw-Hill

H Richard Implementing and Managing e-Government Sage Publications

V Sharma Handbook of Cyber Laws Macmillan India Ltd

IT INFRASRUCTURE MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 615

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course aims to acquaint the students BBA program specializing in Information Technology with the nuances of managing the IT infrastructure of any organization

UNIT I

IT Infrastructure ndashAn Overview-The Meaning of IT Infrastructure Challenges in IT

Infrastructure Management Design Issue of IT and IT Infrastructure Determining Customerslsquo

Requirements IT Systems Management Process IT Service Management Process Patterns for

IT Systems Management IT Infrastructure Library

UNIT II

Service and Delivery Process-Service Level Management Financial Management IT Service

Continuity Management Capacity Management Availability Management Service Support

Process-Configuration Management Incident Management Problem Management Change

Management Release Management

UNIT III

Storage Management-Introduction to Storage Backup and Storage Archive and Retrieve

Disaster Recovery Space Management Database and Application Protection Bare Machine

Recovery Data Retention

UNIT IV

Security Management-Introduction Computer Security Internet Security Physical security

Identity Management Access Control System Intrusion Detection

UNIT V

IT Ethics-Introduction Intellectual Property Privacy Law Computer Forensics Ethics and

Internet Cyber Crimes Technical Support-Introduction Basic Concept Goal Scope and

Objective Benefits Costs and Possible Problems The Technical support Processes Impact of

Internet on Technical Support

COURSE OUTCOME

Develop a new communication mechanism based on emerging trends in information technology

REFERENCE BOOKS

Best practice for ICT Infrastructure Management by Office of Government commerce

(OGC) TSO UK

Phalguni Gupta Surya Prakash and Umarani Jayaraman IT Infrastructure and Itlsquos

Management Tata McGraw Hill

AGRIBUSINESS GROUP

FOOD TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESSING MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 616

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with different food processing techniques

and their management

UNIT I

Present status of food industry in India Organization in food industry Introduction to operations

of food industry Deteriorative factors and hazards during processing storage handling and

distribution

UNIT II

Basic principles of food processing and food preservation by manipulation of parameters and

factors and application of energy radiations chemicals and biotechnological agents Packaging

of foods

UNIT III

Analysis of costs in food organization Risk management Laws and regulations related to food

industry and food production and marketing Quality management ndash quality standards PFA ISO

etc

UNIT IV

Case studies on project formulation in various types of food industries ndashmilk and dairy products

cereal milling oil-seed and pulse milling sugarcane milling honey production baking

confectionery oil and fat processing fruits and vegetable storage and handling processing of

fruits and vegetables egg poultry fish and meat handling and processing etc

COURSE OUTCOME

Explain digestion absorption functions and food sources of various nutrients

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Aggarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India Oxford amp IBH

Early R 1995 Guide to Quality Management Systems for Food Industries Blackie

Jelen P 1985 Introduction to Food Processing Reston Publishing

Potly VH amp Mulky MJ 1993 Food Processing Oxford amp IBH

MANAGEMENT OF AGRICULTURAL INPUT MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 617

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to give the students an understanding of different marketing

concept and marketing system in context of agricultural inputs

UNIT I

Agricultural input marketing ndash meaning and importance Management of distribution

channels for agricultural input marketing Agricultural Inputs and their types ndash farm and non-

farm role of cooperative public and private sectors in agri- input marketing

UNIT II

Seed- Importance of seed input Types of seeds- hybrid high yielding and quality seeds

Demand and supply of seeds Seed marketing channels pricing export-import of seeds Role of

NSC and State Seed Corporation

UNIT III

Chemical Fertilizers- Production export-import supply of chemical fertilizers

Demandconsumption Prices and pricing policy subsidy on fertilizers marketing system ndash

marketing channels problems in distribution Role of IFFCO and KRIBCO in fertilizer

marketing

UNIT IV

Plant Protection Chemicals- Production exportimport consumption marketing system ndash

marketing channels ElectricityDiesel Oil- marketing and distribution system pricing of

electricity for agriculture use subsidy on electricity

UNIT V

Farm Machinery- Production supply demand Marketing and distribution channels of farm

machines Agro-industries Corporation and marketing of farm machines

implementsEquipmentlsquos

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the fundamentals of management with reference to agribusiness Acquaint with

various functional areas of agribusiness

REFERENCE BOOKS

Acharya SS amp Agarwal NL 2004 Agricultural Marketing in India 4th Ed Oxford amp

IBH

Broadway AC amp Broadway Arif A 2003 A Text Book of Agri-Business Management

Kalyani

Singh Sukhpal 2004 Rural Marketing- Focus on Agricultural Inputs Vikas Publ

House

FARM BUSINESS MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 618

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To acquaint the students with the basic principles of farm management dealing with the analysis

of farm resources having alternatives within the framework of resource restrictions

UNIT I

Nature scope characteristics and role of farm business management farm management

decisions farm management problems

UNIT II

Principles of farm management decisions ndash principle of variable proportion cost principle

principle of factor substitution law of equi-marginal returns opportunity cost principle etc

UNIT III

Tools of farm management and farm business analysis - farm planning and budgeting Farm

records and accounts types and problems in farm records and accounts net worth statement

farm efficiency measures

UNIT IV

Management of farm resources ndash Land Labour Farm machinery Farm building etc

UNIT V

Risk and uncertainty in farming -sources of uncertainty in farming management strategy to

counteract uncertainty and decision making process in farm business management under risks

and uncertainty

COURSE OUTCOME

Evaluate the impacts of policy economics and markets on farm businesses

REFERENCE BOOKS

Heady EO amp Jensen H 1960 Farm Management Economics Prentice Hall

Johl SS amp Kapoor TR 1973 Fundamentals of Farm Business Management Kalyani Publ

Kahlon AS amp Singh K 1992 Economics of Farm Management in IndiaAllied Publ

Panda SC 2007 Farm Management amp Agricultural Marketing Kalyani Publ

RETAIL GROUP

BUYER BEHAVIOUR

Course Code 1Y3BBA 619

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To analysis personal socio-cultural and environmental dimensions that influence consumer

decisions making

UNIT-I

A Perspective on Buyer Behaviour- what is Buyer Behaviour- Buyer Behaviour ndash is Dynamic

Involves Interactions Involves Exchanges Levels of Buyer Analysis - Individual Buyer Market

Segments-Industries- Societies-Cognitive Process in Buyer Decision Making

UNIT-II

Buyer Product Knowledge and Involvement Buyers Product Knowledge Products as Bundles

of Attributes Benefits and Value Satisfiers Means-End Chains-Developing Deeper Buyer

Understanding-ZMET Approach to Buyer Knowledge-The ZMET Interview-The Means and

Basis-For Involvements-Understanding Key Reasons for Purchase-Understanding Buyer-Product

Relationship

UNIT-III

Attention and Comprehension Information The Power of AdvertisingDisplay-Exposure to

information-marketing implications-Attention Processes Variation factors Influencing Attention-

Marketing Implications-Comprehension Variationinferences during ComprehensionsFactors

Influencing ComprehensionsMarketing Implications

UNIT-IV

Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Conditioning and Learning Processes-Influencing

Buyer Behaviour-Environment-Cultural and cross Cultural Influences-reference Groups-Family-

Market Segmentation and Product Positioning-buyer Behaviour and product StrategyPromotions

Strategy-Brand Endorsing-Pricing Strategy-Channel Strategy

UNIT-V

Buyer Behavior Theory Predict Retail Shopping Behavior-Major BB areas demographics

lifestyle data group and individual attributes How do people shop given the time scarcity they

experience What are their attitudes towards shopping in store vs online Decision process and

impulse purchases ndash research on ADDADHD and impulsive Buyer Behaviour

COURSE OUTCOME

Relate internal dynamics such as personality perception learning motivation and attitude to the

choices consumers make

REFERENCE BOOKS

JPaul Peter and JERRY LOLSON Consumer Behaviour and marketing StrategyTata

Mcgraw HillNewyork-2006

Upinder Dhar and Sathish Dhar New franklin of Management Cases In Indian Context

Excel Books NewDelhi-2001

Alries Focus Harper Collins Business 1997 Ghargous

DelIHawkins RogerJBest KennethAConey Consumer BehaviourBuilding Marketing

Strategy 9th Edition Tata Mcgraw HillNewDelhi

Harrey Thompson Who side My Customer-Winning Strategies for Creating and Sustaining

Customer Loyalty Pearson Education NewDelhi-2005

Harrey Thompson The Customer-Central Enterprise Mcgraw Hill-2000

RETAIL PLANNING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 620

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To evaluate plan and choose channels of Retail distribution The strategic and operational

decision-making processes in the organized retail

UNIT I

Marketing amp Strategic management Marketing Retailing Role Relevance amp Trends-Retail

Customer-Retail market segmentation amp franchising-Relationship marketing in Retailing-

Retailing in banking and other financial services mutual funds and Insurance-Quantitative

methods in marketing-Social Marketing in Retail management

UNIT II

Operations amp Finance in Retailing Operations Retail location strategy-Product and Merchandise management-TQM-Mathematics

Statistics-EDP MIS -Logistics amp SCM-Security measures-Footfalls computerized methods amp

non-computerized methods-Visual display methods -Merchandising amp Management-Fashion

designing Finance Accounting Methods-Capex planning-Risks-Capex planning-Accounting

Processes-Accounting softwarelsquos-WIP -Accounting methods-Strategic cost management-

Management of Obsolete goods

UNIT III

Human Resources Management in Retailing Human Resources Retail organization- Laws involved in HR- Motivation-Customer

psychology-Training needs for employee-Top grading-Obstacles to Top grading- Astronomical

Costs of Mis- Hires- Company killers and Company Dealers- recruitment Best Practices

UNIT IV

Legal amp compliances for a Retail Store Legal amp compliances License-Contracts amp Recovery-Legal Process-PFESIC amp Exemptions-

Food amp Restaurants-PPF-IR ndash Law-Shops amp establishments-IPR Patents Copyright amp

Trademarks- Inclusion of Service Mark- Procedure and Duration of Registration-Collective

Mark- Certification Mark- Procedural Compliance for Establishing an Retail Store- Customer

Rights- Consumer Protection Acts

UNIT V

Mall Management Mall Management-Types of Various retail formats-Concepts in mall design-Factors influencing

Malls establishments-Aspects in Finance-Aspects in security accounting -Aspects in HR-

Aspects in Quality management-Statistical methods used in measuring mall performance

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the functions of retail business and various retail formats and retail channels

REFERENCE BOOKS

Retailing Management Text amp Cases- Swapna Pradhan- The McGraw Hill Companies

Retailing Management -Levy amp Weitz- The McGraw Hill Companies

Marketing Channel- Bert Rosenbloom- South Western ndashThomson

Marketing Creating and Keeping Customers in an e-commerce world- Wiiliam G Zikumund

amp Michael d Amico- South Western ndashThomson

Retail Management A Strategic Approach ndash Barry Berman amp Joel REvans- The Prentice

Hall of India New Delhi

Legal Aspects of Business ndashAkhileshwar Pathak- The McGraw Hill Companies

Top Grading ndash How Leading Companies Win by Hiring Coaching and Keeping the Best

People- Bradford D Smart- Viva Books Pvt Ltd

RETAIL SALES TECHNIQUE amp PROMOTIONS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 621

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To learn promotion and sale of goods Familiarize the students with organized retail and the

value it creates

UNIT I

Advertising Communications and Promotions- Effective Advertising Understanding When

How and Why Advertising Works- Marketing Objectives and Positioning- Target Audience

Selection and Action Objectives- Communication Objectives- The Creative Strategy and Tactics- Media Strategy The Reach Pattern and- Effective Frequency

UNIT II

Promotion Impact- on the Marketing Mix-On the Customer-Promotions and Integrated

Marketing- Creating a Customer Relations- Characteristics of an Integrated Programme-

Strategic Considerations- Promotions role- Overcoming barriers in Integrated Marketing-

UNIT III

Tactical Analysis ndashStrategic analysis to Promotion tactics- Objective Setting- Perspective on

Strategy ndashPromotional tactical tool set ndashWhen and how to apply the right tactics-Built-traffic-

Reach new customers- Trade users up- Introduce new products- Gain Product Display

Placement amp Distribution- Stimulate repeat sales- Generate Brand loyalty-

UNIT IV

Sales promotion technique- Off the Self-Offers- Joint Promotions- Price Promotions- Premium

Promotions- Prize Promotions- How Promotion Affects Sales-Switching Acceleration and

Deceleration- How Promotion Affects Sales- Acceleration Repeat Purchasing Consumption-

Trade Dealing

UNIT V

Retailer Promotions-Consumer Promotions (Coupons Rebates and Loyalty Programs)-

Consumer Promotions (Loyalty Programs Online and Special Event Promotions)-Calculating

Promotion Profitability-Trade Deals Retailer Promotions

COURSE OUTCOME

Describe how a retailer can satisfy the needs of habitual decision making customers by choosing

to act in ways that increase loyalty

REFERENCE BOOKS

Robert C Blattberg amp Scott A Neslin -Sales Promotion Concepts Methods and Strategies -

Prentice-Hall

Paul J Hydzic -Sales Promotion Strategies That build brands-Illinouus Institute of Technology

Schulz William A Robinson amp Lisa A Peterson -Sales Promotion Essentials The 10 Basic Sales

Promotion Techniques

Julian Cummins amp Ruddy Mullin- Sales Promotions How to create Implement and Integrate

Campaigns that really work- Kogan Page

Kazmiamp Sathish K Batra Advertising amp Sales Promotions- Excel Books

George e Belch amp Michael A Belch- Advertising amp Sales Promotions An Integrated Marketing

Communications Perspective- Tata Mc Graw Hill

PRODUCTION GROUP

PROCESS PLANNING AND CONTROL

Course Code 1Y3BBA 622

COURSE OBJECTIVE-

Considering Production as a separate section for managerial This particular subject provides a

basic understanding of project management demonstrate an awareness of the importance of

facility layouts explain the importance of quality control apply techniques to measure quality

control demonstrate a basic understanding of the problems of waiting lines demonstrate an

understanding of the concept of aggregate planning

UNIT- I

Introduction to Production Planning and Control Need of PPC Functions of PPC Factors

Influencing PPC in the Organization Manufacturing Methods and Managerial Policies and Pre-

requisites of PPC

UNIT- II

Materials Planning and Control Input Required for Materials Planning and Control Steps in

Materials Planning and Control Techniques of Materials Planning and Control Machining

Allowances Make or Buy Decision Scientific Stock Control Techniques (Inventory Control

Models)

UNIT- III

Factors Influencing Process Planning Step in Process Planning and Process Selection

Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II) Introduction Aggregate production planning master

production scheduling MRP II (Introduction concepts) MRP I with Just in Time choice of

software making MRP II system work achieving business objectives with MRP II

UNIT- IV

Scheduling Factors Influencing Scheduling Working and Scheduling Charts Job Sequences (n

job on two machines n job on three machines) Project Scheduling Critical Ratio Scheduling

Assignment Techniques (Assignment - Model)

UNIT- V

Capacity Planning Capacity Planning Integrated Production Planning and Control

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of the course to understand the core features of the production planning and control

function at the operational and strategic levels specifically the relationships between people

REFERENCE BOOKS

bull JhambProduction Planning and Control Pune Everest Publications

bull Hari Raghu Rama SharmaProduction Planning and Control Concepts and Application New Delhi

Deep and Deep Publications

PROCESS REENGINEERING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 623

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The subject knowledge provides solution to the problem keeping in mind the considerations of

business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-engineering

projects

UNIT- I

Introduction to BPR Concept Philosophy of BPR Fundamental tenets of BPR Benefits amp

pitfalls of BPR Drivers to BPR

UNIT- II

Process reengineering framework Opportunity assessment planning the process reengineering

project organizing for process reengineering

UNIT- III

Process analysis and design

a) Process analysis

(b) Process design

UNIT- IV

Planning and implementing the transition Planning the transition implementing the transition

tracking and measuring process performance

UNIT- V

Tools and techniques used in BPR Case tools Work flow systems Imaging technology

Flowage Business design facility tools and Change management tools Risk and impact

measurement

COURSE OUTCOME

To be able to provide the most feasible practical solution to the problem keeping in mind the

considerations of business automation value processes and risks in launching the business re-

engineering project

REFERENCE BOOKS

Lon Roberts Process Re-engineering The Key to Achieving BreakthroughSuccess Tata

McGraw HillHenry J Johanson Palrik Mchine AJohn Pandilebury William A Wheater

Business Process Reengineering Breakpoint Strategies for Market DominanceChichester

John Wiley amp Sons

WORK SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Course Code 1Y3BBA 624

COURSE OBJECTIVE

This course intends to analyze manufacturing service process for methods improvement to learn

the techniques and procedure of methods study and work measurement including setting of time

standard to develop competence in applying methodology of work study and value engineering

to design of work systems

UNIT- I

Productivity-Introduction Productivity Index Measurement of Individual workerlsquos

productivity Productivity of Capital Motion and Time Study and Productivity

Definition Scope and History of Motion and Time Study-Definition of Motion and Time

Study Work Methods Design Work Measurement Scope Non- manufacturing Activities

Taylorlsquos use of Time Study Taylorlsquos Investigation of Shoveling Motion Study as it was

developed by the Gilbreths Micro-motion Study The Cycle Graph and the Chrono-cycle Graph

UNIT- II

Work Methods Design-Procedure Selection Recording Techniques Process analysis setting

up Time Reduction Techniques Fundamental Hand Motions Motion Study and Micro-motion

Study Equipmentlsquos making the Motion Pictures Film Analysis The use of Fundamental Hand

Motions Principles of Motion Economy as related to the use of the Human Body Workplace and

Design of Tools amp Equipment

UNIT- III

Time Study-equipmentlsquos Process Determining the Rating Factor Allowances Time Standard

from Standard Data and Formulas Computer Aided Time Study Computerized Machine and

Equipment Downtime Monitoring and Reporting Predetermined Time Systems The Work

Factor System Methods- Time Measurement Work Sampling

UNIT- IV

Wage Payment-The Relation of Motion and Time Study to Wage Incentives Multi-factor Wage

Incentive Plans

The General Problem Solving Process-Problem Definition Analysis of Problem Search for

Possible Solutions Evaluation of Alternatives Recommendations for action

UNIT-V

Advance Work Study-Synthetic Time Standards and Introduction to Predetermined Motion

Time Systems and Standards Business Process Analysis and Mapping Basic Work System

Physical and Cognitive Task Analysis Office Planning and Design Value Engineering Concepts

Methods of Function Analysis and Creative idea generation

COURSE OUTCOME

Understand the professional and ethical responsibilities of practicing the computer professional

including understanding the need for quality

REFERENCE BOOKS

iebel BW amp Freivalds A Methods Standards and Work Design McGraw Hill

ILO Introduction to Work Study Universal Publishing Corporation

Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work John Wiley amp

Sons

Meyers F E and Stewart JR Motion and Time Study Prentice Hall

Mundel ME Motion and Time Study Improving Productivity Prentice Hall

Richard Park Value Engineering A Plan for Innovation Boca Raton St Lucie Press

Babbage Charles On the Economy of Machinery amp Manufacturers Charles Knight Pall

Mall East and London

Gilbreth FB and L M Fatigue Study Macmillan Co New York

TRAVEL AND TOURISM GROUP

TOURISM POLICIES AND PLAN

Course Code 1Y3BBA 625

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the theoretical framework of destination planning and various intricate involved in

it and to analyses sustainable tourism practices as the best way of overcoming the negative

impacts of tourism development

UNIT I

Tourism Planning Understanding Tourism Planning Conceptual meaning of Tourism

Planning Evolution of Tourism Planning General Concepts of Planning Levels and Types of

Tourism Planning Background Approach and planning scale Public and Private sectors role in

Tourism Development

UNIT II

Contemplation in Planning and Plan Conceptualization Deliberations in the planning

system- Role of systems approach in tourism planning- Tourism systems ndash Modified Leiperlsquos

Tourist System and Whole Tourism System (WTS) - Weaknesses in Leiperlsquos model of WTS-

Other models of tourism ndash A model for interdisciplinary studies of tourism - Using models in

learning system

UNIT III

Sustainable Tourism Definitions of sustainable tourism sustainability sustainable

development- Forces which promote Sustainable Tourism ndash Economic Force which resist

Sustainable Tourism- Principles of Sustainable Tourism ndash Carrying Capacity and its application ndash

The Environment Impacts of Tourism ndash Basic Properties of Ecology- Definitions of Ecology ndash

Environment ndash Ecosystem ndash Relationship of Ecology Tourism Activities

UNIT IV

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) - The need for EIA - Steps of EIA - Method ndash Usage

of EIA- in conserving Ecology and Environment

UNIT IV

Environmental code of Ethics-Codes and Conduct of Conservation in Accordance with the

Culture and Tradition of the Habitat ndash UN Initiatives on Ecology and Environment ndash National

Policy on Ecology and Environment

COURSE OUTCOME

To explore key concepts in tourism policy and planning from a social ethical and global

perspectives Apply the conceptual tools of policy and planning to a wide variety of international

tourism cases to analysis situations and evaluate creative thoughtful feasible solutions for

sustainable tourism

REFERENCE BOOKS

Babu S S Mishra S amp Parida B B (2008) Tourism Development Revisited ndash

Concepts Issues amp Paradigms Sage Publications

Bhatia AK (2009) Tourism Development Principles amp Practices Sterling Publishers

Burkart A J amp Medlik S (1994) Tourism Past Present and Future London William

Heinemann Ltd

Cooper CFletcher JGilbert DampWanhill S (2000) Tourism Principles and Practices

London Pitman Publishing

Christie R M amp Morrison AM (2006) the Tourism System 5thEdn New York

Kendall Hunt Publishing Company

Douglas F (1995) Travel amp Tourism Management London Macmillan

Douglas P (1990) Tourist Development Hong Kong Longman

Swain KSamp Mishra MM (2012)Tourism Principles and Practices Delhi Oxford

University Press

New Inskeep Edward (1991) Tourism Planning An Integrated and Sustainable

Development Approach VNR and New York

TOURISM MARKETING

Course Code 1Y3BBA 626

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various marketing functions and techniques related to hospitality and tourism

and their applications to real life situations and to focus on the pragmatic aspects of marketing

that helps the learners to focus on the pertinent facets of placing hospitality and tourism products

before the stakeholders of tourism industry

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION-Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism ndash Definition ndash Core Marketing

Concepts Marketing Philosophies ndash Selling Vs Marketing Differences between Products and

Services ndash Technology and Marketing ndash Specific features of Tourism Marketing

UNIT II

MARKET SEGMENTATION TARGETING AND POSITIONING - Market Segmentation

Segmentation bases ndash Criteria to effective segmentation ndash Market Targeting ndash Market

Positioning

UNIT III

PRODUCT - Product Mix ndash Salient features of Tourism Products 7 Plsquos in tourism marketing

Product mix and product line New Product Development ndash Product Life Cycle ndash Strategies for

different stages of life cycle

UNIT IV

PRICING Pricing Considerations ndash Internal and External Factors of pricingndash Pricing

Strategiestypes

UNIT V

PROMOTION - Promotion Introduction Different tools of Promotion (Advertising Sales

promotion Publicity Personal selling Direct marketing Public relations Digital

communications) Emerging trends in promotion promotion of tourism products

COURSE OUTCOME

Tourism is witnessing huge global growth every year and it is forecast to grow far into the future

It is definitely an industry of the future Growth means that more and more skilled workers are

needed all over the world By studying tourism you give yourself the skills and knowledge to be

a part of this growth

REFERENCE BOOKS

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2006) Marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 4thedition Pearson Education Bengaluru

Morrison Alistair M (2002) Hospitality and Travel Marketing 2nd edition Delmar

Thomson Publications Florence

Christian Gronroos (1999) Service Management and Marketing Management 3rd

edition Rowman amp Littlefield Publishing Group Lanham Maryland

Keller amp Kotler (2007) A Framework for Marketing Management 3rd edition Dorling

Kindersley India Private Ltd New Delhi

Kotler Philip Bowen John Makens James (2013) marketing for Hospitality and

Tourism 6th edition Pearson Publishers New Delhi

Chaudhary Manjula (2010) Tourism Marketing 1st edition Oxford Higher Education

University Press New Delhi

TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT Course Code 1Y3BBA 627

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To introduce the major components of Tourism to the students And to familiarize the concept of

Transport and accommodation and its linkages to tourism industry

UNIT I

HISTORY OF TRANSPORT - Role of transport in tourism ndash Growth and Development of

Road Transport system in India Transport types -Road transport system in India ndash types of roads

ndash Public transportation system - Car coach bus Tour Rent-a-car Scheme (Concept and

marketing) and Transport amp Insurance documents

UNIT II

RAIL TRANSPORT - Rail Transport General information about Indian Railways Brief

History ndash high speed trains - Classes of Journey ndash Types of trains amp tracks ndash Railway

Reservation ndash modes ndash circle trip ndash Tatkal ndash e-ticket ndash e-ticket - Passenger amenities (Railway

station and onboard) ndash Introduction to the types of rail tours in India luxury trains hill trains

express train mail and passenger ndash IRCTC - Mountain Railways of India in the UNESCO world

heritage list Railway timetable - Eurail and Indrail passes

UNIT III

AIR TRANSPORT- Airlines Transportation- the Airline Industry-Origin and growth

Organization of Air Transport Industry in International context Scheduled and Non-scheduled

Airlines services Classification of Aircrafts Multinational Air Transport Regulations-Nature

Significance and Limitations Air Transport Industry in India ndashDGCA and other key players

Regulatory Framework Air Corporation Act Indian Carriers- Operations Management and

performance marketing strategies of Air India

UNIT IV

WATER TRANSPORT - Water Transport Categories of water transport- Boats Ships Hover

crafts Ferries Submarines Safari boats (Coastal shipping Inland Waterways Foreign going

traffic) ndash National waterways

UNIT V

CRUISE LINERS ndash TYPES Houseboats Brief account of Harbors Docks Jetties Landing

stages and Wharves Brief account of Cargo handling facilities (Cranes Container Dry bulk and

Liquid bulk handling) Cruises Types of cruises- Facilities- cruise accommodation

COURSE OUTCOME

Transportation management systems play a central role in supply chains affecting every part of

the processmdashfrom planning and procurement to logistics and lifecycle management

REFERENCE BOOKS

RK Malhotra Fundamentals of Hotel Management and Operations Anmol Publishers New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Hotel front office Management Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

Sudhir Andrews Introduction to Tourism and Hospitality Industry Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP

HOSPITAL HAZARDS amp DISASTER MANAGEMENT

Course Code 1Y3BBA 628

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To prepare a candidate to assume the responsibility of a hospital service manager irrespective of

its ownership status and the location The training broadly emphasizing on developing

knowledge skill attitudes and analytical approach pertain to the specialty of Hospital

Management

UNIT I

Hospital hazards ndash meaning types (physical biological mechanical amp psychological) its

impact on employees preventive measures Hospital hazards management- meaning need

principles purpose

UNIT II

Control of hospital acquired infection- types of infection Common Nosocomial infections and

their causative agents prevention of hospital acquired infection role of central sterile supply

department infection control committee monitoring and control or cross infection staff health

and patient safety

UNIT III

Biomedical waste management ndash meaning amp categories of biomedical Wastes disposal of

biomedical waste products incineration and its importance Government rules and schedules

standards for waste autoclaving micro waving and deep burial segregation packaging

transportation amp storage

UNIT IV

Human waste disposal and sewage disposal- diseases carried from excreta sanitation barrier

methods of excreta disposal Sewage wastes ndash meaning composition aims of sewage disposal

decomposition of organic matter modern sewage treatment drawbacks of improper disposal of

wastes ndash solid and liquid ndash effluent treatment plan

UNIT V

Medical insurance national insurance companies paramount health care services third party

insurance payment terms and conditions amp limitations of liability and indemnity Disaster ndash

meaning types manmade natural need for disaster Management Management of natural

disasters - flood earth quake drought cyclone tsunami etc Epidemics - cholera plague

typhoid jaundice amp management of epidemics

COURSE OUTCOME

To prepare the candidates to meet the challenges of achieving quality together with cost

containment maintenance of costly and vital equipment managing human resource challenges

arising of chronic and newer diseases development of cost effective technologies to contain costs

and have a broad understanding of the health and hospital care system and factors impacting its

various components

REFERENCE BOOKS

Shahunth and panekar v - first aid vora publication

First aid manual - accident and emergency vora medical publn

Park k - Preventive and social medicine

Park k - Text book on hygiene and preventive medicine banarsidas bhanot

MARKETING MANAGEMENT amp PUBLIC RELATIONS IN HEALTHCARE

Course Code 1Y3BBA 629

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Public relations agencies can serve as your spokesperson or your trusted

advisor Healthcare organizations are especially vulnerable to crisis situations and a public

relations agency can help you proactively plan for train for and be prepared to respond to any

potential crisis that may arise

UNIT I

Introduction to marketing- definition nature scope and importance of marketing approaches

to the study of marketing and economic development traditional and modern concept of

marketing functions of marketing

UNIT II

Marketing environment- analyzing needs amp trends in the micro amp macro- environment

Marketing mix- the elements of marketing mix Market segmentation - bases for market

segmentation requisites of sound marketing segmentation Market targeting strategies ndash

positioning undifferentiated marketing concentrated marketing amp Services marketing

UNIT III

Analyzing consumer markets and buying behavior ndash factors influencing buying behavior

(cultural social personal psychological) the buying decision process amp stages of the buying

decision process

UNIT IV

Product ndash classification of products product mix decision product line product addition amp

deletion Product lifecycle product planning diversification product positioning New product

development process and strategies concepts of branding packaging amp labeling

UNIT V

Pricing ndash pricing objectives policies factors influencing pricing policy method of pricing

policies and strategies

Channels of distribution ndash definition need channel design decision channel management

decision factors affecting channels amp types of marketing channels

COURSE OUTCOME

Recognize and be able to apply relevant communication and behavior change theories to an

integrated health campaign Develop effective communication strategies between healthcare

professionals and the public

REFERENCE BOOKS

Philip Kotler - marketing management

Wiliam jStanton - marketing management

Sherleker S A - marketing management

J C Gandhi - marketing management

Davar - modern marketing management

Joelr Evans and Barry berman - marketing in the 21st century biztantra pub

P K Guptaeph - Marketing management amp Research

Mvkulkarni eph - Marketing research

HOSPITALS RELATED LAW

Course Code 1Y3BBA 630

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Use legal terminology appropriately Identify the basic attributes of the court system and of

common-law development

UNIT ndash I

Introduction to Indian constitution- content and significance of fundamental rights and duties

sources of law interpretation of law important provisions under Indian contract act insurance

act trust act societies registration act

UNIT ndashII

Laws governing the qualification or practice and conduct of professionals transplantation of

human organs act 1994 pre-natal diagnostic techniques (regulation and prevention of misuse) act

1994 central births and deaths registration act 1969 medical termination of pregnancy act 1971

mental health act patient consent

UNIT ndash III

Law governing sale storage of drugs and safe medication drugs and cosmetics act 1948

narcotics and psychotropic substances act pharmacy act 1948 poison act 1919 sales of goods

act drugs and magic remedies (objectionable advertisement) act 1954 dying declaration

UNIT ndash IV

Law governing employment and management of manpower employees provident fund act

1952 payment of gratuity act 1972 minimum wages act 1948 payment of wages act 1916

maternity benefit act 1961 workmen compensation act 1923 industrial employment (standing

order) act trade union act industrial disputes act

UNIT ndashV

Laws governing medico-legal aspects consumer protection act 1986 application of cp act in

hospital recent judgment of supreme court implication for health professionals medical

negligence act bio-medical waste management rules fire safety rules and act medical

establishment (registration and regulation) act Indian evidence act law of torts income tax act

COURSE OUTCOME

Apply knowledge of the structure of the legal system to understand the validity of various types of legal

pronouncements rulings and regulations

REFERENCE BOOKS

Hospital Law Manual ndash Walters Kluwer

Hospital Law Manual- Aspen Health law

Hospital amp Law - Brig M A George

RURAL MANAGEMENT GROUP

RURAL LIVELIHOODS AND PRODUCTION SYSTEMS

Course Code 1Y3BBA 631

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To enable students understand and explore livelihoods and livelihood programs in India

To help students understand the current scenario and challenges pertaining to agricultural

Production system in India

To assist students understand land tenure system and land reforms in India

To help students gain perspective about government scheme and IT in rural development

UNIT -1

Rural livelihoods Meaning and basic concept of livelihoods ndash Types of livelihood interventions

ndash Sustainable livelihood approaches ndashLivelihood programs in India Transaction Methodology

Case analysis and discussion

UNIT II

Agricultural Production System Importance agricultural production and productivity ndash

Agricultural backwardness causes and consequences ndash Modernization of agriculture

UNIT III

Green revolution- farm management and technology of farming natural organic farming co-

Operative farming minor irrigation ndash Challenges of Agriculture in India

UNIT IV

Land Tenure Systems and Land Reforms Tenancy laws - Land ceiling and consolidation of

holdings ndash Land-ceiling laws fragmentation and consolidation of land and distribution of surplus

land among the rural poor ndash Bataidari ndash Challenges of land alienation in tribal areas

UNIT V

Government Schemes and Rural IT Bharat Nirman ndash Swacch Bharat Mission (Gramin) ndash

Rural IT and other infrastructure development programmes- Recent development programs and

schemes introduced by GOI like National Rural Livelihood Mission NRLM

COURSE OUTCOMES

Draw learnings from livelihood opportunities and programsRE | BBA in Rural Management

Analyse the challenges faced by the agriculture production system in India

Analyse the role and scope of government schemes and IT in rural development

REFERENCE BOOKS

Bordet D and Rabezandrina S (1996) Sustainable Rural Livelihoods What Contribution

Can We Make London Department for International Development

Sharma AN (1984) Economic Structure of Indian Agriculture Himalaya Publication House

PANCHAYATI RAJ

Course Code 1Y3BBA632

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To facilitate students to appraise the Rural Local Administration

To provide insights into working of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites

To create awareness on Zilla Parishad system of governance

To provide insights on Rural Administration

To provide insights on Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development schemes

UNIT I

Panchayati Raj A brief history existing legal framework working and challenges Transaction

Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites - Power functions elections and working challenges

Transaction Methodology Visit to gram panchayat office discussion with village administration

(Official and non-official) and report submission

UNIT III

Zilla Parishad - Structure Powers function working and challenges

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and report submission

UNIT IV

Rural Administration ndash Concept amp Scope Administrative structure State - District ndash Block and

Block- Panchayat relationship

Transaction Methodology Visit to Gram Sabha and Role play

UNIT V

Panchayati Raj System - Government Schemes Panchayati Raj System ndash Government

Schemes- Swachcha Bharat Abhiyan Jal Shakti Abhiyan Unnat Bharat Abhiyan and Pradhan

Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

COURSE OUTCOMES

Utilize the knowledge of Gram Panchayat and Panchayat Semites to introduce village

Development interventions

Design proper intervention programs through the awareness of Zilla Parishads and its

power Structure

Apply the information on provincial organization to actualize new government plans and

Plans

Comprehend the aspects on Panchayati Raj system and Rural Development schemes

32 MGNCRE | BBA in Rural Management

REFERENCE BOOKS

Gandhi MK (1959) Panchayat RajNavajivan Trust Publications Ahmedabad 1959

Sharda M (2010)Evolution of Panchayati Raj in India From Traditional to Constitutionalise

Panchayats Kanishka Publishers New Delhi

Mohammed (2004)Panchayati Raj System and Rural Development D P S Publishing New

Delhi

RURAL ECONOMY

Course Code 1Y3BBA 633

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To orient the students on various aspects of rural economy

To help students understand their role in rural economic development

To enable students to gain insights on rural human resources

To gain insights on rural infrastructure including drinking water and sanitation

To create awareness on rural economic development

UNIT I

Introduction - Economic Resources (Human or Physical) in rural areas and their distribution-

Production system in rural areas- Agriculture crop production horticulture livestock fisheries

(including marine fishing) forestry- Non-Agriculture Forward and backward linked activities in

agriculture individual production other production services

Transaction Methodology Classroom teaching

UNIT II

Economic Perspectives of Rural Development-

Economic perspectives of Rural Development access to assets Micro finance Capital market ndash

Sectorial Issues in Rural development Agriculture Agro and non-agro Industries and Land

Reforms

Transaction Methodology Case analysis and discussion

UNIT III

Human Resources -Employment situation ndash Migration ndash Rural poverty ndash Poverty alleviation

programs (analysis) ndash Role of Micro Finance Institutions MFIs and Self Help Groups SHGs

UNIT IV

Rural Infrastructure -Rural Roads Energy Drinking Water and Sanitation

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Project work

UNIT V

Rural Economic Development - Agriculture development ndash Agriculture finance and marketing

ndash IT in agriculture ndash Rural industrialization ndash Cottage industries ndash Policies and Programmes for

the Development of Rural Industries ndash Rural Industrial Sectors Handloom and Handicrafts

Transaction Methodology Village visit and Group-wise Project work

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the student will be able to

Explain knowledge on various aspects of rural economy

Devise suitable response to specific economic challenges in any specific village

Provide immediate local alternatives to rural-urban migration issues

Design proper rural infrastructure facilities which includes drinking water and sanitation

Facilities

Design short term responses for agriculture development to improve rural economy

REFERENCE BOOKS

Chandra BK (2013)Indian rural economy Neha publishers and distributors Delhi

Mustafa A (2009) Indian Rural Economy Serials New Delhi

Narula U (2010) Dynamics of Indian Rural Economy Growth Perspective Atlantic

Publishers and Distributors New Delhi

Sinha S K (2010) Economics of Rural Development Mahamaya Publishing House New

Delhi

INSTRUCTION TO QUESTION SETTER

Mid Semester Examination (MSE)

There will be questions in written examinations of 20 marks Question paper will consist of 5

descriptive type 5 questions of 5 marks each out of which any 4 are to be answered

End Semester Examination (ESE)

There will be two groups of questions Group A will be short answer type 5 question of 5 marks

each out of which any 4 are to be answered Group B will contain descriptive type 5 questions of

10 marks each out of which any 3 are to be answered

Note There may be subdivisions in each question asked in Theory Examinations

The Mid Semester Examination shall have 2 components (a) Per Semester Internal Assessment

Test (SIA) of 20 Marks (b) Class Attendance Performance Score (CAS) of 10 marks will be

applicable

(Attendance Upto75 4 mark 75ltAttdlt85 7 marks 85ltAttdlt95 10 marks )

Note Mid Semester Examination (MSE) Question paper Size will be of A4 Type

End Semester Examination (ESE) Question paper Size will be of Book size

Page 10: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 11: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 12: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 13: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 14: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 15: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 16: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 17: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 18: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 19: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 20: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 21: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 22: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 23: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 24: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 25: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 26: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 27: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 28: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 29: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 30: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 31: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 32: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 33: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 34: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 35: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 36: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 37: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 38: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 39: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 40: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 41: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 42: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 43: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 44: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 45: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 46: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 47: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 48: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 49: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 50: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 51: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 52: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 53: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 54: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 55: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 56: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 57: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 58: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 59: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 60: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 61: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 62: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 63: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 64: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 65: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 66: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 67: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 68: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 69: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 70: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 71: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 72: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 73: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 74: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 75: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 76: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 77: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 78: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 79: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 80: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 81: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 82: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 83: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 84: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 85: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 86: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 87: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 88: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 89: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 90: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 91: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 92: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 93: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 94: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 95: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 96: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 97: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 98: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 99: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 100: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 101: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 102: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 103: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 104: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 105: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 106: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 107: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 108: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 109: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 110: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 111: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 112: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 113: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 114: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 115: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 116: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 117: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 118: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 119: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 120: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 121: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 122: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 123: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 124: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 125: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 126: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 127: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 128: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 129: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 130: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 131: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 132: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 133: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 134: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 135: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 136: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 137: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 138: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 139: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 140: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 141: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 142: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 143: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 144: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 145: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 146: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 147: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 148: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 149: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 150: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020
Page 151: BACHELOR OF BUISNESS ADMINISTRATION (B.B.A) 2020